Home

PG Music Band in a Box - RealBand User Guide

1. The Style Demo STY button shows a list of styles that use the currently kih ehied RealTracks instrument Clicking on a style name will load the style into the current Band in a Box song Press Play to hear your current song played with the RealTracks style that you want to audition CO Show Error messages This will display installation errors of RealTracks when you open the dialog Press the Rebuild button for more information or after you have installed new RealTracks Uptioris for selected Fealtrack With the Timebase option you can play any RealTracks at normal half time or Timebaze Normal Time double time Half time is used for fast tempo songs when a much slower tempo RealTrack has been chosen Double time is used for slow tempo songs e g ballads when a much faster tempo RealTrack is chosen This allows you for example in a ballad at a ape of 70 to add a RealTracks Sax solo with a tempo of 140 and play it as a double time which will match the ballad tempo of 70 All of your existing RealTracks can be used at three different tempos normal half time double time 92 Chapter 8 Audio Production The None button sets the current instrument to have no override of RealTracks for the song The style may still have a RealTrack in it for the instrument clear Al The Clear All button sets all RealTracks for the song to None It will also optionally disable RealTracks present in the style for th
2. 4 The Audio File Type shown at the top of this dialog Select the 96 kHz 48 kHz 44 1 kHz or 22 05 kHz sample rate option at either 16 bit or 24 bit depth depending on your system s speed and storage capacity on the number of tracks and on the fidelity you wish to record For CD audio use the 16 bit 44 1 kHz setting If you experience sluggish performance from your computer you could try the 22 05 kHz setting The Audio Driver Type is MME by default but if your sound card supports ASIO drivers you can choose this type ASIO is an alternate driver system developed by Steinberg It allows for much lower latency than ordinary MME drivers When RealBand detects ASIO drivers it will prompt you to ask if you want to use them The Drivers button will bring up either the Audio Drivers dialog if the driver type is set to MME or the ASIO Audio Drivers dialog if the driver type is ASIO If using MME the Microsoft Sound Mapper is selected by default for both input and output If you have multiple sound cards or a multiple I O card you can select more than one input or output This will affect the computer performance when recording or playing audio tracks The more ports that are selected the more demand is placed on your computer This may require a very fast computer Input Channel for MONO Tracks Left Right L R 2 Tracks Since most digital audio sound cards are stereo you have the option of recording to your project using the
3. Use Secondary Filter BEES 0 co 0 127 8192 0 A 7 MIDI Channel Lyrics Iw Audio checkbox affects Audio tracks only Ctrl checkbox affects either amp udio or MIDI tracks All other checkboxes affect only MIDI Audio IJ tracks PT wont paste data from MIDI Tracks to Audio Tracks or vice versa Secondary filter only affects MIDI tracks SYS exe we The Use column determines whether or not an event type will pass through the filter If the Use column is checked the event type will be used but if it isn t checked the event won t pass through the filter For example if the use column in the Note row is not checked then note events will not pass through the filter The Range column determines what range of events will pass through the filter For example if the minimum for the note range is C1 and the maximum is C2 only notes that fall within the range of C1 through C2 will pass through the filter The current edit command will not affect any notes lower than C1 or higher than C2 The Value column works in the same way as the range column but will act upon note velocities controller values or aftertouch values Only events with values that fall within the specified values will pass through the filter For example if the minimum note value is 50 and the maximum is 100 then only notes with a velocity of 50 up to a velocity of 100 will be passed through the filter Duration allows you to specify that only notes w
4. Main Toolbar amp 8Use Welcome to RealBand zt v 2 Bar Ending y Gm F coweo Ca Je Ber Ofset This group of buttons will take you directly to the selected BB track in the Tracks Mixer or Notation windows The letters stand for the track name B bass D drums the second D below indicates that RealDrums are present P piano G guitar S strings M melody S solo The name of the BB track is displayed along with the instrument patch assigned to that track There is a volume slider that will affect only the selected track This is a quick and convenient way to adjust BB volume levels while other tracks are playing The GM button opens the list of General MIDI 25 Acoustic Guitar nylon instruments Click on the name of an instrument in the list 26 Acoustic Guitar steel assign 1t to the current track highlighted button et The F button opens a short list of favorite instrument 28 Electric Guitar clean patches for the current track For instance this list is for the 29 Electric Guitar muted Guitar or G track 30 Overdriven Guitar 31 Distortion rauibar az Guitar Harmonics 106 Banjo B Clawinet When your song has BB tracks the first eight rows in the Tracks window are reserved for them Track 9 is used for RealDrums This is not always convenient when you have lots of tracks of your own farther down in the window The BB and User buttons wi
5. gt pst rvb ini Y pst tane ini b pst trem ini PTT oo B2 Ini PTT oo B3 Iri PTT oolB3_Beta Ini PTToolB4 Ini ob PTW INI 5 VSC INI b VSTiPluginList ini S VSTPluginL ist ini EESTI Save Files of type PTW Patch IMI files Cancel When you press the Save button RealBand will prompt you to add the new patches to your existing PATCHES INI file File name Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings Configuration Settings 67672002 8 04 PM 64142006 2 33 PM 221421998 4 04 AM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM of 1 2005 12 03 PM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM of 1 2006 12 12 PM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM 2 14 1338 4 04 AM 5 21 2005 4 30 PM 21322006 3 46 PM r20 2005 4 22 PM of 1 2005 12 35 PM 8412006 12 35 PM 622322005 4 34 PM 22522006 1 43 PM 2122006 1 55 PM Chapter 13 Reference 213 Power Tracks Pro 2 Do vou want to automatically add this patch list to the end of PATCHES INT
6. BB Piano 1 Acoustic Grand Piano 24 12 O t MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth v I L R v L R y L A R BB Guitar v 25 Acoustic Guitar nylon L scs MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth mmm v L R v I L R x L R Xx L R zx BB Strings 2112 Vibraphone MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth BB Melody 12 Vibraphone f MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth BB Soloist 27 Electric Guitar jazz MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth BB Audio Generic Audio AUD Out 45 0 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrerr amp BB RealDrums JazzBrushes Y E2232 oit Generic Audio L AUD Out ASIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrem aaa This arrangement will play exactly as it did the last time it was generated in Band in a Box which is worth remembering if you have an arrangement that you particularly liked To keep it unchanged you could save all of your BB tracks as user tracks with the Track menu command Make all BB tracks regular tracks Or save the song as a SEQ sequence file in RealBand Another option would be to use the Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Audio Track feature to render the MIDI tracks to audio and then save the song as a SEQ file Generate Of course you can generate a new arrangement with any style and regenerate selected regions add RealTracks and record your own audio tracks remix and add effects on
7. Note ME Gio o 127 o 65535 Cancel Help eu wan Next you will be prompted for 1 the type of event with which Kaphi dr ES to replace the found events and 2 the replacement ranges F Ewent Type AS C Kep Aftertouch Control Change Pragram Change t Channel Aftertauch Pitch Bend E Enter Replacement Values Range value Duration Note Mi Gio o iz o 65535 Cancel Help 190 Chapter 13 Reference Pressing the Esc key at any time will take you back to the previous step The events that match the search criteria will be changed to the kind of event you specified as the replacement event type assuming you didn t select the same replacement type as the search type In addition the program will re map the values of these events from the search ranges in order to fall within the replacement ranges Pitch Transpose MIDI Music Pitch Transpose Value d Use Data Filter Erom 3B i es E Es Thru Af 4B 28 PES Lancel Help Fill Fill Type Controller t Bitch Bend t Channel Afterteuch atan salue 0 End Walue 127 MIDI Channel 1 Erom 3 1 88 ES El Thru 4 4 s 38 gt En Lancel Help This command transposes notes in the marked area of all selected tracks by the specified value For example 1f you specify a value of 12 the notes will be transposed down one octave You can also use the
8. Page Down Down one page Right Cursor Right Left Cursor Left Right Cursor Right one word Left Cursor Left one word Ins Toggle Insert Mode Del Delete text Ctrl X Cut text to clipboard Ctrl Insert Copy text to clipboard Shift Insert Paste text from clipboard SysEx Window The SysEx window 1s actually a built in system exclusive SysEx librarian This allows you to transmit or receive any SysEx data You can also load and save MIDIEX compatible SysEx files The SysEx librarian can hold up to 24 banks of system exclusive data Since the librarian stores all data on disk as opposed to memory the size of the SysEx data is limited only by the amount of free disk space available Pt Length Heceive Transmit Request Load Save Name 1 8 1 8H 1 8H 1 8H 1 8 1 8H 1 8H 1 8H 1 8H 1 8 1 8H 1 8H 1 8H Auto Chapter 13 Reference Sees Part Delete Edit Send All 249 SysEx MIDI Events you can insert System Exclusive data directly into a MIDI track as MIDI events in the Event List window You can record SysEx data in real time and when you keep a take the SysEx data will be added to a MIDI track as SysEx events You could also load SysEx data into a SysEx MIDI event by receiving SysEx data from your synth or by loading the SysEx data from a file SysEx MIDI events can also be edited Note Although RealBand allows SysEx MIDI events to be huge in size we recommend limiting real time
9. surface noise you could try a judicious combination of Smoothing and DeNoise DeNoise Amount This control sets the DeNoise threshold in dB For instance if you set it to 40 dB high frequencies louder than 40 dB are passed unaltered High frequencies quieter than 46 dB are completely silenced Levels between 40 and 46 dB are gradually faded down to complete silence If the audio level at 8000 Hz happens to be below threshold but the audio level at 4000 Hz happens to be above threshold the 8000 Hz signal would be muted but the 4000 Hz signal would pass un altered This is Multi Band Single Ended Noise Reduction The DeNoise section can slide the filter all the way down to 500 Hz so on silent sections of a record the DeNoise silence can be pretty silent 278 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins Carefully adjust the Denoise Amount so that desirable high frequencies in the music are minimally affected but hiss in the quiet sections of the music is removed Even a 1 dB difference can be easy to hear when tweaking the Denoise Amount Many high fidelity vinyl records didn t have much information higher than 10 KHz another common mastering decision in the good old days On many records frequencies above 10 KHz can be squelched most of the time without noticeably affecting the sound A suggestion for tweaking the DeNoise Amount first increase the setting until the music is obviously losing high frequencies Then gradually
10. 440 000 Chromatic Pitch Select this radio button to select any desired note and octave Note Pick the desired note Octave Pick the desired octave f Chromatic Fitch Guitar Bass E High C High Mote E C B C G CG CD Restrict Range The reference tone can become Octave 5 CD CA painful and possibly dangerous to speakers in the a C E very high range if the playback system is set too Restrict Range loud Similarly very low reference tones could FE Low Blow damage woofers Cycle Tones If the Restrict Range checkbox is enabled the e UP pitch range 1s limited to the mid and bass range where the tone is not as hazardous to ears or C DOWN loudspeakers Guitar Select this radio button to tune using standard guitar pitches Once a note has been selected in the Guitar group you can switch between the different string pitches with the cursor up and cursor down computer keys Bass Select this radio button to tune using standard Bass pitches These are the notes for six string bass Use the middle four pitches for four string bass and use the bottom five pitches for five string bass Once a note has been selected in the Bass group you can switch between the different string pitches with the cursor up and cursor down computer keys Cycle Tones This checkbox automatically plays the Guitar or Bass pitches in sequence to make it easier to tune guitar without touching the computer keybo
11. 62 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features Track Type MIDI Port 1 Microsoft G5 Wavetable Sw Synth Set All MIDI Tracks to Microsoft G5 Wavetable Sv Synth Specific DxilvsTi Synth Far MIDI Track Open DXilv5Ti Synth Panel Configuration Channel Patch Select Dialog Program Bank M3B Bank LSB Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Wa File Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Audio Track Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Selected Audio Tracks Select Whole Track Ctrl 4 Kil selected region ESC Change Current Time lk LeFiMouseclick Select and Generate RealTrack Generate RealTrack Favorites Select and Generate Realbrums Generate R ealDrums Favorites Generate MIDI Track Insert Volume Change Audio Effects There are 32 MIDI Output ports You can think of each of port as route that the track takes to output sound whether through an onboard sound card software synthesizer or an external MIDI keyboard or sound module The first 16 ports are for either onboard synthesizers or external MIDI I O connections Ports 17 through 32 are for DirectX DX1 or Virtual Studio Technology VSTi instruments Mouse over the Port menu item to see a list of all available ports At the bottom of the Port submenu there are additional menu items to Load DXi VSTi Synth into unused Slot and Load DXi VSTi Synth into specific Slot Load Dixifesti Synth into unused Slot Load D xil vsTi Synth into specifi
12. Digitally Recording a Vinyl Disc Here are some basic recording tips If the reader 1s interested copious audiophile advice can be found on the internet Some audiophile wisdom may be superstitious hokum and other audiophile advice may be vastly better than the brief suggestions in this help file Obviously to use PG Vinyl Tool the disc must first be recorded to a computer audio file To record a wave file obviously you need a turntable preferably a turntable in pretty good shape with a reasonably new stylus For high quality recording a vinyl disc a home audio turntable may be a better buy than a DJ turntable which has special features unnecessary for a good vinyl to digital dub At the same price levels you may get better fidelity from a home audio turntable rather than a DJ turntable A turntable with a magnetic cartridge 1s almost mandatory Old turntables with ceramic cartridges just do not sound very good and can have tracking force heavy enough to damage records Sometimes modern high quality home audio receivers do not have phono turntable inputs However if you have a quality home audio integrated receiver with phono inputs or a quality turntable preamp these are the best choice for turntable recording If you have a cheap home audio tuner or phono preamp the choice 1s less clear cut Older cheap tuners and phono preamps had undesirable preamp noise There are small inexpensive phono preamp boxes but the cheapies oft
13. Key key transpose Cho Chorus and Exp expression settings You can make changes to these settings by clicking on the edit fields with the left mouse button and then moving the mouse up or down while holding the mouse button down The Edit DXi button launches the DirectX Window dialog and will display the settings panel for either the Default DXi Synth 16 DXi synth slot which is MIDI port 32 or the current DXi port number if the track is set to a valid DXi port 17 32 Any track s MIDI Output Port can be set to send to one of the 16 available DXi synth ports or to any other available MIDI port Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 61 Track Type MIDI When you right click your mouse on a MIDI icon you ll see a pop up menu that lets you set the MIDI Output Port Program o do Patch setting and Bank MSB and Bank LSB settings Set All MIDI Tracks to SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Specific DXiJVSTi Synth For MIDI Track Immediately below the Port menu item is a menu command that lets you Set All Midi Tracks to the same port used by the lo track you are adjusting Open Dxilv5Ti Synth Panel Configuration There is also a menu item Patch Select Dialog that launches a patch selection dialog which lets you select patches and variations as well as allowing you to change the track s patch list If the patch list is set to General MIDI Roland GS or Yamaha XG the track will display an instrument icon corresponding to the patch Otherwise
14. Mo Choose Yes to add your new patch list to the existing PATCHES INI file Choose No if you want to create a new INI file with just the new patches The original PATCHES INI file will not be modified To use your new INI file by itself you will need to name 1t PATCHES INI and copy it over the default PATCHES INI file in your RealBand folder Be sure to save a backup copy of the default PATCHES INI file first The next time you run RealBand it will recognize the new patch list This message will confirm that your new patch list has been made PATCHES INT successfully converted to PATCHES BIN Run DLL or EXE This command will let you run any DLL or EXE plug in that was specifically designed to work with RealBand To choose which DLL or EXE plug in will be run by this command see the next topic Select DLL or EXE This command will bring up the Select DLL or EXE dialog This allows you to select and run any DLL or EXE plug in that was specifically designed to work with RealBand All plug in files that ship with RealBand are installed by default into the RealBand main folder e g C RealBand The RealBand dlldemo32 zip file contains information for developers about interfacing a DLL or EXE with RealBand The Block Menu From Now Fi Thru Now F From Value Ctrl F Thru value Ctrl Fe Mow From Alt F How Thru Alt F8 Select Current Section Choose recent From Thru Range
15. Right click the Avg Tempo control for some easy automatic fixes Note If you want to use the Avg Tempo Menu functions use the menu very soon after you have opened a song before you have done much bar editing If you invoke the Avg Tempo Menu functions after you have laboriously edited a lot of bar lines the automatic nature of these functions can ruin your previous editing Note Here is a good reason in some cases to initially set the tempo artificially slow by using the Find Best Half Tempo function If the initial tempo estimate is considerably faster than the tempo which you want to tap in the Tap Bar line function can mistakenly think that you want a very fast tempo which fills the remainder of the song with unwanted fast tempo bars In that case if you initially set the tempo very slow ACW will be unlikely to misinterpret your Tap Bar Lines Set Key Signature Once the chords look reasonable For instance if your song looks like it is probably in the key of F Set the Key Signature control to F for better chord spelling This only affects the cosmetic display of notes and chords flats and sharps The Key Signature control does not currently affect the basic accuracy of Chord Detection Adjust Fine Tuning If a song is significantly mistuned from concert pitch the notes are in the cracks which makes Chord Detection less accurate If your Chords look reasonable there is no need to bother with
16. The Mixer window provides real time control of volume and effects You can launch it with the toolbar button or by typing ALT W 38 This is an integrated mixer that controls both MIDI and Audio tracks There are sliders for all 48 tracks 8 auxiliary effects Aux busses and a combined total of 16 audio output ports or audio subgroups zE 7x C pawn Ol EN mg a Apoa ga ep suniqieas ag paun LL Ps ob Ps el paun Sb paun 91 AYUNO 5 s UNA gies s m AUX e RU AU eee ree rea rera BO NV Wiexe ee CC exe er ese ON tJ Y p wy 1 my P sue TX hd L y FX vE VEE VE VE yA Ve yA Px me CA O Om RYB RYB EN RVB A IGN Sirve SY pve KN X C ws Q Q CN v0 we Q CHO cHo 7 cuo Alcno cHo cuo C cuo H cuo C cuo cHO 1 cuo Alcno L MOD mop 7 MOD MOD L mop MOD MOD 7 E MOD MOD 7 mop 7 MOD MOD L L R L R L RiL RIL RIL RiL R L R RiL RIL RIL RiL RIL RIL RiL R cs cos cos Qe cos cos cos cos cos cor cos cos cos cos Da cos 1 J 2 J 3 ILa j 5 ILe j 7 1 8 j S j 10 MAN 12 J 13 j 14 15 j 16 Track 14 Untitled The Mixer track strips conveniently show the track name vertically to the left of the volume sliders This is the track name that 1s assigned in the Tracks window go to that window to add or change track strip names When the mouse cursor is positioned over a track number in the Mixer window a popup box will display all of the Tra
17. TranzPort Key Commands Track arrow keys increase or decrease the current track in RealBand Rec begins recording Solo same as pressing solo button in RealBand Undo same as Edit Undo in RealBand IN when a popup OK Cancel or Yes NO dialog is on the screen IN will function as either an OK or Yes answer OUT when a popup OK Cancel or Yes NO dialog is on the screen OUT will function as either a Cancel or No answer Shift IN Load Previous Song Shift Out Load Next Song Punch enables or disables punch in mode in RealBand Loop enables or disables loop mode in RealBand Wheel change the tempo of a MIDI only song Shift Wheel Increase or Decrease volume of Current Track by 5 Prev Wheel Increase or Decrease volume of Current Track by 1 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 159 Next Wheel Increase or Decrease MIDI Patch number for current track Shift Prev jump to previous marker in RealBand Shift Next jump to previous marker in RealBand Add add a new marker at current song location Rewind button rewind Fast fwd button fast forward Stop button stop Play button play Record button record Pitch to MIDI Converter Access the Pitch to MIDI Converter by selecting highlighting an audio track and choosing the Audio Pitch to MIDI Convert current audio track menu item The converter cannot recognize chords or
18. Version 2010 5 for Windows Li PQ ReaBand Listen SEQ RealTracks 2010 5 is bere Tracks Ctrl 1 D F e Ede Aude Track Action Block Options Window Help H E Seve Save As A A E MIA E e mo k Trads Bars Chords Meer PimoRol Tempos Comments Notation Cock Conductor Rec udo PreMak NetMok Moers W Loco lli o Cnm t RealTracks 2010 5 is here mp aem pes m j G E z zaurwr O 601 Cial CO Cn Gea Ee ongs Barono 2 e Go lo Section 11 Ez rd EE SR Conductor Window Control during playback using OWIRTY keys MIDI notes or uic But Secten Name 1 Jh Countin n 63 3 First chorus 9 JJ C a la Middle chorus C9 m eba ending 4 B sacton nstrumantal PP o hr 55 A section instrumental MIDE kevboad control 2 Enable control by MIDI keyboard Poeun 2 Len gn str e 7 OK to change setting above by ATAT note 1 v Stilo Cmn Bagira at ber 11 39 Meno P n F rabie Control by QWERTY k Lat Chorus E xb 75 Hada fhe t de the acion lu tachen 9o back ahead Dana 0 Tus O NOW and go to start w Cnona jaj Section fa Screen jap Cabas p O NOW go to same set pos E O Nai DAA 2 O Newt PART MARTERA T Go Bock Cul key Y Choras Cal Sechon t8 Seren 41 bans 11 O Nest CHORUS CT O Nest SECTION u But J 48201 Fat c Default Mode for y Go Abas
19. click on the patch number box to see the Select Patch dialog where the name of the patch will be highlighted You can select a new patch from this dialog right click on the sliders to type in an exact fader level the track name from the Tracks window is shown vertically to the left of the Volume slider each track strip has its own stereo VU meter the LR stereo pan slider also has a smooth even response with the option to right click and type in an exact value click in the Out box to assign the track to a MIDI output port DXi and VSTi synths are identified with an S For example the default DXi synth or VSTi synth is S16 selected tracks are highlighted in red or yellow as in the Tracks window Hover the mouse over any track number to see a summary of the track settings MIDI or audio A click in area around the track number will open the context menu with a full list of commands and settings for the particular track This is the same menu that opens with a right click in the Tracks window so it reduces the need to switch back and forth between windows 140 Chapter 11 Mixer Window Audio Track Strip This 1s the Mixer strip for an Audio track the FX button opens the DirectX VST Window where up to four real time effects can be inserted into the track each track has four auxiliary effects sends that can be assigned to any four of the eight available Aux busses Each Aux bus can have up
20. 3 3 PitchzL B Velocity 46 p04 B4250 d 4B 20 Note On 9 3 Piich Eb B Velocity 44 905 5450 1 92 3F 33 Note On 9 3 FPichzEb 5 Velocity 5 BOB 54250 92 44 3D Note On 3 3 Pitch 4b 5 Velocity 6 gor S450 92 3L 2D Note On 3 3 Piich L 4 Velocity 45 oig 54250 g2 38 3B Note On 3 3 Piich 4b 4 Velocity 58 The MIDI Monitor provides details on all aspects of the MIDI data being transmitted and received MIDI Display Controls Event The current event number since the display was last cleared Clear Clear the MIDI Display Event counter and Channel Activity panel Save Text This feature will allow you to save a text file of the data in the MIDI display The file can be opened with a word processor or spreadsheet program for printing or further study Various Save Text options can be adjusted in the Settings window Settings Press to open the Settings dialog which allows you to adjust various display behaviors The display can be modified to suit the task at hand Filter This opens the Filter dialog where receive settings can be adjusted 172 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Sequencer Control Standard transport controls Play Rewind and Stop Timer A millisecond timer useful for viewing timing relationships between MIDI messages If the computer is under a light load this timer 1s fairly accurate However if the computer is under a heavy load the values can be expected to be le
21. 4 Song time signature 2 4 to 12 8 supported Key Sig C Song key signature set by user FineTuneCents O Use to correct pitch of song if necessary Toggle Play Pause Space Bar or Multimedia PlayPause Key stop Play and Rewind to Beginning Esc Key Click the W Key to Rewind without Stop Tap Barline Fo ar Enter key Moves the nearest Barline to the Current Playback Position Exit And send Chords to PT Exit Without Returning Chords to PTW d Mary Ford Greatest Ea E File Pray Stop Tap Barline F8 OK Send ta BIAB Cancel Help Avg Tempo 116 888 Time 519 E 4 Rey Sig C FineTune 0 Song Time Signature Average Tempo song Key signature Fine Tune mou cannot directly setthe Average Tempo Ifthe song is notin concert pitch but it has a Right Click Menu this adjustment can improve chord recognition Vertical Lines are the Detected Audio Beats Blue Full Range Beat Red Bass Beat Lime Midrange Beat Fuchsia ee Beat Bar Tempo Audio Wave Display 113 62 DA 11431 N PINE m A o SI O i M Left Click Drag to Move a Barline Lser Edited Bars are Red Playback Location Cursor Inferred Barlines are Green Click and Drag to Move Location Double Click to Play atthe Desired Location Chords Likely Bass Notes for each Eighth Chord Detection accuracy depends on the accuracy of the bar lines If bar lines are not well aligned then the Chord
22. Comments window cccccccccccececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 Conductor acon Ws inde 155 detine SCCHONS eo eee t E 155 CX AMD ICS ette eh bre tenes 156 A iosctes utm Each nen oral 157 MT oa ote POE DDR 153 MIDI keyboard control 154 OWERT Y CORBIEOL 5e aii 154 Conners sede nd ad 8 Consolidate Audio ReglonN cccccccccncnccccicocinininono 203 Cs A emueisen 215 Convert Guitar Tracks ui RR REESE 201 Convert to Karaoke ic 180 Convert to WMA 0d 161 Copy Command soi oe ease beta a ees 185 A a RIOT 285 COMA a 76 create NOW SONE reta 70 Custom Hle dialog ob 53 178 CU 183 Data PUE dedo 183 188 197 DA po va Tn roe ee nU 84 LN 143 Exclusioti ai ie 144 O ae 144 A A isa astu Se Pe 143 o ooi e a eto ost tale 86 164 ducto OU DU ou eie e reu o ant 257 AUR DUS rM 88 CE e 89 SP este B Pe n he AA 87 A t stes AUD E CER LU 87 PAM oro eta aces 269 PO DISON OT iod perio eti tn rte E ERE 269 PODIAMOS laos 264 PG Echo CAS eite ede een oes 261 288 PG Five Band PEO is 267 PORIIN e enr ee 268 PO Peaken title ci 262 PORRO cad 261 POR Md oiga 270 A eer eens ere ee enter ern eee 271 Ten Band EOL trm iaa 266 ttd ck TOS CEU be De opes penitus du sentes 88 DirectX Plug Ins PG Real Time AnalyzZeT ooooononnnnnnonononnncnonnnonoss 271 PO Vinyl Pool csetera AE 273 PG Vocal REMOVE dd 278 Disclosure triangle ads 6l drac and COP ice 102 Dras and dEO ia 67 DTA ici aaa pein cs uad ola tee certs n
23. Custom section you will see the track numbers that notes will be placed onto You can type the note numbers into MIDI Note Nums edit field separated by commas For example 62 65 would mean that MIDI note numbers 62 and 65 will go onto the track specified on the left field E g 77 If you press the button a list box will pop up that makes it easier to specify the note numbers The Note Name Octave number of each note is shown e g E 5 and for notes in the GM drum range the GM drum sound names for GM drums are shown e g Acoustic Snare Closed High Hat etc You could override the track number by enabling the checkbox next to the Hard Trk field and typing another track number in the hard track field The Hard Track can be any MIDI or blank track that you specify Data Filter The Data Filter is a filter that when in use determines which events will be affected by the current edit command RealBand will only allow the events that match the chosen characteristics to pass through the filter so that the current edit command can act upon them The Use column determines whether or not an event type will pass through the filter If the Use column is checked the event type will be used but if it isn t checked the event won t pass through the filter For example if the Use column in the Note row is not checked then note events will not pass through the filter The Range column determines what range of events will pass
24. Guitar Electric Soloist Train Pickin Ev 130 Bluesy Clean Elect Soloist Cou 419 Jason Roller Guitar Electric Soloist Train Pickin Ev 130 Clean Elect Soloist Cou 413 Jason Roller Guitar Nylon Chet Fishin Sw 120 Nylon Strin Rhythm Cou 606 Mark Thornton Guitar Nylon Chet Train Ev 130 Nylon Strin Rhythm Cou 607 Mark Thornton Guitar Nylon Elec Rhythm Bossa Ev 140 A simple Nylon Strin Rhythm Jazz 709 Oliver Gannon Guitar Nylon Elec Rhythm Bossa Ev 140 B energ Nylon Strin Rhythm E Do Oliver Gannon Guitar Nylon Elec Rhythm Bossa Ev 140 Nylon Strin Rhythm Oliver Gannon Guitar Resonator Background Allis Ev 120 TEME ECETIA RR Guitar Resonator Background Cowboy Ev 165 Acoustic G Backgrou Cou 619 Wanda Vick Guitar Resonator Background Hank Sw 130 Acoustic G Backgrou Cou cU Les x Steve Hinson Y Guitar Resonator Background Hayride Sw 190 Acoustic G Backgrou Cou 608 36 Steve Hinson y Guitar Resonator Background Roundup Sw 120 Acoustic G Backgrou Cou 609 36 Steve Hinson Guitar Resonator Background Trav Ev 088 Acoustic G Backgrou Dou are 4 Wanda Vick Guitar Resophonic Rhythm Blues Crossroads Ev 0 Acoustic G Rhythm Blues 577 31 Jack Pearson Guitar Resophonic Rhythm Blues Delta Sw 065 Acoustic G Rhythm Blues 569 30 Jack Pearson Guitar Resophonic Rhythm Blues Muddy Sw 120 Acoustic G Rhythm Blues 585 32 Jack Pearson Guitar Resophonic Rhythm B
25. If you ve recorded a click track for the entire track you should ensure that you use this command for the whole track rather than attempting to align a part of a song a little at a time or you may end up having to re record part of the click track again If you are using this feature starting from the middle of a song and the first click follows a rubato section the program will align the music to the nearest bar to the actual click location in the click track or the next bar if the first click isn t close to the nearest bar location Consolidate Audio Region Use the Consolidate Audio Region feature when you are working with WAV digital audio files to recreate a track or region as one contiguous file While not always necessary this is especially useful in situations where you have performed many edits e g Cut Copy Paste and the resulting track has been broken up into many smaller wave chunks that may cause audio glitches and or timing errors as your computer has to work harder to open and close the many small files The consolidate feature effectively serves to stitch together these smaller files into one big file The non real time audio effects work better with consolidated tracks if these effects are returning error messages the problem is often corrected by applying this feature Insert Blank Track This command inserts a blank track at the position of the Current Track selected in the Tracks window and bumps all
26. MIDI display options are adjusted in the MIDI Monitor Settings dialog Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 173 F MIDI Monitor Settings MIDI Monitor is Always On Top Check this item to keep the v MIDI Monitor is Always On Top MIDI Monitor window on top of other programs or windows When Display ts Full When Display is Full f Stop The display buffer can record a maximum of 32000 events There play Wrap Around are three options when the display gets full C Wrap Around Clear Ext Count Stop Stop capturing events and turn off the timer Wrap Around When the display is full begin over writing it Number of Display Events Uu I from the start a Wrap Around Clear Evt Count 1s like the Wrap Around Stan ti ft id c Ser option except the event count 1s cleared when the display wraps op timer after ecs of inactivity eee Save Test Options Save entire buffer to text File f Display recent events in T ext window Cancel Help Number of Displayed Events This box allows you to set the length of the capture buffer The length can be set as high as 32 000 Stop Timer after nnnn Milliseconds of inactivity It does no harm to let the timer free run but if you find this irritating you can set the timer to automatically stop after a period of no MIDI activity Save Text Options These options help set the behavior when the Save Text button is pressed Save ent
27. Print to Graphics Files Save The Opt button will access the Preview Options such as the bitmap dimensions and the type of file used 1f you wish to save a page to a graphics file The Screen Width button will make the size of the pages in the preview equal to the width of the screen The Full Page button will make the size of the pages just big enough to see the entire image in proportion without having to do any scrolling The Print button returns to the Print Options dialog The Print Page button prints the currently displayed page directly to the default printer unless you select a different printer in the Print Options dialog The Save button lets you save the current page to a graphics file You ll see a dialog with some of the same settings as the Options dialog The Save Range button saves a range of pages The pages will be named SONGNAMEXXX BMP with SONGNAME being the name of the song and XXX being the page number The Close button closes the Print Preview Use the Save button to save your song as a graphics file Graphics files can be inserted into documents uploaded to the Internet or sent as email attachments other graphic formats as grayscale or color files save to File Type Save Resolution Automatic The JPG Save Smooth and JPG Save Quality a LL utomatc settings affect the quality of JPG files JPG Save Smooth 100 JPG Save Quality 131 Chapter 1
28. The Block menu contains commands that deal with marking an area or block of the song The areas marked here work in conjunction with the editing options found in the Edit menu From Now This command sets the beginning of the marked area to the current time Thru Now This command sets the end of the marked area to the current time 214 Chapter 13 Reference From Value This command lets you directly specify the From Time value A dialog box will appear in which you can enter the new time Thru Value This command lets you directly specify the Thru Time value A dialog box will appear in which you can enter the new time Now From This command sets the current time to the beginning of the marked area Now Thru This command sets the current time to the end of the marked area Select Current Section This command will highlight the current section for editing purposes The current section starts with the previous marker and ends at the next marker If there is a marker in the song at time 1 01 000 named Intro and another marker at 4 01 000 called Verse 1 and the current time of the song is 2 01 000 when you execute this command then the section from 1 01 000 up to but not including 4 01 000 will be highlighted for editing purposes Choose recent From Thru Range This command lets you select from a list of recently highlighted From Thru regions and RealBand will make your chosen range into the curr
29. There are two kinds of part markers an a part marker blue and a b part marker green Clicking once on the bar number that currently has no part marker will set the bar to a part marker Clicking again will set it to b part marker and clicking again would set the bar back to having no part marker T E e ar a 2 9 With the New line for every section part marker setting enabled a line will be inserted between 66 99 each section that has been marked with an a or b part marker You can toggle the part marker type for a measure during playback In addition you can also toggle a part marker for the current measure by pressing the M key on your keyboard when the Chords window is currently active 246 Chapter 13 Reference Chord Wizard Options Right click in the Chords window to open this menu with Chord Wizard MIDI Chord wizard options Custom MIDI Chord Wizard If you select MIDI Chord Wizard the program will automatically detect the chords in the song If you ve highlighted a range of bars RealBand will only attempt to detect the chords for the highlighted range If no bars are highlighted RealBand will attempt to detect the chords for the entire song You can use the Undo command if you want to undo this The Custom MIDI Chord Wizard will launch the Chord Wizard dialog which lets you customize the settings for chord detection p p E Key s Presets for
30. are for Standard Notation Editable Notation and Staff Roll Notation modes Holding the mouse cursor over a button will show its name in a pop up hint Notation Track 1 Opt Print Chapter 13 Reference 235 The Standard Notation mode displays the notes as regular music Editable Notation mode will display standard notation but allow you to edit the notation You will see standard notation with vertical gray lines that represent possible note locations Staff Roll mode displays the notes as note heads no stems with optional duration and velocity lines Also the Staff roll mode will contain gray vertical lines across the staff See the chapter on Notation and Printing for full details Notation Track 3 Opt Print Ch c4 f Clem L tr Auto f Rest Do T d Q5 G w Bm e H Rhe A y esp uomen E Is Y F A a st 10 Jo la 42a gal Auf eC NS EO AA AX ee a s AJ T j Y SS a y ye I 7 andT ll say it PA A n O YPF a naa 17 la O O dle A 3 h _ ura e e ear ie SM gt gt EEN M AAN ANNAN AAA AN NES AN A T ERE EE Notation window in Standard Notation mode Big Lyrics Window Big Lyrics Track 3 The Big Lyrics window will display any existing lyrics in a track The program will highlight the lyrics as they play which is very useful for singing along with the music You can read Big Lyrics from across the room 1 i Various sett
31. ccocccccccnnnnncnnnnnnnno 152 Odd enoti or ad 152 o aoe oot UA DOM M uU EIE 146 verson 146 PP as todcu e pesce EG Eod iu 153 ANIGIO edit WIN 4 etta rie uei s edes 100 AR tits etit ids 101 A ut avena E E tad tas E EE 101 LADEN CT EM 101 Audio Edit window Index PACMAG KE s rabo e Cb aede 101 riebt click fe luos ue eer Ca RENS 102 AO MeNi coa 98 Audio DOES e i ole ts 13 a A reta d a RU 219 AMO SCID aeri ars cid 11 Audio subgroups A cae 223 Audio temp directory eeeeeeeeeeeesesse 13 Audio tracks A pH Mp 97 audio RealTracks RealDrums 9 Auto yc Chase ise to ae b Ux 217 Auto convertpatehess usus eue IRR RURR REA UMRURRE 211 O A 255 Bank CA is tutelae 258 A BE LAE 74 BaS WING A e a oU eos peli eem 243 A Ae beer 235 Be Pia soos dte MU Re EE 44 232 Block IMEI eoo a duplum tof dans 213 buffer size siiser ojr m PC 222 CODI dsd 162 Change Velootte 5i iio ob pes tie 193 CROFPOCIHSUS orn cae css echt isa ROM IPAD M ERE 246 Chord Window OPOS sot ico tette EM Er 56 Chord Wizard eoe Rab Ra E IE 55 AUIUO rr 59 A A yaad teeta Oo Lt qM Re dad eU du 56 COPS aes cae ee ee es 187 COPY MNO asno 187 dele Chordata 187 Chords A lis d ERR ERE 244 oiu T X AX CR 245 toggle part markets io eth P S 245 Classic Tracks Vie Wisin 68 257 287 pateh il t ees 68 A E A pp 202 Clipboard 179 183 185 186 202 250
32. too soft compression can reduce the difference Compression can make a signal loud with more sustain This can be desirable when preparing music for noisy environments such as club music car music radio and television sound or small computer multimedia speakers Live music has a wide dynamic range Live music peaks are much louder than the average music level When playing live music on a weak sound system 1f playback volume is raised so you can hear soft parts the speakers Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 265 can distort on loud peaks Compression can level the peaks making a sound system can seem louder without distortion The PG Dynamics compressor is a downward compressor with make up gain A downward compressor works by making loud signals softer After loud passages have been made quieter by the compressor you can apply make up gain to raise the final audio level Compressor checkbox enables PG Dynamics compressor module Threshold sets the level where compression begins Below Threshold the level is unchanged Above Threshold as the input gets louder the gain is gradually reduced Ratio adjusts how drastically the compressor behaves At a 2 1 ratio an over threshold input change of 6 dB would yield an output change of 3 dB An input change of 12 dB would yield an output change of 6 dB Modest ratios are appropriate for smoothing a vocal or drum performance Ata 10 1 ratio the difference between loud and
33. ve gt r3 188 A ee 4 B sacton instrumental Prano r z al p aj Ross Bean D J 55 section instrumental 4 Guitar 00 MIDE hevbosrd control A 25 Acoute mln 7 Enable control by MIDI keyboard Mitt vat Rated VIC ri 2 Strings 58 Fest Chorus Begna at bar z i9 OK to change ttg above by AMAT one 1 v X M MM AAA a 3 e natie LR Made Chorus Bega al bar 39 Apni Octave 0 m ShowMiDE notes V Enable Control by GwEATY k e pa Raad gt _ gt J g Melody RR Lati Chorus Begres at bw 75 Moda ahan 35 de ra chon lo tachon oo back sahaad D Raia VIC Ch 4 gt Delma 0 j C f go 24 32 C Loop NOW end go lo start w Baux Aak Chorus baj Section 1 L Screen Idi aci nj C NOW go to same sel pos E B k 4 Bars be Pet cl Previa oe Nest BAR R bok m O Next PART MARKER T eS Go oh O hey A T Bai E Cora a Sectiont sl Soren 41 bes 11 O Net CHORUS 1 Newt SECTION U ura Ja Past c E CMaj7 40 C6 TE Beni 51 wich J Delat Mode lar section change F i7 Go Abd futs SHIFT kay Now Land go ta start h 44 Maj Chorus A j Section 5 Screen D M bars n Dela Mode ter going back cr ahead sug 4853 Paria Now lard go o itat 48 613 Ply F4 Step Esc The other chapters in this guide provide detailed instructions and information on RealBand s features but if you want to make real mus
34. with a thin red vertical stripe to mark the current song position The number ruler at the top of the window denotes the bar numbers of the current song Small vertical lines are displayed at 8th and 16th note boundaries This makes it easier to align audio to correct timing issues The dB Scale on the left side of the Audio Edit window gives you a better idea of the level of an audio track EN By clicking on the and buttons you can zoom in or out on the waveform to facilitate very precise waveform editing The large buttons zoom horizontally the smaller set zooms vertically Snap The Snap button will cause the highlighted region to snap to the nearest beat when selecting a region with the mouse Play Selected Area The Play Selected Area button will play the highlighted area to let you hear what was selected Select whale The Select Whole button selects the whole audio track The current time within the song if visible within the Audio Edit window will be shown as a vertical line in red This will be drawn in reverse video if the current time is within the selected region You can select a region to edit with the mouse by clicking on the waveform and dragging the mouse to the right Shift click Shift key left mouse button support makes it easy to tweak the beginning or end of the highlighted area If you Shift click before the start of the From Thru range or after the end of the From Thru range the highl
35. you ll see the patch number displayed instead of an icon Patch Select Dialog Program 33 Acoustic Bass Bank M56 O Bank LSB The Track Name field shows the track s name which is edited by right clicking or double clicking on the track name field Type the name and press Enter Eiana When using the General MIDI patch map the program will T lec automatically display an icon for the instrument selected HIDI out Microsoft GS vvaverable SYY Synth The Volume and Pan sliders let you adjust a track s volume and pan settings without opening the Mixer window Right clicking on the Volume or Pan controls will let you edit the setting by typing in a number EO Below the Volume slider stereo VU meters give you a general idea of a track s level during playback Track Overview Display To the right of the track info panels you ll see the overview display T Tracks EB AUD Outs S00 0 1 rave ve Right click anywhere on the track to see more track options Right Click Menu for MIDI Tracks If a track is a MIDI track and you right click on the track you ll see a pop up menu that lets you set the MIDI Output Port Channel Program Patch setting and Bank MSB and Bank LSB settings This menu will also open with a left click on the track type icon if Left click on track type icon in Tracks Window shows pop up menu has been selected checked in the Options Preferences General dialog
36. 0 Janeiro Ev 16 Med Latin Samba Jazz at T 250 Fast Jazz Jazz at T 60 Slow Jazz Jazz Cool Style Jazz Fours A Trading 4s Jazz Fours B Trading 4 Jazz Fours C Trading 4 Jazz Fours Style This is an up tempo hot Jazz style inspired by the Swing music of the 40 s The quintet features a driving rhythm guitar Ideal tempo range 200 300 t 200 150 250 Styles Disk 4 Examples After You ve Gone Indiana Sweet Georgia Brown Real Drums for this style JazzBrushes 1 Jazz Smooth Jazz 44 Jazz Swing 171 Latin All 243 Latin Cuban Salsa 34 New Age Soundtrack 76 Praise amp Worship Gospel 124 JAZSALSA Jazz Salsa Latin ev 16 Salsa SD S52 JAZSAMBA Jazz Samba Style SD 5 JAZSIMP Jazz Simple Style SD 5 v Re Build Search Open Find new styles Change Prototype Style Show Styles by Feel and Tempo Show all Show all style rhythms Only show styles disk Show All Styles Disks Rock Ballads 179 Rock Blues 109 Rock British 86 Cancel Help Use this button to load a style STY file from disk RE Double click the mouse in this box to open the Meter dialog Odd time signatures such as 5 4 7 4 9 16 11 4 etc are supported Meter Numerator Denominator Cancel The key signature and tempo are set by double clicking in those boxes to open the selection dialog 40 Chapter 4 The Main Screen Key Si
37. 1 Start of song Section 2 Intro Section 3 First Chorus Section 4 Middle Chorus i e start of chorus 2 Section 5 Last Chorus Section 6 Ending Sections 7 10 are user definable To do this type in any bar using the bar chorus format e g 21 2 would be bar 21 chorus 2 If you prefer to enter custom values for the section numbers you can do this if you check the custom checkbox and then type in up to 10 bar numbers for each section Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 59 Go ta Sectio The section numbers are saved with the song Once you have defined the sections you can jump to a certain section of the song as the song is playing simply by 1 Pressing the 1 9 or 0 key on the QWERTY keyboard or 2 Opening the Conductor window hot key and clicking on the section button or 3 Pressing MIDI keys 77 86 F6 to D7 corresponding to sections 1 10 Mode when to do the action By pressing a QWERTY hot key prior to an action you can control when the action will take place If no mode hot key is pressed prior to an action the default mode will occur Default Mode for section change Now and go to start Default Mode for going back or ahead Now and go to start The default is set in the Default Mode for section change or Default Mode for going back or ahead combo box For example by default the section change will occur as soon as you press the key and it will go to
38. 10 KOhm to 100 KOhm range A turntable s magnetic cartridge will be loaded by the lower than expected mixer impedance This won t damage the turntable but will affect the frequency balance A 10 KOhm mixer input could cut the highs quite a bit and even a 100 KOhm mixer input could cut the highs a perceptible amount There is no way to predict the characteristics of your turntable cartridge and the input impedance of your mixer Adjust HF Boost by ear until the frequency balance sounds right You may not get the frequency response as precisely as the mastering engineer intended but if you are happy with the result who cares Some PG Vinyl Tool options can cut highs If a record is damaged so much that subsequent PG Vinyl Tools cut high frequencies along with the noise you could increase the HF Boost by ear to make up the loss Rumble Filter Checkbox Cheap or worn out turntable platters can make subsonic vibrations Slightly warped records can also make undesirable low frequency noise Use the Rumble Filter to block unwanted low frequencies The Rumble Filter is a 24 dB per Octave Butterworth High Pass filter which attenuates undesirable low frequencies In most situations it will do no harm to always enable the Rumble Filter Rumble Filter Frequency At the default of 40 Hz signals below 40 Hz are attenuated and signals above 40 Hz are unaffected Vinyl mastering engineers typically avoided frequencies lower than 40 Hz It is diffic
39. 2008 12 05 El Latencu djust SEQ 1555KB SEG File 29 01 2007 23 33 Ls melanbab seq 1BKB SEQ File 01 03 1993 1 06 Ls miribwlz seg SKE SEQ File 01 03 1993 1 06 i HealBand is here SEG Br 123kKB SEQ File 13 07 2008 11 53 d TEMP_ACW PT Way 3b 161 KB Wave Sound 13 07 2008 11 53 as Template New File With Fieverb SEG 3KB SEQ File 19 04 2004 15 11 Files of type MID 3 SEG G 77 KAR SWAY MPSS WMA WMV COA Cancel TEN Custom file dialog is available to Open and Save files Save This command will offer to save your work along with a name of your choosing Ifa song has no name untitled a dialog box will pop up when you choose this option so that you can choose a file name and format e g MID SEQ or DP See the Save As command for more information on choosing a file name and format Note There are dedicated commands in the Audio menu for saving exporting audio data to a WAV file etc Save As The Save As command is similar in function to the Save command except that it also prompts you every time to choose the name of a file before saving it The Save As dialog recalls the folder from the last time it was used This setting can be enabled or disabled in the File tab of the Options Preferences dialog RealBand can save files either in MID Type 0 MID one track Karaoke KAR or SEQ format A dialog box that looks similar to the File Open dialog allows you to choose the name of the file directory drive and file type I
40. 237 Edit Both Ch For stereo tracks there is the option to apply edits to both channels or to either the left Edit Bath Ch or right channel only E dit Lett Ch E dit Right Ch ose epe 75 100 Percentage tempo buttons give you a choice of playing the song at 25 speed one quarter the regular speed 50 regular speed 75 regular speed and 100 which is regular speed This feature is also available with the Action Play at Speed menu command Selecting a Region to Edit You can select a region to edit with the mouse by clicking and dragging over the section you are interested in Shift click Shift key left mouse button support makes it easy to tweak the beginning or end of the highlighted area If you Shift click before the start of the From Thru range or after the end of the From Thru range the highlighted area will be extended If you Shift click within the From Thru range the range will be reduced and the location you clicked on will become either From or Thru depending on which boundary was closer to where you Shift clicked the mouse If you keep the left mouse button held after the Shift click and you move the mouse you can adjust the boundary of the range while moving the mouse After selecting a region you can then use the Edit Cut Copy and Paste features or choose from one or more of the plug in Audio Effects found in the Edit menu Drag and Drop Editing You can select a highlighted regio
41. A Drum Patch Map file has the DK extension These are the same files that are used by Band in a Box to identify and use all the sounds and patches available on a given sound source or synth Once a DK file is loaded you can use the Re map Drums Patches command to re map a General MIDI file to the custom sounds accessible in your DK file Check the PG Music web site for additional DK files that may be applicable to your synth or sound source Clear Drum Patch Map This command clears the current Drum Patch Map from memory Re map Drums Patches This command will re map the drum notes and patches from a General MIDI file to those of the current Drum Patch map This will bring up a dialog box in which you have two checkboxes that determine whether drums patches or both will be re mapped Open the PATCHES INI file located in the RealBand directory with a text program to see instructions for creating a new patch map Merge 2 Mono Audio Tracks to Stereo This command lets you combine any two mono audio tracks into a single stereo track When the dialog box pops up you need to type in the track numbers of tracks containing mono audio in the Source Track for Left Ch and Source Track For Right Ch fields In the Destination Track field type in the track number of a blank track Press the OK button and RealBand will merge the mono audio tracks to stereo Note The original tracks will remain untouched At some point you could choose to er
42. Adjust Octave fo Show MIDI nates If you want to control the Conductor using the MIDI keyboard you need to enable this by selecting the checkbox Enable control by MIDI keyboard in the MIDI keyboard control box When this setting 1s enabled any MIDI input will be interpreted as a hot key for the Conductor and you won t hear MIDI thru OK to change setting above by A Bb B in octave If you d like the ability to switch your MIDI keyboard between Conductor mode and regular playing mode you can do this using the lowest A natural MIDI note on your keyboard This is A1 on an 88 note keyboard Note A1 will turn the Conductor off Bb1 turns it on and B1 will toggle the Conductor on only when the Bb1 note is held down If you don t have an 88 note keyboard you can set the octave setting to a number higher than 1 for example if you set it to 3 then notes A3 Bb3 B3 will turn the Conductor Off On Toggled Using the Conductor QWERTY or MIDI keys you can Define and jump to up to 10 user defined sections in the song Jump back 1 bar 4 bars of bars screen part chorus section Jump ahead 1 bar 4 bars of bars screen part chorus section Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 155 Loop 1 bar 4 bars of bars screen part chorus section Pause stop the song In addition using the MIDI keyboard you can also use the Conductor to Al note 21 Turn MIDI Conductor OFF Bbl Turn MIDI Conductor ON Bl Turn MI
43. AutoWwah iV Enable Auto ah 1000 1000 gol 800 700 550 400 55 2 2 200 100 T mr D 10 Distort Freg Resonance Seng Release E 600 4 4 400 Sens adjusts the degree to which loud notes sweep the filter cutoff frequency No level sensitive sweep occurs when Sens is set to zero Release is the time in milliseconds that it takes for the filter to track note loudness decay Adjust to taste Gain is applied if the plug in settings make the signal too loud or too quiet PG Distortion PG Distortion is a Soft Distortion effect Soft Distortion is similar to over driven analog tape or tube amplifiers Soft Distortion is mellow it generates more even harmonics than hard distortion Even harmonics can complement musical tones and chords Tape or tubes have soft distortion because overloaded signal peaks are gently rounded off Hard Distortion is caused by over driven digital audio systems or solid state amplifiers Odd harmonics in hard distortion have a raucous sound less musical sounding notes and chords Low Gain settings around 3 to 9 dB give subtle distortion which may be perceived as warm or fat Low Gain settings can be used to warm up vocal harmony or fatten up drums and electric guitar Many musicians prefer to record guitar and drums to analog tape for a fat effect Use modest amounts of Soft Distortion to fatten a track 270 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins High Gain settings are more simil
44. Azz B 123 850 For our short tutorial song we ll start at bar 1 and end at bar 8 The Start of Song Chorus button is set at one by default so it will stay the same The End of Song Chorus button defaults to 32 so we ll click on the button and type in the number of the new end of chorus bar in the Enter Measure Number box Enter Measure Humber e Bar Ending We d like RealBand to add a 2 bar ending to our song so we ll check the 2 Bar Ending box ZJ AZZ Next we ll choose a style for our song by clicking on the style name to open the StylePicker window You aren t required to have Band in a Box for your RealBand styles but if you do you will see that all of your styles are available here Select Style Prototype Style 77JA77 STY All Styles 1 733 Other Styles Found 60 RealStyles 0 Styles with RealTracks 27 Styles with RealDrums 701 Blues 176 Classical 56 Country All 411 Country Ballads 92 Country Bluegrass 36 Country Classic 154 Country Folk 43 Country Rock Pop 170 Country Southern Gospel 29 Jazz Ballads 71 Jazz Bebop 43 Jazz Big Band 10 Jazz Dixieland 10 Jazz Fusion 97 Jazz Latin 79 Jazz Modern 96 Jazz Smooth Jazz 44 Jazz Swing 168 Latin All 238 Latin Cuban Salsa 34 New Age Soundtrack 70 Praise amp Worship Gospel 89 R amp B Soul 79 Reggae 30 Rock Pop All 752 Rock Ball
45. Carne Ante ter D ALLE Mat tp er et 8 Audio Drivers Tutorial ou eerie edu da co E 15 Chapter 2 New Features in RealBand 2010 eeeeeccssssscececccsssssceccoccsssssceceecosssssssececcosssssseee 19 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand sssccssccccscsssssssssssccccsccccsssssscssccoees 21 A a r E r EE 21 Cene are E a tens A E E E E A E 21 Introduction to the Tracks and Mixer WindOWS acrana a LAI ieee 23 Cieatime a New SOO At ame cm as 24 IMPOR SONS AA A ba 33 NA RE al e aaa al bet 36 Chapter4 The Main SCECOTG os cee scstacevesessacesteccceudeteess vaste ceceaeseuscvessueceecesecsscestuacetecsecadeeseeacoueers 38 T He Status Breed usta tinte emp dpa ea EUM MEME M P MEM EE C DUM MEME RU TM CLE CU Es MOUSE 38 HIEMS HT PE 38 MEO OMAN AO 38 Whe Piao Ke yO an 5e oiim cine tah ufa a ea uta eae ae ae ae eas 43 W DOON A emeaauiita a ei eacarecbeees 44 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features sccisssicccccesseveiscstdccececacvedseshececescaevencesidedenecauvoseesaes enesanseesseanssenes 51 O 51 Usme DX rand VS TAS yO ES ZE id 51 Loading and PAS MU DES e 53 Conductor WOW a as 58 TEAC cR 110 O e T 61 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks ececcccsssssececcccsssssceceoccossssscececoosssssceceocosssssseocosssssseee 70 la e S 70 C reatne d New SOM ATP eMC Ii a olaa 70 Table of Contents 3 Itecording Y Our Owain a 76 Editine BB Tracks and MIO odas 79 0 SUE ES S
46. Chord Options Chord Options E Pop wrtha Jazz Standard Chord Resolution 2 beats Rock Pop no 7th Jazz Modern Include Slash Chords Some Slash Chords Pop Ballad Solo Pia Pop Solo Pia Jazz Bass Part Type Walking bass fewest chords i Allow Sus chords suspended The Bass is on channel s Iw Allow 7th seventh chords e g C SN Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes Lowest bass note ls delayed The chording is on channal s 3 6 7 Method Jazz Leadsheet OF Interpret Chords Cancel Help Chord List Chords listed here are based on C but any valid chord letter A G can be used Major chords C CMAJ C6 CMAJ7 CMAJ9 CMAJ13 C69 CMAJ7 S C5b Caug C CMAJ9 11 CMAJ13 11 Minor chords Cm Cm6 Cm7 Cm9 Cm11 Cm13 Cmaug Cm 5 CnMAJ7 Half Diminished Cm7b5 Diminished Cdim Dominant 7th chords C7 7 C9 C13 C13 C7b13 C7 11 C13 11 C7 11b13 C9 C9b13 C9 11 C13 11 C9 11b13 C7b9 C13b9 C7b9b13 C7b9 11 C13b9 11 C7b9 11b13 C7 9 C13 9 C7 9b13 C9 11 C13 9 11 C7 9 11b13 C7b5 C13b5 C7b5b13 C9b5 C9b5b13 C7b5b9 C13b5b9 C7b5b9b13 C7b5 9 C13b5 9 C7b5 9b13 C7 5 C13 5 C7 5 11 C13 5 11 C9 5 C9 S5 11 C7 5b9 C13 5b9 C7 5b9 11 C13 5b9 11 C7 5 9 C13 5 9 11 C7 5 9 11 C13 5 941 1 Chapter 13 Reference 247 Sustained 4 chords Csus C7sus C9sus C13sus C7susb13 C7sus 11 C13sus 11 C7sus 11b13 C9susb13 C9sus 11 C13sus 11 C9sus 11
47. Clean Mode will clean up the notation in certain situations where there are notes played very close together and are within a certain interval of each other The clean option makes the notation more readable when there are a lot of grace notes notes leading up or down to the next note or glitch notes which are notes that are short in duration and have a low velocity Opens Lyric Edit mode In the Notation window lyrics can be entered into a track that already contains the notes of a melody When you switch into Lyric Edit mode a gray edit box will appear near the top of the Notation window The closest note or chord to the current time location will be highlighted T The Track button lets you choose which track to view The Duration Button lets you select the duration of the note The default duration is Auto If Auto is the currently selected duration the duration will be automatically set by the program so the note s duration lasts up to the next note in the measure or to the end of the measure which ever is closer le Rest The Rest checkbox lets you insert a hard rest onto the notation window to force a rest to be shown at a particular location For example if there is a half note at the beginning of a measure you can cause it to be displayed as quarter note by inserting a hard rest on the 2nd beat of the measure Hard rests are shown in blue The Rest checkbox only remains checked until you insert a rest Switch between a Notation W
48. Data Filter to further refine the selection of notes to transpose This command will insert a stream of the controller pitch bend or channel aftertouch events You can use the Fill feature to perform various tricks such as fade ins fade outs pitch bends etc The program will prompt you for the type of event to fill and what the From start and Thru end value should be Then the events will be automatically inserted throughout the marked area of the song The values of the inserted events will gradually increase or decrease from the start value to the end value Chapter 13 Reference 191 Length of MIDI Music Percentage 110 54 We Durations w Start Times Use Data Filter From 40M OH ss E E Thru EB oH o Eran ES Cancel Help Slide MIDI Music E Ticks Use Data Filter 1B a T Thru 1000 EI x 0 gt gt EN Cancel Help Value Fram Rechannel c Old Low Channel Old High Channel New Low Channel Mew High Channel Use Data Filter From 1E 1 0 E Thru 1000 1 0 gt Cancel Help 192 This command alters the length of the marked area of all selected tracks by the specified percentage For example a setting of 50 will shorten the length by half You can also use the Data Filter to determine which events this feature affects The Edit Length of MIDI Music command supports floating point percent
49. Detection can be expected to be rather poor It is quick and easy to align the bar lines on most songs once you get the hang of it The first task is to locate the beginning of Bar One Since an audio file could have an arbitrary amount of silence at the beginning of the song and many songs begin with a pickup partial bar ACW cannot easily guess the first bar without a hint from you 148 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins The shortcut keys and mouse playback controls make it easy to find Bar One Tap the space bar to begin play watch the Location Cursor and listen for the downbeat If the Location Cursor passes the downbeat and you were not completely certain of the location you can tap the W key to rewind to the song beginning and replay the first part of the song to audition the downbeat as many times as necessary to make sure of its location You can also single click in the Chords panel to jump the playback position If the rhythm is unusually complicated near the downbeat you could repeatedly click just a little before the suspected Bar One location to zero in on the exact downbeat In the following example song we have discovered the downbeat of Bar One so we Right Click on that location to Set Bar One Now the Bar One bar line is red Shown below The red Triangle bar indicator indicates that we have edited that bar line The Red Triangles are called Good Bar Lines GBL s The green Triangle bar indicators are ba
50. Drop tracks between RealBand and another sequencer Sonar Reaper ProTools FL Studio Nuendo and more RealTracks now support Shots Holds and Pushes Endings are improved and RealTracks endings are now 4 bars long giving time for the natural decay of the instruments The New Features in RealBand 2010 for Windows are There now is a Plug in mode for use with RealBand and another sequencer Sonar Reaper ProTools FL Studio Nuendo and more With the new plug in mode RealBand is open as a small always on top window and acts as a plug in for your favorite DAW sequencer so that you can Drag n Drop MIDI and audio WAV tracks from RealBand to another sequencer or to Explorer Work in another sequencer type a progression in RealBand and then simply drag the track from RealBand in a Box to your sequencer s track at the desired track and bar location RealTracks now support new features including Shots Holds and Pushes Simply type in the chords as you normally would adding periods for shots and holds and the RealTracks will play them RealTracks endings have been enhanced and are now 4 bar endings instead of 2 bar allowing time for a natural decay of the instruments RealBand main window is now sizable when size changes chord sheet notation and other windows redraw in proportion to the new size This allows you to have BB open as a small window on screen with other programs and you still see a full chord sheet The
51. Filter Playback Only w Both recording and playback Disabled Preferences CkErl F5 Audio Editing Any of the forty eight tracks within RealBand can be designated as either mono audio or stereo audio If you edit a stereo track in the Audio Edit window you will see two channels waveforms in the window The Audio Edit window lets you edit only the left or right channels of a stereo track instead of always editing both channels This lets you Cut Paste just the left or right channel or you can apply a non real time effect Edit Audio Effects to just the left or right channel Stereo tracks are normally panned to the center so the stereo signal 1s centered 98 Chapter 8 Audio Production E Audio Edit Window Track 1 Snap Play Selected Area Select Whole E dit Left Ch Edit Both Ch Edit Lett Ch Edit Right Ch li ii ui aid a dl ll rT Loop Record ifa If you record while in Loop mode which is activated using the loop button the music will loop when recording 1s started with the Record button The music that is recording during each loop can be put onto Loop individual tracks after recording is finished or the entire take can be put onto a single track like an ordinary recorded take A dialog will pop up giving you a choice of whether the recorded audio will go on separate tracks or on the same track If you choose the latter the take will be kept the same way an ordinary take is nor
52. IO D800 Ch 4 BB Soloist 247512 27 Electric Guitar jazz l MIDI out B Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 8 IBB Audio ie Generic Audio AUD Qut ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave JBB RealBass ce Generic Audio A AUD Dut ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave BB RealDrums NashvilleE ven8 2 y 54 13 A E aN AUD Out ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave i a Ss a SA Se Em El w BB RealPiano MT EISE ms Ww E Generic Audio L A f amp UD Dut ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave M3 RR BealGuitar 24 12 0 L 24 12 OWL If there are any RealTracks that you want to preserve when regenerating the arrangement you can use the Track Duplicate feature to make a copy on a blank track Destination Track BB Heal uitar A Generic Audio a e E VAUD DutAS 10 0 1 Wawe rave This copy will be a user track as indicated by the name in black type and will not be affected by generating a new arrangement This 1s a useful way to generate multiple versions of a Real instrument part and then choose the one you like best or edit together your favorite parts from different tracks or even layer multiple tracks Select and Generate RealTrack Generate RealTrack Favorites Additional Real Tracks can be added to your song by right clicking on any blank track and selecting one of the two options for generating RealTracks from the track options menu Y ou can also highlight a region of a track and generate your RealTrack for just that region to dr
53. Lyrics Text c notice etc map to track 2 Lyrics ReMap HOW Melody map to track 3 map to track 4 Drums 5 map to track Bass map to track 6 Chords piano or gtr Note Non mapped tracks will be added following the Chords track Termal Eso Help This feature will remap the track numbers to conform to the KAR Karaoke file format In a KAR file Track 1 and Track 2 only contain lyric events Track 1 has lyric events for identification and copyright purposes Track 2 contains the actual lyrics of the song In the 6 edit boxes you can enter the track numbers that should be moved to destination tracks in order to conform to the standard For example if track 7 contains lyrics you would type 7 in the edit box for track 2 If the melody were Chapter 13 Reference 181 on track 8 you would type an 8 for track 3 etc If the lyrics and melody are both on the same track for example track 6 you would type a 6 for both the lyrics and melody track If there are any tracks such as non lyrics text bass etc that are not included in a given song you should type a 0 in the edit controls for these Pressing the ReMap Now button will cause tracks to be remapped to the Karaoke Standard Track Order Any tracks that are present in a sequence that wasn t specified to be remapped will be placed after the chords track Only lyric events are re mapped to Tracks 1 and 2 For example if you ve specified that track 3 should be re
54. MIDI tracks we just want to change the key signature Select No Just before we play our song we can set a tempo The tempo box has a setting of 120 bpm To change it to 140 we ll click in the box to open the Tempo dialog and type in 140 Tempo El We could also set the tempo with the up and down scroll arrows or even tap in a tempo with the minus and equals buttons Tempo Calculator File File Utilities The length of a song depends on tempo and number of bars With this calculator found in the File menu under File Utilities you can enter 2 of the 3 variables length of song in seconds tempo number of bars and the Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks 73 program calculates the third variable for you So for example if you need a piece of music lasting 60 00 seconds and it is 45 bars you can use the calculator to find the tempo that will achieve that x Tempo Calculator Desired Length of Music in Seconds Number of Bars of Song Tempo TIP highlight Field with mouse and press Ctrl C to copy to clipboard To use calculator First select the desired number of seconds of music Next choose the number of bars of music in the song The tempo Field will the automatically change to show the exact tempo needed For the desired song length MOTE The Number of Bars are assumed to all have the same time signature as the First time signature in the current song MOTE You could adjust Tempo to calculate Number of Bar
55. Middle Chorus Begins at bar Adjust Octave o Show MIDI nates Enable Control by QWERTY keys Last Chorus Begins at bar Made when to do the action for section or go back ahead Default a NOW and go to start Loo Chorus a Section s Screen d bars F NOM go to same rel pas Bar z 4 Bars x Part c Prev v OFF b Newt BAR Nest PART MARKER Go Back Ctrl key Chorus a Section s Screen d H bars T Next CHORUS Nest SECTION Bar z 4 Bars x Part c ELM Bess BM Default Mode for section change Go Ahead fuse SHIFT key Now and go to start Eee eo _ Screen 0 bale E Default Mode for going back or ahead Bar 4 Bars X Part C Now land go to start es Defaults Close W Enable Control by WERT keys You must enable the QWERTY keys to be active for the Conductor during playback This is done by selecting the Enable Control by QWERTY keys checkbox on the Conductor Window 58 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features MIDI keyboard contro Enable control by MIDI keyboard OK to change setting above by A Bb 6 in octave Adjust Octave jo Show MIDI nates If you want to control the Conductor using the MIDI keyboard you need to enable this by selecting the checkbox Enable control by MIDI keyboard in the MIDI keyboard control box When this setting is enabled any MIDI input will be interpreted as a hot key for the Conductor
56. Options dialog allows mono audio tracks to use the real time effects track inserts in stereo mode for better sounding mixes Chapter 11 Mixer Window 145 Note This feature only applies to track effects inserts Aux busses have always worked in stereo mode if the effects were stereo This feature when enabled will also cause RealBand to use up more CPU processing power Aux Busses Each track s mixer channel strip also has four assignable AUX knobs that let you individually control the send levels for up to four auxiliary effects on each track There are eight Aux auxiliary effects busses in the Mixer window Each allows a chain of up to four effects You can adjust the Send level Return level and output port destination audio port or subgroup for each bus The FX effects button at the top of each Aux strip brings up the DirectX VST Window so you can select effects or edit effects settings Effects can also be applied to the individual audio subgroups and output ports Each subgroup and audio port has an FX insert with slots for four chained effects This is useful if you wish to apply special effects to a selected group of tracks or apply them globally to the final stereo output Real Time Effects Reset Reset Realtime Effects The Reset Realtime Effects button is found in the Audio preferences dialog It will remove any real time effects from your project so you can begin remixing from scratch Notes on
57. Osi Tracks to Compressed File Merge Audio and Di Tracks to WMA File Test Wave File or Compressed File Launch CD Burner Pitch to MIDI Convert current audio track MultiTracks Wave File Player ShiFt F3 Audin Chard Mtissrd Anan fuidia Fila AAA IMDS HOD AS Rendering Individual Tracks to Audio Right click in the Tracks window to access these audio rendering commands Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to WAV File Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Audia Track Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Selected Audio Tracks Select Whole Track Change Current Time rAlE LeFEMBuser lick Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to WAV File Choose this command to convert any MIDI track to a WAV file RealBand will automatically render using a DXi or VSTi synth WAV files can be exported to other sequencers or Windows Media Player Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Audio Track It is easy to convert any MIDI track to an audio track RealBand will automatically render using a DXi or VSTi synth and import the audio into the first available track in the Tracks window Loading and Playing MIDI Songs Loading a Song To load in a new song choose File Open You will then see a list of files available for use with the program To see the custom Open dialog go to Options Preferences Ctrl F5 and select the checkbox for Long File Names use custom open save dialog mw Long File Names use custom apen save dialog This
58. Overlap ooocccccccccncnnnnnnonos 192 Endless Loop aan 217 E NO e abi 70 rests shots held chords pushes 71 A he 201 Erase Data Oia o aie er tt obedit 201 Eveem L oor ean ee 233 Event ASES eS 82 Events channel aftertouc ci 234 controller changes cooccccccccncnnnnnnnnononononnnos 234 key albe noc 234 PTA CS m PP DE 234 A A 234 Dutchobe Bette ttbi eM itt 234 PAU 182 Extract Channels to Tracks 192 File AA UC 224 I inii Tm ERN 198 A i c DEUM IER a Sad Sees 198 Meni iira eoe E isum bib VU sU EUR UU RU 176 A eee os ey 179 File types A ieee seed snot nd acp abadieuaieaupsaaacate 161 File Types DO ES pacas 210 A A agent 194 A PN NER 213 LIE sont uote tuum te ati es ease een 190 Floating Point e AMA NE 191 CIDO on 54 153 EOM ee UU EE E cl ENE ESE Oe a aR 58 213 generating BB tracks oooocccccccccncncnnnnnnnnnnnos 712 GM GS XG Mode On 211 Goto TIME eiu etis ues a end edad 207 Guitar T ner Calibra Oi ct ERR Rees 169 Guitar Tune cc 168 generate TONES isra E RA 169 EET a RR AE E T ter 170 Gs A a aint REN EUNE 250 other fretboardS cooccccccccccnonocccccnncnncnnininnn 253 Je ca hase eed E 252 SS PUIG eoi eu saad ta ballad ta Se NER SERRE 253 Help COMES a 259 Chir D 260 nsi CERE UNT TE 259 les 258 Tide Pince poen cated hoa Raa sies 232 Hide Tool Bi li 232 O 281 289 How tO TECIE ahs dao
59. Performance The number of real time effects that you can expect to activate at a time without stressing the system depends on the speed of your computer Normally you would mostly be using the Aux busses since the effects used in the Aux busses can be applied to multiple tracks efficiently Let s say you were to select a reverb in the Aux section of the mixer and you adjust the Aux send knobs for five tracks so that they were all using Aux for reverb In this case there would only be one instance of this reverb plug in active regardless of the number of tracks 5 that were utilizing the Aux bus since the signals of all tracks utilizing Aux share the same Aux signal path Note The more effects you chain together within each Aux bus Track Insert or Output Insert the more CPU power will be required For example an Aux bus with just an EQ will require a lot less CPU power than an Aux bus with a chain of four effects such as Compressor EQ Chorus Reverb Recordable Mixer Moves Audio track mixer moves Vol Pan Aux1 Aux2 are now recordable and you can insert delete edit the associated MIDI controller events in the Event List To record Mixer moves the current track should be set to the track in which you want to record the moves Rehearse the Mixer move while playing the song noting the begin and end points for the move It s often useful to enable the metronome for reference during playback and reco
60. Point Tempos RealBand supports precise floating point tempos such as 120 514 BPM This makes it easier to sync MIDI tracks to prerecorded audio tracks if the audio tracks weren t recorded exactly at an integer tempo This also is what lets RealBand play a song in sync to an existing audio track after the Audio Chord Wizard has worked its magic Notes Display The Notes Display looks like a MIDI Piano Roll but it is not exactly the same as a MIDI Piano Roll Audio Chord wizard detects the strongest frequencies found in each eighth note time slot and displays them in the Notes Display Sometimes the displayed frequencies REALLY ARE instrument notes played in the audio file But they could be spurious information such as the accidental loudest frequency of a drum beat A midrange frequency note bar might be showing the sum of harmonics from several instruments each instrument s harmonics contributing to the strength of that frequency The Notes Display information is real and useful but try not to assume that every displayed note bar is a real note in the audio Horizontal Scroll Bar aa E Scroll forward back in the wave file Plus Minus Zoom Buttons Zoom the display to show more or less detail Conductor Window Conductor Live Looping Playback Control As the song is playing there are options to control the flow of playback by one of three methods 1 Conductor window 2 QWERTY hot keys 3 MIDI keyboard amp The Con
61. Start Time Offsets are set to 0 the notes won t be moved in time The Vel Percentage setting determines the degree to which the program will randomly alter note velocities For example a setting of 10 will cause the program to randomly alter velocities anywhere from 10 lower and up to 10 higher than the note s original velocity If this setting 1s set to O the note velocities won t be altered by the program There are hot keys available for quickly setting the value of a drum grid cell without having to type an entire number These hot keys are located along the bottom row of the keyboard The Z key sets the cell to unused while the other keys to the right of the Z key will set the cell to values ranging from 40 for the X key up to 127 for the forward slash key The key lets you decrease the tempo without having to exit the Drum Grid editor and the key will increase the tempo Each time you press or key the tempo will decrease or increase by 1 Holding down these keys will gradually decrease or increase the tempo Panic This command will send an All Notes Off and a Sustain Pedal Off command over all 16 MIDI channels V It will also shut off any MIDI po Thru notes that may be sustained This command is the same as pressing the panic button Cache Patches Now This command is only applicable to you if you are using a MIDI output driver that requires patch caching This command will cause RealBand to update the patch cac
62. Test Audio Performance option from the Action menu This will test your system and give you its findings on the digital audio recording capabilities To reapply this benchmark with another drive revisit the Audio dialog and change the path of the Audio Temp Directory to another drive D temp for instance Then select Test Audio Performance from the Action menu again and note the difference in the estimated number of tracks for each drive i RealBand Estimated Number of 44 16 Audio tracks For playback 62 Mate Estimated performance is For Mono tracks Mote Currently enabled effects may reduce the estimated number of tracks Audio performance benchmark results Setup for Multiple Sound Cards or Multi Port Audio Cards RealBand has the ability to input and output tracks of digital audio through separate channels of multiple sound cards or multiple ports of a multichannel card If your computer system has multiple sound cards or if you have a multiple channel audio card you can configure RealBand for digital audio production through a mixer or other multi channel system such as the front and rear speakers of a surround sound setup 1 To configure for multiple sound cards choose the Drivers button from the Audio dialog to bring up the Audio Drivers dialog Audio Drivers Audio Input Driverts Audio Output Oriverts microsoft Sound Mapper Microsoft Sound Mapper SB Live Audia SB Live udio BS00 Roland W
63. The Delete From Bar and Delete Thru Bar settings allow you to select a range of bars measures in which the chord symbols are deleted This command can t be undone later A warning message box will provide you with the opportunity to cancel the command before it is performed 188 Chapter 13 Reference You can delete chord symbols individually for a specific beat of a song by pressing Ctrl Delete or the comma key while in the Notation window only if the Ch checkbox in the Notation window is checked Edit Audio Effects This submenu contains all of the installed audio DSP effects that can be used with Wave Digital Audio Tracks or rendered MIDI tracks The audio effects in this submenu are actually external plug ins that are transparently integrated with RealBand You ll be able to use them just as if they are built in to the program since they work in a manner similar to the standard editing commands To access any DirectX or VST plug ins you have installed in your system choose the DirectX Audio Plugins option and select the effect you want to use from the drop down list located in the DirectX plug in dialog Each audio effect has its own Help button which gives a detailed description of the effect parameters and their use Quantize Quantize Percentage 10C We Start Times Durations Besolution Sixteenth Use Data Filter Pe se oe Cancel Help The Quantize feature can be used o
64. The lower middle row contains toms and cymbals The upper middle row contains Latin drums and the top row contains Latin hand percussion The Numpad keys contain the rest of the Latin hand percussion plus the electronic tones Multi Note Instruments Kick Drum Ac Bass Drum Bass Drum 1 Square Kick Snare Acoustic Snare Side Stick Hi Hat Closed Pedal Open Floor Tom Low High Electronic Pad Multi zoned for Hi Q Slap Electric Snare High Conga Mute Open Surdo Mute Open Cuica Mute Open Metronome Bell Click Whistle Long Short Triangle Mute Open Guiro Long Short Scratch Push Pull Settings Dialog Press the Settings button to the left of the Rewind button to adjust the various Drums Settings The Drum window 1s always on top checkbox keeps the Drum Kit window on top of other program windows MIDI Settings Drum MIDI Port defaults to Port 1 but can be changed to use any of the ports available 1 e the MIDI Output drivers enabled in the MIDI Driver Setup Drum MIDI Channel defaults to channel 10 which is the channel used by General MIDI instruments If your drum machine or MIDI device uses a different channel for drums you can set it here Drum Duration Boost adds duration to drum notes with a range of 1 10 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 167 Note Velocity When playing drums with a mouse or computer keys the Shift key toggles between two lev
65. To use calculator first select the desired number of seconds of music Next choose the number of bars of music in the song The tempo Field will the automatically change to show the exact tempo needed For the desired song length MOTE The Number of Bars are assumed to all have the same time signature as the First time signature in the current song NOTE You could adjust Tempo to calculate Number of Bars but it will not always result in whole number of bars The length of a song depends on tempo and number of bars With this calculator you can enter 2 of the 3 variables length of song in seconds tempo number of bars and the program calculates the third variable for you So for 180 Chapter 13 Reference example if you need a piece of music lasting 60 00 seconds and it is 45 bars you can use the calculator to find the tempo that will achieve that Load Scrap The Load Scrap command works in the same way as the Open command except that a selected MID or SEQ file is loaded into the scrap buffer instead of directly into a project You can then paste the contents of this scrap buffer anywhere within the song This is useful for importing another file into your current project Load Scrap loads audio tracks into the scrap buffer so they can be pasted into the current song If the audio file format of the SEQ file doesn t match the file format of the current song the tracks in the file you re loading will be converted to
66. Tuning Most songs are recorded pretty close to Concert Pitch But if you see numerous Chord errors 1t may help to adjust the Fine Tuning control If you are playing along with a song on your keyboard you might decide to make an ear estimate of how far out of tune is the song For instance you could adjust the fine tuning control on your keyboard until your keyboard matches the song s pitch according to your ear Then you could look at your keyboard s tuning readout and adjust AC W s Fine Tune Control to match Either click drag ACW s Fine Tune control like a slider control or right click the Fine Tune control then type in a number The Fine Tune Control currently does not change the pitch of playback Currently the ACW s Fine Tune control only improves Chord Detection on mistuned songs The Fine Tune control is calibrated in cents 1 100th of a semitone Therefore if a song is perfectly in the key of C Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 151 but if you set Fine Tune to 100 Cents ACW would display chords in the key of B Similarly if you set Fine Tune to 100 Cents 1t would display that song s chords in the key of CF That simple use of the Fine Tune control is just a backwards way to transpose the Chords But if you set Fine Tune somewhere in the middle ACW looks for notes that are somewhere in the cracks between the piano keys For instance if your song SHOULD be in the key of C but it was unfortunately record
67. With events such as Pitch Bend or controllers like Modulation and Sustain it is important to take care to end a gesture with a zero value event Otherwise subsequent notes will be affected with an unwanted hanging Pitch Bend Vibrato or Sustain Pedal locked down To fix this move the mouse cursor where the gesture should have ended and click in a single zero value event Event Selection Selected Events are red Hin Graphic Event Ruler Time Selections The Graphic Event Ruler will only select non note events In addition it will only select the type of MIDI events specified in the Chan View Edit and Controller Type controls When you make a Ruler Time selection only the visible events in this time range are selected Click drag on the Ruler to select a time range Shift click drag to add another time range to the selection 2 Ctri click drag to invert the selection of events in the time range For instance you could drag to select bars 2 thru 7 then option drag to toggle off selections for bar 4 Itis very flexible Individual Graphic Event Selections 1 Click on an event to select it 2 Shift click on an event to add it to the selection 3 Ctri click on an event to invert toggle the selection of that event Chapter 10 Piano Roll Window 135 Edit Events Edit Event Value Move the cursor over the top half of an event An up down cursor appears Click drag vertically to scale event values To scal
68. a Notation window The sequence of keystrokes to enter all the chords in the above line would be w c6 am7 dm7 gt ab9 g9 gt c6 e gt a739 Enter W indicates rewind the gt indicates cursor key to the right and Enter indicates pressing the Enter key Entering Lyrics The L button in the Notation window puts the notation into a mode in which you can enter lyrics Lyrics are stored as individual track events which can be accessed in the Event List window like any other events In the Notation window lyrics can be entered into a track that already contains the notes of a melody In Lyric Edit mode a gray edit box will appear near the top of the Notation window The closest note or chord to the current time location will be highlighted Lyrics are entered by typing a word in the edit box and then pressing Enter When Enter or Tab is pressed the Notation window will advance to the next note or chord of the melody You can then continue typing lyrics and pressing Enter to advance forward into the melody Ctrl lt left cursor arrow lets you back up to the previous note or chord and Ctrl right cursor arrow lets you advance to the next chord without saving the contents of the edit control 112 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing Note When creating KAR files you enter lyrics in RealBand as usual and if you save as a KAR file the lyrics will be converted to the KAR format Unlike the KAR format RealBand lyrics s
69. a standard Windows media player Launch CD Burner This command launches the Miniburn CD Burner program If the current song has audio data this feature will first offer to merge audio tracks in the current song to a WAV file If you say OK to this option the CD Burner will automatically add the WAV file to a list of files to be burned onto a CD burn list If necessary RealBand will convert your file to 16 bit 44 1 kHz stereo before burning it to an audio CD Pitch to MIDI Convert current audio track This command will perform a pitch to MIDI conversion of the current track It works best on audio tracks that contain only single note melodies The current track is analyzed and then the program will attempt to convert it to MIDI If the conversion is successful the MIDI notes will be placed on the next available empty MIDI track MultiTracks Wave File Player This command will play special MultiTracks wave files up to 48 tracks This file format is similar to regular wave files but instead of being simple stereo or mono standard wave files these files can be quite large and contain up to 48 discrete mono tracks The dedicated MultiTrack Wave dialog is simply a quick means of playing these special wave files This player can also play and preview any regular mono or stereo wave files To use note the following 1 Use the Load button to load a file 2 Use the Play and Stop buttons to start and stop playback 3 The Time Scroll
70. a sharp e g F 7 1s the uppercase symbol of 3 so you can actually type F37 to get F 7 RealBand will sort out the case saving you the effort of using lt SHIFT gt 3 to type the symbol Use for Slash Chords with alternate Roots such as C7 E C7 with E bass Use a comma to enter 2 chords in a row In the example below we would type Ab9 G9 to enter 2 chords at a time on beat 3 and 4 of bar 2 You can use the Delete key to delete a chord or type a comma and press Enter Each measure is divided into Beat Groups indicated by a highlight cell A Beat Group consists of two beats Ifa song is in 4 4 then each measure will contain two beat groups The current beat group will have a rectangle drawn around it You can type two chords into the current beat group For example if you type this C7 G7 without the quotes you ll see the text you re typing in the white rectangular panel on the toolbar If you then hit lt Enter gt you ll see the C7 and G7 chords appear within the current beat group and the input rectangle will automatically advance to the next beat group When you re in the middle of typing chord symbols you can use the backspace key to correct a mistake The Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys let you move the input rectangle to a different beat group without entering chords You can also click the mouse on a different beat group to move the input rectangle to a new location Note Don t use the mouse in a situation where
71. a tempo of 120 less at faster tempos At 3840 PPQ and a 4 4 time signature the maximum allowed note duration length is around 17 beats regardless of the tempo Then make the necessary settings in the Tracks window to select the port MIDI channel patch etc for the part you are recording Track Type MIDI Port 1 Out USB MidiSpork 1x1 Set All MIDI Tracks to Cut USB Midisport 1x1 Channel 3 Patch Select Dialog Program 1 Acoustic Grand Piano Bank M56 O Bank L5B Start recording with the Record button by pressing the R key on the computer keyboard or with the menu command Action Record The Record command starts the count in according to the settings that you have made in the Metronome Settings dialog Counting Down 7 4 Metronome To open the metronome settings go to Preferences and select the Metronome tab Click on the Metronome Settings button Metronome Settings 76 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks F Metronome P In addition to the on screen countdown there is an option for a MIDI drum count in on any drum Recording Play Back Crunk i da Allow Count in before playback kit instrument The default note is F 3 hi hat Metronome shuts off after count in There is a setting in the l Metronome Settings dialog Silent Count In Keep these settings permanent ignore settings stored in SEQ files that will cause RealBand to MIDI Metronome remember the
72. additional gap from being Chapter 13 Reference 203 created between the rubato section and the next clicked in section since clicked in sections may be aligned to the next bar as explained later in this section This sliding forward may cause a gap between the rubato section and the prior clicked in section or at the beginning of the song There can be several rubato and clicked in sections throughout a song Each paired rubato clicked in section can have its own tempo based on the tempo of the click track for the clicked in section Each clicked in section following a rubato section will be aligned to begin at the start of a bar line The program will use the first meter event in the Meter Map and assume this is the meter throughout the song when calculating the bar locations for this purpose When recording a click track there should be a click at the beginning first beat and at the end last beat of each section At the very end of a song you should record one extra beyond the last beat of the last measure so that the program can tell where the song ends in order to perform the alignment procedure The Align Music To Click Track command has From and Thru values Usually you will use this command on an entire track with the human click track spanning the entire length of the free time track This 1s the recommended method of using this feature However you could specify a From and Thru region if you are only aligning part of a track
73. always generate the complete song When either button is pressed we ll see our new tracks in the Tracks window x Tracks Ctrl 1 CJL Snap Play Selected Area E 24 12 i i fe E go D110 D800 Ch2 a Tm Dunt e E Dru 24 12 E ibi ou SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 10 1 1BB Piano 7 MT t Acoustic Grand Piano MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 3 i 24 12 Le mus l 25 Acoustic Guitar nylon g E MIDI out B Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch amp EA he I IN I Iin a v BB Strings 24 12 amp 150 String Ensemble 2 MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 7 24 12 Generic Audio JAUD Dut ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave d 17 Untitled MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 0 D eo E T lage v L R v L R v L R ZIBB Guitar Y eas R v L R v L R xL 24 312 0 L R X BB RealDrums BossaRock 1 HiH sey e E The track overview shows us that we have five MIDI tracks playing the parts generated by the J Lush style and because RealDrums are allowed in the Preferences Song Generation settings the BB Drums track is empty and we have a RealDrums audio track Notice that the BB track names are in blue whereas user track names are in black BB tracks cannot be moved or renamed but you can change any of the settings with the right click menu for example the patch MIDI port or MIDI channel These track
74. and you won t hear MIDI thru OK to change setting above by A Bb B in octave If you d like the ability to switch your MIDI keyboard between Conductor mode and regular playing mode you can do this using the lowest A natural MIDI note on your keyboard This is A1 on an 88 note keyboard Note A1 will turn the Conductor off Bb1 turns it on and B1 will toggle the Conductor on only when the Bb1 note is held down If you don t have an 88 note keyboard you can set the octave setting to a number higher than 1 for example if you set it to 3 then notes A3 Bb3 B3 will turn the Conductor Off On Toggled Using the Conductor QWERTY or MIDI keys you can Define and jump to up to 10 user defined sections in the song Jump back 1 bar 4 bars of bars screen part chorus section Jump ahead 1 bar 4 bars of bars screen part chorus section Loop bar 4 bars of bars screen part chorus section Pause stop the song In addition using the MIDI keyboard you can also use the Conductor to Al note 21 Turn MIDI Conductor OFF Bb1 Turn MIDI Conductor ON Bl Turn MIDI Conductor ON only as note is held down The various functions of the Conductor are available with MIDI keys and QWERTY hot keys as listed in the Wizards Tools and Plug Ins chapter Customizing the Sections Sections This allows you to define up to 10 points in the song that are sections By default the following sections are defined for each song Section
75. be displayed on the clef that they normally would be shown Other Notation Options There are some additional settings that can be accessed by pressing the Other Options button The Duration setting causes the durations to be set to a percentage of the currently selected duration For example if the current duration is Whole and you set the percentage to 50 the duration will be 50 of a Whole note The Channel and Velocity settings determine the MIDI Channel and velocity of inserted notes When the Use Existing Channel setting is enabled and you insert a note in the Notation window RealBand will intelligently determine the channel number of inserted notes instead of using the Channel setting in the Other Notation Options dialog When this setting is disabled the Channel field is used for inserted notes If this setting is enabled and you then insert a note in the Notation window RealBand will first try to use the forced MIDI channel in the Tracks window to determine the channel of the note you re inserting If there is a forced MIDI channel setting for the track in the Tracks view then RealBand will set the channel of the note you are currently attempting to insert so that its channel 1s the same as the forced MIDI channel 122 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing If this setting is enabled but there is no forced MIDI channel i e the Ch field in the Tracks window is set to zero RealBand will search the tr
76. by 1 peg Alt Right Arrow Backup bv 1 peg Alt Left arrows Notation Mode Editable Mode Staff Roll Mode 116 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing Insert Section Text Launches a dialog that lets you insert a Section Text event Section Letters A submenu will let you select a section letter from A Z or Remove which removes the nearest section letter to where you right clicked Cleanup Orphaned Notation Controller Events This will automatically remove stray notation controller events such as any that no longer have notes associated with them Chord Height Adjustment Lets you make an adjustment to the vertical position of the chord symbol at the current beat Advance by 1 Peg Advance the time by 1 peg Backup by 1 Peg backup the time by 1 peg If you right clicked on a note there will also be a menu item at the top that lets you edit the note 1 Peg Notation Hot Key There is a 1 peg hot key in the Notation window to move current time forward or backward by 1 peg normally a 16th note Alt left arrow moves the current time backward by 1 peg Alt right arrow moves 1t forward by 1 peg This makes it easier if you are using the on screen piano for entering notes into the Notation window Pop Up Note Properties Display When in Editable Notation mode Iw Show pop up hint for note properties if the Show pop up hint for note properties setting is enabled in the Other Options Other Notation Opti
77. checkbox when checked will prevent RealBand from saving the forced MIDI channels the Ch field in the Classic Tracks View window into the MID files This META event is only recognized by other PG Music programs If you choose to not have this setting saved then the forced channels won t be recalled the next time the file is loaded You could use the Edit Rechannel All Tracks command to convert the actual MIDI data in the tracks to the forced channel so that a forced channel setting isn t needed Automatically Rechannel track data when saving to MID When saving to a MIDI file RealBand will automatically ask you if you want to rechannel the track data to the forced MIDI channels in the tracks view if the tracks contain MIDI channels different from the forced channel Note By default this is disabled and you will receive a notification dialog if you enable it If you are a MIDI guitar player you probably will want to leave this setting disabled permanently Leaving this setting disabled and never enabling it will ensure that you will always retain the individual channels recorded by your MIDI guitar The Long file names use custom open save dialog checkbox lets you use a more advanced custom file dialog This dialog allows you to choose a Font This dialog will remember the dialog s window size and placement and the currently selected font It also has a tree button that lets you view the directory structure and a button that lets
78. chords in a row In the example below we would type Ab9 G9 to enter 2 chords at a time on beat 3 and 4 of bar 2 Y ou can use the Delete key to delete a chord or type a comma and press Enter Each measure is divided into Beat Groups indicated by a highlight cell A Beat Group consists of two beats Ifa song is in 4 4 then each measure will contain two beat groups The current beat group will have a rectangle drawn around it You can type two chords into the current beat group For example if you type this C7 G7 without the quotes you ll see the text you re typing in the white rectangular panel on the toolbar If you then hit lt Enter gt you ll see the C7 and G7 chords appear within the current beat group and the input rectangle will automatically advance to the next beat group When you re in the middle of typing chord symbols you can use the backspace key to correct a mistake The Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys let you move the input rectangle to a different beat group without entering chords You can also click the mouse on a different beat group to move the input rectangle to a new location For a list of the chord spellings that are recognized by RealBand see the help topic Entering Chord Symbols 70 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks Rests Shot Held Chord Pushes Rests Shot Held Chord and Pushes are supported by the RealBand generation routines A chord can be specified as a Rest by adding a period after the chord
79. displayed in MiniBurn s central file list region Trk Track Number File Name Path and name of Wave files Time Play time of each track formatted in minutes seconds frames Burn Time indicates the sum of all the burn list track times Avail Time indicates the time available on the blank CDR if a writeable CDR or CDRW has been inserted in the CD Burner If no disc has been inserted or if an unwriteable disc has been inserted Available Time reads No Disc Add Files to the Burn List Use the menu item File Add Track A Right click on the Burn List and select Add Track from the pop up menu Drag wave files into the MiniBurn window from an open Windows folder Remove Files from the Burn List Left click to select a track then use File Remove Selected Track Left click to select a track then right click on the Burn List and pick Remove Track from the pop up menu Clear All Files from the Burn List A Use the menu item File Clear All Tracks From Burn List Right click on the burn list and select Clear All Tracks from the pop up menu Change the Order of Tracks in the Burn List Left click on the Trk column of the file you wish to move and drag the file to a new location in the list Description of Filenames 164 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins miniburn exe Main program executable This program can be run as a plug in from within RealBand or it can be run stand alone Double click this fi
80. doe tt P Don mei 113 Event TAOS solent ada eio sin 117 Menlo BEI ooo rom t e iR 114 Hic thickness sde ats 123 lario REN NT E 111 NES DEICIKS ca 112 IMICTO TESOLU ION ooooooonoooooooonnnnnnonononnnonononononoss 114 THO VIBP NOLES eins 113 A EOR 118 OP MONS enasi eel MN SEE LE EA d eae 118 orphaned nOs 116 OUNCE ODEHOIS i eos esta Ore tUa er nade eee 121 POPUP Meni 2 dioere epo asen tan uc Era RS TUER YU DE 115 PrDUD ereraa icdoda 128 properties DOPUD ii 116 A iu e reet E 116 A A TO 115 standard NO AMON a 110 SI era M LEM 116 ab 21 10 cen ote meee nee eee nes eee nee 120 Notation WIOdOW seit o mte ei etat mts 109 Note Roll notation cete Da RE 118 Notes A a enit ed 192 Open From Clipboard cccccccccccccnononcncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 179 Options IMO LEWIN AA 57 77 97 218 Undo Level EN 219 OPUS IMC od 215 Overlapping notes eliminating 192 OVAL titi 206 nce ENS 211 part markets eoe eoe IRI Na E 71 Part marke A teomtarte etaccenman ateea teens 245 luc 185 PACH IMADS ied obe pipi ii sies 204 Pateh DAME laica 215 Patches auto COD ia iii 211 A A tes Modan ase cebat tL tee Nereis 2 Pr ALO es 269 PCrDISEtOFLOTIG is 269 PCY MAINS ti ias 264 PG ECHO CAOS da 261 PO Five Band BO sso ceda 267 ld6npirapum eee 268 PG Music Inc a Ie m T I ODD 285 PG PedEDTIIILD oett eO tat obe E RR amt 262 PG Real Time Analyzer 291 Mano mastetfll 2 sedis E antes 271 DOLIO rca ii 26
81. e g C indicates a C chord that is a Rest A chord can be specified as a Shot by adding two periods after the chord e g C indicates a C chord that is a Shot A chord can be specified as a Held Chord by adding three periods after the chord e g C indicates a C chord that is a Held Chord Pushes C 8th push AAC 16th push Note Pushes Shots Rests Hold Chords can ONLY be entered in the Chords Window Part Markers If you click directly on a bar number the number will change into a Part Marker There are two kinds of part markers an a part marker blue ES and a b part marker ereen al The part markers choose one of the two substyles available for BB Tracks arrangements In general these substyles correspond to the a and b sections of a song Clicking once on the bar number that currently has no part marker will set the bar to a part marker Clicking again will set it to a b part marker Clicking again would set the bar so it would be back to having no part marker The Chords window allows you to toggle the part marker type for a measure during playback This can be done the usual way which 1s to click on the measure number with the mouse In addition you can also toggle a part marker for the current measure by pressing the M key on your keyboard when the Chords window is the currently active window and when not already in the middle of entering a chord within the Chords w
82. existing tracks down in the Tracks view by one row For example say you want to insert a blank track at Track 2 By using this command the existing track at track 2 will become track 3 and the track that was previously track 3 will become track 4 To undo this procedure you could use the Remove command to remove the track previously inserted Remove Track This command removes deletes the Current Track and moves higher numbered tracks up by 1 row in the Tracks window If you want to delete track number 3 with this command Track 4 will become track 3 and track 5 will become track 4 etc This command can t be undone later but you could move the remaining tracks back to their original locations by using the Insert Blank Track feature Swap Tracks r This command lets you easily swap two tracks This will switch their positions track number on the Tracks window To swap track 2 with track 4 enter 2 in the Swap Track field and enter 4 Swap Track in the With Track field and the two tracks will trade places With Track 2 Swap Tracks 204 Chapter 13 Reference Save Track to File This command lets you save the Current Track as a file If the track is an audio track this will export it to a WAV file If the track is a MIDI track you can save it either to a SEQ MID or Type 0 MID file Drum Patch Map This feature provides the ability to load a Drum Patch Map file that is customized to your MIDI sound source
83. fastest method but with the lowest quality May sound best on simple tracks 2BAND SUM Fast with better quality than IBAND SUM May sound best on simple tracks Chapter 13 Reference 223 4BAND SUM Fast with better quality than 2BAND SUM Good for simple tracks or mixes 8BAND SUM This is the best sounding fast method likely to sound good on either simple tracks or mixes 2BAND AUTOCORR Noticeably slower than the above methods It may sound much better than 8BAND SUM on simple tracks but it probably will not sound better than SBAND SUM on mixes 3BAND AUTOCORR Even slower may sound much better on simple tracks but it may not sound better than 8BAND_ SUM on mixes 4BAND AUTOCORR Same speed as SBANDSUM HYBRID but may sound better than 8BANDSUM HYBRID on simple tracks SBANDSUM HYBRID Same speed as 4BAND AUTOCORR If processing speed is not an issue 8BANDSUM HYBRID is likely to be the best choice for full mixes It uses AUTOCORR on low audio bands and SUM on the high audio bands W Unassigned Output Ports work As Subgroup when the Unassigned Output Ports Work As Subgroups checkbox is enabled in the Audio dialog any audio output ports that do not currently have a driver port assigned to them will function as subgroups A subgroup is a bus or signal path that gives you the ability to control several tracks as a group W Mona Tracks can use effects in stereo mode The Mono Tracks can use effects in Stereo mode
84. generate tracks in any of the Band in a Box styles that you have installed on your computer RealBand also lets you generate selected sections of tracks and regenerate either complete tracks or selected parts as often as you want to and with any style you want to use This means that your BB Tracks can be assembled from any number of different styles to add variety and fine tune the arrangement Creating a New Song Arrangement To generate a new song arrangement you begin by typing the chords into the Chords window using standard chord symbols This window opens with the C7 button the hot key combination Ctrl 3 or the menu command Window Chords Band in a Box users will feel right at home Fj Chords Ctrl 3 You ll see the bars of the song displayed in rows If a bar contains chord symbols they will be displayed to the right of the bar number Enter the chords for your song by typing them in using standard chord symbols such as C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13 9 E For example type c6 to get the C6 chord Note that you should never have to use the Shift key as RealBand will sort this out for you Use b for a flat e g Bb7 Use or 3 for a sharp e g F 7 1s the uppercase symbol of 3 so you can actually type F37 to get F 7 RealBand will sort out the case saving you the effort of using lt SHIFT gt 3 to type the symbol Use for Slash Chords with alternate Roots such as C7 E C7 with E bass Use a comma to enter 2
85. in the Print Options dialog of the Notation window The Bars Per Line setting determines how many measures are drawn on each line of the lead sheet in 4 4 If the Bars Per Line is set to 4 you will get 8 measures per line if the time signature is 2 4 Note This setting is the same setting as found in the Print Options dialog of the Notation window The First Bar is Lead In setting causes the program to display an extra bar of music on the first line of the first page displayed Use this setting in combination with the Bar Offset setting if the song has a lead in This setting is the same setting as found in the Print Options dialog of the Notation window The Resolution setting determines the resolution of each beat Normally you ll keep this set to either 4 sixteenth notes or 3 triplets In the Notation window you can select micro resolutions for each individual beat When the Chord Symbols checkbox is checked the program will show the chord symbols of the song if there are any This setting 1s the same setting as found in the Print Options dialog of the Notation window When Chords Above Each Track is checked the chord symbols if present will be seen above each track This is helpful for following the chord changes on tracks farther down the screen but it makes the overall appearance of the window busier If left unchecked chords will only show above the top track The Bar Offset sett
86. interface MIDI synthesizer or PC sound card Digital audio system 16 bit Windows compatible sound card Headphones or amplified speaker system Installing the Program Use any of the three methods described SETUP EXE will copy all of the program files to your RealBand folder usually C RealBand and install icons to a RealBand program group Click on the RealBand icon or run RealBand exe to open the program and configure the setup Method 1 Auto Run 1 Insert the program CD ROM into the CD drive 2 Inafew seconds a browser window will open listing the CD contents 3 Double click on SETUP EXE to run the installation program Method 2 My Computer 1 Insert the program CD ROM into the CD drive 2 Access your CD ROM drive from the Windows desktop by double clicking on the My Computer icon 3 Then double click on the CD ROM drive icon and double click again on the SETUP EXE program found in the root or main folder of the CD ROM Method 3 Start Menu l Insert the program CD ROM into the CD drive 2 Fromthe Windows Start button select Run 3 Type D SETUP in the Open command line box If your CD ROM drive uses another drive letter type the appropriate letter e g E SETUP 4 Ifyou don t know the drive letter for your CD ROM you can use the Browse button to find it When installation completes you can select the option to Launch RealBand and continue with configuring it to run on your c
87. is centered and often snare Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 279 drum is centered However most accompaniment instrumental tracks and backup harmony vocals are side panned louder on one side than the other On typical recordings we can subtract one stereo channel from the other which removes common mode lead vocal but leaves side panned accompaniment tracks relatively unaffected Simple subtraction will also cancel center panned bass kick drum and snare or other center panned instruments Therefore we only subtract the midband where the vocal resides Even when lead vocal is center panned vocal reverb is typically in stereo If a song has loud stereo reverb the stereo vocal reverb is unaffected by the Vocal Remover The Reduce Reverb feature can reduce the level of the side panned tracks when the center vocal is loud Some vocal reverb leakage may not be a bad thing on a sing along track When you sing along the original reverb ambience could make you sound better Source Recordings PG Vocal Remover works best on wave files extracted from well made commercial audio CD s which usually have good fidelity and low distortion But it works fine on many MP3 or WMA files as long as the file is encoded in stereo It works best with high quality recordings Of course an MP3 or WMA file must be converted when loading into RealBand NOTE This plug in MUST be applied to the insert of a RealBand stereo track It doesn t w
88. is not in the default 4 4 time signature set the Time Signature very early before you do anything else Bad Initial Tempo Estimates Double Half Tempo Sometimes Audio Chord Wizard will guess double or half of the tempo you might prefer 150 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Slightly Wrong Sometimes syncopated songs can have musical anticipations which make ACW guess a tempo slightly too fast or slightly too slow Completely Horribly Wrong Some songs have rhythms difficult for a computer to understand Sometimes a song s rhythmic beats are spaced in such a way that a song with a perfect Tempo of 120 might mathematically BETTER fit the audio beats at some simple but wrong related ratio such as 80 100 160 or 180 BPM If the initial Tempo Estimate is pretty good the Tap Bar line function will be the easiest way to fix such errors requiring only a few keyboard taps during playback But if the initial tempo estimate happens to be horribly wrong it helps to make the initial tempo in the ballpark BEFORE you tap a few F8 s to make it completely right Tap Barline FSI Time Sia 4 li 4 l Ayo Tempo MARENN Find the Next Good Faster Tempo Playback Lags Behind BarLines IE Find the Next Good Slower Tempo Playback Drifts Ahead of BarLines Find Best Double Tempo Quarter Notes are Displayed as Eighth Notes Find Best Half Tempo Quarter Notes are Displayed as Half Notes Tempo Tracking Range d p mer f
89. l l You also have the option of using a metronome to count you in and keep time during the recording using the settings that you choose under the Metronome tab in the Preferences Note During recording you could follow along with the chord changes in the Chords window or with a notation part in either the Notation or Lead Sheet windows 30 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand When you ve finished recording press the stop button on the toolbar RealBand will prompt you to either keep or discard the take You can keep recording as many audio tracks as you want up to the limit of the 48 available tracks in RealBand Here s the Tracks window showing an overview of our first recording on track 10 and a second audio recording on track 11 Live audio recording Genenc Audio AUD Qut StO 0 1 Wave ave Audio Stereo was specified as the track type for track 10 in the right click Track window menu but you ll notice that Track 11 is a mono audio track That is because we did not specify any audio settings for this track and RealBand automatically applied the default audio settings If you change your mind about an audio take you can use the Edit Undo Keep Take menu command to clear it Or if you want to remove it at a later session use the Track Erase command Adding RealTracks Another way to add live instrumental audio tracks is with RealTracks To start right click on any blank track in
90. lets you use a more advanced custom file dialog Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 53 This dialog lets you choose a font and it will remember the dialog s window size and placement along with the currently selected font It also has a tree button that lets you view the directory structure and a button that lets you chose between details mode and list mode RealBand will remember these settings the next time you load or save a file using the custom file dialog AGE 22 vel oki Sr al lots Harmony H le said sed a impromtu seq le javsblue seq as Listen 4 part harmony SEL f Listen Pitch Tracking SEG Ex listen MID les melanbab seq as minitwlz seq el TempHarmony5174 M10 16 File Name SEO 164 Template New File With Fieverb SEQ MIDS SEU T RAR E WAN MP Cancel F The font selection button lets you use any font on your system for the file dialog in your choice of font size and style The find button in the custom Open dialog lets you search for a file within the current folder useful when a folder has many files The favorite folders button in the custom Open dialog will let you quickly change the current folder by selecting from a list of favorite folders RealBand will remember up to 25 folders from which you had previously loaded files You can quickly select a folder and instantly go there without having to navigate through the Windows tree structure Let s load in the demo song
91. longer than the note s original duration If a note has a duration of 200 for example the program will randomly alter it so that its new velocity is somewhere between 180 and 220 If this setting is set to 0 the note durations won t be altered at all This feature is often used to randomly adjust the durations for tracks that were either step recorded or ones that were manually entered into the Notation window Rechannel All Tracks Note This command is for MIDI tracks only This command has no effect on audio tracks This command will rechannel all the events in ALL the tracks to the forced MIDI channel in the Ch field of the Classic Tracks window Any track that has 0 as the forced channel won t be affected Make sure you don t execute this command if multi channel tracks such as guitar tracks have forced channels This would cause you to lose the multi channel information Note Rechanneling of all tracks used to automatically be done when saving to a MID file but this has been eliminated because it destroyed the string separation of multi channel guitar tracks Use this command as a quick way to rechannel the data in all the tracks before saving to a MID file 196 Chapter 13 Reference Insert Blank Bars Command The new Edit Insert Blank Bars into song command makes it easy to insert blank bars into the song with an option to intelligently adjust MIDI notes that are close to the boundary of the section you a
92. match the audio file format of the current song Note If you load a SEQ with both MIDI and audio tracks check that both files have matching track types in order to ensure that all the data will be pasted into the song when you use the Edit Paste command If the existing song contains some blank tracks then RealBand will automatically set the track types to the correct track type This won t be done until you use the Edit Paste command if the scrap buffer contains data and if the corresponding tracks in the project are blank but aren t already set to the correct track type Save Scrap This command works like the Save As command but is also used to save only the contents of the scrap buffer to a separate MID or SEQ file This is useful for exporting part of a project for use in another program etc Wave Files Submenu Wave file commands are now found in the Audio menu When this menu item 1s selected the Audio menu opens Remap to KAR Karaoke Format This dialog will pop up when attempting to save a MID or SEQ file as a KAR file or if you select the Remap to KAR Format command Convert Tracks to Karaoke File KAR Karaoke Files KAR files are Standard MIDI files that use specific track numbers for lyrics melodies and instruments This dialog will re assign tracks in your MIDI file to conform to the Karaoke Standard HOTE Can t be undone later Existing track to Karaoke Standard map to track 1 non
93. meaningful when metering a stereo track or Aux Master inserts which are almost always stereo The Channel View setting has no effect on a mono track If metering a stereo insert select the Left Right button to view the summed frequency response of both the Left and Right channels Select the Left or Right buttons to view only one of the channels Zoom In Out Adjust the vertical amplitude resolution in dB If a track has wide dynamics zoom out to see all the bands without scrolling If zoomed out too far 1t can be difficult to visually judge frequency levels All the bands may appear about the same level Zoom In to see the best amplitude resolution For instance in the screenshot above the display was zoomed to 3 dB per ruler line which emphasizes the differences between loud and quiet frequency bands View Range Scroll Adjust the Scrollbar to center the display to taste When zoomed in on a quiet track as in the screenshot above you would scroll down to get a good view of the frequency distribution PG Vinyl Tool PG Vinyl Tool can improve vinyl recordings Vinyl discs can have many troubles depending on their condition Some records may be severely damaged whereas others may only have a few occasional crackles Though PG Vinyl Tool has many processing sections 1t will not be necessary to use every section on every record We can t really offer meaningful presets because each record you process will be a little different
94. measure higher than low 272 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins frequencies you should rest your ears and then re evaluate the mix If the mix has a positive slope it is almost certainly brighter than any musical genre Enable PG Realtime Analyzer Select Channels Frequency Resolution Help Frequency Hes Yon Channel View W Enable Plugin Octave le Third Octave e Lett Aight Lett Right L Fi M a A ae ri e BT x ra a i i P Fl KL F Amplitude dB Frequency Hz View Range Scroll Zoom In Zoom Out Rhythm n Blues tends to be bass heavy Most R amp B tunes have an overall negative slope with the high frequency bands quieter than the low frequency bands If you mix an R amp B tune with a straight horizontal line frequency distribution it is probably too bright for the R amp B genre Classical music tends to be even darker than R amp B except for low bass frequencies Techno and Dance music is often very bass heavy Jazz is typically pretty mellow with low frequencies louder than high frequencies but not necessarily a lot of very low bass Country music often has rolled off low bass Many country tunes use bright bass and bright kick drum so that the bass is not as deep sounding as R amp B or Dance styles Some people have to work very hard to get a good mix while others almost effortlessly find the proper combination An RTA doesn t turn mixing into a paint by n
95. octave Velocity the speed that the key was pressed Duration the length of the note Controller Change events consist of 2 parameters Controller number a number ranging from 0 to 127 Controller value a number ranging from 0 to 127 Program Change events consist of 1 parameter Program number a number ranging from 0 to 127 or 1 to 128 The range depends on which patch list is currently selected or which numeric range is selected if you are using the Numeric patch list See also the Patch Names command in the Options menu for more information about patch lists Pitch Bend wheel events consist of 1 parameter Bend level a number ranging from 8192 to 8192 with 0 representing the wheel in the center position Channel Aftertouch events consist of 1 parameter Aftertouch level a number ranging from 0 to 127 Key Aftertouch events consist of 2 parameters Note string the note which the aftertouch will affect Aftertouch level a number ranging from 0 to 127 Lyric events can be entered and edited in the Event List Lyrics that are entered in track in the Notation window will appear in the Event List for that track Notation Window The Notation window displays the notes of a MIDI track on a staff and lets you print music on your printer The Notation window can also display chord symbols and lyrics There are three notation modes each mode opens with its own button on the tool bar From left to right the buttons
96. of an individual frequency band is very light this plug in can be made even more efficient by un checking frequency bands that are not needed For instance if a track only needs adjustment in the 250 and 500 Hz frequency bands you could disable the other bands on that track Reducing the processor load can make it possible to run more simultaneous real time plug ins within RealBand When a band is disabled the band is bypassed and receives no boost or cut Bypassed bands have a flat frequency response as if the slider was in the center position This feature can also be used to help audition an EQ setting If you are not sure that a certain band s setting is making the sound better or worse listen to the tune while toggling the band in and out This is easier than constantly moving the slider to judge the effect of a setting Enable All button enables all the bands Disable All button disables all the bands If you only want to enable one or two bands it is quicker to Disable All and then enable the bands desired rather than to uncheck all the unwanted bands Set Flat button returns all the sliders to the center position Note It usually makes no sense to use PG Ten Band EQ by itself in an Aux Return though EQ can be useful to tailor some other effect that is chained on the Aux Return such as Delay or Reverb PG Five Band EQ PG Five Band EQ is a convenient simple effect for overall tone shaping If a track requires fin
97. on a mic input or have an acoustic guitar or a guitar with dead strings With dead strings or some acoustic guitars the ear can reconcile the out of tune harmonics in the string better than the Tuner program These tones are basically very accurate but remember that the final accuracy depends upon the accuracy of the sample clock in your sound card The cards we have tested seem to be within a couple of cents of standard tuning but larger errors are possible with some sound cards Wave Shape Sine wave is a very pure wave which only contains the listed fundamental frequency Complex is a filtered ramp wave which contains the fundamental tone plus a healthy dose of even and odd harmonics The complex wave may be easier to tune against since guitars and other instruments usually have a broad mix of harmonics Complex wave may also be less tiring to the ear In the low bass range the sine wave can be difficult to hear unless you have a very good set of monitor speakers Cents Fine adjust the pitch in cents hundredths of a semitone Level The output level measured in dB Zero dB is as loud as it gets and negative numbers reduce the level Frequency A read only indication of the frequency of the tone As you adjust Note Octave and Cents Frequency is calculated from the current settings 170 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Generate Tones Wave Shape Sine Cents n Frequency f Complex Level 3
98. only button instructs the program to analyze your sound card and apply the optimal values for your system if you are using the standard MME audio drivers These settings normally don t need to be changed Project Recording Options General 2 Audio iie 4 Big Lyrics Window 5 Notation 6 MIDI Audio File Type Audio Driver Type 16 Bit 44 1 JASIO Enable Input Monitoring 4510 Only DMA Size MME only NN NUM Allow IM effects recording ASIO only DMA Offset MME only o Default MME only Reset Realtime Effects Use 16 bit 10 for higher bit res file types MIME only Offset In HS 0 Track Buffer Size 65536 Output Buffer Millseconds MME only 2000 Input Buffer Seconds MME only 1 Input Channel for MONO Tracks Lett Butter Size for Edit 5 ave 512 Bytes Audio Temp Directory ID DOCUME 1 PGMUSICXNLOCALS A Temps Browse W Full Duplex Record Play at same time Quick Volume Change i Advanced MIDI to Audio Sync MME only Realtime Effects Enabled Audio 10 Thread MME only Main Thread M Always record audio taa if current track is MIDI iw Backup most recent audio take Speed Change Quality ITIMESTRETEH Q UALITY_4BAND_ SUM m O Unassigned Output Ports Work As Subgroups Mono Tracks can use effects in Stereo mode Soft Synth Latency Adjust Recording Offset MS MME Only 0 The options you may need to manually adjust in this dialog are 12 1 2 3
99. or decreased chromatically as you move it up down the screen Entering Notes Notes can be inserted simply by clicking on the staff in an appropriate location You will see the name and octave of the current note location in a box at the top of the window This helps if you are inserting a note above or below the grand staff You can also insert notes via the Piano or Guitar window as discussed later in this section When inserting a note holding down the mouse button and then pressing the Shift key click Shift will make the note half step sharper than the position that you click on Holding down the Ctrl key and then clicking Ctrl click will make the note 1 half step flatter and holding down the Alt key will make the note a natural Hold the key down until after you release the mouse button You can also insert notes by clicking on the Piano or the Guitar window If you click on the Piano or Guitar window notes will be inserted into any open Notation window at the current location in the Notation window For example if you click on middle C of the Piano keyboard a middle C will be inserted into the Notation window There is a 1 peg hot key in the Notation window to move current time forward or backward by 1 peg normally a 16th note Alt left arrow moves the current time backward by 1 peg Alt right arrow moves it forward by 1 peg This makes it easier if you are using the on screen piano for entering notes into the Notation window No
100. or mixes 8 BAND SUM This is the best sounding Fast method likely to sound good on either simple tracks or mixes 2 BAND AUTOCORR Noticeably slower than the above methods It may sound much better than SBAND SUM on simple tracks but it probably will not sound better than SBBAND SUM on mixes Chapter 8 Audio Production 107 3 BAND AUTOCORR Even slower It may sound much better than the above on simple tracks but it may not sound better than 8BAND SUM on mixes 4 BAND AUTOCORR This method is slow about the same speed as 8 BANDSUM HYBRID It may sound better than 8 BANDSUM_ HYBRID on simple tracks 8 BANDSUM HYBRID This method is about the same speed as 4 BAND AUTOCORR If processing speed is not an issue 8 BANDSUM_ HYBRID is likely to be the best choice for full mixes It uses AUTOCORR on low audio bands and SUM on the high audio bands Saving Audio Files RealBand files are saved in the SEQ sequence file format which can include both audio and MIDI tracks in the same file So you could import a Band in a Box MIDI file into RealBand and then record live parts along with the Band in a Box accompaniment Auto Backup of SEQ Files When you save a file RealBand now saves a backup of the file in a c RealBand RBBACKUP folder This doesn t add any time to the file save command and the number of backups is configurable So the next time that you mistakenly overwrite a file when saving go the backup folder to look for a saved pr
101. patch As another example if you select the General MIDI 2 patch name list when you select a patch for Track 2 the program will remember this selection the next time you decide to select a patch for Track 2 The Patch Name list information is saved in RealBand s SEQ files The Numeric setting allows you to select patches as numbers rather than from a named patch list When the Numeric setting is used numbers will always be used for all tracks when selecting a patch The Numeric Range setting dialog also offers the ability to choose whether the numbers should range from 0 127 or 1 128 in order to accommodate both numbering conventions used with different synths This setting has no effect when a named patch list is used If you re using a named patch list the number range is based on whether the first name in the list was assigned a value of 0 or 1 in the PATCHES INI file PATCHES INI is a text file that resides in the RealBand folder It defines a named list of synth specific patches You could add a new named patch list specific to your synth by entering the names into the PATCHES INI file This file also has instructions for creating a new patch map 216 Chapter 13 Reference Punch In When the Punch In feature is enabled recording takes place between the From and Thru settings and will overwrite existing events in the specified section When Punch In 1s disabled recording may occur at any time within the song and the data w
102. position marker e g 1 3 5 7 9 etc The Insert Position button causes the currently selected position to be embedded into the track at the Now location When you play back a track with embedded position information the guitar position will correspondingly change when the position event is encountered A position event is stored in the track as a MIDI Controller parameter number 84 with a value ranging from 0 24 indicating positions 0 24 A controller 84 value of 127 indicates the All position The ability to insert position information into a track is especially useful for properly displaying a track that was recorded by a MIDI guitar controller with all six strings set to transmit over one channel By manually inserting this position information you can coax the guitar fretboard into displaying the notes in the position they were originally played instead of having them display in all possible positions Try recording guitar music on a MIDI piano keyboard then insert the appropriate position information into the track and watch the virtual guitar display the notes as if they had been played on a guitar 252 Chapter 13 Reference Of course the best way to record guitar music is with an actual MIDI Guitar Controller set to transmit over 6 separate MIDI channels e g 11 16 The Note Indicator is a white square located to the right of the Insert Position button When you pass the mouse cursor over the guitar fretbo
103. press OK the program will compress the file If you select an MPEG layer 3 format RealBand will save the file with an MP3 extension instead of WAV This format requires that your system have an MP3 compression codec installed Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to WMA File This command works the same as the Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File command except that this will compress the file When you execute this command RealBand first generates a temporary stereo PCM file a dialog will pop up which will let you save to a WMA file Windows Media Audio Chapter 8 Audio Production 109 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing Notation Overview A The Notation window displays the notes of a MIDI track on a staff and lets you print music on your printer Open the Notation window with the eighth note button with the Window New Notation menu option or with the keystrokes Alt F2 Notation Window Tool Bar Notation Track 1 port rl CS PA PA TS Opens the Notation Window Options dialog where user settings and preferences are made Launches the Print Options dialog to print music Opens the Standard notation mode window Opens the Editable notation mode window AA Opens the Staff Roll notation mode window Enables Chord Entry mode to type chords in the notation x mel Name of the current note or the note that will be entered Clean The Clean checkbox put the standard notation into Clean Mode
104. racks View uel teme oey ve e e feankjestloo Evente il e FP Bass BB 40 Synth Bass 2 O Drums BB 1 Acoustic Grand Plano O Piano BE b Chorused Piano O Guitar BB 25 121 strings BB 25 Acoustic Guitar nylonO Melody BE 25 121 The menu command Window Show Tools Panel gives quick access to the basic File menu and Edit menu commands The Icon Row Em 5 a fx RE e P x Fj Chords EJE Fl Tempo SG Fl Sysex EJIIEd E Classic e olx El Mixer EJIIF3 iid Comme EJE Guitar EJE l ee ajax There is a row of icons at the bottom of the main screen window They give quick access to the most commonly used windows and when you minimize any window it appears in the icon row which makes it easy to restore when you want to work in that window again Double click on the icon or use the standard Windows buttons to open a window from the icon row Chapter 4 The Main Screen 49 Other Plug Ins and Utilities RealBand includes many more powerful and helpful utilities that are launched by their own toolbar buttons 50 In Plugin Mode audio or MIDI content can be dragged and dropped to other DA Ws The Plugins button opens the Direct VST window where DX and VST plug ins are assigned Open the control panel for your current DXi of VSTi softsynth with the Synths button The Metronome button opens the programmable metronome for playback and or recording Launch the Audio Chord Wizard to automatically fi
105. recorded data in the Punch In range field without the need for you to erase the old data 206 Chapter 13 Reference When recording WAV audio tracks the recording always overwrites any existing data even if you re not punching in In other words audio recording works like a tape recorder If you want to ADD to a track without overwriting the old existing track simply select and use a new blank track before recording additional material Recording onto a MIDI track won t overwrite any existing data unless Punch In mode is enabled Each column in the mixer represents a track and if the track is a MIDI track then any adjustments made in that column will result in a MIDI controller message mixer move being generated based on the forced MIDI channel of that particular track If there 1s no forced channel for the track the channel of the first MIDI event will be used If there are no events or a forced channel the actual track number will be used See the Window Menu section later in this chapter for further information on the Mixer window If a selected track is a MIDI track and you also make mixer adjustments during recording then you will be prompted as to whether or not you wish to keep the recorded moves at the end of the take Record From Start This command will automatically start recording from the beginning of a song Step Record The Step Record feature allows you to record MIDI data one step at a time as opposed to a regular rea
106. routed to a DXi synth The MIDI Input Driver is the port that your MIDI controller for example a MIDI keyboard or MIDI guitar controller is attached to The MIDI Output Driver selection is the port that your MIDI synthesizer e g Sound Canvas or an internal sound card DXi or VSTi synth is connected to Note This is a straightforward procedure and you should encounter no difficulties selecting a MIDI driver However if you do experience any difficulties selecting a MIDI driver or you do not see your sound card s internal synth or MIDI interface listed in the MIDI Driver Setup dialog you may not have the appropriate MIDI drivers installed or configured in your Windows System Software Synthesizers RealBand supports both DirectX DX1 and VSTi software synthesizers which allow RealBand to play high quality sounds directly through your computer sound card without requiring any external MIDI hardware DXi Synthesizer Support To use DXi DirectX instrument synthesizers with RealBand you can think of the DXi as a type of MIDI Output Driver As such you can either visit the MIDI Driver Setup dialog Options MIDI Devices and select the Re Route MIDI Playback to Default DXi Synth checkbox to send all MIDI playback to the default DXi synth or you can assign DXi synths to individual tracks in the Tracks window Routing to Default DXi Synth The Default DXi Synth combo box lets you select which DXi or VST1 s
107. s overall size will be determined by the amount of Visible Lines Per Screen as well as the height of the Chords window New line for every section part marker inserts a line between each section of the song based on the a and b part markers When this feature is used each section starts on a new line similar to paragraphs in a book making the chords easier to follow Extra space between sections pixels sets the width of the line between sections between 0 and 100 pixels The Auto Interpret Chords setting 1s useful in a situation where a file is loaded but the file doesn t already contain any chord symbols If you set this to Always then RealBand will always attempt to automatically interpret the chord symbols using the Chord Wizard If set to Ask First then RealBand will ask before attempting to automatically interpret chord symbols If set to Never then RealBand will just load the file without attempting to figure out the Chord Symbols This button launches the Audio Chord Wizard where you can automatically figure out the chords from audio files WAV MP3 WMA SEQ and write them to the Chord window If you hold the Ctrl key and press the Endless Loop button on the toolbar RealBand will play the highlighted section in an endless loop If no section 1s highlighted then the entire song will be looped S En If you click directly on a bar number the number will change into a Part Marker
108. set to All this item will select all graphic events of the current view edit type on all channels Otherwise all graphic events of the current view edit type that match the current MIDI channel are selected For instance you could select all channel 4 modulation events then Delete to easily remove all of those events from the Track Cut Copy selected events to the clipboard and then remove them from the track If you wish it is possible to Cut from the Piano Roll and then Paste into the Notation window or vice versa Copy Copy selected events to the clipboard If you wish it is possible to Copy from the Piano Roll and then Paste into the Notation window or vice versa Paste Replace If no events are on the clipboard this item 1s dimmed The Paste occurs at the time location of your right click Move the mouse cursor to the desired insert location Right click on the Note Panel the Graphic Event Panel or any of the Rulers Then choose this item from the popup menu Any previous event types in the paste range which match event types in the clipboard are removed before the clipboard data is added to the track If the Chan combo box is set to All pasted events keep their original copied MIDI channel Otherwise the pasted events will be re channeled to match the Chan combo box Paste Merge If no events are on the clipboard this item 1s dimmed The Paste occurs at the time location of your right click Move the mo
109. size you choose Chapter 13 Reference 207 Auto Advance When the Auto Advance setting 1s checked the time will automatically advance to the next step after you play each note or achord You will see the Now and Time fields on the tool bar change accordingly as the time is advanced Dotted Step When Dotted Step is enabled the step size will be land 1 2 times the regular step size Example a dotted eighth note is equal to 3 sixteenth notes Go to Use the Go to key to conveniently move to a new location Backup and Advance The lt Back Up and Advance gt buttons allow you to move through your project forwards and backwards by one step at a time When you are finished with step record press the OK button The take will be automatically saved Pressing the Cancel button will cancel the step record without keeping the take Stop This command stops a sequence from playing or recording Test Audio Performance This command will test the performance of your computer and hard drive for recording digital audio tracks This feature will provide an estimate of the maximum number of 44 1 kHz tracks that the program can successfully play back Keep in mind that this is just a rough estimate the actual amount of tracks you can play back may be higher or lower than this estimate Power Tracks Pro Estimated Number of 44 1K Audio tracks For playback 48 Mote Estimated performance is For Mono tracks Moke iF your so
110. song title on the top of the first page of the song The Margins button lets you adjust the margins of the Lead Sheet window You can select the Staves per page and Font Size The bigger the font the fewer staves you ll be able to fit on each page If you select a higher number of staves than will fit with the current font size the Lead Sheet window will only display the maximum number of staves that will actually fit on the page Use the combo box to select from several presets Double Bar Lines Double bar lines supported in the Lead Sheet and for staff printout RealBand will automatically display double bar lines when a new part marker is reached Note the part markers are entered in the Chords Window RealBand will display a double fat bar line at the beginning of the 1 part marker except when the First Bar Is Lead in Checkbox 1s enabled in which case the double fat bar line will be displayed at the beginning of bar 2 RealBand will also display a double fat bar line at the end of the printout Double bar lines of normal thickness will be displayed at part marker section changes in the middle of a printout Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 127 Lead Sheet Window Track 3 DER Opt Print co Memo Copy Paste Song Lyrics to Lead Sheet Easily copy and paste lyrics from other applications to be appended to your lead sheet for display and printout with selectable font Lead Sheet Memo Extra vers
111. take precautions on the Mixer Output Watch the output meters and reduce the master if you see clipping or Insert PG Peak Limit on the Master Output to prevent output clipping Aux Return In most cases 1t makes no sense to insert PG Peak Limit on an Aux Return unless you wish to apply Peak Limit to other unruly effects that are chained up stream on the same Aux Return plug in group Track Insert PG Peak Limit can be used on a Track Insert as a quick and easy to adjust compressor smoothing a track s dynamic range PG Peak Limit may be helpful on tracks with inconsistent levels If inexpertly performed or recorded any track can have inconsistent levels PG Peak Limit is not a cure all for badly performed tracks It is much better to record a proper performance rather than apply a band aid to fix it in the mix However if you should become stuck trying to mix an impossibly inconsistent performance PG Peak Limit could help a bit PG Dynamics PG Dynamics Iw Enable Dynamics Left Gain Right Iw Expander Gate Mm Cip ml Threshold Ratio Iw Compressor Iw Auto Gain i Threshold Ratio Attack Release Output Gain PG Dynamics will apply compression expansion or a combination of the two Compressor A compressor squeezes the dynamics of a performance reducing the difference between loud and quiet passages Compression is used for leveling a performance If some sections of a performance are too loud and other sections
112. that point A typical click might last 0 5 to 2 milliseconds Each muted section is very short If Fill Gaps is set to zero this small muted region is replaced by nothing It behaves like a very brief mid frequency dropout On a clean record occasional muted clicks are never noticed But on a dirty scratched disc if many snips are made it can sound like a reduction in high and mid frequencies As you increase the Fill Gaps knob PG Vinyl Tool extrapolates the midrange signal in the vicinity of the click synthesizing a guess of what the signal might have been in the tiny muted region If you set Fill Gaps to 100 it will insert this extrapolated guess at the same level as the original signal This allows many clicks to be snipped from a dirty record without reducing the mid frequency content On many recordings the extrapolated guesses are quite good Frequent clicks can often be removed without audible side effects One might encounter a badly damaged record where the audio is so damaged that the guesses are not good enough to be completely transparent In these problem cases you could try setting Fill Gaps to 70 or 50 filling the gaps with lower amplitude guesses which may sound less obnoxious Set Fill Gaps to 100 unless it sounds bad Smoothing Some badly damaged records particularly worn out 45 s and 78 s have high frequency noise approaching crackle on steroids The surface noise sounds like bacon frying Crackle atop cr
113. the Audio Import Wave File command to insert the recorded audio onto a different track by importing the RBBAKx WAV file from the Temporary Audio Directory Setting Audio Levels 4m There are 2 pairs of VU meters one pair for audio input and one pair for audio output If you re size the VU Meters window vertically the height of the meters will expand or shrink to match the new window height The clipping indicator at the top of the meters indicates that clipping has occurred Try to keep the levels low enough so they re safely below 0 db and so that the clipping indicator doesn t light up To be on the safe side it s probably a good idea to adjust the levels so that the meters don t get close to 0 db even if the clipping indicator hasn t yet lit up I VU Meters Input be Output EH Cip EH EN Cip EH 1 ie The VU meters have an automatic peak hold feature with gradual peak fallback so it will be easy to see the transient peak levels if you ve got your eye on the meters For the Output you may have to adjust your mixer settings within RealBand to keep the levels within a reasonable range fi For the Input you may have to press the speaker button to launch the Windows Recording Control properties and adjust the input level Note The appearance of this window is different for different sound cards The example shown is for a typical Sound Blaster Audigy card In the example shown of the Recording properties
114. the Guitar window will display notes on the current highlighted track 1 e recorded MIDI data or the notes echoed out via the MIDI Thru port 1 e live MIDI Controller data Tip When the Multi Channel mode is enabled by default and the MIDI channel of a note is within the guitar channel range e g Channels 11 16 by default the program assumes that notes within the specified channel range fall on a particular string For example in this case a note on MIDI Channel 11 will be considered to be on String Number 1 A note won t be displayed at all if it is too high or too low for a particular string e g the E string The purpose of multi channel mode is so that when you play back a track that was recorded by a MIDI guitar controller in mono mode the notes will correctly display the notes in the virtual guitar If a given note s MIDI Channel falls outside the channel range e g Channel 9 the program will attempt to use the position information instead to display the note correctly The Base Channel determines the guitar channel range when in multi channel mode For example with a Base Channel of 1 the channel range will be 1 6 The highest possible base channel is 11 the default making the range 11 16 Guitar Settings Note Display Options Octave w Show Notes at amp eolian Position i Current Track Fretboard We MIDI Thru Iw Show Notes at Phrygian Position Hote Names Scale Tone W Multi C
115. the Notation Event list box Notation Event Lrescenda Event Type Decrescendo Staccato SLaccatissimo Regular Accent Legato Accent Length of Event o Beats 0 Ticks Offset valuez lower values higher Clef Treble Clef U mw Snap to notes toward beginning end of range Start Time 7 E 360 OF Insert Event Lancel Help OR Remove Event The Length of Event field determines the length of a slur crescendo or decrescendo The length 1s specified in beats and ticks Ifan event 1s a single peg event such as a staccato or accent then this field will cause multiple events to be inserted if the range is greater than zero and the range spans multiple pegs If you had highlighted an area of the Notation window prior to right clicking on 1t to launch the pop up menu and choose the notation symbols menu item then this field is set based on the length of the highlighted area Note The highlighted area does not actually include the very last peg at the very edge of the highlighted area The Clef field if present indicates the clef in which the event will be inserted or removed from Most events affect only one clef at a time and therefore you must choose the clef and this field will be preset based on where you had initially right clicked with the mouse on the Notation window you did this to get the pop up menu that launches this dialog For example if you had right clicked on the treble clef
116. the equivalent place in the bar immediately before the beginning of the target section so that the music stays in time and the next section begins at the end of the bar But you can change the default for the action to take place at the end of the current bar or current part marker etc Mode when to do the action for section ar qo back ahead f Default g C NOW and go to start NOW go to same rel pos Next BAR Hest PART MARKER Next CHORUS C Next SECTION Default Mode for section change Now and go to start Default Mode for going back or ahead Now and go to start Play Control Buttons Play F4 This plays the song Hot key F4 MIDI note F4 Stop Esc This stops playback Hot key Esc MIDI note F 4 Example uses of the Conductor In this example we don t have custom sections set so the default sections apply middle chorus section 4 etc Jump to the start of middle choruses during playback press 4 60 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features Loop the middle chorus press S which is Loop Section Jump to the end of the song press 6 Go back 1 chorus Ctrl A Go ahead 1 chorus Shift A At the end of the current chorus go back 1 section press Y then Ctrl S Note Pressing the Y sets the mode to do the action at the end of the current chorus These actions can also be done with the MIDI keyboard See the section on Conductor Functions with MIDI and QWERTY Hot Keys in the Wi
117. the files From i are preserved The Percentage setting determines how the velocity Thru values are changed For example a percentage setting of 100 results in no change while a percentage setting DE pss Help of 50 would reduce the velocity values by half A Canes Heb percentage parameter of 125 would increase the velocity values in the track by 25 When Normalize is checked the MIDI note velocities of the track being edited will be boosted by the difference between the highest velocity found in the track and 127 Note The MIDI Normalize works on each track independently This could potentially change the mix when multiple tracks are normalized For example if normalizing two tracks and one track generally had very low velocities but another had very high velocities then normalizing multiple tracks may boost the relative volume of the one that originally had low velocities The solution would be to reduce the volume of that track Velocity Dynamics This command will compress or expand the velocity values of notes within the marked area of all selected tracks The program will automatically determine the average velocity of all notes within a marked area 194 Chapter 13 Reference The Percentage setting will cause the velocity values to be moved either closer or farther away from the average velocity A percentage setting of 100 results in no change A percentage setting of 50 would compres
118. to scan for newly installed plug ins The Register a New Plug In button can be used to register a plug in with DirectX so that audio applications such as RealBand can use the plug in if you have a plug in that doesn t automatically register itself The Unregister a Plug In button removes a plug in from DirectX so that audio applications will no longer be able to use this plug in The Run DirectX Diagnostic Tool button will run the Microsoft Direct X Diagnostic tool which checks for problems with DirectX Select the Remove VST Plugin from list button to remove a VST plug in so that it is no longer included in the Plugin list in the DirectX VST Window Note VST VSTi plug ins are added manually to the Plugin list in the DirectX VST Window Once added a VST VSTi Track Settings The FX track insert button assigns effects to the specific track alone Up to four effects can be chained on the FX insert Each of the four Aux control knobs can be assigned to one of the eight auxiliary effects busses The position of the control knob determines the amount of the signal that 1s routed through the auxiliary bus and how much of the dry signal goes directly to the audio output bus Auxiliary Effects Busses Each of the eight Aux busses can have a chain of up to four real time effects These can be any DirectX or VST effects that you have installed on your system either the included PG Music effects or third par
119. track In other words the click track follows the pace of the free track rather than any internal metronome in the program itself When the Align command is executed the program will align the free time track so that the time locations of all the events will correspond to the beats in the human click track For example if the click track begins at time 0 a note on the free time track at the same location of the 4th click on the click track will be assigned a time of 1 04 000 after the command is executed RealBand will then make the necessary adjustments to the tempo of the aligned track so that the overall tempo is the same as the original tempo RealBand doesn t insert the tempo changes for every beat 1 e it makes the adjustments at the beginning of every bar so if the original music had a lot of little changes in tempo the resulting music may become more steady after the alignment is executed If any two clicks in the click track are separated by the current PPQ multiplied by 4 this will be treated as a rubato section as opposed to a clicked in section The most common occurrence for this is when there is a rubato section at the beginning of the song A rubato section is paired with the next clicked in section it will be given the tempo of the next clicked in section and the event times will be adjusted so that the music sounds identical to the original tempo of the rubato section A rubato section may also be slid forward to prevent an
120. track at a time You will be prompted to select a destination track The destination track must be empty Erase This command permanently erases all selected tracks and resets their track setup values to 0 You will be prompted as to whether or not you wish to erase all selected tracks This command can t be undone later Erase Data Only This feature works the same as the preceding Erase command except that it will not erase the parameter settings in the Tracks window such as the Track Name Channel Velocity etc Merge This feature will offer to merge two tracks of the same type e g MIDI together and place all the MIDI or WAV data found in both tracks onto a 3rd track Merge Track and with Track fields These settings contain the numbers of the two source tracks that are to be merged To Track field This setting specifies the number of the destination track in which the merged data from the source tracks will be placed Any blank track number from 1 to 48 is valid Convert Guitar Tracks This command will convert a single channel guitar track that contains position information in it into a multi channel guitar track i e MIDI Channels 11 16 The position information tells the Guitar window which position on the 202 Chapter 13 Reference fretboard to display the notes It consists of Controller Number 84 MIDI Events that have been inserted into the track in the Guitar window by pressing the in
121. tracks ci did 95 DIC os 96 Ul irc ERE 218 A aset eE TE MIXET MIO VES scii ba e E hs dg Hee Lee 78 OWE UI DS a cies cance tte IRR erus petant T PICA 78 216 Md Ga a T WAS MEOS ra iaa 96 Recording MID uan 76 Recording mixer MOVES occccccnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 78 E a 176 Registration Form 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 295 Remove Mack ette ied 203 tender MID gUG O o bote ds 99 Rendering MIDI to audio occccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 99 A O 19 o eee E 188 Resize Track Column oooocccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 258 R sol ti i 76 168 188 216 Right click MIDI menu occcccncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 62 65 A erate anew ee Teene ne were meer ete ene 247 Run DELE estadio nri tidie ticis 213 sale OO LUD s Goa dtes bet ette dantes etes ogee ia uen 14 Samp HN Tales oe esto t P ERRARE 12 SUONI 178 Save CA nee eee eee ren O 180 o ES ao ee aont A 229 selectable buffer size eet ert I ee 222 Settinps Tor DA m nte nom 74 A ME 75 volume CHANG CS i eee tote ER M UU 75 BEHIDa od eon EE EE E I 8 SMPTE A TY 217 231 Solo bass and AMS dd 57 SOLOING MACKS ue iones dto antt 57 DONO Id KOES rita ricotta 57 239 Split Pano Track si 202 Standard NOlAUOM ee aes 110 AA P 38 SIP Col COT acsi a 206 SLOP POCORN O eae 97 wobei 203 SUDO oic MIDI MO iE LI E 217 auto CASE oo edad svi n NERA IR RUNS 217 viUa NEM TNR 172 249 S SEN VOUS iod seite E eee ee a 78 249 SVSEX WIDOOW
122. type two chords into the current beat group For example if you type this c7 g7 without the quotes you ll see the text you re typing in the white rectangular panel on the toolbar If you then hit Enter you ll see the C7 and G7 chords appear within the current beat group and the input rectangle will automatically advance to the next beat group When you re in the middle of typing chord symbols you can use the Backspace key to correct a mistake The Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys let you move the input rectangle to a different beat group without entering chords You can also click the mouse on a different beat group to move the input rectangle to a new location If you ve attempted to enter chords within a beat group and you ve pressed enter and chords don t appear within that beat group this means that you have made a typing error and the text was not recognized You should then use the left arrow key to go back and try again It may be that the chord spelling is different than the spelling that RealBand recognizes for that chord Look in the list of chords for the spelling recognized by the program Tip You can have the Chord Wizard name chords for you Just record the chords on a blank track in RealBand then open the Chords window and have the Chord Wizard interpret them You can highlight a range of cells for editing by clicking inside of a bar and then dragging the mouse to the inside of another bar For example if you clic
123. using the audio driver If RealBand detects that ASIO4ALL isn t connected it will warn you about this so you are aware of why the audio is silent 16 Chapter 1 Welcome ASIO Audio Drivers Select one ASIO Device None gt 4510 Drivers Control Panel ASI04 LL v2 Rezampler L ualitu Good W ASIO Always On Input Port Output Fortis Mis L Analog O 1 Wave Wave 2 3 Mis L Min H 2 3 Front LA Front LA 4 5 Mis FL Mis FA 4 5 Rear L R Rear LA 6 7 Mis AL Wis RA 6 7 Center LFE Center LFE 8 3 Mis FE Mis LFE 8 9 Rear Center Rear Center 10 11 Mis AC Mix AC 10 11 Side L R Side LA 12 13 Mig SL Mix SH 12 13 FX Slot 1 L R Fx Slot 1 L R 14 15 SPDIF In L SPDIF In A 14 15 F Slot 2 L R Fs Slot 2 L R 15 17 Linen mic 2 L Line In Z Mic 2 A 15 17 Fx Slot 3 L R FX Slot 3 LA Show Warning for Untested Soundcard Formats Driver Infa name SB Audigy 4510 L800 version FO000000 2 input channels 22 output channels 0 allowed sample rates 22050 nao 44100 no 48000 lt pez gt 96000 no input data format Intl BLSB output data format Int ELSB buffer sizes in samples min 96 max 655536 pref 480 granularitp 4 actual ASIO buffer size in MS 10 actual ASIO sample rate used 48000 RESAMPLER IN USE Cancel Help Once you have selected an ASIO driver you will see the Input Port s and Output Port s list boxes filled with your driver s input a
124. will be overdubbed 1 e the existing MIDI notes will not be erased as the new ones are recorded This is sometimes useful but a better way to make overdubs 1s to select a blank track and give it the same settings as the track you want to overdub Then record the overdub part on the new track using as many tracks as you need for additional overdubs or layers This 1s a great way to overdub drum fills or layer string parts Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks 77 Then you can delete edit or re record each separate overdub without affecting the original track Use Track Merge to combine all of the overdubs onto a single track To clear any previously recorded material from a track go to Track Erase Data Only This will erase the recorded MIDI data on the track but will preserve all of the other track settings such as volume patch and channel Punch In JE The Punch In button allows you to enable or disable Punch In If Punch In mode is active recording will erase previously recorded MIDI data in the Punch In range without the need to erase the old MIDI data F Pressing the Ctrl key while clicking on the Punch button allows you to enable or disable punch in mode without having to go into Enabled the Punch In setting dialog Punch In When Punch In is enabled recording will take place during the period between From and Thru and will overwrite any existing events during that time Use Frome Thru from the main toolbar Use F
125. window left right scroll bar directly above to scroll horizontally across the mixer layout The vertical splitter bar between the track strips and the bus strips can be moved right or left to make a custom mixer view The Delete button in the mixer will automatically delete all mixer events volume reverb pan chorus that are currently embedded within the song s selected tracks The mixer s Insert button will automatically insert mixer events volume reverb pan chorus into the song s non blank tracks The Ctrl M and Ctrl U hot keys are a convenient way to mute or unmute any track within the Bars or Mixer window Mixer moves can be recorded as the song is playing There is a special Record Mixer Moves button in the mixer that will let you record ONLY mixer moves This special button also lets you record n mixer moves onto an audio track without the audio being silent during recording Note This mixer is a combination mixer that controls audio and MIDI data in one integrated console Therefore MIDI tracks have reverb chorus modulation and expression controls in place of the Aux sends and there is no FX button Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features 85 Creating Audio Subgroups in the Mixer Unassigned Outputs Work As Subgroups W Unassigned Output Ports werk As Subgroups When this checkbox is enabled in the Audio preferences dialog any audio output ports that do not currently have a driver port
126. wise to not use the highest PPQ settings Higher note resolution reduces the maximum allowed song length as well as reducing the maximum allowed note duration length At 3840 PPQ the maximum song length of a 4 4 song is around 35 minutes long at a tempo of 120 less at faster tempos Chapter 13 Reference 217 Sync Source termal This option determines which clock source will handle all the timing of the MIDI music MIDI Sync MTC SMPTE Internal When the sync source is set to internal the program will handle all timing The following two settings are also used when syncing to external devices MIDI Sync When the sync source is set to MIDI the program will use song position pointer SPP and MIDI clocks as the clock source MTC SMPTE When the Sync Source is set to MTC SMPTE the program will use MIDI Time code MTC as the clock source and display the time in SMPTE format If a song has WAV audio data the playback speed of the audio will not be varied freewheeled during playback even when clock syncing to an external device as described above If the external sync device being used varies you may find that the audio may eventually drift out of sync over time Y ou may also have to decrease the Output Buffer Seconds setting in the Options Preferences Audio Settings dialog if your computer is having trouble syncing correctly after playback has started If syncing to MIDI the program may not have enoug
127. you can share them with another program Selecting this command will automatically launch a Big Lyrics window for the current track and then copies the lyrics to the clipboard You can close the Big Lyrics window at any time after the lyrics have been copied to the clipboard If a Big Lyrics window is already open for a given track the program will use the existing window rather than launch a new one Align Music to Click Track This feature attempts to align a track of music that was recorded in free time to a click track It tries to take a free time track and make adjustments to the times of the events so that the music becomes a standard track that can be synced to a metronome For example suppose you have recorded Track 1 in free time You could then record enter a human click track on Track 2 To do this you would record or enter a middle C C5 note to your human click track at the location of each beat in the song It s easiest to record the click track from a MIDI keyboard but you can also record it from the Drum Kit window if you don t have a keyboard With the Drum Kit window open press the Record button and tap the left square bracket key on your keyboard on each beat in the song Or you could mouse click in time on the high bongo drum which is assigned to note C5 If the song speeds up and slows down you ll have to make sure the timing of the click track corresponds speeds up or slows down with the beats of the free time
128. you find that the screen redraws too slowly on your computer When in Editable Notation the spacing will not be drawn using engraver spacing There are now two Engraver Spacing settings Enabled and Enabled During Playback If the Enabled checkbox is checked then engraver spacing is enabled but won t be displayed during playback unless the Enabled During Playback checkbox is checked If the Enabled checkbox is unchecked then engraver spacing will be totally deactivated The Detect fine resolution notation setting will allow the Notation window in Standard Notation Mode non editable mode to detect micro resolutions automatically It will detect notes a short as 32nd notes in most situations When this setting is enabled the program will count the number of distinct chords or individual notes per beat and if there are more chords played in the beat than the current Resolution the program will display the beat at a high enough resolution to show all of them separately rather than lumped together For example if the Resolution 1s set to 3 and 4 chords were played on a beat the program will display 4 chords as 16th note chords for that beat even though the song s resolution is 3 The Use Ch 8 9 for Left Right Hand checkbox will cause the standard notation to display within reason notes on channel 8 on the bass clef and the notes on channel 9 on the treble clef Notes on channels other than 8 or 9 will
129. you ve just typed a chord symbol but haven t yet pressed enter or pressed the left arrow unless you want your input to go into another beat group The help topic Entering Chord Symbols has additional information and a list of the chord spellings that are recognized by RealBand The Chords Window topic explains how to enter breaks such as rests and pushes and how to copy chords Let s enter some chords in the chord sheet We ll put our highlight cell in the first beat group of bar and type the letters cm7 Press the Enter key and the chord symbol Cm7 is entered at the start of bar 1 Press the Enter key again and the highlight cell moves to bar 2 Type f7 for an F seventh chord and press Enter Now we ll use some chord shortcuts The letter J is the shortcut for a major seventh chord Type bbj and press Enter to write the chord symbol BbMaj7 on the chord sheet Move to the next bar and type ebj to write EbMaj7 in that bar Advance to the next bar and type the letters ah to write Am7b5 the h is for a half diminished chord In the next bar type df and the chord symbol D7b9 will be entered then enter gm for a G minor chord in bar 7 We ll stop there for purposes of this tutorial and here is what our Chord window looks like now f Chords Ctrl 3 Now we ll move on to the arranger toolbar to generate our RealBand song arrangement Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 25 Arranger settings
130. your synth or sound source each time the program is started Dump Request Macros A Dump Request Macro DRM allows you to initiate a data dump of your synth from the program instead of having to press buttons on your synth A DRM file contains the name of a synth names appear in a pick window when you select the Initiate Dump Request command and the appropriate packet of bytes can be sent to your synth which will instruct it to auto send a data dump When you use the Initiate Dump Request command RealBand reads the dump request macros from a binary file called RB INS The binary file RB INS is converted from a text file called RB DRM which contains the macro information in ASCII format If you have a synth that isn t listed in the RB DRM file it is possible for you to manually add your own macro for your synth These macros are derived from the System Exclusive Implementation information in your synthesizer manual Guitar Window The virtual guitar fretboard displays the notes of any track or group of MIDI channels The virtual Guitar window displays notes as green squares for fretted notes and blue squares for bends that are played in a selected track or by the MIDI Thru channel on the virtual guitar fretboard Chapter 13 Reference 251 Ti A LA al m J m j r E ae l im l l L r 1 y Y i 1 i p L Pad A A 4 I IIM yt I Y 1 po N I 0 Ct r J n Vs
131. 0 Piano Roll Window Overview The Piano Roll window enables precise graphic editing of note timing and duration You can also graphically edit Note Velocity Controllers Program Changes Channel Aftertouch or Pitch Bend There are 2 panes in the window one for notes and the other for controllers velocity and other data Track i v Snap rom Dur a Chan View Edit Velocity v I The Piano Roll may be opened as a movable window which floats above the main RealBand window or it may be opened embedded in the same position as the Chordsheet Notation panels in the RealBand main window Track Selection This is a window for editing notes and controllers on MIDI tracks Click on the drop down arrow to choose a track to view and edit Audio tracks are edited in the Audio Edit window but Audio Track Volume Pan and Aux Send automation can be edited in the lower Graphic Data panel of the Piano Roll window Snap to Grid Snap rouse Selections Inserted Notes or Edited Notes will snap to the grid spacing If beg you do not want snap to grid select NONE in the drop down menu O C 3 View Insert Channel Chan EN If a track contains multiple channels AII will display MIDI events on all channels Otherwise select the Channel which you need to see If AII is selected new MIDI events are inserted on the R
132. 1 PO RANG VIOQ a 270 PG Ten Band ED one an edam 266 PCrD CIBOIO eode e irati tea Eua RM rasta 2l PG Vinyl Tool recording teo e oo 213 PG Vocal Remover operating principle occcccccccncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 278 PEVELD TOdUCHOD ue eor Rab bee 279 PROI ne ERE UM anti 253 Piano keyboard ii iaa 44 Piano roll chord TUE oontra eM m HUM 132 controller CCI Corin ren mcis Coma tae RM detto 132 Cursor loca 132 A pte IMMER aS IMS 135 display controls coocococcccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 136 graphic editing ioo oboe ttr Dav ttes 132 graphic event edits oae be e ee esr 135 graphic event panel ooccccnnccccncnnccnccnccnnnnn n 134 graphic event selection cccccccccccccccccccninnno 134 MAA ettet isse MR ARRIUS 135 keyboard pitch panel ssssss 133 movable floating ssssssss 131 238 note CUERPO uen rea te Re ERE 132 A a a 133 A binos 133 o as eet wen ence RE 133 noten TUNEL is 132 playback location indicator 132 right click contextual menu 135 select channe la eost oen et 131 MANO cines 131 SA A IIRBISEUS 134 PA lao e 44 Pitch Transpose MIDI Music 190 Piteliztos MID eee ane tects ean s ae 159 A M Re LIE ee Pe eT LUE 159 rom ENDE 205 292 PLA SONOS ii eaters bete HEB va 57 Port MUD TRO Up x id a 258 PICICTCDOE S ere eR Om Orr ee nC rR 218
133. 1 03 1993 1 06 13 07 2008 12 05 23 01 2007 23 33 01 03 1993 1 06 01 05 1393 1 06 13 07 2008 11 53 13 07 2008 11 53 13 04 2004 15 11 File name Template Mew File with Reverb SEQ Jun Cancel Files of type MID SEQ 7377 KAR datado MPS WMA Sey CDA MIDS SEO GARA Wei MPS MA MVC CDA Band in a Box Songs 7G 7 Drum Pattern File DF Karaoke Files KAR You can selectively restrict the type of file you re looking for The File of type masks are as follows RealBand native files SEQ MIDI files MID Band in a Box songs G Drum Pattern files DP Karaoke file KAR or Wave audio files WAV as well as MP3 audio files MP3 provided the MP3 codec is present in your system WMA Windows Media Audio a compressed audio format developed by Microsoft WMV Windows Media Video is a compressed video format developed by Microsoft RealBand will load the audio from a WMV CDA CD Audio is the file extension used by Windows to make CD audio tracks available for loading into programs like RealBand Just put an audio CD into your CD ROM and then open a CDA file from that drive usually drive D Note This feature may not work unless running Windows XP or higher RealBand can also load most sizes and shapes of mono stereo or multitrack WAV files These are files that contain only WAV audio data When loading a WAV file the program will import the audio data to 1 or more individual tracks depending on
134. 100 the program will randomly move it anywhere between 2 01 095 and 2 01 102 If both the Min and the Max Start Time Offsets are set to 0 the notes won t be moved Randomize Min Start Time Offset hax Start Time Offset Vel Percentage Dur Percentage Use Data Filter tm aa Cancel Help When MS is selected instead of Ticks the min max start time offset in the Randomize command is Ms specified in milliseconds rather than ticks The MS offset will be rounded to the closest tick at the actual song PPQ which works excellent with higher song PPQ resolutions Note If the Ticks setting is enabled the ticks are actually based on a PPQ of 120 regardless of the current PPQ This is how Randomize has always worked The Vel Percentage setting determines the degree to which the program will randomly alter note velocities For example a setting of 10 will cause the program to randomly alter velocities anywhere from 10 lower or up to 10 higher than the note s original velocity If a note has a velocity of 100 for example the program will randomly alter it so that its new velocity is somewhere between 90 and 110 If this setting 1s set to O then the note velocities won t be altered at all The Dur Percentage setting determines the degree to which the program will randomly alter note durations For example a setting of 10 will cause the program to randomly alter durations anywhere from 10 shorter or up to 10
135. 2 1 e port 2 which is now called Subgroup 2 and you were to adjust the volume of Subgroup 2 in the mixer the same way you do for output ports this will affect the volume of all 3 tracks as a whole You could also add effects to the subgroup in the mixer the same way you do for output ports For example you could apply an EQ to the subgroup as a whole L E RL a R L E R Options Edit Bypass Plugin E Load Group Save Group Load Preset Save Preset Delete Preset The final output of the subgroup G2 is sent to the audio output port A1 Real Time Audio Effects Real time effects will let you add your favorite effects such as chorus reverb EQ etc at the same time that the audio tracks are played without permanently altering the actual track data You can apply real time DirectX and VST effects to the audio tracks Aux busses audio subgroups and audio output ports Track FX Inserts On the mixer there 1s an FX button at the top of each channel track strip of the mixer Press the FX button to bring up the DirectX VST Window and you can select edit a chain of up to four effects plug ins you wish to insert for just that particular track The Track field of the DirectX VST Window lets you choose a track in which to select or edit effects The Edit radio buttons let you chose which of the four effects to edit in the group of effects available in each Track DirectX VST Window In the illustratio
136. 38 6 52 Ph 7224 1998 6 52 Ph s 101 Riffs Triolnt E sc880usr pat liil c Bandstand Techr ic bb2005 155 bac c bb2005_backup 9 bb2006_backup 5 BGFAKE 5 Bluegrass Melodi ic BLUEJA ME c3 BLUEJAMF i EGSOLOS Sy CLASFAKE E Classical MIDI Fa CopyMe Duets for Sight A gt frail sc 8920 2 pat fea p El scene pat Ed sc8850_55 pat Ej sc8850_88 pat El cB050_8bpro pat Ej 208850 S850 cap to varl pat E sc8850_8850_varl9_up pat Ej 208850_userbank s pat E sc880880 pat E sd 0 pat E sAJY8001 PAT E SAJY8002 PAT I Tom ga asmogmgmom m I cm lt PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File PAT File i cm oru 6 15 2000 4 51 Pt 6 15 2000 4 43 Ft 6 4 2000 10 53 AF 6 4 2000 10 53 AF 6 4 2000 10 51 AF b 4 2000 11 34 AF 6 4 2000 11 36 AF 6 4 2000 11 08 AF 224 1998 8 52 Ph 11 15 2002 5 35 F 7 1 1886 8 00 AM 413936 8 00 AM ad 2S m m gt Filename sc8820 2 pat Files of type Band in a Box PAT or Cakewalk INS files r Cancel Then a file Save As dialog will pop up with a default INI file name based on the name of the source patch file Date Modified E p plugsz ini patches ini pst cha ini E pet dist ini E pet dyn ini pet echo ir E pst fing ini pst gain ini pet greg ini a pst preq ini E pet ring ini
137. 50 The multi note instruments send different MIDI notes to your sound source depending on where you click on the instrument For instance the Kick Drum can send three different notes Ac Bass Drum MIDI note 35 Bass Drum 1 MIDI note 36 and Square Kick MIDI Note 32 Y Drum Kit E meg Lili Lilo Lid Lose d A AA m Tip The hint line at the top of the window describes the current control under the mouse cursor Use the hint line to learn the mouse responsive areas of each drum instrument Control Buttons Record Places RealBand in Record mode so drum instruments can be recorded Play Starts song playback Space key Rewind Stop and return to song start Return key Stop Stops song playback Space key Size Buttons 1 1 1 2 1 4 Clicking on these buttons changes the size of the Drum Kit window to full size half size or quarter size You can also resize the window to any size by dragging a window border Settings Adjusts program behavior See the Settings Dialog topic Help To launch the drum Help file press F1 166 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins C Rewind gt E FE E E 1 f Pr i E E Li T m i velocity H E i E E T x H n velocity Emphasis E l Stick E E 38 m E Emphasis Play Stop Press computer keys to play drums Drums are grouped on the computer keyboard by category The kick snare and hi hat sounds are on the lowest keyboard row
138. 54 Tranz Port Support Wireless Remote Contool etie pr Ad 158 Piron to MEDICO Entera 160 MIDI Guitar ad 162 Convert to WMA Windows Media Audio enne nn nn 162 UTI OUTING aside crise Pe talar bete most tran ratio AE 163 DirectX Windows Audio Plug In Format a be ER redit bbs eu otto Det reisen setis eee eS 165 Dynamic a A TRU DUM EET M DM msan E e ee 165 Can AL RRE POPE EP Pi PEO e E LO OU A A entera 169 NUDE Montoto lala L72 Chapter SRC a SA Aeuav Asner EA EE 177 RS ile Me ida 177 IT Don A NO 183 MTS AIO DUI a tora 199 IEA A LR 202 TAS ACI MA oda 206 Theo Menta ade 214 ESSO SIEUT 215 Tis W indov Mendo tobd teen ere eT ern Te bu 234 AA H 259 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 4 ccce eee e ee e eee e ee eee eee eee eee eee eese ssssssssoe 262 PERROV D cocta sumite canas Viesstpe mme ste det oan che Sd aM UE tC e MM SCIMUS ANAR 262 PEIC RR 262 POP HC cp 263 DI Vin HOS att 265 latc Bind E Me E ne 267 PS ive Bard ENS sss siete 268 E nee eee eee ae ee eee ee eee ere 269 PATIO Ml bnmacds ceca Ub al a a manna tet iamnpaaueranetnas 270 CADA ar T T T TUER 270 PO Rine VIG Yo PROPER PIN EE O A T 271 EG bicolor OI tab 272 PERE UM Time Analy A tis a I came 272 Tab
139. 7h an 79 ie y az I Y an 8 PEN E T z Pitch bends are displayed in real time as blue lines extending in the direction of the bend If the direction is up then line extends higher on the neck than the original note If the direction is down such as if a pull off were executed then the bend extends lower on the neck The pitch bends shown as horizontal blue lines will move horizontally along the string in real time illustrating the extent of the pitch bend Guitar u I oO I OL lt Example of a MIDI pitch bend from a B to a C This virtual instrument works in the same fashion as the piano keyboard display However given that there are six separate strings on the guitar fretboard and that many notes and chords can be played several different ways on the guitar there are a few additional settings unique to this instrument Just below the fretboard you will find position markers The current position setting of the guitar 1s highlighted in reverse video The positions range from 0 open to 24 24th fret There is an additional position called All where the MIDI notes will be displayed in all possible ways on the guitar When the position 1s set to any other range e g from 0 to 24 the notes will be displayed in that position unless they are outside the range of a given position in which case they will not be shown You can change the position simply by clicking on any
140. A A 219 DIES ere eee eee eee eee oe eee ere eee eee 225 A sistere Metu i ene 223 General evento ta terea uan D E 218 INNS certeut cM EN kenretenseanncueeme 230 MID Eos tees dt ote odo Stob tot sind 225 ING EAU OM sheep oe asl Rr OA 225 TAINO PEA NR EE tou d meee Necata 232 SA e 231 Sone AA eet ian 229 Pri t command A 182 Pront ODHOD id 128 Prnt PIEVI Wee a E E 129 A EE E N 128 Prosram C hange an 258 PEO PLANS E URS 49 A TUR 250 Ji Ne ae 250 Putich nr e E e Mu EE 216 Punch in FU s MM MET MC ET 205 Oc 206 QUAN ZC nidad tance eses 188 Rindom Ze aser 194 RealTime CO ads 209 RealBand MA CUS ose t tt bte ated deeds 22 PUIGSC TOUT dud oie ubt ioi Sind 21 MIDES srta letter ERR E tss 23 IW I A AES oot erede 5 Mixer WIBdOW A RI MP 24 A natutue Parte deees teas 23 Tracks WII OW axxo di mlt irte 24 RELAIS es 93 A n otii red oi e 95 generate LAV OMICS uu octets p E peris 95 part markers ioo ie ei et ae rhe a aris le 95 select ANG Den rate acid 94 A O E A ET 95 Real ris PI de 94 e A 91 REGIT ACR S oce otro o ea desee 91 assign RealTracks to track 92 generte TAVO ES eure isn Paice beens eee oem 93 select ANG penca aan 91 A eb t mises 195 Iccchante cessent mU ipee cut eta eo UAE 191 RECO NORTE OU TER NEA 205 SICD Te COLO oie oae t boa OR ta ENS 206 IS CORGHIIU E ead eese ia 218 Recording always record audio oocccccccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnninnnnnos 96 duco Teve E aoii re ee Ie 96 audio
141. Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio B888 B888 B888 B888 B888 B888 B888 B888 B888 B888 B888 Cancel Help 4 The Audio Output Port dialog is presented when the Pt column is double clicked The sound cards drivers selected in this dialog will correspond to the number shown to the left of the driver name and in the Pt column in the Classic Tracks window The Safe boot up option gives the user the chance to boot up RealBand with clean configuration and INI files if a crash occurred during the most recent session This runs automatically on launching the program after a crash 14 Chapter 1 Welcome Audio Drivers Tutorial MME Audio Drivers The Drivers button in the Options Preferences Audio dialog brings the Audio Drivers dialog which lets you select Audio Input and Audio Output drivers This dialog is for MME drivers and not ASIO Audio Drivers Audio Input Diriver s Audio Output Driver s Microsoft Sound Mapper Microsoft Sound Mapper SB Livel Audio 8800 SB Live Audio B800 Roland WSC Move Selected Devices to Top By default the Microsoft Sound Mapper is selected for both input and output If you have multiple sound cards or a multiple I O card you can select more than one input or output This affects computer performance the more ports that are selected the more demand is placed on your computer Order of Audio Ports The Move Selec
142. DI Conductor ON only as note is held down The various functions of the Conductor are also available with MIDI keys and QWERTY hot keys Customizing the Sections Sections This allows you to define up to 10 points in the song that are sections By default the following sections are defined for each song Section 1 Start of song Section 2 Intro Section 3 First Chorus Section 4 Middle Chorus i e start of chorus 2 Section 5 Last Chorus Section 6 Ending Sections 7 10 are user definable To do this type in any bar using the bar chorus format e g 21 2 would be bar 21 chorus 2 If you prefer to enter custom values for the section numbers you can do this if you check the custom checkbox and then type in up to 10 bar numbers for each section Go to Sectio C JF MEE AA E ee ASES E Section Mame TEN eed E ue TENDO NN A The section numbers are saved with the song Once you have defined the sections you can jump to a certain section of the song as the song is playing simply by 1 Pressing the 1 9 or 0 key on the QWERTY keyboard or 2 Opening the Conductor window hot key and clicking on the section button or 3 Pressing MIDI keys 77 86 F6 to D7 corresponding to sections 1 10 Mode when to do the action By pressing a QWERTY hot key prior to an action you can control when the action will take place Ifno mode hot key is pressed pr
143. DI channels remapped to MIDI channel 2 As another example suppose you have a multi channel MIDI guitar part ranging from channels 3 through 8 and you wanted to change the part so it is played on MIDI channels 11 through 16 the standard MIDI guitar Chapter 13 Reference channels In this case you would select an Old Channel range of 3 through 8 and a New Channel range of 11 through 16 This would result in all the events in the guitar part being remapped to MIDI Channels 11 through 16 Tip You can also use the Data Filter to refine which events are affected by this feature Eliminate Note Overlap This feature is a convenient way of eliminating overlapping notes without having to spend a lot of time manually identifying and editing each one An overlapping note is one that ends after the next note starts For example if a note begins at 1 01 00 and ends at 1 01 130 but the next note starts at 1 01 120 then the first note overlaps the second note In this situation the Eliminate Note Overlap feature would shorten the note making it end at 1 01 119 so that the two notes don t Bl eles Deve overlap each other Mw Same MIDI Channel Ticks to avoid overlap by 1 Remove Duplicate Mates The default settings for this command are to eliminate Fram 1m 1E x z overlapping notes that are identical in note number and MIDI Channel If you want to eliminate all overlapping Thru 1000 1E ONES gt note
144. Driver D followed by Driver C was preserved as shown in the picture below Driver D Driver C Driver A Driver B The Microsoft Sound Mapper will use the sound card selected as the preferred device in the Control Panel Sounds and Audio Devices Audio tab You should not select both the Microsoft Sound Mapper and the device it uses For Chapter 1 Welcome 15 example if the preferred output device in the Audio Tab of the Multimedia settings in Control Panel is set to AWE 64 Wave Out you should NOT select both the Microsoft Sound Mapper and the AWE 64 Wave Out as two output ports in RealBand You would just select one or the other but not both If you selected both you would get an error message saying you couldn t open one of the devices Recording Tracks in Stereo or Mono Each Input and Output port 1s a Stereo pair with a left and right channel For example if you select 4 Input Ports and 4 Output Ports then you would be actually getting 8 input and 8 output channels since each audio port has both a left and right channel In the Tracks window you can select the output port for each track and in the Mixer window you can use the pan setting for the track to control where the output gets sent left or right channel for the port When recording to a stereo audio track the track will contain both the left and right channels If you ve selected multiple input ports RealBand will record to multiple stereo track
145. ESHBR Pon ole renta The Notation chapter has full descriptions of these commands Chord height adjustment Advance by 1 peg Alt Right Arrow Backup bw 1 peg Ale Left Arrow Motation Mode w Editable Mode Staff Roll Mode Click on Edit Note to open the NOTE editing dialog NOTE 480 PPQ l E The NOTE dialog allows editing of Channel ES The MIDI channel for the note ima E 1 E 2 The exact time location Note name Nate EE E Velocity of the note Velocity B3 E Duration of the note in beats and ppq Notes can be Normal Invisible or a Guitar Bend Duration OB 139 E f Horal C nvisible C Guitar Bend Cancel Delete Micro Resolutions The Delete button removes the note You can change the resolution for any individual beat of a song to a different resolution by clicking with the right mouse button above that beat on the Notation window s time line Time Line indicator For example if you click on the time line above the 2nd beat in a measure a dialog box will C T pop which will let you set the resolution of the current beat for both clefs If you select a resolution of 8 then 32nd notes can be displayed You can even select a resolution as high as 32 which would allow 128th notes to be shown Beat Resolution Treble Clet Resolution for this Beat l l o When you choose a micro resolution RealBand will insert a Bass Clef Resolution Far this Bea
146. ESTS for each output part to verify that the instrument on each port actually supports tuning NOTE Although you will only HEAR results WITHIN THIS DIALOG for one part at at time this is a Master Tuning setting 0 PowerTracks will always attempt to fine tune all the output ports at once Master Tuning setting D 1Cent ES Reset to 4 440 Cent input a from 8192 to 8797 Sound note an this instrument R Is it i ange Is semitare Acoustic Grand Piano m hear the notes sound on this part 1 Microsott GS Wavetable Sw Synth o cent oue Enable TranzPort if present allow remote control from a TranzPort wireless DAW controller Song Generation These are global settings that apply to all RealBand songs Auto generate song when MGL file opened Paths for BB Reallracks RealDrums Allow FiealTracks Allow HiealDirums Stile can change patches Auto generate song when MGU file opened automatically generates and arrangement when a Band in a Box file is opened in RealBand Disable this feature if you don t want the parts in the imported Band in a Box file to be regenerated and overwritten Paths for BBW RealT racks HealDrums l Click on this button to open the Select Folders dialog to choose or change the path for RealBand to find its RealTracks and Real Drums 230 Chapter 13 Reference Select Folders Select path For Band in a Box e g Ci BB Select pa
147. EdLancg 40e sw rhy quitar Jazz EdLlangl var 40 sw rhy qui Jazz Freddie GreenZ rhy Git war Jazz Freddie Green rhy guitar Jazz Guitar Waltszs w smart Guitar VintJs Lush S50s St 8 MOR w strs VaintdJs Lush2 S3t68 MoR RSecOnly VintJz Lush2 3t8 MOR no pno Vaintds Lush4 St6 MOR no strs qui Jazz Mancnil 3low pop bal var Jazz Mancni 3low pop w bal VintJz New Orleans Sw Zt86 mix VintJz New Orleans2 Sw St6 mix VintJzz Nat piano Trio no drs VintIJz Satch low 12 6 Pop Search Open Sps es SD z5 sD 25 SD z5 SD z25 Sps es sD 25 SD z5 SD z25 Show Styles by Feel and Tempo Show all style rhythms Im Only show styles disk Gentle MOR Middle of the Road st 8 Rhumba w 5 insts drs bongos pno fills b G amp sl strings This var has strings T 100 t 100 80 120 Styles Disk 25 Examples Watch What Happens More Real Drums for this style BossaRock 5 HiH at HiHatL ot v Show All Styles Disks Y Cancel Help ILUSH From the Jazz category select the J Lush style or any other style of your choosing and you ll see that the style selection box has been updated with its name 26 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand The time signature defaults to 4 4 but a new time signature can be set by clicking in this box to open the Meter dialog Compound time signatures are supported in fact the numerator can be any number from 1 to 99
148. F F3 Audio Chord Wizard Open Audio File WAWVIWwmAJIMP3 ICDA Audio Chord Wizard Use Existing Song Open Directx ST Plugins Configuration Open Dxilvs5Ti Synth Panel Configuration Chapter 8 Audio Production 99 Rendering MIDI to audio is virtually automatic when using the DXi VSTi synthesizer support in RealBand Just go to the Audio menu and choose Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File or to a WMA file or to any compressed format such as MP3 that is supported by your computer Note If no audio tracks are present the MIDI tracks will still be rendered to audio using the DXi synthesizer This feature requires that you have a DXi software synth assigned to the MIDI track s you are rendering All levels and effects settings will be rendered exactly as they are in the Tracks and or Mixer windows Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to WAV File Invoke this command by right clicking on the track in the Tracks window and easily convert any MIDI track to a WAV file RealBand will automatically render using a DXi or VSTi synth Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Audio Track It is easy to convert any MIDI track to an audio track RealBand will automatically render using a DXi or VSTi synth This command is accessible by right clicking on the track in the Tracks window Manual Rendering of MIDI to Audio MIDI tracks can easily be rendered recorded to audio using your system s sound card and its
149. From location and then click on the timeline again and press F8 to select the Thru location Big Clock Window if X This 1s accessible from an icon on the toolbar same section of the toolbar that has the Lue Tracks Bars Chords buttons etc Big Clock This window displays the current time location in a large text It will show Measures Beats Ticks or Hours Minutes Seconds Hundredths or Samples Clicking on the window will toggle the display mode Measures Beats Ticks Hours Minutes Seconds Hundredths Chapter 4 The Main Screen 47 Samples Big Clock If you resize the window then the size of the font will adjust to the new window size e Dto Olor PEE Other Program Windows These program windows can be launched by selection in the Windows menu or by clicking on their buttons in the Toolbar Bars The Bars window shows the bars or measures of the song Bars with MIDI data will be shaded while bars with audio will show the audio waveform in miniature Chords The Chords window displays the chord symbols of a song You ll see the bars of the song displayed in rows Mixer The Mixer window is a graphical mixer that lets you control the 48 tracks in RealBand Piano Roll The Piano Roll window allows editing of MIDI notes and graphic editing of controllers Tempo Map The Tempo Map is a list of all the tempo changes that occur during the course of the song Comments The Comments window is
150. However by clicking on the scroll bar s thumb position box and using the mouse to move the scroll bar you can send these controller messages in a familiar way 1 e like a hardware version This is useful if you don t have a good hardware controller available When Pitch Bend is selected the scroll bar will return to the center when the mouse is released When Mod Wheel is selected the scroll bar will always stay wherever you leave it RealBand can record any Real Time Control messages that you send when Recording is active For example when you ve finished recording and you have sent some Real Time Control messages the program will prompt you as to whether you wish to keep the recorded Controller Moves just like when you make changes to pan vol effect settings in the Mixer window Drum Grid Editor This command will bring up a window with a grid that lets you create 4 4 drum patterns Patterns can be loaded from a list or created in the drum grid editor Load fram List Country Hack a dg Patterns are created by typing velocity values into the square fields of the grid To the right of the grid are the names of the drum instruments that correspond to each row of the grid Each column of the grid represents one of the 16 divisions of the measure assuming the resolution 1s set to 16 For example if you type the number 100 in the field located in the lower left corner of the grid a bass drum will sound with a ve
151. I Said It Before The file name is 1 said seq Open the song as you would any file either with a double mouse click on the file name or by selecting the file name in the dialog and then clicking on the Open button The song title and file name appear in the status bar at the top of the screen The song s time signature and key signature are seen below the song title and directly above the on screen piano keyboard a The song tempo is seen to the right of the time signature and key signature Click in the e tempo field to open the Tempo dialog and type in the tempo in beats per minute bpm Use the up down scroll arrows to change the tempo without typing it in again or click the button four times in tempo and RealBand will set its tempo to the four beats three for a waltz that you just tapped If you click the button four times it will set the tempo and start the song playing You can also use the minus and equals keys on the computer keyboard to do this Use the square bracket keys to change the tempo by 5 bpm Precise Floating Point Tempos RealBand supports precise floating point tempos such as 120 514 BPM This makes it easier to sync MIDI tracks to prerecorded audio tracks if the audio tracks weren t recorded exactly at an integer tempo This also is what lets RealBand play a song in sync to an existing audio track after the Audio Chord Wizard has worked its magic 54 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Featur
152. IDI playback to the default DXi synth or you can assign DXi synths to individual tracks with the option to set all MIDI tracks to the same port Piano BB 1 ef 1 Acoustic Grand Piano Port 32 gt gt WoC Dxi Default lt lt Al MID out 27 5C Dx Default lt Ch 3 Set All MIDI Tracks to gt gt WSC Dai Default lt lt Routing to Default DXi Synth The Default DXi Synth combo box lets you select which DXi or VSTi synth is used as the default DX1 synth Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 51 The Re Route MIDI Playback to Default DXi Synth setting will cause RealBand to re route all MIDI playback to the Default DXi synth This is the easiest way to use a DXi or VSTi softsynth for playback If this option is checked then all MIDI playback output will be routed to the default DXi synth regardless of the MIDI track s port number Assigning DXi or VSTi Synths to Tracks To assign a DX1 VSTI1 synth to a particular MIDI track select the track in the Tracks window and then click on the Disclosure Triangle wy 24 12 0 L DL Audigy MICI 10 D800 Ch3 R T The Disclosure Triangle will reveal more information about a track by making the track row height taller LRL an Track Edit Bypass Plugin le E E E E 3 Bi In the DirectX VST Window you can select the type of DXi VSTi softsynth to use and also see a control panel display of the softsynth that allows you to make settings directly
153. Input continues to be processed while the computer is generating tones 1t makes more work for the program This extra work might stall slow computers MIDI Monitor The MIDI Monitor opens with the MIDI button which is found in the View Panel The MIDI Monitor displays a listing of data received from computer MIDI Input and or the RealBand MIDI output This plug in program has been found to be very useful for educational and diagnostic purposes Note To display the data received from the computer MIDI Input the MIDI THRU option must be enabled in RealBand ES MIDI Monitor MIDI Display Sequencer Control Timer Hel Event Play Rewind Stop Current Time m3 54929 Help Lear Save re Channel 1 2 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 EDS Settings 1 Filter Mr 3 38 39 293 D gt E xit Data 1 Data 2 XT 4 3E 00 P On 9 Pitch D 5 Velocity 734 53090 92 39 00 Note On 3 Fitch 2 4 Velocity 96 53090 92 3L 00 Note On 3 3 PitchzL 5 Velocity DO r36 53910 92 4600 Note On 9 3 Piich L B Velocity Jy o S920 92 44 00 Note On 3 3 Piich D B Velocity rg S920 92 40 00 Note On 9 3 Piich F B Velocity P99 53950 9241 00 Note On 9 3 Pitch F 5 Velocity B00 53350 92 45 00 Note On 3 3 6 Pitth 4 5 Velocity DO 801 4250 9241 22 Note On 9 3 Piich F 5 Velocity 34 902 54250 92 35 20 Note On 9 3 Piich F 4 Velocity 45 B03 54250 d 48 2E Note On
154. It allows for much lower latency than ordinary MME drivers ASIO When RealBand detects ASIO drivers it will prompt you to ask if you want to use them ASIO Driver Warning There is a warning if the ASIO4AII driver is not connected Sometimes the ASIOAAII driver will not be connected to an audio driver and output will be silent This is usually due to a soft synth already using the audio driver If RealBand detects that ASIO4ALL isn t connected it will warn you about this so you are aware of why the audio is silent The Drivers button will bring up either the Audio Drivers dialog if the Driver Type is set to MME or the ASIO Audio Drivers dialog if the Driver Type is ASIO If using MME by default the Microsoft Sound Mapper is selected for both input and output If you have multiple sound cards or a multiple I O card you can select more than one input or output This will affect the computer performance when recording or playing audio tracks The more ports that are selected the more demand 1s placed on your computer This may require a very fast computer Each Input and Output port is a stereo pair with a left and right channel If you select 4 input ports and 4 output ports then you would be actually getting 8 input and 8 output channels since each audio port has both a left and right channel Note When using MME drivers Port number 1 is used as a source of timing when syncing MIDI to digital audio If you are attempt
155. Jazz Mancni 3low pop w bal VintJz New Orleans Sw 3StS mix VintJz New Orleans2 Sw amp Sth mix VintJzz Nat piano Trio no drs VintJz Satch low 12 6 Pop Search Open Spass SD z25 Sps es SD zS SD z25 SD z2z25 Sps es Sps es sSps2es Show Styles by Feel and Tempo Show all style rhythms Y Only show styles disk Gentle MOR Middle of the Road st 8 Rhumba w 5 insts drs bongos pno fills b G amp sl strings This var has strings T2100 t 100 80 120 Styles Disk H25 Examples Watch What Happens More Real Drums for this style BossaRock 6 HiH at HiH atL ot Show all Show All Styles Disks v Cancel Help ILUSH From the Jazz category select the J Lush style or any other style of your choosing and you ll see that the style selection box has been updated with its name 72 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks The time signature defaults to 4 4 but a new time signature can be set by clicking in this box to open the Meter dialog Compound time signatures are supported In fact the numerator can be any number from 1 to 99 The denominator is selected from the drop down combo box Meter MNumeratar Denominator Our song is in C minor so we could select the relative major key signature of Eb for fewer accidentals in the notation display Click in the key box to open the Key Signature dialog In this instance we do not want to transpose the
156. LSB 3 U 1 C120 Program Change C 2 Program 32 4 0 B2 00 00 Control Change FE 3 LL Type 0 Bank Select WSE A U 1 BY 0 00 Control Change B 3 LL Type 32 Bank Select LSB b 0 L200 Program Change C 3 Program 7 0 B 00 00 Control Change FE b LL Type 0 Bank Select WSE B 0 B5 20 00 Control Change B b LL Type 32 Bank Select LSB g 0 C576 Program Change Cx b Program 24 10 0 BB 00 00 Control Change FE 7 LL Type 0 Bank Select MSB 11 0 BB 20 DU Control Change B 7 LL Type 32 Bank Select LSB 12 0 LB 31 Program Change C f Program 49 13 0 B3 00 00 Control Change FE 4 LL Type HU Bank Select WSE 14 0 Ba 20 00 Control Change FE 4 LL Type 32 Bank Select LSB 15 0 334 Progran Change Cx 4 Program 52 16 307 Fe 583 07 Song Position Ptr F2 Clocks 24 PPON 5074 When the Save Text button 1s pressed in the MIDI Monitor program s main window and the Display recent Capture the MIDI Monitor display contents to a text file for further analysis or printout events in Text window option has been enabled in the Settings dialog the Save Text window will open containing the most recent MIDI events Select All Selects all the text in the window Clear Clears the selected text Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 175 Copy Copies the selected text to the Windows clipboard Save Saves all window text to a TXT file You can also use th
157. Microphone is the selected audio input for the SB Audigy Audio device and the Volume fader is at 70 of the maximum level If the Input meter were too high either clipping or getting close to 0 db then lowering the Microphone volume level would correct this Chapter 8 Audio Production 97 A Recording Control Si Options Help E MIDI Syrth what U Hear LCD Digital Analog Mix Microphone Wave Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance gt 4 F 4 amp 2 4 P F 4 6 2 doo 4 Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Select Select Select Select Select Select SB Audigy Audio D800 Start recording by pressing the Record button D You can press the record audio button instead of record it will automatically change a MIDI track type to Audio if the track is blank Stop recording by pressing the Stop button or the lt SPACE gt bar When recording is stopped a Keep Take dialog appears that gives you the option to keep or reject the take If you choose Yes the audio wave file will be saved and you will see an added event in the Events column for the track Classic view Auto Rewind Auto Rewind 1s found in the Options menu When enabled RealBand will automatically rewind to the location that playback or recording was started The choices are Recording Only Playback Only Both Recording and Playback or Disabled w Auto Rewind Recording only Record
158. Notation mode but notes can be inserted by clicking on the staff with the left mouse button moved by dragging with the left mouse button or edited by clicking on a note head with the right mouse button Broken vertical gray lines across the staff show the position for each note subdivision in either eighth note triplets or sixteenth notes Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 113 Notation Track 3 Opt Print d Ch Bb0 f Clean L Tr Auto Rest Gj T 4 Cy pu Se dede tt t ie ae PE HR uu LI LE nm Editable Notation window in 16th note even resolution Moving Notes Notes can be moved via drag and drop To move a note move the mouse cursor over an existing note and then click and hold the left mouse button The mouse cursor will change to a different shape While keeping the mouse button pressed move the mouse cursor over to the location you wish to drop the note and then let go of the mouse button The note will be moved to the place you dropped it Certain areas of the screen are not valid locations to drop a note The mouse cursor will change to a circle with line through it to indicate an invalid location If you try to drop a note in an invalid location nothing will happen When you click on a note with the left mouse button and drag the mouse without releasing the left mouse button you will hear the note being played as you move it up and down the screen The note s pitch will be increased
159. Only Both Recording and Playback or Disabled Record Filter This feature brings up a dialog in which it is possible to choose what kinds of MIDI events are recorded as well as exactly which MIDI Channels will be recorded For example if you uncheck the Key Aft checkbox any key aftertouch events that were transmitted won t actually get recorded Similarly if you uncheck the Channel 9 checkbox any events encountered on MIDI channel 9 won t be recorded Preferences The Options Preferences menu item will launch a tabbed Preferences dialog box which has multiple sections or tabs This replaces the preferences submenu in previous versions of RealBand Preferences 1 General 2 Audia d File 4 Big Lyrics Window 5 Matation E MIBI 7 5ang Generation B SMPTE 9 Metronome Plana General Song Title in Window Caption Enable Undo Far Event Level Editing Dialogs use CUSD Effects S uses Input Buffers Sysex Input Buffer Size Silent Message Boxes Restore Never Ask Again Questions Humber of Lindo Levels Undo warning message threshold in megal Toolbars use large icons Toolbar buttons have text Lock Toolbars Reset Toolbars Enable Flyby Hints dl Lett click on track type icon in Tracks Window shows pop up menu Default Measure Offset Song Title in Window Caption This checkbox when enabled displays the song title in the main window s caption If you prefer to have only a
160. Percentage The new length as a percentage relative to the original length For example a new length percentage of 200 will result in the section being double the original length New Speed Percentage Time stretching or reduction will also cause the section to be played faster or slower If you are stretching a section of the song it will play slower If you are reducing a section it will play faster This 106 Chapter 8 Audio Production setting is the inverse of the New Length Percentage For example a New Speed Percentage of 50 half speed will result in a New Length Percentage of 200 double length Old Tempo and New Tempo If you specify old and new tempos this is another way of adjusting the speed but this method lets you think in terms of a change in tempo rather than a change in speed as a percentage Quality There are 8 different choices here The best choice depends on the source material You may need to experiment to determine the best choice for tracks you are working with See the explanation that follows Pitch Shift Enabled If checked then RealBand will pitch shift based on the following settings Semitones Amount of semitones to pitch shift up or down There are 12 semitones per octave Cents Amount of cents to pitch shift up or down There are 100 cents per semitone Explanation of Time Stretch Quality The simplest way to change audio duration is to change the playback rate exactly like changing the s
161. RealBand to record audio even when the current track is MIDI RealBand will offer to keep the audio take on the nearest available blank track This can be a lifesaver in those situations where you wanted to record audio but you accidentally selected the current track as a MIDI track Backup Most Recent Audio Take this setting when enabled will cause RealBand to always backup the most recent audio take as Temporary Audio Directory gt RBBAKx WAV with x being the audio input port number This can be helpful in those rare yet frustrating situations such as when you accidentally recorded audio onto the WRONG audio track or you accidentally punched in instead of recording a regular take If this happens you can undo the keeping of the most recent take and then use the Wave Files Import Wave File command to insert the recorded audio onto a different track by importing the RBBAKx WAV file which will be located in the Temporary Audio Directory Note If you do this you may have to edit the audio data s track location to get it to sound at the right time Speed Change Quality This setting determines the time stretch method used to alter the speed of the song when you play the song at a different speed such as 50 speed There are 8 different choices here The best choice depends on the source material You may need to experiment to determine the best choice for the music you are working with Here are the choices IBAND SUM The
162. Reference You can also open an Event List while multiple tracks are selected In this case the Event List will display all events encountered in the tracks that are selected For example if Tracks 1 through 3 were selected highlighted when you created an Event List window the Event List will display all the events occurring in those 3 tracks regardless of what tracks you select later Events are inserted by pressing the Ins key or button After pressing this insert key a menu will pop up to allow you to choose what type of event to insert After picking the event type an entry box will pop up which will ask you to choose the MIDI Channel Time and any other parameters applicable to the event Events can be deleted by pressing the Del key button Existing events may be edited by pressing the Enter key An entry box will pop up and you may make changes to the event in this box You can play events one at a time by pressing the Transmit button If the event you re playing isn t a note the cursor will be advanced to the next event If the event is a note it will be sustained until any other key is pressed You can stop a sustained note from sounding by pressing the Silence button The sustained note will also stop in other situations such as when you switch to a different window or if you choose a different event list command Types of Events Note events consist of three parameters Note string shows the name of the note and its
163. SC Move Selected Devices to Top Chapter 1 Welcome 13 2 Choose the input and output digital audio devices that you want to use Note The Microsoft Sound Mapper driver option refers to the default Windows sound card setup as configured in the Windows Control Panel 3 In the Tracks window you can choose which sound card to output each track of audio on by clicking on the track type icon and selecting one of the ports that you activated in the Audio Drivers dialog T Tracks _ Snap _Play Selected Area fal Bass gt Generic Audio SUD Out Microsoft Sound Mapper m i Track Type Audio Mono h A Port 5B Live Audio B800 Microsoft Sound Mapper e 56 Live Audio B800 5B Live Audio B800 5B Live Audio B800 Set All Audio Tracks to SB Live Audio B800 Track Category Make a Mew Audio Category In the Classic Tracks View window you can choose which sound card to output a given track of digital audio on by double clicking the Pt column for any given audio track Here we have set the Bass Piano and Guitar tracks to be output through the Pt 1 sound card and the Drums to be output through the Pt 2 sound card E Classic racks View ILE P eme iet Key vel Pt 1 Hicrosoft Sound Audio SB Live SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB SB Livet Livet Livet Livet Livet Livet Livet Livet Livet Livet Livet Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio
164. Sheet Options Lead Sheet Options Track 5pecific settings Track 3 Piano BB e Selected W Include Treble Clef iw Include Bass Clef Tablature Mane Clef Sign Every Line Bars per Line in 44 4 Kep Signature Every Line First Bar le Lead In Resolution 4 Sixteenth We Chord Symbols iw Chords 4bove Each Track Bar Offset r Clefs split at ic 5 Show Bar Mums Every Bar Medium d shaves Shaves per page 4 Margins Font Size 100 Cancel Help The Track Specific settings section lets you adjust settings for individual tracks The Selected checkbox determines if a track is displayed in the current Lead Sheet window use this to display multiple tracks of notation The combo box with the track numbers will show an asterisk for tracks that are selected The Include Bass Clef and Include Treble Clef settings determine which of the clefs will be displayed for each track We Shaw Title The Show Tablature checkbox lets you enable or disable the display guitar tablature for each track Note When a Lead Sheet window is launched the selected tracks will be based on the selected tracks in the Tracks window 126 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing The Clef Sign Every Line and Key Signature Every Line checkboxes let you decide if the lead sheet should show the clef sign and key signature on every line These two settings are the same settings as found
165. SysEx MIDI events to 128K or less to prevent a song from stuttering during playback Receive This command enables the ability to receive a data dump from your synthesizer to the currently selected bank When you select this feature a message box will pop up to indicate that the sequencer is ready to receive the SysEx dump After you initiate this command you can press the appropriate buttons to dump the data from your synth All the data received will be stored in the current bank in the program A dialog box will show the progress of the SysEx dump as shown below Receiving Sysex Data Bytes Hecerved 244 Cancel When your synth 1s finished dumping the data press the OK button to exit this window Transmit Sends the SysEx data in a given bank out via MIDI A dialog box will inform you that a send is in progress If you wish to cancel a transmission after it has started press the Cancel button and the transmission will be stopped Request This option allows you to initiate a SysEx dump request by sending the request to your synthesizer via MIDI Simply choose an instrument from the available names and press the Enter key You may be prompted for the channel or patch numbers if the instrument requires them After sending the request on the MIDI Out port the program will then proceed to receive any data that is sent from your synth automatically as if the Receive command had been issued Load This command will load a MIDIEX c
166. The Clefs Split At setting determines the split point for placing notes on the Bass or Treble clef The default setting is C5 which is middle C For example you can use a higher split point such as C6 if you want some notes up to a G above middle C to be displayed on the bass clef with ledger lines instead of on the treble clef The Title Composer Style and Copyright settings let you insert text onto the first page of the printout The Title field 1s for a song title The Composer field is for the author s name and will appear to the right of the title The Style field is for the style of the music such as Slow Blues and will appear to the left of the title The Copyright field is for a copyright notice and will appear at the bottom of the first page of the printout The Font Size setting lets you adjust the size of the font used for the printout A value of 100 is normal size You can make the font smaller or larger by increasing or decreasing this setting Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 129 The Number of Copies setting allows you to easily print out multiple copies of notation You can print any number of copies from 1 to 1000 Select the Bar Numbers checkbox to print only the range of bars defined by the Print Options From and Thru boxes Print Options O Include Treble Clef From Thru Include Bass Clef Bars per Line in 414 M Clef Si
167. The denominator is selected from the drop down combo box Meter MNumeratar Denominator Our song is in C minor so we could select the relative major key signature of Eb for fewer accidentals in the notation display Click in the key box to open the Key Signature dialog In this instance we do not want to transpose the MIDI tracks we just want to change the key signature Select No Just before we play our song we can set a tempo The tempo box has a setting of 120 bpm To change it to 140 we ll click in the box to open the Tempo dialog and type in 140 We could also set the tempo with the up and down scroll arrows or even tap in a tempo with the minus and equals buttons Tempo Tempo Calculator File File Utilities The length of a song depends on tempo and number of bars With this calculator found in the File menu under File Utilities you can enter 2 of the 3 variables length of song in seconds tempo number of bars and the program calculates the third variable for you So we ve entered our chords in the Chords window set the length of our song and added a 2 bar ending chosen a Band in a Box style and set the tempo l l We re ready to generate an automatic arrangement with BB tracks RealBand can either generate the whole song or selected portions of the song when the Generate button is pressed but if you use the Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 27 button it will
168. Track This will regenerate an existing track Ifa track is a non BB track but 1t was generated individually from one of the generation options in Tracks window popup menu or from one of the generation options on the Generate button popup menu then the track name will be displayed in green The track name being displayed in green or blue means that the track can be regenerated using this command This feature is useful to regenerate if you had changed the song s tempo or just to generate fresh material Generate All will regenerate all Blue and Green tracks automatically RealDrums Variations Fills and Accents There are a and b variations for each RealDrums style They are determined by the part markers assigned in the Chords window To assign the substyles for your song click on the Chords button to open the Chords window and insert a or b part markers Click on the desired bar numbers to toggle through the a b selection or to clear a marker Dm69 e2 EE N6m7 24 Rests shots and pushes are supported by the RealDrums generation routines They are entered in the Chords window Rests and shots are set by adding periods to the chord name A chord can be specified as a Rest by adding a period after the chord e g C indicates a C chord that is a Rest A chord can be specified as a Shot by adding two periods after the chord e g C indicates a C chord that is a Shot Pushes are set by enter
169. UE UNE e E E E ER A E 83 Chapter 7 Divital Audio Feature S ier tae peer Eee eee haa E ett ERE Ee IEEE COR I Pet ertet 84 TURBINE T TNNT ERE 84 Loading and Playing A O e ala a i et a a suu a ea 84 Real AM E Hoc O E 86 AMA 91 A A abate a anatase 91 HA Real Track o eh Cal be 91 Generatme Rea ues schen cis es aes cea a aoe cx eel ccna t lesa idum t wad nase I ME 94 Recordin A A O a aa 96 Rendernno MIDI Tracks tO AU Orar 99 AU MENOS iio 99 Editing Audio asi 101 BS 21 NS RR 108 Autosbackup or SE OEE Sy aerei A voles RE PIN PUE deem E RETO 108 Wave ios 108 Chapter 9 Notation and PEIBUTS scier EA EET 110 NOO esee ctc los 110 Lead sheet Notation WOW id 124 e TENERETUR 129 Chapter I0 Piano Roll W IHdOW i eei ves dci ie sica 132 OEI as 132 NOE Lane ccleaner 134 Grape B venb Pancho das 135 Ieishit chck Conte xtual MEDIUS etus hos oem belit usu e uai AL D sree orn 136 Display 0 on DL M te noe ee o ao 137 Chapter TE Mixer VV IC OW sanidad 139 ONE ii 139 Hace Contour 140 Master Controls and Mixer Ulsa oia Does 142 Creatine Audio Subgroups inthe MIEP 4i obere bestes petes bouem eres boten e up ae ins sheraele EAA E EER 143 Real brtne AIO B PC CUS iaro we aaa a Seine ic 144 4 Table of Contents Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins cissicssicsccessccesscstssiccasissccesissencastedssvesvsceedessacsssevesconce 147 AUTO C Hord Wiza d screeners X la 147 WON CU CLOR N MO Wa ll ra 1
170. W Adjust MIDI nates close to boundary Cancel Help In the Starting Bar field enter the bar number of the beginning of the section you would like RealBand to remove In the Number of Bars field enter the number of bars to remove If the Adjust MIDI Notes close to boundary checkbox is checked RealBand will attempt to ensure that MIDI notes that are slightly earlier than the very end of the deleted section and really are part of the section of music beyond the deleted section will be moved backward in time rather than deleted RealBand will also attempt to delete MIDI notes that are slightly earlier than the start bar and really considered to be part of the first bar being deleted Chapter 13 Reference 197 Split MIDI drums This command will split a MIDI drum track to separate tracks Custom settings allow you to control which notes go to which track It acts upon the current track Split Drums or MIDI Notes to separate tracks f AutoFill Tracks for each MIDI note used Custom MIDI Note Hums Hard Trk DEM EN amp fr A ZEE IT S2 h BEE Y nte empty track if na nates found Save 4s Preset Load Freset Cancel Help If the Auto Fill Tracks for each MIDI note used setting is enabled then RealBand will automatically move each MIDI note over to a new blank track If the Custom setting is enabled you can specify which MIDI notes go to which track On the left column of the
171. Y J SEKYZ J TEDYZ J ALHIRT J EDLAHNG J EDLNGZ J FGREE2 J FGREEN J LUSH2 J LUSH4 J MANCN2 J MANCNI J N_ORL J HN ORLZ J NAT Jg SATCH Re Build Find new styles q qd gag ago goggprg gg stotmgosgacaoactgadggagggogsgogc Change Prototype Style Guitar Corp Med Up Tempo Jazz Goodtime Smooth Jazz Groove Gravy Fast Jazz Swing Walts Grover Pop Style Grover W Fusion Guitar Bossa fast contemp Bos Hartbeat 3 4 Smooth Jazz Held Bossa Bossa style w Sust Herbie2 Funky jazz even 6th gr Higher Smooth Jazz Hip Hop Horacel loose ev 6 Jazz Bossa Italian Pop World Styles 2 VintdJds Basin Easy 40s SOs swin VintdJs Benny East 20s swing VintJz Club 30z 40s sw Ballad Vaintds FPreddy smart rhy quit VintJz Hoagy 20 40 swing Jazz Honey zolo stride piano VintJz Hot Club 20 s40 HotS3w VintJz Nat Cole2 40 Ot swing VintJz Nicht wery slow ballad VintJz Sky 20 40s bounce VintJz S3ky2 20 40 bounce var VintJz Teddy2 stride Pno Quartet VintJz AlHirt NewoOrl Js Pop Jazszs EdLang 40 s sw rhy quitar Jazss EdLang2Z var 40s sw rhy gqui Jazz Freddie Greenz rhy Git var Jazz Freddie Green rhy guitar Jazz Guitar Walts w smart Guitar VintJz Lu sh S50 St 68 MOR vw strs VintJz Lu sh2 3t8 MOR RZecOnly VintJz Lu h2 3t5 MOR no pno Vintds Lush4 S3t68 MOR no strs gui Jazz Mancnil 3low pop bal var
172. a damaged vinyl record PG Vinyl Tool will work best if the clicks are recorded clean Whatever preamp you use leave the tone controls flat Simply record the disc as accurately as possible You can tweak the tone in the computer after the disc has been dubbed to a wave file Clean the disc thoroughly Some suggest water and a soft cloth or whatever esoteric vinyl disc cleaning tools you may have available Some audiophiles claim good results recording a disc wet You might add a couple of drops of dish detergent to a bottle of water and wet the record before recording This will lubricate the record and minimize some noise and distortion Keep the stylus clean It may help to play the record all the way thru before recording it After the first play re clean re wet the disc and then record A first play might dislodge dust specks so that the second play thru might sound better After the disc is recorded to a wave file you can insert the PG Vinyl Tool plug in on the track and twiddle the plug in settings while the wave file plays Polish the plug in settings as you listen to the results You may find it beneficial to insert additional plug ins after PG Vinyl Tool Some obvious possibilities could be a Peak Limit or EQ plug in After PG Vinyl Tool has been adjusted to your satisfaction make the final cleaned output with RealBand s menu item Audio Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave file PG Vinyl Tool Features Enable P
173. a simple text editor which allows you to edit or view comments Notation The Notation window displays the notes of a MIDI track on a staff and lets you print music on your printer Lead Sheet The Lead Sheet window is similar to the Notation window except that it can display multiple staves T4 S e 2 E e an A QO Chapter 4 The Main Screen SysEx The SysEx window is a built in system exclusive SysEx librarian to transmit or receive SysEx data Guitar The Guitar window displays notes played in the current track or MIDI Thru on a guitar fretboard Meter Map The Meter Map is a list of all the meter changes that occur during the course of the song Event List The Event List window is an event editor that lets you insert delete or change MIDI events Audio Edit The Audio Edit window shows audio data as a waveform Select a region to edit by mouse clicking on the waveform and dragging the mouse to the right Big Lyrics The Big Lyrics window will display any existing lyrics in a track and can be resized The lyrics highlight and scroll great for singing along Drums The Drum button launches the built in 3 D animated Drum Kit plug in Big Clock The Big Clock window displays the current time location in a large text Conductor This opens the Conductor window for live playback and looping control NOG Ex n e le RealBand s Classic Tracks View is available in the Window menu or with the keystrokes Ctrl 9 Classic
174. aFull Latin Ev 8 080 150 RumbaPerc Latin Ev 8 080 150 Rumba Latin Ev 8 080 150 SalsaAfroCuban68Folk Latin Sw 8 104 154 ade SalsaAfroCuban68Modern Latin Sw 8 104 154 RD Demo SenaDemo BB Styles SalsaAfro Latin Ev 8 100 150 E ERES LE SalsaBachata Latin Ev 8 095 145 SalsaBolero Latin Ev 8 095 145 a Audition Rebuild a Cancel Help A Generate RealDrums This command opens the RB RealDrums Picker dialog You will see a list of all of your available RealDrums styles If you have Band in a Box installed on your computer you can use all of your Band in a Box RealDrums styles if you have set the path for RealDrums to your bb Drums folder in the Song Generation preferences 94 Chapter 8 Audio Production The RealDrums Picker has many features to help you choose your RealDrum style Enter a filter string like Salsa Jazz or congas and the displayed list of styles will be limited to styles genres including that name Filter by The Update button applies the current filter in the edit field Show All Update Show Al clears the filter and shows all styles in the list v Show if Tempo is out of Range This will show styles that wouldn t work well at the current song tempo The acceptable range is shown in the Lo Hi columns for the list of styles w Show if Feel does not match This will show a song where the drums are in Even feel and the style is Swing or vice versa w Show RealDrums that a
175. ack for the nearest MIDI event in the track that is located before the time of the note you are currently attempting to insert If a MIDI event was found in the track then RealBand will set the channel of the note you re currently attempting to insert so that its MIDI channel matches the MIDI channel of the event which was found If this setting is enabled but there is no forced channel and a MIDI event isn t found in the track then RealBand will use the Channel field of the Inserted Note Defaults section in the Other Notation Options dialog If the Play Inserted Notes checkbox is checked notes that you insert will sound briefly as they are inserted so you know that the note is correct Other Notation Options Inserted Hote Defaults Duration Channel 1 Velocity W Use Existing Channel Iw Play Inserted Notes Advanced Notation Settings Chord Mate Separation in MS Chord Total Separation in MS Glitch Duration in M5 Glitch Velocity Mate at the original tempo of 127 at 480 PPO BU me is equivalent to 51 ticks Line Thickness Settings Bar Line OD Tie x Shaye Line 100 Slur W Show pop up hint for nate properties OF Cancel Help These are advanced settings for standard notation mode Chord Note Separation in MS is the maximum time span in milliseconds allowed for adjacent notes within a chord when Detect fine resolution notation is enabled The default setting is 63
176. ackType Audio Mona User pictures are located in RB_PictureslAudio Pictures User_ Pictures in the RealBand folder You can add your own user icon pictures to this folder and you can also associate your own effects groups with your custom audio categories To make a new user icon and optionally an effects group tgs to go with it click on Make a New Audio Category in the pop up menu Most audio categories have associated effects groups tgs When you choose a track category the Load Audio Category Effects dialog opens giving the names of the effects and options for loading activating and customizing them UEM The Apply Cat FX button loads the Category Effects for the chosen track category If you Apply Cat E previously chose not to load the effects or to bypass them you could use this button to apply the category effects to the track at a later time The Track Name field shows the track s name which is edited by right clicking or double clicking on the track name field Type the name and press Enter The Mute button lets you mute or unmute a track The Volume and Pan sliders let you adjust a track s volume and pan settings without having to go into the Mixer window Below the Volume slider are two VU level meters to give you a general idea of a track s playback level Note If a track is an audio track the meter display will be early by the size of the audio Output Buffer Milliseconds setti
177. ackle atop even more crackle The Smoothing section could be useful with severe surface noise The Smoothing section is a very gentle Gaussian low pass filter with 6 selectable intensities Gaussian low pass filters are about as good as it gets for attenuating random noise while having minimal effect on music transients However a Gaussian filter is still a low pass filter All low pass filters reduce high frequencies along with surface noise You should only enable the Smoothing section if 1t is necessary for a badly damaged record Experiment with the Smoothing Level to find an acceptable tradeoff between reduction in surface noise versus reduction of musical high frequencies DeNoise Checkbox PG Vinyl Tool DeNoise is a hiss gate It gradually attenuates quiet High Frequencies below the Denoise Threshold Think of it as a sliding high frequency dynamics expander Many vinyl discs were made from reel to reel tape masters The best quality reel to reel tape recorders of yesteryear had more hiss than modern digital recorders A vinyl disc in excellent condition could contain an accurate copy of the original tape hiss In some cases carefully adjusted DeNoise may give a perceived improvement over the original noise level DeNoising may also be beneficial on low level disc surface noise slightly worn discs If you have low level frying bacon surface noise DeNoise might work better than Smoothing With loud frying bacon
178. acks or layer multiple versions Regenerating BB Tracks You can always generate new BB tracks by choosing a new style and J COMBO pressing the Generate button Try as many as you like But what if there are tracks or even parts of tracks that you want to keep RealBand lets you keep the parts you like and just regenerate selected bars on selected tracks You can keep the same style or use a different style all together Here s an example We ll substitute the first 5 bars of the BB Bass and BB Piano tracks by regenerating them in a different style Before selecting the region to regenerate click on the Snap button in the Tracks window With Snap enabled RealBand will automatically snap to exact beat and bar line boundaries as you drag your mouse in the track overview to make your selection We ll select the region we want in the BB Bass track overview Then that exact same region can be selected in the BB Piano track with a Ctrl click on the track name x Tracks Ctrl 1 LJ Snap Play Selected Area I8 12 Olg C lc Dass WSC DXi Default lt Ch 2 BB Drums 24 12 Drums o JMIDIout gt gt V SC DYI Default Ch 10 a E de Plano xi Default lt Ch 3 M 1 Now we can pick another style and only the highlighted areas will be regenerated using that style The rest of the arrangement will be unchanged This is a very powerful feature for customizing and tweaking your arrangements
179. acks window This window has 48 tracks each of which can be designated as a MIDI track a mono audio track or a stereo audio track When starting a new file any track can be set to any track type in the Tracks window Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 23 MIDI The default track type is MIDI as indicated by the MIDI plug icon A right mouse click on the track type button opens a whole menu of track options and we will reset the track to be a stereo audio track Audio Mono B Audio Stereo The track icon changes to show a pair of audio wave forms A mono audio track would show a single audio waveform The track settings are described in detail in the Tracks Window help topic For a quick look at the settings for any track just hover the mouse cursor over the track type icon and a pop up will give a summary of the current settings Track Type Stereo Audio Num Events 0 Volume 4 dB Pan 0 Aux 1 40 Aux 0 Aux 3 0 Aux 4 O Fx Slot 1 None Fs Slot 2 None Fx Slot 3 2 Mane FX Slot 4 Mane Click to Edit Track Parameters You ll have a great time recording your own audio and MIDI tracks in this window and you can also import wave files MP3s WMA files MIDI files and Karaoke files You ll find your Tracks window settings duplicated in the Mixer window where you will usually spend more time in the later stages of song production n The Mixer window opens with the mixer icon or with th
180. ads 161 Rock Blues 78 Rock British 74 Jazz Swing Style Styles CIT COMP CGOODTIME GRAVY GROVER GROVERW GUITEOSA HARTBEAT HELDBOSA HERBIEZ HIGHER HORACE ITAL POP J BASIN JI 1 BENNY JI CLUB J FPREDY J HOAGY J HONEY JI HTCLE J NATZ J NIGHT J SKY J 3KYZ J TEDYZ J ALHIRT J EDLANG J EDLNGZ J FGREE2 J FGREEN J CITULZ J LUZHZ J LUSH gt J LUSH4 J MANCN2 JI MANCNI J N_ORL J N_ORLZ J NAT J SATCH Re Build Find new styles q gq gag agg odgogogprggsqmgggocggdgodgggggggosogo Change Prototype Style Load Song Demo Guitar Comp Med Up Tempo Jazz Goodtime Smooth Jazz Groove Gravy Fast Jazz Swing Walts Grover Pop Style Grover W Fusion Guitar Bossa fast contemp Bos Hartbeat 2 4 Smooth Jazz Held Bossa Bossa style w Sust Herbie2 Funky jazz even 6th cr Higher Smooth Jazz Hip Hop Horacel loose ev 0 Jazz Bossa Italian Pop World Styles 2 VintdJs Basin Easy 40s 50s swin VintJs Benny East 230s swing VintJz Club 30z 40s sw Ballad VintJz Freddy mart rhy quit VintJz Hoagy 230 40 swing Jazsz Honey solo stride piano VintJz Hot Club 20s 40s HotZ3w VintJz Nat Cole2 40 Qt swing VintJz Nightvery slow ballad Vintds Sky 30s 402 bounce VintJz S3Sky2 20 40 bounce var VintJz Teddy2 stride Pno Quartet VintJz AlHirt NewOrl Jz Pop Jazz
181. ady have been played otherwise they will be heard again since the program will be restarting the song list from the first song in the list Your new song list should start from the song that you want to be played next 4 Then make any other changes to the song list such as substituting one file for another etc Use the Add to Play List button to add a song This action will add the song at the end To change the position of a file you can use Ctrl X cut and Ctrl V Paste keys 5 The Jukebox will stop after the current song 1s played since the Stop Between Songs checkbox is enabled Step 1 6 Press the Start button and the Jukebox will proceed to inform you that the song list has changed and will ask if you want to use the new song list Choose yes and the Jukebox will restart with the new song list Note If you edit the song list ensure that you don t exit the Jukebox until the new song list is playing Otherwise the new song list will be ignored If you make any errors while editing the song list you will be prompted to fix them before proceeding Real Time Control This command brings up a dialog box that lets you send either MIDI Pitch Bend or Modulation Wheel messages to your sound source These messages are sent out over the forced channel and port of a selected track The combo box lets you choose between Pitch Bend and Mod Wheel messages This feature isn t intended to be a substitute for a good hardware controller
182. aff roll mode also contains gray vertical lines across the staff Standard Notation Mode Notation Track 3 Opt Print amp Ch c1 Clean L T Auto f Rest cl T d RealBand Notation window in Standard Notation mode Standard Notation mode is a convenient way of displaying a track as regular music on a staff with chord symbols and lyrics The Notation window will draw brackets around an accidental in a situation where the same note in the previous bar was an accidental outside the current key Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 111 This is a courtesy which helps to remind you that the note is now played as expected within the current key Entering Chord Symbols Chords symbols can be entered in the notation for each beat of a song A beat is equal to the numerator of the current time signature For example if the song is 2 4 you could enter up to 2 chord symbols per bar If a song 1s 6 8 you could enter up to 6 chords per bar although you likely won t want to enter that many Chords are typed in from the computer keyboard using standard chord symbols like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13 9 E Chord entry 1s enabled when the Ch checkbox is checked in the Notation window Note Chords can also be entered by typing them in the Chords window To start typing in chords in a Notation Window Rewind to the beginning of the song Enable chord entry by clicking on the Ch checkbox Yo
183. ages You can specify a length percentage as a floating point number such as 110 54 This command shifts the time values of the events within the marked area of all selected tracks by a user specified value This value can be either positive or negative A positive value will slide the events forward in time and a negative value will slide them backwards in time This feature can be set in terms of Ticks 1 e PPQ or MS milliseconds 1000 1 second There is a combo box available next to the value field that allows you to choose between these two time formats The Data Filter offers refinements to the selection of exactly which type of MIDI events will be affected by the Slide MIDI Music command This handy feature lets you make changes to the MIDI channel s of the events in a marked area of any selected tracks The Old Low Channel and Old High Channel fields allow you to specify a range of channels that will be affected Conversely the New Low Channel and New High Channel fields allow you to select the range within which to re map the events For example let s say you wanted to change all the events in a marked region so that they are all on MIDI Channel 2 First choose an Old Low Channel of land an Old High Channel of 16 to encompass the all range of 1 through 16 Next select both a New Low and New High Channel of 2 e g arange of 2 through 2 This would have the desired result of all events in all MI
184. al track volume Change by to enter a value in the range of 127 to 127 Fade or increase volume Repeats You can add repeats to an arrangement Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks 75 Repeat Bars including this bar Number of Repeats The repeats display on the Chords window and both audio MIDI play with the repeats When the number in Repeat Bars is greater than zero a repeat will be enabled and repeat signs shown in the Chords window Now that you have generated BB Tracks for the chords you entered in the Chords window your next step might be to record some additional MIDI tracks along with the BB tracks Recording Your Own MIDI Tracks In addition to BB Tracks MIDI data can be recorded on any track in RealBand Just select the track by clicking on the track number and make sure that the track type 1s set to MIDI MIDI is recorded with the Input driver that is selected in the MIDI Driver Setup dialog Go to Options MIDI Devices to open the dialog If more than one Input Driver is available then choose the one that 1s connected to your MIDI keyboard or controller Before you start you might want to select a higher resolution for greater precision RealBand supports note resolutions as high as 3840 PPQ Note Higher note resolution reduces the maximum allowed song length as well as reducing the maximum allowed note duration length At 3840 PPQ the maximum song length of a 4 4 song is around 35 minutes long at
185. alBand can change the tempo of the audio track without affecting the pitch Tempo can be adjusted from 1 4 speed to 4X speed Pitch can be adjusted one Octave in one Cent increments a Cent is 1 100 of a Semitone Chapter 8 Audio Production 105 These features are also useful for learning your favorite up tempo song Load the file and play it back at half speed If the song is in the key of F but you would rather learn it in Eb transpose it down 2 semitones and continue playing at half speed As you master the song you can gradually increase the tempo until you can play along at full speed The Time Stretch and Pitch Shift dialog lets you stretch or reduce the length of the highlighted section of audio tracks Time Stretch or Reduce Enabled if checked then RealBand will change the length based on the following settings Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Time Stretch or Reduce W Enabled New Length Percentage 200 E New Speed Percentage 50 x Old Tempo 1115 New Tempo 57 5 Quality TIMESTRETCH_GUALITY_SBAND_SUM Quality Setting Info TBAND SUM The Fastest method but with the lowest quality May sound best on simple tracks BANO_ SUM Fast with better quality than 1RAMD SUM May sound best on simple tracks BANDO SUM Fast with better quality than 2BAMD SUM Pitch Shift iw Enabled Semitones 0 Lente o B From 6 4 108 Eg Thru UEM i o ost Cancel Help New Length
186. also create a blank text file called FAVORITE WS if you would prefer the program start out in an identical manner to previous versions of RealBand Although WS files can store information on whether or not a window 1s currently an icon minimized the exact locations of these icons are not available to be recalled when a WS file is loaded An Event List window that is displaying multiple tracks can also be restored when loading a WS file if it was part of the window setup However when restored it will display all the tracks regardless of which ones were being displayed before For example if you have an Event List window open for Tracks 1 2 and 3 and you proceed to 182 Chapter 13 Reference save a WS file the Event List window would be restored when the WS file is loaded However it will display all the tracks regardless of how many were displayed before Window Setup Normalize Window Setup This command resets all windows to the factory defaults When selected RealBand will restore the window locations and sizes that were in effect when the program was first installed Print This feature will send notation to your printer to be printed This is the same as the print button in a Notation window A Notation window must be the currently active highlighted window in order to print You can launch a Notation window by clicking on the notation button or by pressing ALT F2 Exit This command exits quits the
187. am Change field for any track will launch the Select Patch dialog This dialog lets you select a patch from the current patch list shown in the Patch List combo box For example if you select General MIDI then the patch list used for current track will be the General MIDI patch list RealBand saves the most recently selected Patch List for each track in its native SEQ files This example shows Roland GS which is an extension of the General MIDI list with variations alternate choices for many instruments To select a patch simply click on the patch in the main list box then hit the OK button to exit the dialog The Variations list box shows the variations which are patches in other banks that have the same number as the selected patch If the Always Show Bank 0 Names checkbox is checked the main list box will be filled with the patches of the default bank those patches with both the bank MSB and LSB being 0 and the highlighted variation is the actual patch that is selected If the checkbox is unchecked then the patches in the list box will change to those of the bank number of the current variation Only patches that have names will be in the list box e g if there are only 9 named patches in the current bank the list box will only be filled with 9 patches When you select a patch in the list box the number of the patch will appear in the Patch edit control 68 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features Sele
188. and 29 The VU Meters window can be left open for monitoring during F WE VU Meters u recording Input a Output The input levels should normally be active in the mid range of green segments with transient peaks in the yellow range Red indicates levels EH Cio EN that are too high and in danger of clipping which adds a cracking sound to your track When that happens the top red segment marked Clip will light up You ll need to adjust the input level To adjust input levels that are either too low or too high just click on this speaker icon to open the recording control window Note The appearance of this window is different for different sound cards The example shown is for a typical Sound Blaster Audigy card F A Recording Control Options Help MIDI Sunth what U Hear Analog Mis Microphone Wave Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance p LF 4 p 2 46 9 4 p 2 4 2 4 Volume Volume Volume Volume V alume LJ LJ Select Select Select Select Select SB Audigy Audio L800 Our recording input is the analog mix from an external mixer If you were to select What U Hear as your input you would also be recording the output of the BB tracks to your new track which 1s not something your would normally want to do D When you re ready press on the audio recording button in the toolbar and record your part as the RealBand accompaniment plays 3 Metronome l
189. and release would make sense Adjust the Attack so that the compression kicks in about the same time as the pre delay reverb and adjust the release long enough to hold back the reverb after a vocal line is finished Don t expect miracles You can reduce the reverb level but will rarely completely eliminate vocal reverb Judiciously use just enough compression to avoid ruining the overall fidelity Compare the dry sound against the processed sound The maximum vocal reduction setting could be extreme enough to ruin the instrumental quality Sometimes it is better to allow some vocal leakage to achieve the best sounding instrumental quality Is it better to allow some low voice leakage to improve the bass response Is it better to allow some high voice leakage to improve the cymbals and acoustic guitar After the PG Vocal Remover is adjusted as good as it gets try inserting an Equalizer plug in downstream Notch some frequencies to improve the effect If the output amplitude is inconsistent try inserting a compressor or peak limiter plug in downstream Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 281 Appendix B Keystroke Commands Generatelregenerate track 000000000 Generate regenerate track Play Stop play Play from start Record Record from start Unmutes current track Open next file Open previous file Ctrl F5 Preferences dialog Notation Window Options dialog Print Options dialog Edit Cut dialog Edit Copy dialog Ctrl V Edi
190. ands available for you to use when editing SysEx data Home Go to beginning of line End Go to end of line AHome Go to beginning of text AEnd Go to end of text 250 Chapter 13 Reference Up Cursor Up Down Cursor Down Page Up Up one page Page Down Down one page Right Cursor Right Left Cursor Left Right Cursor Right one word Left Cursor Left one word Ins Toggle Insert Mode Del Delete text Ctrl X Cut text to clipboard Ctrl Ins Copy text to clipboard Shift Ins Paste text from clipboard If you save a song to a SEQ file the SysEx data will be saved within the file However there are a few differences in the way SysEx data is saved to MIDI files since they must be saved as SysEx meta events For example if you save a file as a MID the SysEx information will be saved but the banks won t retain their individual names when the MID file is loaded back into RealBand If a bank has multiple SysEx messages in it such as a bulk dump each individual SysEx message is saved separately into a MIDI file If more than the maximum number 24 of SysEx meta events are read from a MIDI file into RealBand the additional banks will be added to bank number 24 Tips Use the Send All feature to send all the banks out via MIDI If you save a file called SOPTIONS SEQ RealBand will automatically send any SysEx banks with Autosend A enabled in that file This is useful if you want to have default SysEx data sent to
191. ar to the sound of a smoking guitar amp Use high gain for Marshall like electric guitar crunch In Rap Techno Industrial or Grunge styles it is common to use high distortion to fry drum synth bass or vocal tracks Record a tame drum machine groove and then distort the heck out of 1t for a nasty rap street sound PG Distortion IV Enable Distortion 3b Pre Gain Output Gain If the maximum gain doesn t fry the signal adequately make multiple passes on the same audio selection With three or more passes of distortion a signal can sound as ratty as your heart desires Pre Gain Adjust the amount of Soft Distortion Output Gain Reduce the final level of the distorted signal Distortion makes tracks sound louder Use Output Gain to compensate by reducing the final level PG RingMod PG Rinaldad M Enable RingMad 1000 100 640 on Bal 520 360 200 ll 40 0 Mad Freg BU 40 Ring Modulation is a strange effect which works best for non pitched sounds such as gongs unusual percussion and robot voices Ring Modulation is not a very useful effect on ordinary melodic or chord parts because it radically changes the pitch of the signal PG RingMod is a balanced modulator or four quadrant multiplier Carrier and Modulator signals are multiplied together and only the sum and difference frequencies are passed The original frequencies in each signal are suppressed Modulator Freq sets the fr
192. ard or mouse With Cycle Tones enabled if the Guitar radio button is selected the tuner will automatically play the guitar pitches in sequence If the Bass radio button is selected the tuner will play the bass pitches in sequence The UP and DOWN buttons cycle the pitches either up or down Period is the sustain time of each pitch in seconds With the default period of five each pitch will hold for five seconds before cycling to the next pitch Settings Guitar Tuner Settings iw Shut down audio input when Tuner ls Inactive iw Shut down audio input when generating Tones Close Help Tuner 1s always on top The Tuner main window remains above all other windows on the screen Sometimes this option does not appear to stick after it is set If the Tuner 1s set to always on top but doesn t stay on top close the Tuner and re open it to get the desired behavior Shut down audio input when Tuner is inactive When the Tuner window is not the active window it will close the sound input channel Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 171 This can help the Tuner work smoother on slow computers or free up the sound input driver for other programs which are running Shut down audio input when generating Tones When the Generate Tones window is active it will close the sound input channel This can help the Tuner work smoother on slow computers If the Audio
193. ard the name of the note that the cursor comes into contact with 1s shown in this white box This can be used for getting to know the note locations found on the guitar The lt backup and advance gt buttons allow you to advance forward or go backward by one note at atime The program will step play the note that you have advanced or backed up to You can stop the note from sounding by advancing or backing up to another note or by pressing the Stop button This feature is available so that you can hear and see a sequence of notes one step at a time The keyboard shortcuts to backup and advance are the Shift Left Arrow and Shift Right Arrow keys The lt backup group and advance gt group buttons work in a similar fashion as the previously mentioned backup and advance buttons except that these button allow you to see and hear a group or cluster of notes Notes that are within a certain distance from each other automatically determined by the program are considered to be such a group cluster of notes Keyboard shortcuts for the backup and advance group feature are the Ctrl Left Arrow and Ctrl Right Arrow keys Additional hot keys available for this feature are the 0 and numeric pad keys which can be used even when editing or viewing notation in the Notation window The Settings button offers a dialog that can change the following settings applicable to the Guitar window The Note Display Options checkboxes determines whether
194. are using software based MIDI synth setting both the Synth Output Latency and Audio Latency Delays will let you play record audio in sync with the MIDI Note When recording playing audio tracks along with a software based synthesizer the stability of the audio MIDI synchronization will vary depending on the stability and speed of your computer operating system and drivers Software based synthesizers have excellent playback quality but for recording situations a hardware chip based MIDI synthesizer may be best since hardware synths don t have an output delay and don t consume much CPU power Chapter 13 Reference 229 Master Tuning allows you to master tune your sound card or sound module useful if you re playing along with an instrument or recording that can t easily be re tuned like an acoustic piano A setting of 0 1s the default A 440 This setting is saved between RealBand sessions Master Tune This allows you ta MASTER TUNE your soundcard or sound module This i useful if you re playing along with an instrument or recording that can t easily be re tuned like an acoustic piana A setting of is the default 440 NOTE Mat all soundcards modules support Master Tuning Ones that do include the Roland Sound Canvas Yamaha 4G SoundBlaster amp w EB4 Live and more To see if pour soundcard supports Master Tuning press the TEST button Test NOTE IF using multiple output ports vau likely need to do indpenedent T
195. ark sections such as Intro Verse and Chorus using the Window Show e Markers Window option These buttons are used to jump to the next marker in either direction d um from the current location Now MEEERERIINM Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 57 The Now readout gives the current location in the song file The Now location is in bars beats and MIDI clock ticks according to the current resolution setting which could range from 48 to 3840 system clock ticks per quarter note ppq From MERGETINS 7 ENTER The From and Thru locations define the range of bars and beats that will be affected by the various Edit menu operations The settings are made in the Block menu or by selecting a range of bars in the Bars window the Audio Edit window or the track overview in the Tracks window RealBand defaults to showing the Tracks window Each row in the Tracks window represents a different track of the song Conductor Window Conductor Live Looping Playback Control As the song is playing there are options to control the flow of playback by one of three methods 1 Conductor window 2 QWERTY hot keys 3 MIDI keyboard amp The Conductor is launched with the Conductor button on the toolbar F Conductor Window Control during playback using QWERTY keys MIDI notes or buttons in this dialog Go to Sectio Enable control by MIDI keyboard A Bean E OK to change setting above by A Bb B in octave f
196. ase the original tracks using the Track Erase command Split a Stereo Track Into 2 Mono Tracks This command lets you split a single stereo audio track into two mono audio tracks This is useful in special situations such as if you wanted to use completely different effects on each of the two channels In the Stereo Source field type in the track number of a stereo audio track In the Destination Track For Left Ch and Destination Track For Right Ch fields type in two blank track numbers Press the OK button and RealBand will split the stereo track into two mono audio tracks Make all BB tracks regular tracks This allows BB tracks to be moved or renamed like regular tracks It also means the tracks won t be regenerated so it is useful safety feature to save a RealBand arrangement that you don t want to change Make first 8 tracks BB tracks The first eight tracks will be assigned the default BB settings If there are existing tracks present they will be moved down Chapter 13 Reference 205 The Action Menu This menu contains commands dealing with recording or playback Play P Play From Start Ctrl F Record R Record From Start Ctrl F Step Record Stop Test Audio Performance Play at Speed z5 Go to Ti FE 50 Ctrl oto Time 5 Go to Marker TI Jukebox Real Time Control Drum Grid Editor Panic Cache Patches Mow Mode On Messages k Convert Patc
197. assigned to them will function as subgroups A subgroup is a bus or signal path that gives you the ability to control several tracks as a group The Mixer Window chapter has full instructions for creating audio subgroups Real Time Effects Plug Ins RealBand supports DirectX and VST effects which you can apply in real time to the audio tracks A full range of PG Music effects is included with the program you can also use any other third party DirectX or VST effects to add effects in real time without permanently altering the actual track data Installing DirectX Effects Plug Ins DirectX effects are installed by default in the Program Files folder on Windows computers They will be present in the Plugin list in the DirectX VST window There is a Scan feature in the DirectX VST Options that will search for newly installed DirectX plug ins not on the list Installing a VST Effects Plug In Click on the FX button in the Mixer window or the DX Plug Ins button on the toolbar to open the DirectX VST Window UF DirectX VST Window AE ck LT oo Edit Bypass Plugin Load Group TI ca Group D m Load Prezet s E Save Preset E Delete Preset Add VST Plugin In the Plugin list select the Add VST Plugin 1tem at the bottom of the list Select a VST plug in dll file in the following Select a VST plug in dialog and it is added to the plug in list After you add each VST the plug in is permanently adde
198. ayback Bnk Bank Select This will send a bank select message followed by the track s current program change setting Some synthesizers have more than 128 patches The additional patches can be accessed by sending a bank select message which will cause the synth to switch to a different bank of patches See also the Options MIDI Out command Loop Loop MIDI Track When this setting is enabled a track will automatically repeat for the number of times specified The track will loop back to the start of the measure that contains the first event in the track If this setting is set to zero the track will not be looped Resizing the track columns You can resize the columns of the Classic Tracks View window as follows Move the mouse cursor to the top gray row and point it to the edge of the column you wish to resize The mouse cursor will change shape Click on the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the right to expand the column or to the left to reduce the Ich 0 1 column width Bass BE 2 0 Drums BB 10 0 1 Piana BB 3 Io lo h Meter Map The Meter Map contains a list of all the meter changes that occur during the course of a song 1 47H 37 68 8 TEI The Ins Del and Change buttons may be used to insert delete and change the entries in the Meter Map You may also insert meter entries by pressing the Insert key on your computer while in the Meter Map dialog Pressing the Enter key or doub
199. ayed in green JAT591 Banjo Bluegrass Doc Ev 1 Generic Audio AUD Out Microsoft Sound Mapper Generate RealTrack Favorites opens a list of recently used Real instruments for quick selection and generation Select and Generate RealDrums opens the RB RealDrums Picker for selection of a RealDrums style and options for the generation of the audio RealDrums Track names for generated non BB tracks are displayed in green HealDrums BossaBrushes Geneng Audio AUD Out Microsoft Sound Mapper Generate RealDrums Favorites opens a list of recently used RealDrums styles for quick selection and generation Generate MIDI Track opens a list box to select the part for a MIDI track to be generated on the current track Bass Drums Plano Guitar Strings Insert Volume Change will insert a MIDI controller into the track at the current location If a highlighted region exists then the program will ask if you want to apply this change to the highlighted region as opposed to a change at the location you clicked If applying the change to a region then program will insert a volume change at the beginning of the region and a 2 volume change at the end to restore the prior volume 64 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features If necessary the program will insert a controller at the very beginning of the song to preserve the original volume if you insert a volume change beyond the start of the track This will normally be done the first time you
200. ays attempt to automatically interpret the chord symbols using the Chord Wizard If set to Ask First then RealBand will ask before attempting to automatically interpret chord symbols If set to Never then RealBand will just load the file without attempting to figure out the Chord Symbols Audio Chord Wizard The Audio Chord Wizard is an extremely powerful feature that automatically finds chord symbols C Fm7 etc by analyzing the audio content of a song and displays them in a chord sheet window The song can be in a digital file format MP3 WAV WMA or CD audio file one that you created in RealBand or directly loaded from a CD In addition to the chords the Audio Chord Wizard also automatically determines the bar lines and a Tempo map 56 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features DE Send ta PTw The Audio Chord Wizard imports chord symbols it finds into the Chords window Use this feature to instantly play along to your favorite songs by reading and printing the chord symbols Playing a Song Use the familiar tape deck control buttons to Record Play Rewind to the e u m rs Forward to the end and Stop song playback Playback can be stopped and started anywhere in the song The fast forward and rewind buttons jump to either the end or the beginning of the song The red circle indicates the Record button for recording MIDI tracks Auto Rewind Auto Rewind is found in the Options menu When enabled Rea
201. b13 C7susb9 C13susb9 C7susb9b13 C7susb9 11 C13susb9F11 C7susb9 11b13 C7sus 9 C1l3sus 9 C7sus 9b13 C9sus 11 Cl3sus 9 11 C7sus 9 11b13 C7susb5 C13susb5 C7susb5b13 C9susb5 C9susb5b 13 C7susb5b9 C13susb5b9 C7susb5b9b13 C7susb5 9 C13susb5 9 C7susb5 9b13 C7sus 5 C13sus 5 C7sus 5 11 C13sus 5 11 C9sus 5 C9sus 5 11 C7sus 5b9 Cl3sus 5b9 C7sus 5b9 11 C13sus 5b9 11 C7sus 5 9 Cl3sus 5 9 11 C7sus 5 9 11 C1l3sus 57 9 1 1 Notes on entering chords It is not necessary to type upper or lower case the program will sort this out for you Any chord may be entered with an alternate root slash chord e g C7 E C7 with E bass Separate chords with commas to enter 2 chords at a time e g Dm7 G7 Tempo Map The Tempo Map is a list of all the tempo changes that occur during the course of the song Fy Tempo Map 1612822333 161283265 101 83 260 181283 2463 1901 85 186 181 85 39H 1902 81 113 182 81 316 102 H2 4H 182282 2243 182 82 4546 Tempo Map using Fill feature for a ritard The Ins Del and Change buttons shown above may be used to insert delete and change entries in the tempo map Y ou may also insert tempo changes by pressing the computer s Insert key You can change the tempo of the currently selected entry by pressing Enter key or by double mouse clicking over the desired entry The Delete key can be used to delete entries from the map If there is only one entry in the ma
202. bar lets you adjust the current time location 4 The Import button offers the ability to import a wave or waves into new projects provided the sampling rate and resolution of the file is supported by or can be converted by RealBand Otherwise the import button will be disabled grayed out Audio Chord Wizard Open Audio file WA V WMA MP3 CDA Select an audio file to load into the Audio Chord Wizard Audio Chord Wizard Use Existing Song Load the currently loaded song into the Audio Chord Wizard Open DirectX VST Plugins Configuration Open the DirectX VST window to select and edit effects plug ins Open DXi VSTi Synth Panel Configuration Opens the DirectX VST window with the control panel for the current synth Chapter 13 Reference 201 The Track Menu Duplicate Erase Erase Data Only Merge Convert Guitar Tracks Split Piano Track into LHIRH Copy Lyrics to Clipboard Align Music to Click Track Consolidate Audio Region Insert Blank Track Remove Track Swap Tracks Save Track to File Merge 2 Mono Audio Tracks to Stereo Split a Stereo Track Into 2 Mono Tracks Make all BB tracks regular tracks Make First amp tracks BB tracks Crum Patch Map Mone Clear Drurn Patch Map Re map Drums Patches This menu contains the following features Duplicate This makes an exact copy of a track You must select only one track as this feature is intended to duplicate one
203. button and then pressing the Shift key click Shift will make the note 1 half step sharper than the position that you click on Holding down the Ctrl key and then clicking Ctrl click will make the note 1 half step flatter and holding down the Alt key will make the note a natural Hold the key down until after you release the mouse button You can also insert notes by clicking on the Piano or the Guitar window Notes will be inserted at the current location in the Notation window Note By default you must hold the Ctrl key before clicking on the Guitar fretboard to insert a note into a Notation window If the Send Notes To Notation Windows option in the Guitar Settings dialog is enabled holding the Ctrl key won t be required but be careful not to accidentally insert a note when using the mouse to switch to the Guitar window Notes can be deleted by holding down the Delete key and then clicking over the note you wish to delete 80 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks Editing Notes Edit Note Notes can be edited with a right click directly on the note with to Delete Nate launch a menu of Editable Notation commands In addition to editing or deleting note events this menu has commands for adding section text and notation symbols Insert Section Text section Letters There 1s also a cleanup tool for controller events and 1 peg Motation Symbols E l advance backup to pinpoint the location of inserted notes Pane pane MG
204. by Microsoft WMV Windows Media Video is a compressed video format developed by Microsoft RealBand will load the audio from a WMV CDA CD Audio is the file extension used by Windows to make CD audio tracks available for loading into programs like RealBand Just put an audio CD into your CD ROM and then open a CDA file from that drive usually drive D Note This feature may not work unless running Windows XP or higher CDA files may not open in Windows Vista This command will also import MultiTrack WAV files by offering a choice of merging them to mono or placing additional tracks of the wave file onto separate tracks For example if Track 1 is the current track and Track 2 is empty and you import a Stereo Wave file RealBand will place the left channel on track 1 The right channel will be imported to Track 2 on the next available track which in this case is Track 2 since this track is empty A dialog will pop up which lets you select the time location to place the wave file s By default this 1s the current time Now of a song Export to Wave File This command will export the highlighted section of the current track to a wave file as long as the track contains audio data Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File This 1s an export command that will merge all the audio tracks to a stereo wave file while simultaneously rendering and merging the MIDI tracks to audio if you have a DXi or VSTi software synth W
205. c Slot Load DXi VSTi Synth into unused Slot loads in synth into the next available slot port and automatically assigns the track to that port However if the synth is already loaded into a port it will assign the track to that port rather than loading another instance of the same plug in So this command is basically the same as Specific Synth for MIDI track Load DXi VSTi Synth into specific Slot allows you to select the port to load the synth into and it loads another instance of the synth Immediately below the Port menu item is a menu command that lets you Set ALL MIDI Tracks to gt gt the same port as used by the track you are adjusting With Specific DXi VSTi Synth for MIDI track you can assign each track to a specific DXi or VSTi synth This allows you to use multiple synths in the same song Point to Specific DXi VSTi Synth for MIDI track then select the synth you want to use from the submenu Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 63 MI Bandstand WS Di Add VSTi Plugin Open DXi VSTi Synth Panel Configuration opens the DirectX VST Window This allows you complete control over assigning DXi or VSTi synths to ports processing the synth output with DX or VST audio effects and working inside your synth s control panel The help topic Tutorial Using DXi and VSTi synths with RealBand provides detailed instructions for installing and selecting these high quality music synthesizers There is also a Patch Select Dialog menu
206. c music accompaniment in a great variety of styles and also with our PowerTracks Pro Audio DAW program for solid sequencing of both MIDI and digital audio at an incredible price RealBand takes the main features of both programs and combines them into a full featured sequencer with automatic accompaniment PU Resand Listen SEQ RealTracks 2010 5 is here Tracks Ctrl 1 a c Pi Fie Ede Aude Track Action Block Options Window Mep x Ww PD gt Awe 8 E S Lt nmm N gt gt MS E Save Save As Plug Mode Pert Plugrs Syribs Preis Metronome P weet Audo Render pa D AI o m kde un RP LOO e u o 9 7 MY o Trads Bors Chords Meer PunoPob Tempos Comments Notation LesdSht Sysex Gute Meters Evertist AudoES Biglyks Drums Big Clock Cordxtor Rec Hay Rew FF Stop Pec Aude Pre Mark Na Mar Haters Mu Par Loop amp GJ P c S 9 5 Ese RealTracks 2010 5 is here Pres ll vu Meters fc r9 9 7 Bar Ending v T E JAZQUINT B B ns Jil Co 1 Genere BB song Set Bar Oise 0 Bass Of Conductor Window Control during playback using QOWIRTY keys MIDI notes or butto Go lo Sacti n al Bat Secton Name m ted 4 C sce Mey Selec aa Q 1 1 Counbin 63 lass BU 4 33 Acousbe tn TERM a A ae T re a First chorus 89 em MELOS 1 cce ler 7 UP m bo m m p n B sacton m mal 33 neme Y es fad VSC Ch 16 4 J 39 Middle chorus L 0 111
207. cds abad 248 A 120 a 179 A Hp 54 73 TODO Sca o ierit cen LR teat 215 Tempo Calculator teet 27 13 4 79 TEMP OANA cs side ca 247 Tempos precise floating point eee 54 153 Test audio performance sess 207 Eco LT mU ERO 58 213 time shift and pitch shift ooooccoccnnnnnnnnos 104 Inde SONA ud Gio Be atid aei UR dus 73 A TE 172 228 MRE TOC Da eset n HP 260 293 Toolbars add or remove buttons ooccccccccccnncnonononnnonnnnnos 42 dock able ossis A see e mend 42 lide ses iSi E M E Lore 232 NC OU SIZE sa ee MERC esset ERE E M ue M 39 A tabe tete pum at d ins 39 DIAS DS eene sesta lutte Ce o le 50 Reall TAG KS ooo D bem FRE RE 39 TrdC E Te DU id 201 Track NaMe io ea tb e RR E eon 257 Tracks WO Wi 45 61 disclosure triangle ias 45 61 drae and Qt eset ot tete ttai 67 dra dnd drop ouod pde edet aU 102 BO SRI 46 61 MIDI controls urnas 46 61 MIDI Output DOT dic 46 61 WETS ALAC ICS usina abia 46 61 mute unmuto tracks 45 es a AA ben stein dean es 45 61 OVETVICW CISPIAY cars ds pied 46 62 FOAL cheeses C 62 A se nan ees eens see 62 Play Selected area i testet eot iesus 47 66 jue E 62 right click audio menie rh 65 right click MIDI menu eeeeeeeee 62 o RR Oa A AAE EE 47 66 SULA Pic cea O O 47 67 track name tl aia 62 VOM o eise A epi cet 62 DOOM ee eek cea n LM EM Ut ULIS d 4T 67 TAC VA staat eget setae Oed An 2 AGT AUN Zar OT o noon
208. ce your Band in a Box song is in RealBand You can see by comparing the BB tracks in this image with the previous one that new BB tracks have been generated Both versions use the JAZQUINT style but any style could be used 34 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand BB Bass E ar 1 1 att Eg 258 Band in a Box Song fm 8 Y 2 Bar Ending RU da 32 Acoustic Bass v GM FJ JAZQUINT J SiS Songset Bar Offset 2 BB Drums pum an wan nm no Snap Play Selected Area Jaini out Microsoft GS Wawetable SYY Synth R si BB Piano Y T l Acoustic Grand Piano MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth R LS y BB Guitar of 25 Acoustic Guitar nylon L a MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth R BB Strings Y 24 umb s olt J 3 12 Vibraphone L MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SYY Synth R sa BB Melody v 24 12 Chit 12 Vibraphone L MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth R DU dP BB Soloist xi 24 12 air 27 Electric Guitar jazz MIDl out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth p Ze BB Audio xe Generic Audio L AUD Qut ASIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrerr R Bin BB RealDrums JazzBrushes 1 E iy Generic Audio vi AUD Out 4 10 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrerr R If your Band in a Box song has RealTracks they will be generat
209. ceased sa SaL EEUU e Ie atu 158 A ta resto t re ERR NEU FAR UAE 158 o TE anaes 158 A doa dava evita P ce ERE 141 Tutorial adding ReallracksS lia 31 arrangement settings in 26 294 audito TECOLGING recresen iay tii nU 29 BB songs with RealTracks 35 Entorno COS dodo 25 IEOS DE Sette boe t ee ne eee ee eon eae 33 venerate BB MACKS tad 28 A e E 21 importing BB SONYS cccccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 34 MIDES eee BE RR RR 28 O 27 Hav T9 aloe A cu tris 32 le W SONG o apes r PR PAPE den eas 24 regenerate BB tracks eseeuseeessese 32 SONG PIelerenCes ae etate etat ate t EOS 33 SONG SeCUITIDS Uu uu sert EAE 27 VIERIE lt r oes uie MM SEE Dd Mr 26 PARC EU oL o 30 O eee ee 193 uu ERES 193 DYNAMO S UT T 193 forced transposition mi 257 VST control AMON Ss isst ete o trt 90 install DIUg IT oe e a 86 TCINON Gate E E 87 e o THE TT 10 uninstall s ud RN 87 NAPE A 96 VII 239 Wave files a 40161 6111 6 See en ae nee nee en oe ee ere eee eee 199 TOA e ees eet ee eee aucun etna 199 A A aleeaieis 198 merge compressed oocccccnccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononinononos 199 METE VO er Oia 199 merseto WMA 199 multitracks player ninia i 200 Window SI DU Mu 181 Window TR evitados 233 Registration Form Please register your program Registering your PG Music software entitles you to free unlimited technical support advance notice of product upgrades and news about new product re
210. citing Real Instruments live recordings of top session musicians This is the same feature found in Band in a Box RealDrums also found in Band in a Box are similar to RealTracks except that they are generated from live recordings of top studio drummers You don t need to have Band in a Box to generate RealTracks and RealDrums but if you have a copy you can use all of your RealTracks and RealDrums from Band in a Box in RealBand Audio tracks are for your own live recordings such as a person singing or playing guitar or for imported audio files in the many formats supported by RealBand RealStyles Styles with RealTracks Some styles called RealStyles use only Real instruments Every track generated by these styles is a RealTrack playing audio from live recording sessions If you have RealStyles on your system usually in Band in a Box they will appear in a separate list in the StylePicker Category Styles All Styles 1 733 LLI_CE T 20 Crozzeower Style 1z0 ES SD 54 _BALADE Cory Ballad vw el quit 85 ES Other Styles Found 88 BALADP Cery Bal wf ped steel 65 RB ERA BALADE Rock Ballad vw 1 quit 55 ES Realotyles 34 m rite ma ak mM SIT LI TF 41 _EAGR _ GF styles with RealTracks 543 ELJ BES Styles with RealDrums 785 GEO FGF seu HANE BH Blues 242 Maium Classical 55 HNKF EN Country All 594 _HBFPGF Country Ballads 145 Ea Country Bluegrass 43 _ostr_B Country Clas
211. ck back into P status at any time during playback or recording Editing Fields within the Tracks window The following fields may be edited by moving the cursor over the particular field you wish to edit and then pressing ENTER or by double clicking the mouse while over the field Numeric fields may be increased or decreased by pressing the keys Track Name The name of a track Events The number of events in a track Ch Forced MIDI Channel When not set to 0 all events in a track will be sent out over the selected channel Key Forced Key Transposition This setting transposes the events in a track up or down by whatever amount you specify For example 12 will transpose down by 1 octave Vel Forced Velocity transposition This setting increases or decreases the velocity of the notes in a track by whatever amount you specify 258 Chapter 13 Reference Port MIDI Port This setting determines which MIDI port the data in a track is sent out If the port selected is greater than the number of available output ports the events in the track will be sent out the highest available port For example if only one port is available and you select port number 2 the events will be sent out of port number 1 Prg Program Change When this setting is enabled a MIDI patch change will be sent at the start of a song When you change this setting a program change will be sent out via MIDI This is convenient for auditioning sounds during pl
212. ck is a non BB track but it was generated individually from one of the generation options in Tracks Window popup menu or from one of the generation options on the Generate Button popup menu then the track name will be displayed in green The track name being displayed in green or blue means that the track can be regenerated using this command This feature is useful to regenerate if you had changed the song s tempo or just to generate fresh material Generate All will regenerate all Blue and Green tracks automatically Select Area You can click and drag to highlight a section of the song for editing AM SSA o ww A di Shift click Shift key left mouse button support makes it easy to tweak the beginning or end of the highlighted area If you Shift click before the start of the From Thru range or after the end of the From Thru range the highlighted area will be extended If you Shift click within the From Thru range the range will be reduced and the location you clicked on will become either From or Thru depending on which boundary was closer to where you Shift clicked the mouse f you keep the left mouse button held after the Shift click and you move the mouse you can adjust the boundary of the range while moving the mouse Click on Play Selected Area to hear the highlighted section being edited 66 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features J Le Snap Play Selected Area The and buttons upper fa
213. ck windows settings for the track the track name and type patch name volume and pan settings and effects settings MIDI tracks show an output port with an M prefix for a MIDI port or an S for a software synthesizer They have controls for volume pan reverb chorus modulation and expression plus a VU meter a MIDI patch selection box and a mute unmute button Audio tracks either have a prefix of A for an audio output or G for an audio subgroup on their output ports They have volume and pan controls a stereo VU meter a mute unmute button four assignable auxiliary sends and a track specific FX insert In addition to the track specific effects there are eight global busses that can each have four chained effects each You can assign each audio track to four different Aux busses and adjust the amount that each audio track uses the effects in each assigned bus If that isn t enough you can add four chained effects to each audio subgroup and also to the main output this will affect all tracks Mixer Controls Knobs To use the knobs click and hold the left mouse button while the mouse cursor is inside the knob and move the mouse cursor in a circular motion The knob s pointer will follow your mouse cursor movements In this follow mode you can even move the mouse cursor off the knob so that it isn t obscuring your view of the pointer Aux 3 Send 41 As you move any Mix
214. click on the green check mark to the right of the track name When you see a red X the track is muted Note If you wanted to add MIDI data to this project you would select one of the empty tracks and press the record button Mixer Window i n To adjust track volume level and panning controls open the Mixer window by selecting the Window Mixer menu item or by clicking the Mixer button on the toolbar palette You can solo any track or any combination of tracks by pressing the Solo button on the toolbar Select multiple tracks by holding down either the Shift key or the Ctrl key and clicking on the track numbers 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 cno 7 eno Pp eno pp eno 72 o ico 72 eno 77 eno 7 eno 7 eno 72 eno 77 eno 7 eno 77 eno e 7 Mp oo T oo 723 00 77 oo 72 00 77 o 2 o 72 o 7 oo 7 o 2 oo 3 noo oo 72 vo 7 vo 77 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G VE EH y EA VE VE yA Em E EN EN Em NM NM EN LI y Y cs cs cos cos cos cos cos cos eos cos cos cos cos eos 1 3 J J 5 J e 1 z J 8 J 9 J 10 J t1 J 12 J 13 J 14 J 15 J 16 suniqgiegas lt ga oued gg png gg sbuujs ga pole Bg 110105 payun 8 paun 6 Paw LL Paquin SL ag sseg gg sunig b 4 1 16 Default ture QD GS DLL em Del Ins m Mono Track Drums BB Select a track view range from the combo list or use the Mixer
215. combined with high Threshold and high Ratio can cause odd sounding decay tails Sometimes it can even sound distorted This is called Gate Chatter and is a common side effect on expanders If you hear Gate Chatter use settings that are more conservative Using Compressor and Expander Together High compression settings can raise low level noise between musical phrases To reduce hiss noise breathing sounds lip smacks kick drum squeak snare drum rattles or other quiet accidental noises between musical phrases enable both the Compressor and Expander Adjust the Expander to attenuate between musical phrases This keeps the Compressor from boosting undesirable sounds When both compression and expansion are enabled the signal first passes through the Expander then passes through the Compressor and finally the make up gain is applied PG Ten Band EQ PG Ten Band EQ offers reasonably fine level of frequency contouring Fine frequency contouring is useful to repair a track with tonal flaws but gentle tone shaping may sound more musical on tracks that basically sound OK but need just a little tweaking If a track does not require fine tailoring of narrow bands try PG Five Band EQ PG Ten Band EG i Enable EG Enable All Disable All Set Flat 12 Enable Band nl nl v Iv nl v Iv Frequency 3l Es 128 3250 500 71 16k m Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 267 Enable Band Though the processor load
216. control only high enough to remove clicks Note A long duration defect longer than a couple of milliseconds might sound like a click or pop until the high and mid frequency defects have been fixed On long duration defects the left over defect might sound like a thump DeClick Activity This displays the percentage of audio which is being muted Except for very worn records it is advisable to adjust the DeClick Amount so that the DeClick Activity reads no higher than a few percent On very good discs one might get perfect results with much less than one percent of DeClick Activity Strive to mute only the minimum necessary to clean your record NOTE If DeClick is set outrageously high the DeClick Activity reading can exceed 100 percent This is not a bug The DeClick section makes two processing passes in different frequency bands It can happen that the first pass will heal a bad click but the next pass will heal the left over residue of the click Sometimes a bad click will be repaired in multiple processing stages until the defect can no longer be detected as a tick or click With absurdly high DeClick settings the DeClick Activity can exceed 100 percent because both stages incrementally repair the same bad clicks DeClick Fill Gaps Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 277 When a click is detected it is smoothly snipped out of the midrange spectrum without affecting the lower frequencies at
217. ct Patch Patch List Roland WSC 5 mode hd Hammond Organ Percussiue Organ Rock Organ Church Organ Reed Organ Accordion Harmonica Tango Accordion Acoustic Guitar nylon Acoustic Guitar steel Electric Guitar jazz Electric Guitar clean Electric Guitar muted Patch 26 Send I Disabled Yarnations No Bank Change gt 18 MandolinT rem 3 Nulon 5 keel 16 Mandolin a 12 str Gt O Acoustic Guitar steel 1 Mandolin 2 Je Steel Gt 2 Recently Selected Patches You can select any patch by number by typing the number in the Patch edit control You can press the send button to send the patch change you just typed without having to exit the dialog The disabled checkbox simply means no patch change is selected for the current track and a value of will show in the Prg column of the Classic Tracks View window The Recently Selected Patches button brings up a dialog with a list of the 20 most recently selected patches if any recently selected patches exist Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 69 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks Overview As discussed elsewhere any one of RealBand s 48 tracks can be either a MIDI or audio track And for either type you have the option of recording and creating your own parts or using the musical intelligence of RealBand to create professional tracks for you When working with MIDI tracks RealBand uses its Band in a Box components to
218. current metronome settings and ignore any settings Channel 10 Key Velocity stored in SEQ files Duration Pet Keep these settings permanent ignore settings stored in SEG files Recording is stopped by hitting the spacebar or pressing the Stop button i When recording is stopped you will be asked whether or not you wish to keep the take Power I racks Pro 9 Remember that with MIDI recording small glitches are easily corrected so LA keep Take you don t need to discard an otherwise good take because of a minor slip e we Note If you see a message that audio data was recorded that is because Always Record Audio too if current track is MIDI has been enabled in the Audio preferences dialog This is an automatic backup feature in case you wanted to record audio but accidentally selected the current track as a MIDI track Auto Rewind Auto Rewind is found in the Options menu When enabled RealBand will automatically rewind to the location that playback or recording was started The choices are Recording Only Playback Only Both Recording and Playback or Disabled It is convenient to rewind to the start of a recording after a take so that you can listen to the result immediately wv Auto Rewind Recording only Record Filter Playback Only w Both recording and playback Disabled Preferences CkErl F5 Overdubs If there is MIDI data on the selected track it
219. currently selected track The Load Preset and Save Preset buttons let you save and load presets for the current effect The Delete Preset button lets you remove a preset from the list of already saved presets if DirectX VST Window Sle Track Options Edit Bypass Plugin Load Group Save Group Load Preset Es E L Bm Save Preset a E Delete Preset PG Dynamics iw Enable Dynamics Left Gain Right Iw Expander Gate m Clip ml Threshold Ratio Attack Release OOOO s Lm NN i Em iw Compressor Iw Auto Gain Threshold Ratio Attack Releaze Output Gain CHORD mh EN Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features 89 VST VSTi Additional Panel Controls VST is necessarily different from DirectX DX1 and some extra controls are available for VST plug ins DirectX DXi plug ins save their presets to the Windows Registry and only one setting is alive at a time VST VSTIi plug ins save their presets to disk files VST VSTi plug ins contain a bank of presets in memory You can switch between presets while editing and each edited preset 1s remembered in the current bank VST Generic User Interface VST VSTi plug ins are not required to have a fancy graphic control panel There are many faceless VST plug ins that have many adjustable parameters but no fancy control panel When you open such a plug in the control panel will look like this example RealBand presents one generic slider for each adjustable parameter i
220. d Thru is set to 1000 This will cause the entire song to be printed unless the song really goes beyond 1000 measures The program won t print beyond the end of the song If there are sustained notes that go beyond the measure in the Thru setting the program may print extra measures For example if the Thru setting is set to measure 5 and there is a note that is sustained until measure 6 the program will print measure 6 The Bars Per Line setting determines how many measures are drawn on each line of the print out in 4 4 If the Bars Per Line is set to 4 you will get 8 measures per line if the time signature 1s 2 4 The Clef Sign Every Line and Key Signature Every Line checkboxes let you decide if the printout should print the clef sign and key signature on every line The First Bar is Lead In setting causes the program to print an extra bar of music on the first line of the first page printed Use this setting in combination with the Bar Offset setting if the song has a lead in The Margins setting lets you change the left and right margins of the printout in inches When the margins are set to 0 the program will print as wide as your printer will support Therefore there may still be margins if your printer can t print on the edges of the paper The Show Bar Nums combo lets you choose where you want bar numbers to be printed When the Include Notes checkbox is checked
221. d Wild Cards are allowed as shown in the illustration above For example suppose the Play List String is C WINDOWS CANYON MID C RealBand SEQ D MIDIFILE MID In this example the program will first play CANYON MID followed by all the SEQ files in the C RealBand directory This would be followed by all the MID files in the D MIDIFILE directory The Play List String can be up to 1024 characters long When the Random checkbox is checked the Jukebox feature will play all the files in a random order Otherwise songs will be played in the order in which they are physically encountered There are many 3 party disk utilities which can be used to re sort files in a given directory based on selectable sort options such as file size alphabetical file date etc The Open button allows you the option of loading a JUK file A JUK file simply contains a pre made Play List String If you save a JUK file with the Save button the current Play List String can be saved to a JUK file If you later load the JUK file with the Open button the Play List String stored in the file will appear in the Jukebox dialog The Add to Play List button lets you add a file to the play list from a File Open dialog without having to type the file name into the Play List String field The Delay field lets you insert a user definable delay in milliseconds thousandths of a second that the Jukebox will pause between playback o
222. d ute SHIFT kay Now land goto stari Chons jA Section 15 Screen 0 it bars F Delaut Mode lor going back or ahead ETE tempa Peek l Now land go to start v Piya L Sep Er Copyright O PG Music Inc 2010 All rights reserved PG Music Inc License Agreement CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE USAGE OF THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSE A The program may only be used on a single machine B You may transfer the program and license to another party if the other party agrees to accept the terms of this Agreement If you transfer the program you must either transfer all copies whether in printed or machine readable form to the same party or destroy all copies not transferred This includes all modifications and or portions of the program merged into other programs C You may receive the program in more than one media Regardless of the type or size of media you receive you may install or use the media on a single machine D The program including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the program is owned by PG Music Inc or its suppliers and is protected by international copyright laws and international treaty provisions You may not use copy or transfer the program or any copy modification or merged porti
223. d and then return to the custom fretboard The String Tuning setting determines the range of notes that are displayed on each of the six strings The default is Standard E Tuning You can change the note value corresponding to the open note for each of the six strings The guitar fretboard will appropriately display the notes as if they are played on a real guitar set to an alternate tuning The Send Notes To Notation Window setting when enabled offers the ability to insert a note directly into a Standard Notation window by mouse clicking on the appropriate note position on the virtual fretboard Notes will be inserted at the current time location of the opened Notation window The Show Notes at Aeolian Position setting when enabled will show guides on the guitar fretboard based on the current key of the song For example in the Key of C the Aeolian Position can be thought of as an A Minor scale at the 5th Position Aeolian Mode with the root of the minor scale being on the 6th string of the guitar Roots of the relative major scale are shown with orange circles The Show Notes at Phrygian Position setting when enabled will show guides on the guitar fretboard based on the current key of the song For example in the Key of C the Phrygian Position can be thought of as an A Minor scale at the 12th position with the root of the minor scale being on the 6th string of the guitar We ve named this the Phrygian Position since in the Key of C if y
224. d at its best if the Bass button is selected In addition the Fretboard display changes according to the selected instrument The Guitar setting displays a standard tuned six string guitar The Bass setting displays a standard tuned six string bass If tuning a four string bass you would look for the middle four strings in the display If tuning a five string bass ignore the C string Numeric Pitch Hz Display the frequency of the incoming signal As with the Cents pitch display if the pitch becomes unreadable this control will freeze and remember the last good reading Hum Filter The tuner works best if you give it a signal with little hum or noise Hum can make the pitch measurement jittery If you can t keep your guitar from humming then the hum filter may help Note The Hum Filter nearly doubles the processing work that the program must accomplish so it may not work very well on slower computers More Opens a window that displays the most recently detected note on the piano keyboard and the guitar fretboard The tuner program has no way to know what string you are playing so non open guitar notes may show up on the wrong string in the display though it will properly indicate the correct note pitch Tones This button opens the Generate Tones dialog to create wave tones for audible tuning reference Generate Tones Generate tone references for tuning by ear This may be preferable if you do not have enough gain
225. d to the list You only have to add each plug in one time 86 Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features Remove VST VSTi Plug In You can remove a VSTi or VST plug in that you have installed This only removes the VST VST1i plug in from RealBand list of remembered VST plug ins The feature does not uninstall a plug in or delete any plug in files After you remove a plug in from view in RealBand that plug in still remains usable to any other VST program where you prefer to have it available To remove a VSTi or VST plug in from RealBand Click on the Options button in the DirectX VST Window to launch the DX VST Options dialog H VST Plugin fram list Select the Remove VST Plugin from list button Select the plug in to remove so it 1s highlighted in the list then click the Remove button x Select Plugin To Remove From List Boss SD 1 JCM S00 PS 1 Rednef Twin Tube Screamer LInrvibe Bandstand 5T Hemove Uninstall a VST VSTi Plug In If you want to permanently delete a VST VST1 plug in from your computer first check if the plug in has an uninstaller in the Windows menu Start Settings Control Panel Add or Remove Programs If an uninstaller is available that 1s the best way to get a clean plug in uninstall With plug ins that do not have an uninstaller it is safe to drag the plug in s DLL and any other plug in support files to the Windows Recycle folder DX VST Options The Options butto
226. dio file into RealBand and then immediately launch the Audio Chord Wizard Note The Audio Chord Wizard estimates the chord progression of an audio file It is NOT an Audio to MIDI transcriber which would be a much more elaborate program Tutorial The Audio Chord Wizard button on the toolbar launches the Audio Chord Wizard This button will pop up a dialog that gives you two choices Open Audio File or Use Existing Song Use existing sang If you choose the Use existing song option then RealBand will launch ACW using whatever song 1s currently loaded into the program You will also be asked a question about whether or not to preserve the existing bar lines If you choose to preserve existing bar lines then ACW will only attempt to automatically detect chord symbols rather than bar lines and tempo information The Audio Chord Wizard opens the audio file and makes initial calculations finding audio beats and estimating a tempo map And then Audio Chord Wizard displays your audio file Primary Program Controls Toggle Play Pause Space bar or Play Pause key Stop play rewind to start with Esc key Tap Barline F8 Moves nearest bar line to current play position F8 key or Enter key also set bar lines OK Send ta PTW Exit and send chords to RealBand Exit without sending chords to RealBand Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 147 Avg Tempo Average tempo right click for options Time Sig
227. dividual lyrics Enter and Close button added to lyric entry More Soloists are now available up to 2000 RealTracks Picker dialog enhanced Opens up faster New Columns added tempo swappable holds type StylePicker is enhanced Favorites and Recent styles now appear in this dialog as separate lists It now has the ability to add remove styles as favorites A Favorite Style indication F shows up for each style You can filter any list by only showing favorite styles Over time you can build up a list of favorite styles and only show them when needed Many messages changed to yellow alerts at top right of screen so that you don t have to respond to the message interrupting work flow Delete Key DEL for Notation Window deletes currently highlighted section Comments window stays on top and has selectable font size useful for pasting reading lyrics or comments Jukebox now supports BB files MGU and SGU Repeat signs now displayed on notation and leadsheet windows Big Clock window has setting to not show ticks or milliseconds during playback During play will only show bars beats but while stopped shows bars beats ticks 20 Chapter 2 New Features in RealBand 2010 5 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand What is RealBand RealBand is your all in one audio workstation and accompaniment program You may be familiar with PG Music s award winning Band in a Box program for intelligent automati
228. domly affected by out of tune melodies or loud drums However if the first estimate reads 43 and the next measurement reads 12 then it probably means that your song is not a good candidate for automatic Tuning Estimation Estimated Tuning Very Good Excellent Bar 97 is estimated to be an average of 8 Cents Flat Best results are achieved by testing a bar which does not have vocals guitar horn bends scoops or excessive drum fills Vocals or horns can be significantly off center and still sound fine but this can confuse the tuning estimation If you received a poor confidence rating you can spot check other likely bars to see if you get a better estimation The tuning estimation will also be better if you have already set a qood Bar One position If you measure a solo instrument track rather than an entire music mix the measurement might be entirely acceptable but still return a deceptively low confidence score 152 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Odd Length Bars and Drastic Tempo Changes If a 4 4 song contains occasional bars of 3 4 5 4 or whatever or if there are sections where the music has an extreme ritard or accelerando sometimes you can just Tap Bar Lines to adjust it But it is sometimes more convenient to manually add or delete bar lines The following example song has an overall Time Signature of 4 4 but Bar 9 should have a time signature of 2 4 If you simply Tap Bar Line on 9 3
229. ductor is launched with the Conductor button on the toolbar 154 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins F Conductor Window Control during playback using QWERTY keys MIDI notes or buttons in this dialog Go to Sectio MIDI keyboard contro Enable control by MIDI keyboard CISPERETUS BOOKS atbar OK to change setting above by A Bb B in octave f Middle Chorus Begins at bar Adjust Octave o Show MIDI nates Enable Control by QWERTY keys Last Chorus Begins at bar Mode when to do the action for section or go back ahead Default F NOW and go to start Loo Chorus a Section s Screen d bars f NOW go to same rel pos Bar 2 4 Bars x Part c Frew v OFF b Next BAR Next PART MARKER GoBack Chl key Chorus Section s Screen d bars f Next CHORUS Nest SECTION Bar z 4 Bars 2 Part c E 5 Ms Default Mode for section change Go Ahead fuse SHIFT key Now and go to start peas oy Serinin Sneen beis Default Mode for going back or ahead Bar 4 4 Bars Part C Now land go to start W Enable Control by OWERTY keys You must enable the QWERTY keys to be active for the Conductor during playback This is done by selecting the Enable Control by QWERTY keys checkbox on the Conductor Window MIDI kepboard contro Enable control by MIDI keyboard OK to change setting above by amp Bb B in octave
230. e Pos rene 215 Drum WY MINOW cerere 167 Drom Grid BIOL sett re ee tti et uno 209 Drum Kit KON c N 166 SEITE REPARTO On teta etia nC siet tr 166 Drum Kit WindoW cccccccccncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 164 A II ede diedtesudec e EN CU dd aM 204 re map drums patches eeeeeeeeeusee 204 Drupal ns adds 194 Dump Request Met0 aie rete totes Eo id 250 MS 201 DXi Synth SUDDOLL 6 on eo rooted uto EC Rd s 51 DXi synthesizer BE FSC UNO they ciate A acce dde 52 A a 52 DXi Synthesizer i110 bl OPORTO 51 A A a E E 52 audio TCNGCTING aan ada 53 Herb catorce oibu datas shasta rico ia tU e 9 51 Eo ri EE A eiue laete Gaia dios 83 107 a 187 CODY a 185 vl tera a 183 floating point percentageS cccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 191 insert blank DTS asadas 196 js 185 randomize milliseconds 195 rechanne by A pomo setenta iuuat eee 195 split MIDI drums eese 83 197 sterco IIT O1 o PNE UM p 102 SYSE LEVON dei 78 249 A ee Rn d ne 46 61 EUA Cm 182 Editable notation ccccccccccccccccccecececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 112 Editable Notation amet 80 Editing aio Mac kS eeano EEEE 100 o es 82 MID ERE ET ee D easton rea uae 79 A TTE 81 A heehee eae 97 A hai cera eee maar 113 EGAN SOMOS A a 79 Editing stereo AA bo p th leta ebbe 97 Effects A O ae Puta rode edd 104 TEAM HII uc oet eee otii eie ate ee 143 Eliminate Note
231. e Real Track instrument See the Artist Bio box for information about the player The letter Y in the TS column means that Tempo Swapping is supported for the instrument If you have similar RealTracks available at different tempos Band in a Box automatically chooses the best one to use Holds indicates whether that RealTrack supports shots holds and pushes If there is a number there other than a blank field then they are all supported show Reall racks that are N A This will show RealTracks that you do not have installed yet or may not have purchased The missing Real Tracks will be marked in the N A column w Show FiealTracks variations Variations of RealTracks use the same performances but with different settings w show Lempo ts out of Range This will show RealTracks that wouldn t work well at the current tempo The acceptable range is 15 and 40 of the source tempo of the RealTracks Filter by The filter is another feature that makes it easier to select a RealTracks Update Show All instrument For example type Blues in the edit control box and press the Update button to see a list of Blues instruments available including instruments from other genres that are suitable The Show All button clears any filter and shows all available RealTracks IRT591 Banjo Bluegrass Doc Ev Track names for generated non BB tracks are displayed in green Generic Audio For example if you had ge
232. e Ruler panels only Bar Beat Tick is displayed In the left Piano panel only Pitch 1s displayed In the Graphic Event panel Bar Beat Tick and Event Value are displayed Chord Ruler and Note Time Ruler Panel There are two top rulers The top Chord Ruler displays chords and the Playback Location Indicator The Note Time Ruler displays bars and bar subdivisions When zoomed in more subdivisions are displayed When zoomed out fewer subdivisions are displayed Chords Ruler Insertion Point Playback Location Indicator Amg IE D9 D7 C E7H9 Note Ruler Click or drag in the Chords Ruler to set the Insertion Point useful if you wish to use the menu Edit Paste Ctrl V to paste into the Piano Roll If a song is playing a Chords Ruler click will stop playback Double click the Chords Ruler to start playback at the indicated bar You can also set the Insertion Point and then tap Ctrl G to start playback at the desired location Notes can be selected with the Note Ruler However the Note Ruler does not select non note events such as controllers or pitch bend 1 Click drag on the Note Ruler to select a time range of notes 2 Shift click drag to add a time range of notes to the selection 3 Ctrl click drag to invert the note selection of a time range Chapter 10 Piano Roll Window 133 For instance you could drag to select all notes in bars 2 thru 7 Then you could Ctrl drag to toggle off note selections in bar 4 By using the S
233. e a selected group of events Shift click drag vertically on one of the events in the selection Edit Event Time Move the cursor over the bottom half of an event A left right cursor appears Click drag horizontally to slide the event in time To slide a group of events Click drag on one of the events in the selection Insert Events Line Tool With no modifier keys when the cursor is over white space in the Graphic Event panel it becomes a Line Tool Move the cursor to white space and then click drag to draw a line When the mouse button 1s released a series of events are inserted which follow the line slope To avoid choking the MIDI stream the maximum event density is one event per 10 ticks Repeated events of the same value are not inserted Therefore long gradual Line Tool fades have a lower density than short extreme Line Tool fades Pencil Tool Move the cursor over white space and hold the Shift Ctrl keys A Pencil Tool appears Shift Ctrl drag to freehand draw a curve If you don t get the curve right on the first pass keep holding the mouse button and move the mouse back and forth to draw your desired freehand curve When the mouse button is released a series of events are inserted to follow the freehand curve To avoid choking the MIDI stream the maximum event density is one event per 10 ticks Repeated events of the same value are not inserted Delete Events Select events with the Ruler or by clicking on them then ta
234. e common Ctrl X cut Ctrl C copy Ctrl V paste and Delete keys to edit the text Note If column alignment of the text appears ragged adjust the font and tab spacing in your word processor or the column 176 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Chapter 13 Reference This chapter describes the pull down menu commands in RealBand The information discussed in this chapter 1s divided into separate sections based on each menu The File Menu New Mew Template Open Open Audio Chords WEI MPS COA Save Save As Save As Template Import Open Mext File ShiF F8 Open Previous File Shift Ctrl Fe Open Backup File Save Song 45 Default Template File Utilities Load Scrap Save Scrap Wave Files Remap to AR Format Window Setup Print Exit Olt F4 The File Menu contains commands that are related to loading and saving files New This command clears the current song from memory so that you can start a new song If you ve changed the current song since you last saved it you will be prompted as to whether or not you wish to resave the file with changes before clearing the file from memory New Template This command will let you create a new song using a template A template is a file that is used as a starting point when creating a new song A Choose Template dialog box will pop up that shows a list of all available templates Select one and then start working on your so
235. e copies the selected area and places it on the destination track Existing content on the destination track is overwritten The original source track is left intact 4 Copy to new location and merge copies the selected area and merges it with the existing content on the destination track The original source track is left intact Drag And Drop MIDI Or Audio Files Into The Tracks Window You can drag a file such as a WAV file from a folder directly onto the Tracks window The file will be placed on the track you dropped it on at the location onto which you dropped the file The types of files that are supported are the audio files supported by RealBand such as MP3 WAV and WMV In addition to audio files MID files can be dropped onto the tracks window too If the file is a multi track MID it will be imported onto free tracks beyond the highest occupied track If you hold the Ctrl key when dropping the file then the file will be inserted at the time location and any existing data moved beyond the end of the file that is being inserted rather than overwriting any existing data NOTE this feature will only insert files on measure boundaries Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 67 Classic Tracks View Settings E Classic Tracks View O 1 AcousticOl Click your mouse anywhere on a row to select that track The number of the currently selected track Tr is highlighted in blue Ty Type e u a P Play Status Name Trac
236. e effect The effect compares the relative level between center and side channels so no processing takes place unless there is a significant difference between the loudness of the center versus side channels Vocal is not the only sound which can trigger the compressor Any loud midrange center instrument could trigger the compressor so if you crank the Amount too high snare drum or other loud center instruments may unpleasantly pump the side channels Reduce Reverb Attack Slider 280 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins Works like a compressor Attack control Move the slider to the left for faster response to sudden increase in loudness when the vocalist starts a phrase Move to the right for a slower response to sudden increase in loudness Reduce Reverb Release Slider Works like a compressor Release control Move to the left for faster recovery after the loudness diminishes when the vocalist ends a phrase Move right for slower recovery Adjusting Reverb Reduction Experiment to get a feel for what works There may be some songs where the reverb can t be improved and in those cases just disable the Reduce Reverb Checkbox Some vocals have short pre delay and reverb tails Short attack and release would make sense Some songs especially ballads have loud balloon reverb tails with long pre delay Since the reverb comes in after the vocal phrase begins and lasts a long time after the vocal phrase ends longer attack
237. e hot key combination Ctrl 8 or with the menu command Window Mixer A right mouse click on any track strip brings up the same menu of track settings as in the Tracks window These settings are explained completely in the Mixer Window help topic There are many additional and powerful features in the mixer including real time audio effects with lots of routing options This is where you will put the professional finishing touches on your song productions The Chords window is where automatic song arrangements begin Creating a New Song Arrangement Note This follows the RealBand tutorial video and expands on some of the topics found there m To generate a new song arrangement you begin by typing the chords into the Chords window using standard chord symbols This window opens with the C7 button the hot key combination Ctrl 3 or the menu command Window Chords Band in a Box users will feel right at home Fj Chords Ctrl 3 You ll see the bars of the song displayed in rows If a bar contains chord symbols they will be displayed to the right of the bar number 24 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand Entering chords Enter the chords for your song by typing them in using standard chord symbols such as C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13 9 E For example type c6 to get the C6 chord Note that you should never have to use the Shift key as RealBand will sort this out for you Use b for a flat e g Bb7 Use or 3 for
238. e ll start at bar 1 and end at bar 8 Ok j Cancel e Bar Ending We d like RealBand to add a 2 bar ending to our song so we ll check the 2 Bar Ending box AZZ Next we ll choose a style for our song by clicking on the style name to open the StylePicker window You aren t required to have Band in a Box for your RealBand styles but if you do you will see that all of your styles are available here Select Style Prototype Style 77JA77 STY Jazz Swing Style Load Song Demo Other Styles Found 60 RealStyles D Styles with RealTracks 27 Styles with RealDrums 701 Blues 176 Classical 55 Country All 411 Country Ballads 92 Country Bluegrass 36 Country Classic 154 Country Folk 43 Country Rock Pop 170 Country Southern Gospel 29 Jazz Ballads 71 Jazz Bebop 43 Jazz Big Band 10 Jazz Dixieland 10 Jazz Fusion 97 Jazz Latin 79 Jazz Modern 96 Jazz Smooth Jazz 44 Jazz Swing 158 Latin All 238 Latin Cuban Salsa 34 New Age Soundtrack 70 Praise amp Worship Gospel 89 R amp B Soul 79 Reggae 30 Rock Pop All 752 Rock Ballads 151 Rock Blues 78 Rock British 74 CIT COMP CGOODTIME GRAVY GROVER GROVERW GUITEOSA HARTBEAT HELDEBOSA HERBIEZ HIGHER HORACE1 ITAL POP J BASIN J BENNY J CLUB J FPREDY J HOAGY J HONEY J3 HTCLB JI NATZ JI NIGHT J 3K
239. e song Disable RealT racks for this track Force this track to MIDI Since RealTracks can be stored in a style you need to set this checkbox to Disable to ensure that the current part will have its RealTracks disabled Audition This plays a WMA demo of the currently selected RealTrack To help make your selection you can sort the list by clicking on any of the column headings As well as Name Instrument Type Rhythm or Soloist Feel Even or Swing Tempo Genre and Number there are more columns with additional information about each RealTrack instrument The tempo shown is the base or typical tempo for the RealTracks instrument as it is played but RealTracks have a tempo stretching capability that enables their application over a wide range of tempos If saving a song with RealTracks and the audio base tempo is different than the song tempo a warning message will show asking you to confirm that you want to save it like this The N A column shows N A for RealTracks that you have not installed yet or haven t purchased if Show RealTracks that are N A is checked Set is the number of the RealTracks set that includes the instrument The Stereo column shows whether the instrument playback is stereo or mono Instruments with an N or Gt in the Chart column will display the RealTrack in notation The Artist column has the name of the musician playing on th
240. e stretch methods may be added in the future but currently two basic methods are available SUM and AUTOCORR SUM is a fast loop finding method which can work well on monophonic tracks or with multi band processing SUM is pretty smooth with minimal echo click artifacts SUM s Achilles heel is a fluttery tremolo effect AUTOCORR is slow but finds better loops AUTOCORR has less tremolo effect than SUM AUTOCORR s Achilles heel is a hard edged short echo artifact most noticeable on percussive tracks such as drum guitar or piano The artifacts may not be noticeable on smoother tracks such as vocal or horn If multi band processing is applied to a simple audio track you may like the effect because if could make a track sound fatter But if single band processing doesn t exhibit undesirable artifacts single band processing on a simple track may sound more faithful to the original band 2 band 4 band 8 band defines how many frequency bands are independently time stretched Band splits might add a slight comb filter effect For instance on guitar a 2 band method may sound more coherent than a 4 band method But the 4 band method may sound smoother than the 2 band method I BAND SUM The fastest method but with the lowest quality May sound best on simple tracks 2 BAND SUM Fast with better quality than IBAND SUM May sound best on simple tracks 4 BAND SUM Fast with better quality than 2BAND SUM Good for simple tracks
241. ealBand 2010 added over 30 cool new features to RealBand 2009 and now the update to version 2010 5 adds many more Here are the major new features added in RealBand 2010 5 Conductor Live Looping Playback Control As the song 1s playing many single key hot keys are now available to control the playback and looping of the song This is ideal for live performance or jam sessions where you want full control of playback The loops happen seamlessly so are suitable for the dance floor In addition you can control PowerTracks from a standard MIDI keyboard pressing MIDI keys that correspond to each of the functions There are over 80 conductor functions in all 2 Shift click Tempo mapping for MIDI Tracks Tempo mapping allows you to align a freely recorded MIDI performance 1 e not recorded to a click track such that it displays properly in notation and follows the bar lines correctly but still sounds exactly the same as how you recorded it To do this select Align Music to click track from the Track menu and choose the option to Insert tempo changes Plus Double Half time feature in RealTracks dialog Forced accidentals supported in notation Shift click extends the highlighted area in the Chords window Note RealBand 2010 5 is a free upgrade for owners of RealBand 2010 New Features in RealBand 2010 These new features were introduced in RealBand 2010 There s a new Plug in mode allowing you to simply Drag n
242. ealBand track s assigned channel Except for perhaps multi channel Guitar tracks RealBand plays all track events on the assigned track channel Therefore in almost all cases the channel of track events does not matter 132 Chapter 10 Piano Roll Window Note Duration Cur i C OJ d View Edit Graphic Data Controller a i ENE Volume MSB Cursor Location Info Panel 22 14 E 2 Set the default duration of new inserted notes It is easy to mouse edit a note s duration after a note 1s inserted so it is usually sufficient to select a typical note duration that makes sense for your purposes and then mouse edit the duration of exception notes after they are inserted Determine what graphic data to view or edit in the bottom Graphic Data panel Choose Velocity Controller Program Change Channel Aftertouch and Pitch Bend If Chan is not set to All only the selected channel events are displayed If View Edit is set to Control the Controller Type becomes visible The Graphic Data panel will display the chosen controller type If Chan is not set to All only the selected channel events are shown The Info Panel shows the cursor s Bar Beat Tick and MIDI note or controller value depending on the cursor location In cursor locations where a value would be nonsensical this appears blank For instance in the Note panel Bar Beat Tick and Pitch are displayed In th
243. easures that have been specified in the From Bar and Thru Bar fields will be filled with the Track a i loaded pattern The pattern will be repeated until the selected ending bar is reached From Bar Shuffle Rack b dp Soul a dp Cancel Help Note Filename DP files are simply MIDI files containing a short MIDI drum pattern saved with the DP extension You can create your own DP files by recording them yourself i e with the virtual MIDI drums plug in Technically any MIDI data can be saved to a DP file but it makes sense for them to only contain a short drum pattern instead of additional instrument parts Randomize This feature will randomly alter the start times velocities and durations of notes within a marked area of all selected tracks This command can be used to alter the timings and dynamics of notes in a quantized track so that the track sounds less robotic and has a more human feel to it Use this setting sparingly otherwise it may cause a track to sound sloppy This command can be undone with the Edit Undo menu item The Min Start Time Offset is the lowest amount of ticks that the program can move a note backward in time The Max Start Time Offset is the highest amount of ticks that the program can move a note forward in time Chapter 13 Reference 195 For example if the Min Start Time Offset is 5 and the Max Start Time Offset is 2 and a note begins at 2 01
244. eature saves you the trouble of having to keep using the File Open command and repeatedly type in the file names Open Previous File This feature will open the previous file found in the current file directory or folder The order is based on the alphabetic order of the files This command is most useful when you ve been using the Open Next File command and you need to go back to a previously loaded file Open From Clipboard If data is in the Windows Clipboard in the form of a Standard MIDI File the Open From Clipboard feature will use the data to load the entire file from the Clipboard into RealBand This is similar to loading a file from disk except that the file is loaded from the Clipboard instead This command provides a quick way of transferring an entire file from another program e g Band in a Box into RealBand Save Song as Default Template This will save the song as OPTIONS SEQ so that the song will be loaded automatically whenever starting a new song with the File New command File Utilities Submenu Change Directory Path This command lets you change the current working directory for loading saving files A dialog box will pop up prompting you to select a new directory Tempo Calculator Tempo Bars Time seconds Tempo Calculator Desired Length of Music in Seconds 60 E Number of Bars of Sang 45 Tempo iso H TIF highlight Field with mouse and press Ctrl C to copy to clipboard
245. ed 50 Cents sharp There could be many reasons that a song was recorded off Concert Pitch Maybe the recording studio had a broken tape recorder or the singer couldn t quite hit the highest note Maybe the vinyl record cutter was off speed or some Record Executive decided that the song was 10 seconds too long for airplay and instructed the Mastering Engineer to speed it up a little bit In such cases ACW can get confused misidentifying some pitches too high and other pitches too low detecting nonsense Chords So if your favorite song was unfortunately recorded 50 Cents sharp you can set the Fine Tune control to 50 Cents so that ACW will properly display in the original key Auto Estimate Tuning J TZ ACW can automatically estimate the tuning which helps in some cases Since the Estimation is math intensive ACW only analyzes one bar of music at a time Right click somewhere inside a bar and pick the Estimate Tuning function After the process is finished up pops the results dialog As advised in the dialog results can be improved by carefully picking the bar Bars with relatively long notes are easier to analyze compared to bars containing flashy Set Bar One Insert Barline fast melodies Delete Bar 13 TT It can be useful to spot check a few bars If several spot checks give similar answers Jump To d within a few cents you have good confidence that the results are actually crum meaningful not being ran
246. ed in RealBand when you open the file Here is a Band in a Box song with an all RealTracks style that has been opened in RealBand CJ Geo EFI mi 2 3 3 EB o L24 32 OL A R ft GS Wavetable SY Synth R J w BB Drums y E24 12 Oht Drums L MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SV Synth R a BB Piano x 24 12 0i L ET 1 Acoustic Grand Piano L ES MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SYY Synth R p BB Guitar xa 5 07 i 25 Acoustic Guitar nylon L i B MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SYV Synth R Bo E BB Strings 24 A WIEN GE 49 String Ensemble 1 L MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth R a ace it y 24 12 OWL SS eE pa F ad 1 new age L oe MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth R 0 mm Te lt a BB Soloist x 2412 ULJE 127 Electric Guitar jazz MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth R JBB Audio 2 Generic Audio AUD Out 4 10 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrerr R a x 24 312 ot z JBB RealBass M 24 12 Mort Generic Audio AUD Qut amp SIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrerr R BB RealDrums NashvilleE veni Ely 24 12 Generic Audio AUD Out ASIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi rem R a SS RR BB RealPiano 24 12 OWL e Beneric Audio AUD Out ASIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrerr R Em D 9 1 BB RealGuitar y 24 12 oir Generic Audio L AUD Out 4 10 0 1 Sou
247. elect Whole E The Audio Edit window offers precision control of digital audio waveform editing This window displays wave audio data as a large editable waveform The dB scale on the left side of the Audio Edit window gives you a better idea of the level of an audio track inf MIR AAA TAO The thin red vertical line that 1s visible within the Audio Edit window indicates the current time location in the song It is seen in reverse video 1 e negative if the current time is contained within the highlighted range of a track Zoom In Out E These minus and plus zoom buttons on the left side of the toolbar expand or shrink the horizontal range of the waveform These plus and minus zoom buttons in the centre of the toolbar expand or shrink the vertical range of the waveform Both the horizontal and vertical zoom settings are saved for up to three different Audio Edit windows These settings will be restored for any opened Audio Edit windows the next time you run the program The Snap button will cause the highlighted region to snap to the nearest beat when selecting a region with the mouse Play Selected Area The Play Selected Area button will play the highlighted area so you can audition the selected region Select Whole The Select Whole button selects highlights a whole audio track useful for applying effects or exporting a whole track as a mono WAV file Chapter 13 Reference
248. els of note velocity The default velocity is 90 with a default shift key velocity of 127 The two velocity levels can be set any way desired For instance if you want the Shift key to send quieter notes you can program the shift velocity lower than the non shift velocity The Randomize checkbox enables the program to send random velocity levels when playing the drums This is handy when using non velocity sensitive devices such as a mouse or computer keyboard Range controls the amount of velocity randomization Usually a small range works best around 10 to 30 For example if velocity is set to 127 and the random range is set to 20 notes would randomly vary between a maximum velocity of 127 and a minimum velocity of 102 Drum Kit Settings We Drum window is always on top MIDI Settings Instrument Hints Drum MIDI Port w Show Note Mame Show MIDI Mate Number Shaw Computer Rey Display QUERTY Chars On Drums Drum MIDI Channel Drum Duration Boost Show Note Velocity f Show All Instrumente High Velocity Shift key pressed 127 E C Show Used Instruments Transport Keys t Dn f rl Kep 0 Low Velocity Ma Shift kep 3 Randomize Range 20 T Now running in 15 bit or higher video color mode Lancel Help Instrument Hints Customize the appearance of the Hint line Show Note Name Show MIDI Note Number Show Computer Key Show Show All Instruments shows all instruments i
249. ely click the Tap Barline button and then Audio Chord Wizard will automatically recalculate the Bars to the right of the Playback Position as Playback continues 53 54 l amp 2 53 E B A FF IG F IF E IF Bb Eb BPD B B APD c E A A D ID B Now the new Good Barline is drawn Red to show that it was edited The Chords are now much better In the case of this song setting this one Barline is sufficient ta get good tracking to the end However songs which have drastic tempo changes loose feel or Time Signature changes could require a few more adjustments F Cum When satisfied with the Bar lines and Chords click the OK button to return the Chords and Tempo Map to Band In a Box or RealBand Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts make it easier to navigate the song and tap in bar lines without having to work the mouse with start stop scroll actions Play Pause SPACE BAR or Multimedia keyboard PLAY PAUSE key or certain keyboards PLAY key Stop ESC key or PAUSE key or Multimedia keyboard STOP key Tap Bar line F8 or ENTER key Jump To Song Start W key or HOME key Jump To Song End END key Jump Forward One Bar RIGHT ARROW key Jump Back One Bar LEFT ARROW key Jump Forward Four Bars PAGE DOWN key or DOWN ARROW key or Multimedia keyboard NEXT TRACK key Jump Back Four Bars PAGE UP key or UP ARROW key or Multimedia keyboard PREVIOUS TRACK key Special Cases Time Signature If a song
250. en have excessive hum and hiss Most DJ mixers have turntable phono preamp inputs but the inexpensive DJ mixers are rather noisy 274 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins Enable PG Vinyl Enable DeNoise Enable Rumble Filter EnableRIAAEQ DeClick Activity smoothing Amt Help Enable DeClick Enable DeCrackle 2 ALLE DeCrackle Activity P rJ Ep ble Flugin i eran E B 4 v RIAA EG iw Rumble Filter M DeClick 0 118 W DeCrackle 0 239 4 i Deoise HF Boost Frequency Amount Fill aps Amount Fill Gaps Amount NASA 6 TEC Le TO cm DeClick Amt Pct DeCrackle Amt Pct Fill DeClick Gaps Pct DeNoise Amt dB Rumble Filter Hi Pass Freq Hz Fill DeCrackle Gaps Pct RIAA High Freq Boost Pct If you do not have any gear with good phono inputs you can connect the turntable to the inputs of an ordinary music recording mixer The mixer will not have phono RIAA EQ but at least most modern inexpensive mixers have low noise preamps If you must use a mixer check if your mixer has a couple of channels with high impedance guitar inputs Guitar preamps often have a high input impedance a characteristic which is also desirable in a turntable preamp Connect the output of your Tuner or Mixer to your computer s soundcard input In RealBand set the input levels on the Mixer and computer to record a good loud level but not loud enough to cause clipping Try to avoid any clipping even on the loud clicks that might be in
251. en located in the Program Files folder in a subfolder named VST plug ins but they could also be in a folder named Steinberg or wherever else they have been installed on the hard drive Select a VSTi plug in dll file in the following Select a VST plug in dialog and it is added to the plug in list After you add each VST the plug in is permanently added to the list You only have to add each plug in one time 10 Chapter 1 Welcome Track Options Edit Bypass Plugin a Load Group Save Group Load Preset D s Save Preset D Hename Pst Now your VSTi synthesizer will be available along with the DXi Synth selections in the MIDI Driver Setup dialog iw Re Route MIDI playback to default Disi Synth lt YOT Bandstand S T Latency Adjustment Soft Synth Latency Adjust Pressing the Latency Adjust button in MIDI Driver Setup or the Soft Synth Latency Adjust in Options Preferences Audio opens the Soft Synth Latency Adjust dialog This lets you adjust for fine tuning latency settings for MIDI non DXi and non VSTI1 soft synths This works by playing a song called LatencyAdjust SEQ included with RealBand which contains a MIDI note and audio note Pressing the Start button starts the playback you can then tweak the Soft Synth Latency MS setting until you hear the MIDI and audio tracks are in sync Soft Synth Latency Adjust This lets you adjust the latency setting For a nan D xI soft synth e q G5 WaveTable Syn
252. en set to L R 2 Tracks the left channel will be recorded on the Current Track and the right channel will be recorded on the next highest track number If the next highest track is a non blank MIDI track then a new track will automatically be inserted at that position to make room to record audio You can undo the keeping of an L R take Example Say the current track is track number 1 When you record using L R the Left channel will get recorded on track number 1 and the Right channel will get recorded on track number 2 If Track 2 is blank or already has audio then the audio for the Right channel will get recorded directly onto the existing track number 2 If track number 2 already has MIDI data then a new track will automatically be inserted at track number 2 and the existing track with the MIDI data will become track number 3 222 Chapter 13 Reference If RealBand inserted a new track when recording using L R Undo won t remove the inserted track but you could use the Remove Track command if you decided to remove the newly inserted track Note When multiple input ports are selected in the audio drivers dialog this setting MUST be set to L R in order to record multiple channels onto MONO tracks RealBand will set this to L R automatically if you choose multiple input ports in the drivers dialog Each audio input port is recorded as an L R pair and it works the same way as with a single two track L R pair The audio da
253. en you enable this setting RealBand will boot up in the folder of the most recently loaded file from the previous session of RealBand Automatically reload most recent file from last session If this is enabled then when you run RealBand it will load the most recently loaded file from the last session When Open and Save As dialogs remember last folder independently is enabled the File Open and File Save As dialogs individually recall the folder from the last time either dialog was used Chapter 13 Reference 225 Backup Settings When the Create backup file when overwriting SEQ files settings is enabled RealBand will always create a backup file BKS file when a SEQ file is overwritten For songs saved into the same hard drive that RealBand 1s installed the backups are placed into RBBACKUP subfolder of the RealBand folder For songs that are saved to a different hard drive the backups are placed in a RBBACKUP folder which is off of the root e g DARBBACKUP The Max backups per song setting determines the maximum number of backups to be kept for each song If this limit 1s reached then RealBand will delete the oldest backup of the song you are overwriting and create a newer backup The Max backups per hard drive setting is the maximum total backups allowed per hard drive If this limit is reached then RealBand will delete the oldest backup file There is also on option for moving the older backups into the Recycle Bin instead of delet
254. enarete 28 Song Set Bar nea o 4 S tal i MER F A Conductor Windra Control during playback iisa FWEIETY koyi MIDI nates of bulto j G 5 as r a i Section Hare Fie elected cone 9e ja 1 E t p XX p m Cauntn 7 63 rn E M 4 x NA IS 3 Firs si chorus L 75 Seeders cua 1s if la Drums dI che A uli Drums MHadle chars i 111 eher ndis AE inl Fosse FR C 1 5 B asion inabumental A qectian msbumental p HIJI hedpcoand caninal 5 x Bui rsen 1 a j 7 Eaha sinna Ey MIT rbd bong EH mca oe J EJ DK to chans br A noche 4 SL Ag Ci 2 i Mickie Chanar legis at bar 33 Aduit dare 0 M shot ner nadie Control by WERT Helods BH n i5 LE L Lact Chorus Begni at bar P5 Mode iden bon he Mion Ini recon o ge back gne 2 Defeat u Loop CNW and ga bo start ul Chanaan Sector te eres toes m COMO dao la ame nel pas meg 103 te epg orem CH Nes BAR 0 Mew PART MAREA T Go Beck Cul z Ir al 5 mu 1 Se a H bae n VI Mes CHORUS Y C6 sera 48m ra Fra COMM SECUN 40 MA m xs Default Hi ode for pesben change 44 F 17 LE jue tL Li Est x x Haee and go ke start Maj Charu p Section sh Ser n ma mias ir ufi Mode for xing beck x shead Beg mapa Fair Hens rid go 6 an 48 Phase HA PM RealBand Welcome to RealBand SEQ Welcome to RealBand The statu
255. ent List will deal with events occurring in those 3 tracks regardless of what tracks you ve selected after 1t was created Events may be inserted by pressing the computer keyboard s Insert key After pressing Insert a menu will pop up and you may choose which type of event to insert After picking the kind of event to insert an entry box will pop up which will let you choose the MIDI channel time and any other parameters of the event Events may be deleted simply by pressing the computer s Delete key Existing events may be edited by pressing the Change button A dialog box will pop up and you may make changes to the event You can also type directly in the Time Ch and Event fields in the Event List window You 82 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks can use either the period or colon key to separate the Measures Beats Ticks or the Hours Minutes Seconds Frames when the SMPTE display mode is enabled Notes can be made into invisible notes using the radio button in the edit entry box Invisible notes will be invisible in the Notation window when in non editable notation mode You can play events one at a time by pressing the Transmit button If the event you re playing isn t a note the cursor will be advanced to the next event but if the event is a note it will be sustained until any other key is pressed You can stop a sustained note from sounding by pressing the Silence button The sustained note will also stop in ot
256. ently highlighted From Thru range This is especially useful if you ve accidentally unselected the current From Thru range or if you wish to re select a range you selected earlier in the session When you launch this command a dialog box will pop up with a list of recently selected From Thru ranges RealBand will automatically pick the most recent of any previously selected ranges You can click on any range in the list or use the arrow keys on the keyboard to navigate the list box When you have made your choice press the OK button Note It helps to have the Tracks window opened since it will make it easier to see the results of reverting back to a recent range The Options Menu Tempo Meter Kev Signature Run Control Panel Drivers Patch Mames Punch In Resolution Sync SOURCE Auto Sync Chase Endless Loop Auto Rewind Record Filter Preferences ictrl F5 Hide Tool Bar Hide Piano Language Chapter 13 Reference 215 The Options menu contains access to various settings that affect basic program operation Some of these options can be stored within a song if it is saved as a SEQ file Similarly several of these options can also be saved into a MID file Tempo This command allows you change the current tempo of the song You may choose a tempo value of 8 to 500 RealBand will automatically change the current tempo entry in the Tempo Map to the tempo that you select See also Tap in temp
257. ents which differ from the channels of the clipboard MIDI data So if you force all events to the track channel the Paste Replace function will always replace appropriately Re Channel Selected Events to the Track Channel Re channel only the selected events to the track channel Re Channel Selected Events to the View Channel This command may be useful when editing a multi channel guitar part or editing an imported multi channel MIDI file Beware that it might initially appear confusing For instance one might set the View Channel to ALL and make a selection intending to set these events to channel 12 Then set the View Channel to 12 and of course the selected events disappear if the events had some other MIDI Channel But then when you invoke Re Channel Selected Events to the View Channel the MIDI events will re appear on the Piano Roll Display Controls Horizontal Scroll Bar and Buttons Scroll in time and zoom the horizontal display Chapter 10 Piano Roll Window 137 Vertical Scroll Bar and Buttons Scroll to see different note ranges does not scroll the Graphic Event Panel and zoom the vertical display Zoom to Selection Button Eb Make a selection of notes and then click the Zoom To Selection button The vertical pitch range and horizontal time range adjusts to fill the note panel with the selected notes 138 Chapter 10 Piano Roll Window Chapter 11 Mixer Window Overview
258. equency of the modulator sine wave Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 271 Mix adjusts the mix between original signal and ring modulated signal PG Tremolo Tremolo applies amplitude modulation causing the signal to repetitively rise and fall in level Tremolo is a classic guitar effect as used on innumerable surf and rock songs of the 50 s and 60 s The vocal chorus of the 60 s song Crimson and Clover prominently featured tremolo Tremolo is often heard today on Techno recordings applied to instruments and vocal tracks In Techno the tremolo is often fast with the tremolo rate locked to the tempo of the song at eighth or sixteenth note rate PG Tremolo Enable Tremolo 360 100 300 a 240 180 120 3 Bl 0 5 0 bl Hate Stereo Phase Depth Rate is the number of tremolo pulses per second Stereo Phase only has an effect on Stereo Tracks It is un noticeable on mono tracks Stereo Phase adjusts the time separation of the Tremolo pulse between left and right channels When set to zero or 360 degrees both channels pulse in sync When set to 180 degrees the tremolo has a ping pong effect The left channel is loudest when the right channel is quietest and vice versa Set between 0 and 180 degrees the sound may appear to move left to right Set between 180 and 360 degrees the sound may appear to move right to left Depth sets the depth of the tremolo effect At zero percent no tremolo is audible A
259. er Flange is a hollow whooshing effect created by mixing the original signal with a very short delay usually less than 20 milliseconds PG Flanger iW Enable Effect it Invert Delay TOK 100 Wet a 1 T 010 T 0 Dry i Freq E Rate Random Pal Interference between the original and delayed signals makes a comb filter many peaks and dips in the frequency response As delay increases more peaks and notches appear in the comb filter and the frequency of the lowest peak notch descends In truth any delay creates a comb filter but as delay time increases the number of peaks and notches multiply and each peak or notch becomes very narrow Above about 20 mS there are so many narrow peaks notches in the filter the ear does not recognize individual peaks The frequency response of a long delay usually sounds flat As a Flanger sweeps up and down all the peaks and notches sweep up and down in tandem and the spacing of the comb will change Many Flangers use a Delay control as in a Chorus or Echo effect However since a Flanger acts like a filter the PG Flanger uses a Base Frequency control where the short delay is calibrated by frequency rather than milliseconds This may make it more intuitive to dial up the desired frequency range Flange can be tasty on many types of instrument Acoustic Guitar Electric Guitar Electric Piano Bass Drums and Vocal Flange can be used as a quirky equalizer Set slow modulation
260. er For tracks 1 through 10 RealBand uses 10 different colors then repeats these colors for higher track numbers Space ema These settings are automatically saved toRB INI and RB CFG so that they will remain in effect the next time you use RealBand Hide Tool Bar Show Tool Bar This option offers to hide the toolbar from the main screen If you need more space on the screen to work with then this setting can help to free up some screen space This menu option changes to Show Tool Bar when the hidden mode is in effect Hide Piano Show Piano This option offers to hide the piano keyboard from the main screen When the piano is hidden with this feature there will be more space available for the placement of the additional windows below the tool bar This menu option changes to Show Piano when the hidden mode is in effect Chapter 13 Reference 233 The Window Menu The Window menu contains commands that aid in creating selecting and arranging windows Event List Fz Mokation AlE F Big Lyrics Window ShiFt F2 Mew Show YU Meters Show Tools Panel Show Markers Window Show Karaoke Window Audio Edit Window Ckri F2 Lead Sheet window Crri Alt F2 Piano Roll Window CErl 4l P Tile EA In RealBand you can open more than one instance of some types of windows The New command offers the creation of such multiple instance windows The Event List Notation Big Lyrics window Audio Edit window and Lead Close all Shee
261. er D Driver D Driver B Driver A Driver C Driver C Driver B Driver A Driver D Driver C Driver B 228 Chapter 13 Reference MIDI Driver Setup Input Driver s Output Drivers SB Audigy MIDI IO D600 SB Audigy Synth D300 Roland V SL SB Audigy Sw Synth 50500 SB Audigy Synth B 01500 Move Selected Devices ta Top Iw Re Route MIDI playback to default Dei Synth Default Osi Synth WSC Dj Timer Period in Milliseconds n synth Output Latency Delay in Ma Audio I Delay in Ms Cancel Help Let s say that you highlight the 4 port Driver D and move it to the top and then you highlight the last port in the list which is now Driver C since Driver D was moved to the top You now have 2 ports selected Driver D at the top and Driver C at the bottom Driver D and Driver C will be ports 1 and 2 within RealBand The next time you launch the MIDI Driver Setup dialog you ll see Driver D and Driver C at the top followed by the other two un highlighted ports The important point here is that the chosen order of the highlighted ports Driver D followed by Driver C was preserved The Re Route MIDI Playback to Default DXi Synth setting will cause RealBand to re route all MIDI playback to the Default DXi synth This is the easiest way to use a DXi Direct X Instrument or VSTi soft synth for playback If this option is checked then ALL MIDI tracks playback output will be routed to the default DXi synth regardless of t
262. er control try PG Ten Band EQ PG Five Band EG gt I Enable EQ Set Flat Disable All Enable All T n B 12 15 Enable Band w m m vi Iv Frequency La LaMid Mid Hitdid Hi Enable Band Though the processor load of an individual frequency band is very light this plug in can be made even more efficient by un checking frequency bands that are not needed For instance if a track only needs adjustment in the Lo and Lo Mid frequencies you could disable the Mid Hi Mid and Hi bands on that track Reducing the processor load can make it possible to run more simultaneous real time plug ins within RealBand When a band is disabled the band 1s bypassed and receives no boost or cut Bypassed bands have a flat frequency response as if the slider was in the center position This feature can also be used to help audition an EQ setting If you are not sure that a certain band s setting is making the sound better or worse listen to the tune while toggling the band in and out This is easier than constantly moving the slider to judge the effect of a setting Enable All button enables all the bands Disable All button disables all the bands If you only want to enable one or two bands it 1s quicker to Disable All and then enable the bands desired rather than to uncheck all the unwanted bands Set Flat button returns all the sliders to the center position 268 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins PG Flang
263. er knob or slider a continuous readout of its setting displays at the bottom of the window At the desired position simply release the mouse button to set the value Chapter 11 Mixer Window 139 Volume To use the slider controls simply click hold and drag the control knob using the mouse Slider or click on the control strip above or below the knob to move the slider in small increments Holding the mouse button down on the control strip causes continuous movement of the control in small increments until the mouse button is released Pan L a Ifyou need to see or edit the precise value of a knob or slider you can right mouse click on Slider 0 the knob to pop up a dialog box which displays the exact setting as a number allowing you to manually type in a new numeric value e g 80 28 12 etc These knobs and sliders can be automated with MIDI controller messages for volume pan chorus and reverb that are present as events in a song Track Controls The Mixer has different controls for MIDI tracks and audio tracks MIDI Track Strip This 1s the Mixer strip for a MIDI track Fs m 190000 control knobs for Reverb Chorus Modulation and Expression effects have a smooth real feel response Right click on these control knobs to type in an exact controller value rA a click on the green checkmark or red x above the fader to turn tracks on and off 1 e to toggle between active and mute states vf
264. erTracks Pro Audio files SEQ and Band in a Box files G MIDS SEGS T8 ARS WAM MPSS WME se MIDS SEO 9G 7 KAR Z WAV 7 MPA ea PT Files SEQ MIDI Files MIC Band in a Box Songs 47 Drum Pattern File DP karaoke Files AA Wave Files VV MPS Files MP 3 WMA Files M WM Files ih LO Audio CDA Once you ve opened your song file in RealBand you can use the full power of the program to add parts edit mix and finally produce a professional finished recording Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 33 PowerTracks Pro Audio Songs The PowerTracks Pro Audio SEQ file is also the native format for RealBand files so PowerTracks files load and play exactly as they would in that program Band in a Box Songs When importing a Band in a Box file you have the choice of playing it as is with the arrangement as created by Band in a Box or of generating a new arrangement in RealBand In this illustration we see a Band in a Box file that has been opened directly in RealBand All of the parts including the RealDrums track are present in the blue labeled BB tracks 1 through 9 Sees ae Band in a Box Song 7 2 Bar Ending Tn Bass E Acoustic Bass T F JAZQUINT J 44 F ieu Bar Offset medalla CJJ Canan bie Selected nen 24 12 o aJ t GS Wavetable W Synth BB Drums 6 Drums MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable S Synth
265. erts Audio subgroups can be assigned to audio output ports that do not currently have a driver port assigned to them These audio subgroups are used to apply real time effects to a specific group of tracks with a chain of up to four effects on each subgroup The final audio output also has an FX insert bus that allows up to four effects to be applied to the final mix Audio Subgroup Audio Output Classic Tracks View Window This is the original tracks window from PowerTracks Pro Settings made in the Classic Tracks View will also affect the Tracks window and the Mixer OE Classic Tracks View bz Brass Section Selected Indicator The first column in the track view indicates whether or not a track is selected highlighted If a track 1s selected its number will be highlighted in the same color as the window caption top part of a window and an input rectangle will appear over the current edit field Ty Type The type field determines the track type There are three types MIDI mono audio and stereo audio each with its own icon g MIDI Audio Stereo Audio You can t change the track type if a track already has data in it P Play status The play status field shows the current status of a track A track can be in one of two states play P or muted m Tracks with a play status will be heard Muted tracks will not be heard but the data will still be processed so that you can quickly switch the tra
266. es PA Resand i_ssid seq Said h Before Fle Ect Ludo Track Acton Block Options Window Heb LAO gt i C o e oj EA UL 7 72 aE s IE I I eee a Es Ea dl Oo JELEUBEL DOr IALA L LI M lik YEO SOPAS cra pen end Pi 3o F zazquinT ya fe 127 1 y L BCS v Beote momo 0m m mos 2 1 2 ES m tmo m om Loo m e PAPAL w Q9 Qu 0 eR Sew oum Q9 et no m e o Femme gt eee AA Cy E oo SS AAA AR 7 Chord Wizard m The Chord Wizard is located in the Chords window which opens with the C7 toolbar button Right click anywhere in the window to open the MIDI Chord Wizard menu f Chords Ctrl 3 bm7b5 G7 Cm7 F m7 0m7b5 G7 Cm7 11 F m7 15 Cm7 B7b5b9 19 Cm7 F 9b5 Fm7 Bbm7 Eb9 23 G7 5 9 pm7b5 G7 Cm7 27 Abm7 F m7 31 AbMaj7 bm7b5 G7 Cm7 35 Abm7 F m7 39 AbMaj7 Dm7b5 G7 Cm7 43 Options MIDI Chord Wizard Custom MIDI Chord Wizard If you choose MIDI Chord Wizard RealBand will attempt to automatically detect the chords in the song You can use the Undo command if you want to undo this The Custom Chord Wizard command works the same as the MIDI Chord Wizard command except that it launches the Chord Wizard dialog which lets you customize the settings for chord detection Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 55 zi Chord Wizard Presets for Chord Options Chord Options Pop w 7t
267. es Natation Print Options The Lead Sheet Options button lets you access the settings for the Lead Sheet window Lead Sheet Options Note You can also access these settings from buttons within their respective windows instead of from this Preferences dialog Since accessing these settings requires that a Notation window or Lead Sheet window be active RealBand may temporarily launch one of these windows Notation or Lead Sheet if necessary and then close the window after the settings dialog has been exited MIDI This lets you access settings related to the MIDI setup 226 Chapter 13 Reference MIDI Out MIDI Thru MID Devices Master Tuning Enable TranzPort if present MIDI Out MIDI Out SPP Locate Delay o W ero continuous controllers Send Realtime Messages W Send most recent Patch W heelController nc Output Port i Cache Patches when playback ts started oysex Delay r Disable Special Controllers Send MIDI Time Code Cancel Help Use the MIDI Out dialog to choose the messages that will be sent to your MIDI sound source Send MIDI SPP Determines whether MIDI Song Position Pointer data is sent SPP Locate Delay Adjusts the delay time in milliseconds before playback 1s started after sending Song Position Pointer SPP information This gives external MIDI devices the time required to find the proper location when syncing to the program Zero cont
268. es of lyrics etc appended to leadsheet The Lead Sheet Memo can be used to add song memos or extra verses of lyrics It will be appear as a block of text after the last line of notation The Choose Font button lets you choose a font style and size Memo will appear on LeadSheet and Printout after the last line of notation OK Cancel Help Pressing the Memo button on the Lead Sheet window will launch the Lead Sheet Memo Dialog In this dialog you can type in a memo such as extra lyrics etc The memo will show up after the last line of notation in Lead Sheet or notation printout The Choose Font button lets you choose which font is used to display the memo 128 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing Printing The Print button lets you print out music When you press the print button the Print Options dialog will pop up Print Options Dialog This dialog lets you change various settings that affect the printout These settings will remain in effect until you exit the program Almost all of these settings are saved to RealBand SEQ files The Include Bass Clef and Include Treble Clef checkboxes let you decide whether the printout should contain the Bass Clef Treble Clef or both Note that both the bass and treble clefs are always printed in Staff roll mode regardless of these settings The From and Thru settings determine the range of measures that are printed By default From is set to 1 an
269. especially if you have the full collection of Band in a Box styles This feature is not limited to BB tracks You can use it on RealTracks and RealDrums tracks too This is especially useful to generate specific RealTracks passages or fills for your song To do that use a blank track in the Tracks window and highlight the range of beats or bars that you want to fill Then right click on the track and select either Select and Generate RealTrack to choose an instrument from your full list or Generate RealTrack Favorites to select from a list of recently used Real instruments Navigating Tracks When your song has BB tracks the first eight rows in the Tracks window are reserved for them Track 9 is used for RealDrums This is not always convenient when you have lots of tracks of your own farther down in the window The BB and User buttons will take you directly to either group of tracks without the need to scroll up and down in the window 32 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand This group of buttons will take you directly to the selected BB track in the Tracks Mixer or Notation windows The letters stand for the track name B bass D drums the second D below indicates that RealDrums are present P piano G guitar S strings M melody S solo The name of the BB track is displayed along with the instrument patch assigned to that track There is a volume slider that will affect only the selected t
270. etup Input Divers Output Driver s SB Audigy MIDI IO 0500 Microsoft MIDI Mapper SB Audigy Synth 4 D800 Roland SE SB Audigy Sw Synth L800 SB Audigy Synth B L800 SB Audigy MIDI IO L800 Move Selected Devices to Top Re Route MIDI playback ta default Dai STi Synth Default Di 71 Synth Timer Period in Milllgseconds Synth Output Latency Delay in MS o Audio 140 Delay in MS MM RealBand then prompts you to select the folders for Band in a Box RealTracks and RealDrums These are important settings as they enable you to use all of Band in a Box styles RealDrums and RealTracks that you have installed on your system So if you have the latest Band in a Box SuperPAK then you also have access to every style RealDrums set and RealTracks instrument there is for use in RealBand too Select Folders Select path for Band in a Box e g Ci BB cies Select path for RealTracks e g CHBB RealTracks CHB RealTracks Select path for Realbrums e g C BB Drums eee Now that RealBand has guided you through the initial setup you can start to have fun For a start we could look at two of the main workspaces the Tracks window and the Mixer window Introduction to the Tracks and Mixer Windows which you can also open with the T tool bar button with the hot key combination Ctrl 1 or with the menu command Window Tracks Although there are many windows you can work in RealBand defaults to the Tr
271. events RealBand from sending any of the special controller messages that are used for the Guitar and Notation windows The Guitar window uses controller 84 for inserting position markers The Notation window uses controller 85 86 and 88 for advanced notation features such as micropegs and Bars Per Line markers Send MIDI Time Code When this feature is enabled the MIDI Time Code will be sent through the MIDI OUT port during playback This is useful if you need to sync an external device to RealBand that only supports synching to MTC rather than synching to MIDI clocks SPP MIDI Thru This command provides you with the ability to enable or disable the MIDI Thru setting This also allows you to choose how the MIDI data is echoed There are two types of MIDI Thru Track Specific and Global Enable Thru If this option is checked the MIDI Thru feature will be enabled Thru Method As noted there are two types of Thru methods Track Specific When Track Specific MIDI Thru is enabled the incoming MIDI data will be echoed using the forced Channel Velocity Key and Port settings of the track If these settings are set to 0 the MIDI data will be echoed but otherwise unchanged For example if a given track has a forced MIDI channel of 2 all incoming MIDI events will be echoed out via MIDI on Channel 2 Global When Global MIDI Thru is enabled the incoming MIDI data will be echoed using the forced Channel Velocity K
272. evious copy iw Create backup file when overwriting a SEG file Max backups per song E Max backups per hard drive 1 0000 Iw hen limit is reached put old backups in Recycle Bin instead of deleting When the Create backup file when overwriting a SEQ file setting 1s enabled RealBand will always create a backup file BKS file when a SEQ file is overwritten For songs saved into the same hard drive where RealBand is installed the backups are placed into an RBBACKUP subfolder of the RealBand folder For songs that are saved to a different hard drive the backups are placed in an RBBACKUP folder which is off of the root e g D RBBACKUP The max backups per song setting determines the maximum number of backups to be kept for each song If this limit 1s reached then RealBand will delete the oldest backup of the song you are overwriting and create a newer backup The Max backups per hard drive setting is the maximum total backups allowed per hard drive If this limit is reached then RealBand will delete the oldest backup file There is also on option for moving the older backups into the Recycle Bin instead of deleting them when either of the two limits 1s reached Wave Files To make a WAV file and even burn a CD of the song you can render the MIDI tracks to audio and export the whole song to a wave file RealBand offers a number of options to save or export audio files in different formats These options are found in the Audio me
273. ey and Port settings that you specify in the MIDI Thru field If these settings are set to 0 the MIDI data will be echoed out but otherwise unchanged MIDI Devices This command allows you to select the MIDI input and output drivers to use with the program When selected a dialog box will pop up which contains two list boxes one for the Input Driver s and one for the Output Driver s specific to your system You can select more than one input or output driver RealBand supports multiple MIDI ports The Move Selected Devices to Top button lets you adjust the order of the MIDI Output ports This means you can choose which MIDI Output devices appear as Port 1 Port 2 etc within RealBand rather than the default order for the ports determined by the operating system If the ports are in a different order than required you can select highlight one or more ports and press the Move Selected Devices to Top button This will move the highlighted ports to the top of the list You can highlight one or more ports and then move them to the top to shuffle the order until it s the order you want When you launch the MIDI Driver Setup dialog all the highlighted ports will always be shown at the top They will be in the same order they were before relative to each other For example let s say you have four ports on your system and by default they show up sequentially Original Driver Order After Re ordering Next Launch of Dialog Driver A Driv
274. f songs The Start button will start the Jukebox If you ve typed any invalid file names in the Play List String field the program will inform you of the error so you can correct it When the Jukebox is playing the window title on the main screen will have the words Jukebox shown to the right of the file name to indicate that the program 1s in Jukebox Mode The lt and gt buttons enable you to jump to the previous or next songs in the play list The Stop button will stop the Jukebox You can restart the Jukebox from the current song by pressing start The Stop Between Songs checkbox will cause the program s playback to stop between songs You can later re start the Jukebox by pressing the Start button Chapter 13 Reference 209 The OK button will exit the Jukebox Even if the Jukebox 1s playing you can still exit the Jukebox You can always return to the Jukebox later Note Use the Start and Stop buttons within the Jukebox if you wish to stop and resume playing the Jukebox Changing the Play List If you are playing a list of individual songs in a non random order you can change the play list after you ve already started To do this follow these steps 1 First enable the Stop Between Songs checkbox 2 Next start editing the song list either during the playback of the current song or you could wait until it stops and then do so 3 When editing the song list you must delete the songs that alre
275. f you choose to save a file with a file name that already exists the program will prompt you to confirm that you want to overwrite the pre existing file You can also save MIDI data as DP files A DP file is simply a MID file renamed with the DP extension The DP files are used for storing drum patterns in order to differentiate them from a song MID file Chapter 13 Reference 179 Save As Template File templates make it easier for you to begin new projects by selecting from a list of available templates instead of from a completely blank slate The templates can contain preferred track layouts preferred song settings and since templates are stored in SEQ format they can even contain MIDI or audio backing tracks You can create your own custom templates simply by using the File Save As Template command Since templates are stored in SEQ format they contain settings and song data Templates are stored in the template subfolder of the RealBand main folder usually C RealBand templates Import This lets you easily add a MIDI WAV SEQ or MGU file to an existing project SEQ This is handy when combining media types to a new or existing project Open Next File This feature will open the next file found in the current file directory or folder The order is based on the alphabetic order of the files This command is useful when working with a group of files e g a set list and you need to edit a number of them This f
276. for your DXi or VSTi synth The settings panel that opens is either for the default DXi synth 16 DXi synth slot which is MIDI port 32 or the current DXi port number if the track is set to a valid DX1 port 17 32 WSC Di PART PREV IMSTRUFPTEMT FADER E FADER FUNCTION 52 Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features Piano BB 1 amp caustic Grand Piano MID out gt SC Dag Default lt Ch 3 The DXi VSTi softsynth will convert the MIDI information to audio which RealBand will play back through your sound card to audio speakers Note If using MME drivers only the MIDI playback output can use softsynths MIDI Thru MIDI metronome scrub mode and chord advance backup will default to a regular MIDI port With ASIO drivers MIDI Thru will play through softsynths Rendering Songs to Audio with DXi Rendering songs to audio in RealBand is much easier if the MIDI tracks are using a DXi or VST1 synth Rendering DXi MIDI tracks to audio 1s as simple as selecting the Audio Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File menu command You will be prompted for a wave file name and then RealBand will render to the WAV file It s as simple as that Remember that audio tracks will also be rendered so if you only want to render MIDI then be sure to mute all audio tracks first Import Wave File Ctrl F3 Export to Wave File Shift Ctrl F3 Merge Audio and Dii Tracks to Stereo Wave File Merge Audio and
277. ful to properly detect guitar double picking techniques If the slider is too high it will re trigger too many notes and if the slider 1s too low it will miss some re triggers Some instruments might work better with minimal or no re triggering slider all the way down Soft attack instruments such as flute or sax might need the Re Trig set fairly high in order to get good performance on legato repeat notes 160 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Pitch to MIDI Conversion Parameters Audition ed Ba o Doc Mintel Meta Minvel aa AE MIDI a Mina Channel C MIDI Octave fi t Audio MIDI Patch 6 1 Audition 24 8 50 bd 127 bd 12 Presets Fine Tune 0 Hur Filter SendYolume Ctl 7 O Previous Low Mote Limit E 3 Guitar Lo E Str E Copy Paste Gave Preset High Mote Limit ID T Clarinet Hi Mate PitchBend Sens 200 Send PitchBend Help Cancel Synth PB Range 2 Smooth PitchBend Pitch to MIDI plug in will analyze a monophonic audio track and create an equivalent MIDI track Min Dur Minimum note duration in milliseconds This setting helps to ignore very short glitch notes short tracking errors within notes and fixes tracking wobble on note decay As notes decay and become very quiet the note is not very loud compared to the noise in the track which means the converter will have more difficulty measuring the pitch If you get too many glitches increase the Min Dur se
278. g Real instruments It 1s selected from the right click menu in the Tracks window You can generate complete tracks or just selected sections of tracks and you can use more than one Real instrument in a single RealTrack Select an open track for your RealTracks then right click and choose either Select and Generate RealTracks or Generate RealTracks Favorites Chapter 8 Audio Production 91 Select and Generate RealTracks This command opens the RB Assign RealTracks to Track dialog It shows a list of all available RealTracks including the RealTracks you have installed in Band in a Box if you have specified your bb RealTracks folder as the path for RealTracks in the Song Generation preferences Assign RealTracks to Track C BB REALTRACKS lt click to read gt Artist Bio lt click to read gt Guitar Resonator Background Allis Ev 120 A Fiddle player Wanda Vick grew up in Background resonator guitar sometimes referred to as Montevallo Alabama where she started out TIFKAD the instrument formerly known as Dobro playing dobro with a family trio playing in local bluegrass bands and entering fiddle banjo User Memo v MV Show Error messages zona Dome Meu Options for selected Realtrack tyl STY Timebase Normal Time Audition WMA B Style Demo 5TY None Clear All Disable RealT racks for this track Force this track to MIDI Guitar Electric Soloist Metal Wild Ev 120 Overdrive Rhythm Rock 393 Darin Favorite
279. g from toolbar or click the Loop button while holding the Ctrl key to toggle endless looping on and off The From Bar and Thru Bar fields determine the location of the loop If the Thru setting is in a range beyond the end of the song the loop end point will be automatically adjusted to reflect the end of the song Looping only occurs during playback This setting is not saved to RB INI or to SEQ files The Endless Loop command also has the following four choices 1 Chosen Range Below lets you enter start end measures in the From Bar and Thru Bar fields 2 The Entire Song setting loops the entire song 3 The Current Song Section will loop the song based on any existing Markers When you press Play the song will loop until the next marker or end of song is reached and will then loop to the most recent marker at the time Play was pressed For example let s say there is a marker at 4 01 000 and 8 01 000 If the current time is 5 01 000 and you press Play the song will continue playing until just before 8 01 000 1s reached Then the song will continue playing the loop starting at 4 01 000 218 Chapter 13 Reference 4 The Highlighted Area setting will loop the song based on the highlighted area This is the same highlighted area From Thru that you use for editing Auto Rewind When enabled RealBand will automatically rewind to the location that playback or recording was started The choices are Recording Only Playback
280. ge occurs If this checkbox is unchecked then there will be a delay equal to the Output Buffer Seconds setting before you hear the change The Advanced MIDI to Audio Sync MME only checkbox when checked will enable a mode in which RealBand polls the sound card for position information at a higher rate for more accurate timing Realtime Effects Enabled allows processing of audio tracks through real time DirectX or VST effects from PG Music Inc or others These are non destructive effects that do not permanently alter the individual tracks Audio I O Thread MME only gives you three different choices regarding the execution thread for audio playback and recording The three choices are Main Thread Discrete Thread Normal Priority and Discrete Thread High Priority When set to use the Main Thread the audio I O uses the program s main execution thread rather than multi tasking When set to Discrete Thread it uses a separate execution thread for the audio playback which makes it less likely that there will be an audio dropout in certain situations such as when small I O buffer size settings were selected by the user Very Important If you change this setting and later experience any unusual problems with the audio playback recording please change this back to the Main Thread setting The Main Thread setting is the safest of the three Always Record Audio too if current track is MIDI this setting will cause
281. gn Every Line Kev Signature Every Line First Bar ls Lead In Include Mates slaves per page Chord Symbols Bar Offset I Clefs split at bs Composer Po Font Size ze MM ood Number of Copies B r Numbers The Setup Printer button lets you configure your printer The changes to the printer configuration will be in effect for printing music until you exit the program The OK Print Preview button launches the Print Preview Unlike most other dialogs this one has a Close button in addition to Okay and Cancel The Close button works the same as Cancel except that any changes you ve made to the settings will be saved Print Preview When you press the Print button to print from the Notation window you can print to a Print Preview window This lets you view what the printout will look like without having to waste paper To access the Print Preview window you print as you normally would except you press the OK Print Preview button When you ve pressed the OK Print Preview button the Print Preview will be shown At the top of the Print Preview window you will see a toolbar with various buttons The Prior and Next buttons will go to the prior page or next page of the printout The First and Last buttons will jump to the first or last pages of the printout 130 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing Screen Width Full Page Print Print Page Save Save Range Close
282. gnature Tempo The tempo can also be adjusted with these buttons Hold down the up or down arrows to scroll the tempo up or down or click on the arrow to increase or decrease the tempo in single increments Tap tempos with the minus and equals buttons Tapping on the minus sign four times will set the tempo just as 1f you had counted it in Tapping on the equals sign four times will set the tempo at the average speed you tapped and then automatically begin song playback at that tempo LOU These buttons set the beginning and end of the song chorus which particularly affects how endings are played Double click on the button to open a selection dialog 2 Bar Ending Bar Offset This group of settings controls how the song arrangement is generated It is possible to generate the complete song or just a selected range The Generate button will generate a complete arrangement if the From and Thru settings are both the same e g 1 01 000 Ifa partial range is selected only that range will be generated When the button is pressed a popup menu of options opens Generate BB All EB Tracks Generate BB All BB Tracks generates new Band in a Box tracks using the current style Select and Generate a RealTrack Select and Generate RealTrack opens the RB Assign RealTracks to Generate RealTrack Favorites Tracks dialog for Real instrument selection and options for the Select and Generate RealDrums generation of the a
283. gradual changes in dynamics on sustained instruments such as horn or voice Min Vol Max Vol Adjust the volume message range controller 7 that is transmitted according to the instantaneous audio level of the source file Audition Button Convert and then play the file Stop Button End the audition playback Audition Source Audition the source wav the converted MIDI or both at the same time The timing is fairly tight between audio and MIDI but when auditioning Audio and MIDI simultaneously there may be slight variations Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 161 depending on the MIDI latency and audio latency of your sound card The playback timing will be much better once the MIDI track has been exported back into RealBand MIDI Channel The audition MIDI channel MIDI Octave The audition octave This only affects the octave of audition playback It does not affect the pitch of file output Once the conversion has been exported back into RealBand you can adjust the octave of the track here if necessary MIDI Patch The MIDI patch is used for Audition playback This setting does not affect the patch assigned in RealBand Cancel Exit the Pitch to MIDI converter Process Do the conversion and return to the host program RealBand MIDI Guitar Cleanup e The MIDI guitar tool bar button launches the MIDI Guitar Cleanup dialog where you can clean up MIDI MIDI tracks recorded on a MIDI guitar The De Glitch routi
284. gt knob you ll hear an A note sent out through the current part Adjust the knob until the module is set to the desired tuning and release the mouse button DLL This button launches the Select DLL or EXE dialog that lets you select a DLL or EXE that was written specifically to work with RealBand The name of the button changes from EXE to DLL EXE depending on the plug in that is running E 42 Chapter 11 Mixer Window All DLLs or EXEs that begin with the character e g GS DLL will show up in the dialog without the character Select DLL or EXE gs dll sc dll drums exe exedemo exe midiman exe tuner exe Cancel Help UNET This run button to the left of the EXE DLL button changes to show the name of the currently running DLL or EXE plug in such as the GS Settings dialog or the RealBand built in Tuner Click on this button to open the window displaying the currently running application These DLLs and EXEs are small plug in programs that have been specifically designed to work with the program to extend functionality and features such as the DLL plug in that is used to edit Roland GS settings gs dll All of these special DLL EXE plug in files should reside in the RealBand default directory e g c RealBand A list of all plug in files will be displayed automatically e Clicking on the Record Mixer Moves button starts the song playing and lets you record only mixer m
285. gure out the chords from audio files WAV MP3 WMA SEQ CDA The MIDI button launches the MIDI Monitor plug in with detailed MIDI data The Tuner button launches the built in Guitar Tuner plug in This launches the MIDI Guitar Cleanup dialog for de glitching and adjusting latency The Markers window where song markers can be inserted also opens with the menu command Window Show Markers Window The VU button opens the VU meters to show Input and Output levels for digital audio The Panic button attempts to shut off any hung MIDI notes The Punch button is for punch in recording to audio and MIDI tracks Loop button opens the Endless Loop dialog When this option is enabled RealBand will automatically loop through a section of the song Chapter 4 The Main Screen Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features Overview RealBand is a full featured MIDI sequencer for Windows with the added ability to create automatic accompaniments in its BB Tracks If you want to know how to create MIDI tracks and BB Tracks please see the BB Tracks and MIDI tracks chapter This chapter has instructions for using the many powerful MIDI features in RealBand Record and edit music for playback through your sound card or MIDI synthesizer as configured in the MIDI Driver Setup see MIDI Setup Ch 1 MIDI music can be displayed in standard music notation on the screen and also with the on screen piano keyboard or guitar fretboard RealBand MIDI sequences a
286. h List From Band in a Box or Cakewalk Run ELL ar EXE Select OLL ar EXE Fil Shift F 11 Play You can start playback by using this command or pressing or by pressing the lt SPACE BAR gt or by pressing the Play button You can stop playback by using the stop command or by pressing the lt SPACE BAR gt or the Stop button a Play From Start This command will play back the song from the beginning Record You can start recording either by using the Record menu item or by pressing the Record button Recording will occur over the track that is selected as the current track when you activate Record The program will attempt to record either MIDI or audio data depending on whether the current track is set to audio or MIDI in the Tracks window Any Volume Pan Chorus and Reverb mixer adjustments made while recording will be recorded in real time and saved as MIDI controller messages just like incoming MIDI data Adjustments made in the All column of the mixer will not be recorded When recording mixer moves it is common to record the data on separate tracks from the musical data so that 1t can be more easily edited or deleted a Recording can be stopped by pressing the lt SPACE BAR gt or by pressing the Stop button When you have successfully recorded any MIDI or audio events you will be asked whether or not you wish to keep the take If the Punch In mode is activated the recording will automatically erase previously
287. h is Loop Section Jump to the end of the song press 6 Go back 1 chorus CtrI A Go ahead 1 chorus Shift A At the end of the current chorus go back 1 section press Y then Ctrl S These actions can also be done with the MIDI keyboard Example using the MIDI keyboard Assume Charlie is a piano player who uses his MIDI keyboard with RealBand and would like to play his keyboard but also use 1t to control RealBand W OK to change setting above by AJBb B in octave 1 m He sets the conductor to allow his MIDI keyboard lowest notes A Bb B to turn the Conductor mode OFF ON Toggled when held When he turns it off low A note he can play his keyboard normally If he wants to pause the song he holds down the low B3 note as he presses the MIDI key for pause which is G4 The song will pause and the conductor mode turns off as he lets go of the B3 key and he can resume his piano playing If Charlie didn t plan on using the MIDI keyboard for piano playing he could leave it in conductor mode by turning it on with the A3 key Conductor Functions with MIDI and QWERTY Hot Keys MIDI Note Function QWERTY Key Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 157 F4 F 4 A4 Bb4 B4 Db5 D5 F6 to D7 Eb7 E7 F7 F 7 G7 Ab7 A7 Bb7 B7 C8 Db8 D8 Eb8 E8 F8 F 8 G8 Ab8 A8 Play Stop MIDI panic Previous Jukebox song Next Jukebox song Open Notation window Lead Sheet window Jump to sections 1 10 of the song Loop current chorus Loo
288. h time to start syncing correctly if the MIDI device drum machine sound module etc isn t providing enough delay time between the sending of the Song Position Pointer information and the start of MIDI playback In this situation your drum machine may have a SPP locate delay or similar adjustment that can be made to give RealBand enough time to correctly sync to the external MIDI clock source The sync options are saved automatically to the RB INI file and will remain in effect until you re visit this dialog and change it Auto Sync Chase This feature is useful when syncing the program to an external device e g drum machine tape deck etc during playback When Auto Sync Chase is enabled this allows for hands free sync chasing to the external device For example if the program is playing back while synched to a tape deck and you stop the deck the program will also stop and await a MIDI Sync or MTC start command all without you having to find your mouse and manually click on the STOP and PLAY buttons When you start the tape deck again the program will attempt to automatically re sync When this option is selected a check mark will appear next to the appropriate menu item This option is saved automatically to the RB INI file and will remain in effect the next time you use the program Endless Loop When this option 1s enabled playback will automatically loop through a section of a song Use the Loop button to open the dialo
289. hannel Mode Copy to Custom Auto Set Position None Base Channel 11 string Tuning Fretboard Color 1 e Brown 2 PE 3 v Show Out of A ange Mates Auto Set Octave We Use Index Finger Position We Use Inlays Send Notes to Notation Window Cancel Help The Fretboard Color radio buttons let you choose between Brown and Black for the color of the guitar fretboard Chapter 13 Reference 253 The Octave determines the range of notes that are displayed on the guitar fretboard When set to 0 the fretboard will display notes normally When set to 1 for example the guitar window can be used to correctly display bass lines instead Guil E The Guitar window can display fretboards for guitar bass ukulele mandolin Mandala and banjo Select the instrument fretboard from the Fretboard combo box Banjo Alternate tuning presets such as Drop D DADGAD Open G etc are supported Violin for the Guitar window and Notation Tablature 3uitar DiropD E The Custom Tuning setting for the Guitar window lets you specify the number of strings 4 through 6 and the tuning of each string Note This custom setting Guitar D blDropD does not support Banjo Guitar E tuning Copy to Custom Use this button to copy the current string settings as a starting point for a custom tuning When you press OK RealBand will save your custom settings and then they will be recalled if you later switch to another fretboar
290. he See also the Options MIDI Out menu Mode On Messages This command has a submenu for sending a GM GS or XG mode on message out the MIDI output ports The purpose of these messages is to enable the General MIDI mode on GM synthesizers or the GS or XG extensions to General MIDI on devices that support them GS and XG extend and add more functionality and features to the General MIDI standard Convert Band in a Box and Cakewalk Patches The Action menu command Convert Patch List from Band in a Box or Cakewalk will let you convert a Band in a Box PAT file or a Cakewalk INS file to a RealBand INI file Power Tracks Pro This will let you convert a Band in a Box PAT File or Cakewalk IMS File to a PT INI File Select the location of the patch list you want to convert in the Open dialog 212 Chapter 13 Reference ve Look in bb al Bl i J bb Type C 101 Riffs Bluegr ed ve pat PAT File 101 Rifts Blues Ej 141070_nozessior pat FAT File a i i a l ES i1010 _sesstorch pat PAT File its Count E Roland VSC_ GSMode PAT PAT File sE 101 Rilfs Jazz e cra pat PAT File ic 101 Riffs Jazz G l i H 101 Riffs Jazz P Ej cB8 pro pat PAT i E sc 88 55 pat PAT File 101 Riffs Rock i 1 101 Riffs Solo ln El sc880 88 pat PAT File PAT File 22141996 7 00 AM 7 17 1333 6 49 Ph 417201999 6 49 Ph 2711 2005 3 25 A 7 1 1336 3 00 AM 221997 11 35 Ph 7 24 1338 3 01 Ph 7 24 13
291. he Notation window s advanced features use controllers For example when you insert a hard rest or change the resolution of a beat to a micro resolution a controller event is inserted into the track The Notation window controllers are Controller Value Purpose 85 32 Bass clef micro resolutions 85 34 Invisible Note Affects note immediately before it in the track 85 37 Bass clef hard rest 86 32 Treble clef micro resolutions 86 37 Treble clef hard rest 88 33 48 Bars Per Line From This Screen On 33 corresponds to 1 BPL while 48 corresponds to 16 BPL Slur Crescendo 89 Decrescendo Staccato Staccatissimo Regular Accent Legato Strong Accent Marcato Chord Height Adjustment Boxed Section Letter A through Z VO 0 ala Aa BW Nme C 90 Used to store notation data for events such as slurs crescendo etc Y ou can prevent RealBand from sending these controllers by checking the Disable Special Controllers in the Options MIDI Out dialog Lead Sheet Notation Window This window is similar to the Notation window except that it can display a track in the form of a lead sheet with multiple staves per page E Open the Lead Sheet window with the tool bar button or the Window New Lead Sheet Window menu option or with the keystrokes Ctrl AIt F2 124 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing The Lead Sheet window can display notation for up to seven tracks at the same time In order to display mul
292. he United States and or other countries Apple the Apple logo Leopard Macintosh Mac Panther Power Mac QuickTime Snow Leopard Tiger and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries IBM 1s the registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Roland and Roland Logo EDIROL and EDIROL Logo GS and GS Logo are registered trademarks and MIDI2 Logo EDIROL Virtual Sound Canvas Multi Pack VSC MP1 are trademarks of Roland Corporation ASIO is a trademark and software of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH VST is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and should be noted as such PATENTS Band in a Box is protected under US Patent 5990407 The TC Helicon Harmony feature in Band in a Box and PowerTracks Pro Audio is protected under US Patents 5567901 5641926 5986198 34583 296 80 173 9 PI9603819 5 0368046 0750776 6 046 395 and patents pending Printed in Canada 2 PG Music Inc License Agreement Table of Contents PG Music Inc License Agreement cccccccsssssssssccccccsssssssscccoees Error Bookmark not defined o A 3 Chapter T Welcome auod eD ROSEO IS REX EIE ERE EEUU ERE EUER EXE EE UN DESEE 7 PAO UL TR Call Bt dan 7 TAG PANO ss ep E RR 8 O AAA o A ete dci dE MM
293. he track s port number Note If using MME drivers only the MIDI playback output can use softsynths MIDI Thru MIDI metronome scrub mode and chord advance backup will default to a regular MIDI port With ASIO drivers MIDI Thru will play through softsynths The Default DXi combo lets you select which DXi VSTi synth is used as the default DXi synth The Timer Period in Milliseconds setting determines how fast the timer interrupt rate will be for MIDI synchronization the smaller the setting the faster the interrupt rate The range can be between and 20 The Synth Output Latency Delay in MS is useful if you re using a software based synth such as the Roland Virtual Sound Canvas This setting will delay the visual display within RealBand such as displayed times and highlighting of notes during playback When using a software based synth you may have to set this to a few hundred milliseconds depending on your computer s speed You may have to tweak this a few times until the visual display during playback matches the sounding of notes on a software based synth The Audio I O Latency Delay in MS setting will delay the start of audio playback and audio recording which is useful if you want to attempt to keep audio playback recording in syne with MIDI if you are using a software based synth for MIDI playback Normally you will set this to match the Synth Output Latency Delay This is why this setting is in the Midi Devices dialog If you
294. hen played in a wave file player the file will sound the same as 1f the audio tracks of the song were being played by RealBand The volume mute pan etc settings of the track will affect the sound of the merged stereo wave file Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Compressed File Overview When you export audio to alternate file formats a standard Windows Audio Format dialog appears Please select an output audio format CO Quality Save As Remove Format PCM Attributes 44 700 kHz 15 Bit Stereo li2kb sec w Lancel Use the Format popup menu to select the ACM codec you wish to use and then select the exact specifications of the file from the choices available in the Attributes popup menu If you frequently use a particular combination you can save a setting in the Name combo box Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to WMA File This command works the same as the File Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File command except that this feature will compress the file using the Microsoft Streaming Media Compression Technology When you 200 Chapter 13 Reference execute this command the program first generates a temporary stereo PCM file Raw Wave A dialog will then pop up that will let you save the resulting stereo PCM wave file to a WMA file Windows Media Audio Test Wave File or Compressed File This command launches your default media player so you can test your file for compatibility and playability with
295. her situations such as when you switch to a different window or choose a different event list command Split MIDI drums The Edit Split MIDI drums command will split a MIDI drum track to separate tracks which allows for precise editing of drum kit balance and dynamics The Custom settings allow you to control which notes go to which track This feature acts upon the current track and is not necessarily limited to drum tracks Split Drums or MIDI Motes to separate tracks fe Auto Fill Tracks for each MIDI note used Custom MIDI Note Hums Hard Trk e ary EM wE SEM WEM SN 7 e Write empty track if no nates found Save As Preset Load Preset Cancel Help If the Auto Fill Tracks for each MIDI note used setting is enabled then RealBand will automatically move each MIDI note over to a new blank track If the Custom setting is enabled you can specify which midi notes go to which track On the left column of the Custom section you will see the track numbers that notes will be placed onto You can type the note numbers into MIDI Note Nums edit field separated by commas For example 62 65 would mean that MIDI note numbers 62 and 65 will go onto the track specified on the left field E g lt 7 gt If you press the button a list box will pop up that makes it easier to specify the note numbers The Note Name Octave number of each note is shown e g E 5 and for note
296. hift and Ctrl keys very flexible time selections can be made Keyboard Pitch Panel 1 Click on a single note of the keyboard to select all notes of the clicked pitch 2 Click drag on the keyboard to select all notes in a pitch range 3 Shift click drag to add another set of notes to the selection 4 Ctrl click drag to invert a pitch selection For instance you could drag C5 thru C6 to select an octave of notes Then Shift click A3 to add all A3 notes to the selection Then Ctrl click F5 to remove all F5 notes from the selection Note Panel Horizontal bars represent notes Notes can be selected edited start time pitch duration inserted and deleted 00080 B Lh agg 00 JL E Note Selection Selected notes are Red 1 Click on individual notes to select pA Shift click on individual notes to add to the selection 3 Ctrl click on a note to invert toggle its selection Click on white space and then drag a rectangle select a group of notes Only notes which start within the rectangle are selected If the left edge of a note 1s not inside the rectangle it will not be selected This is a feature not a bug m Shift drag a rectangle to add another group of notes to the selection 2 Ctrl drag a rectangle to toggle the selection of the notes in the rectangle Note Editing Edit Note Time Stamp start time Move the cursor over the left of a note A left right cursor appears Then horizontally cl
297. hould not be preceded by spaces Syllables are indicated with dashes and paragraphs and lines are indicated with backslashes and forward slashes at the end of a line or paragraph Multi Syllable Words If a word has two or more syllables you should follow the syllable with a dash For example the word crazy would be entered as two separate lyric events cra and zy Ending a line when lyrics are displayed in Big Lyrics window The Line and Para buttons appear when Lyrics mode is selected in the Notation window These two convenient buttons let you enter line breaks or paragraph breaks when entering lyrics To end a line and start a new line enter a break line or para at the end of the last lyric in a line For example if a word ends with a backslash e g town then the next lyric after town will be displayed on a new line in the Big Lyrics window If you plan on saving as a KAR file you can use a Para backslash to indicate the end of a paragraph and a Line forward slash to indicate the end of a line In RealBand and in some Karaoke players both the and characters are treated the same way Time signature display Time signature changes that occur during the song 1 4 through 4 4 will be displayed in the Notation window Lead Sheet window or printout Time signature change at bar 10 in Standard notation display Editable Notation Mode Editable Notation mode is the same as Standard
298. how Note Durations option is enabled the durations of the notes are shown as horizontal lines The horizontal duration lines are drawn a little higher or lower if the note is a sharp or a flat which helps you be aware of rare situations where notes a half step apart overlap each other Notes are shown with sharp flat or natural symbols depending on the key signature of the song Notes are shown exactly where they occur They are not quantized You can adjust the velocity and duration of a note by clicking on a note head with the right mouse button and then while holding the button down dragging the mouse cursor either vertically or horizontally The velocity or duration will be changed based on the location where you release the right mouse button You can step forward or backward in the song by one chord by pressing the keypad period and keypad zero 0 keys The notes will be highlighted in red and sustained Notation Window Options The Options button launches the Notation Window Options dialog The Bars Per Line Song setting determines the horizontal resolution of the screen For example with 2 Bars Per Line the width of the screen is equal to 2 Bars in length You can increase this setting to 16 Bars Per Line although the screen may look unusual at this extreme since the size of the note heads remains the same regardless of this setting Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 119 You can also use this setting to make the resol
299. hs Jazz Standard Chord Resolution 2 beats Pop mo rth Jazz Modern Include Slash Chords Some Slash Chords Pop Ballad Solo Pia Pop Solo Pia Jazz Bass Part Type Walking bass fewest chords Allow Sus chords suspended The Bass is on channels Allow th seventh chords e g C Palou chords win ma ties Fock bnes The charding is an channel s Lowest bass note is delayed OK Interpret Chords The Options menu item launches the Chords Window Options dialog Chords Window Options Bars Per Line Wisible Lines Per Screen 12 Choose Font Auto Interpret Chords if loading a file with no chords Always Cancel Help The Bars Per Line setting determines how many measures will be drawn per line in the Chords window The Visible Lines Per Screen setting determines how many lines rows of chords are will be visible per screen Each screen will always have 125 lines per screen in the Chords window but the Visible Lines Per Screen setting controls how many lines will be visible without scrolling The Choose Font button lets you select a font for the Chords window The font s overall size will be determined by the amount of Visible Lines Per Screen as well as the height of the Chords window The Auto Interpret Chords setting is useful in a situation where a file is loaded but the file doesn t already contain any chord symbols If you set this to Always then RealBand will alw
300. ic now this tutorial will show you how to get started with RealBand how to use its main features and how to enjoy it Note References to Help Topics are highlighted in bold green text throughout this tutorial Getting Started RealBand will install by default to its own folder usually c RealBand To start the program double click on the application file RealBand exe in this folder To place a convenient shortcut on your desktop you can right click on the file name RealBand exe for a menu of options Select Send To and then Desktop create shortcut d Compressed zipped Folder E Desktop create shortcut You can then open RealBand directly from your desktop by double clicking on the icon like any other Windows program RealBand Note If RealBand is already installed and set up on your computer you can now jump ahead to the next topic and get ready to make real music The first time that RealBand runs it will look for ASIO audio drivers on your system and open this prompt screen if ASIO drivers are found If no ASIO drivers are present the standard Windows MME driver will be selected by default Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 21 RealBand Your computer has 4510 audio drivers available Would you like to configure RealBand to use an 4510 audio driver Select Yes to open the ASIO Audio Drivers dialog and configure your audio setup or No to use the default MME drivers ASIO Audio Driver
301. ick drag the note to a new time If multiple events are selected and you want to move all selected events use Shift click drag Otherwise a click on a note will deselect the previous selection and it will only select edit the clicked note Edit Note Pitch Move the cursor over the middle of a note An up down cursor appears Then click drag the note pitch vertical dragging If multiple events are selected and you want to transpose all selected events use Shift click drag Otherwise a click on a note will deselect the previous selection and it will only select transpose the clicked note Edit Note Duration Move the cursor over the right of a note A right arrow cursor appears Then click drag the note duration horizontal dragging 134 Chapter 10 Piano Roll Window If multiple events are selected and you want to change duration of all selected events use Shift click drag Otherwise a click on a note will deselect the previous selection and it will only select edit the clicked note Insert a Note Hold the Shift Ctrl keys The cursor becomes a pencil Click where you want the note and it is inserted with a duration from the Dur drop down menu and on the channel selected by the Chan drop down menu If Snap is enabled the note is inserted at the nearest grid boundary For instance if Snap is set to quarter note inserted notes will snap to the nearest quarter note boundary There are many on screen visual cues to assist cursor pos
302. ics Font Jnd Hon E Chords Font Arial loo zz Cancel Help Title Font Arial fho X Bar H Font Notation Font 100 A The Resolution setting determines how many vertical grid lines will be drawn for each beat For example with a resolution of 1 just one line will be drawn per beat With a resolution of 4 4 lines will be drawn with 1 line being the beat line drawn in a solid color and the other lines being dashed lines representing sixteenth notes in 4 4 If you re displaying Jazz Swing or Shuffle music that has a triplet feel to the eighth notes make sure to set the resolution to 3 triplets This will display the 8th notes and other aspects of Jazz Swing music correctly You can also set micro resolutions by clicking on the time line above any beat with the right mouse button The Chord Vertical Position setting adjusts the vertical position in which the chord symbols are displayed which is useful when chord symbols overlap other notation This setting can range from 1 to 10 with 1 being nearest to the staff The Transpose setting lets you adjust the Notation window to display notes either higher or lower than their actual pitches For example if you re working with guitar music you could set this to 12 and the guitar music will be displayed an octave higher which is the way guitar music is normally notated 120 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing Hint This setting is also useful for displaying music for
303. ified by the From and Thru settings and places the copied events in a scrap buffer You can then use the Paste command to paste the contents of the scrap buffer anywhere within the song or you may use the Save Scrap feature to save the contents of the buffer to a file You can use the Data Filter to determine which events to copy Events Checkbox When this checkbox 1s enabled the Copy command will operate on MIDI events in the marked area of all selected tracks Tempo Changes Checkbox When this checkbox is enabled the Copy command will operate on tempo changes in the tempo map You can the paste the tempo changes to a different location in the song using the paste command This command also automatically copies MIDI events into the Windows clipboard so that you may paste the events into another Windows iL iani that Supports pasting Standard MIDI Data to from the clipboard Markers and Chord Symbols will be copied if these boxes are checked Another option when working with MIDI tracks is to use the Data Filter to determine which events to copy If you use the Data Filter the program will copy some events and will leave others untouched depending on whether or not they pass through the filter See the detailed description under the Cut topic Paste The Paste command works differently depending upon which window is active If you are working in the Comments window the paste command will paste text from the Windows clipboard into the Co
304. ighted area will be extended If you Shift click within the From Thru range the range will be reduced and the location you clicked on will become either From or Thru depending on which boundary was closer to where you Shift clicked the mouse If you keep the left mouse button held after the Shift click and you move the mouse you can adjust the boundary of the range while moving the mouse Alt click is supported the same way as for the overview section of the Tracks window In other words Alt click will ONLY move the time marker which ensures you don t accidentally alter the current selected area After selecting a region you can then execute Cut or one of the audio effects in the Edit menu 102 Chapter 8 Audio Production The Audio Edit window lets you edit only the left or right channels of a Stereo track instead of editing both channels This lets you cut paste or apply a non real time effect Edit Audio Effects to just the left or right channel E Audio Edit Window Track 1 Snap Play Selected Area Select whole Edit Right Ch 254 50 754 100 4 Edit Both Ch Edit Left Ch Edit Right Ch dE RealBand supports drag and drop editing in the Audio Edit windows Select the highlighted region by holding down the Ctrl key with the left mouse button pressed and then drag the region to a new location in the song Right Click Audio Edit Menu Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Audio Track Selec
305. ill be merged with any existing MIDI events Press the Ctrl key while clicking on the Punch button to enable or disable punch in mode without going into the Punch In dialog Note The From and Thru settings for Punch In are not the same as the From and Thru settings used for editing menu purposes The Punch In dialog offers the option of using the From Thru values from the main toolbar instead of the values in the dialog This makes it easier to select the punch in region by highlighting a section in a Bars or Audio window If punch in is on the program offers to keep the take as a regular take rather than a punch in This is helpful if you forgot to disable punch in and meant to record a full take Punch In W Enabled Use From T hru from the main toolbar Use From Thru specified below Use From Thru from the main toolbar Thru MS O au WwW Offer ta keep punch in takes as normal takes Cancel Help Resolution This option allows you to set or change the timing resolution for a given project in Pulses Per Quarter note PPQ Simply pick a fixed resolution from the supplied menu list and the program will automatically convert a song to the new resolution RealBand supports resolutions as high as 3840 PPQ which allows for more precise audio editing since at higher resolutions each tick spans a finer section of audio Note For really long songs or for songs that have really long note durations it may be
306. ill make tracks 2 through 4 selected Track 2 will still be the Current Track and tracks 3 and 4 will be highlighted in yellow T Tracks l l Snap Play Selected rea 7 demosngl 1 gt Generic Audio AUD Qut AS10 0 1 Wave Wave pru You can select deselect individual tracks by clicking on a Track s number field while holding down the Ctrl key The Disclosure Triangle will reveal more information about a track by making the track row height taller If a track is a MIDI track then you ll see the Vel velocity offset Rvb reverb Mod modulation Loop Key key transpose Cho Chorus and Exp expression settings You can make changes to these settings by clicking on the edit fields with the left mouse button and then moving the mouse up or down while holding the mouse button down The Edit DXi button launches the DirectX Window dialog and will display the settings panel for either the Default DXi Synth 16 DXi synth slot which is MIDI port 32 or the current DXi port number if the track is set to a valid DXi port 17 32 Any track s MIDI Output Port can be set to send to one of the 16 available DXi synth ports or to any other available MIDI port When you right click your mouse on a MIDI icon you ll see a pop up TrackType MIDI menu that lets you set the MIDI Output Port Program Patch setting and Bank MSB and Bank LSB settings Farb 1 Immediately below the Port menu item
307. ill only be recorded onto the current track so you can only record mixer moves for one track at a time Note If a track is an audio track and the regular Keep Take is selected the audio will be deleted for the section of the track where mixer moves were recorded You re better off using the record ONLY mixer moves button in the Mixer window to start recording and you can then concentrate on recording ONLY mixer moves For audio tracks recorded Mixer moves show up as control changes in the Event List for that track For example if you used the volume slider to fade the song out you will see a series of Controller 7 volume changes in the Event List Alternatively you could just use the Edit Fill command or insert MIDI controller events into the Event List for the particular audio track SysEx MIDI Events You can insert System Exclusive data directly into a MIDI track as MIDI events You can record SysEx data in real time and when you keep a take the SysEx data will be added to a MIDI track as SysEx events You could also load SysEx data into a SysEx MIDI event by receiving SysEx data from your synth or by loading the SysEx data from a file SysEx MIDI events can also be edited 78 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks Editing BB Tracks and MIDI tracks Edit Menu The Edit menu lists all of the regular editing commands like Cut Copy and Paste plus many features that are unique to RealBand All editing commands are full
308. iming variation with the modulation section the three sliders in the middle of the panel PG Peak Limit PG Peak Limit is a DirectX plug in that prevents signals getting loud enough to clip the audio PG Peak Limit can also remove any DC Offsets that have crept into the audio stream DC Offsets can reduce the available dynamic range of your music and cause clicks at the beginning or end of audio files when the silent audio level suddenly jumps up to the DC Offset PG PeakLimit IV Enable Peaklimit M Enable DC Blocker 18 l Left Gain Right JE i Im Cio NI 12 E 9 6 3 6 i Pre Gan Output Gain Audio Clipping happens when the audio is so loud that the sample numeric range is exceeded and the tops of the waves are clipped off Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 263 PG Peak Limit is a look ahead RP limiter it can see a coming and EPA to reduce the output gain before over level peaks can happen PG Peak Limit uses multi stage Release Envelopes to smooth out the gain This allows Peak Limit to recover very quickly after brief loud peaks but recover more slowly after sustained over level passages You get quick recovery from the occasional brief loud peak Intermodulation distortion and pumping 1s difficult to hear on brief loud peaks so we can afford to deal with quick peaks without drastically affecting the level of surrounding audio However recovery time is longer on sustained l
309. indow Entering Chords Let s enter some chords in the chord sheet We ll put our highlight cell in the first beat group of bar and type the letters cm7 Press the Enter key and the chord symbol Cm7 is entered at the start of bar 1 Press the Enter key again and the highlight cell moves to bar 2 Type f7 for an F seventh chord and press Enter 66599 Now we ll use some chord shortcuts The letter J is the shortcut for a major seventh chord Type bbj and press Enter to write the chord symbol BbMaj7 on the chord sheet Move to the next bar and type ebj to write EbMaj7 in that bar Advance to the next bar and type the letters ah to write Am7b5 the h is for a half diminished chord In the next bar type df and the chord symbol D7b9 will be entered then enter gm for a G minor chord in bar 7 We ll stop there for purposes of this tutorial and here is what our Chord window looks like now BF Chords Ctrl 3 pum 1 0 3 2 F7 3 BbMaj7 4 EbMaj7 6 D7b9 7 6m 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks 71 Generating the BB Tracks Now we ll move on to the arranger toolbar to generate our RealBand song arrangement The next thing to do is reset the default song length of 32 bars to 8 bars We ll leave the start of song chorus set at bar 1 and click on the end of chorus button to type in the number of the new end of chorus bar A Enter Measure Humber For our short tutorial song w
310. indow and a Lead Sheet Window lo le A m Al orl The Loop Screen button will play the music of the current notation screen in a loop jd 10 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing The Zoom Out button reduces the size of the Notation Window s font The Zoom In button increases the size of the Notation Window s font The Section Text button lets you place a text event at any location on the staff window When you press this button you ll see a dialog box with a list of any existing text events E Ea E f The Scrub Mode button plays the notes in the song as you drag the mouse horizontally over the gt notation This can be helpful for learning difficult parts or for examining recorded tracks for glitches or wrong notes Click the scrub mode button and the mouse cursor will change to speaker icon There are three Notation window modes each with its own toolbar button Standard Notation mode Editable Notation mode and Staff Roll Notation mode By default the Notation window is in Standard Notation mode which displays the notes as regular music with chord symbols and lyrics Editable Notation mode also displays standard notation but allows you to edit the notation You will see standard notation with vertical gray lines that represent possible note locations either eighth note triplets or sixteenth notes The Staff roll mode displays the notes as note heads no stems with optional duration and velocity lines The St
311. ing carets in front of the chord symbol C 8th push C 16th push Recording Audio Tracks Audio tracks are great for recording live sounds such as a person singing or playing guitar in a similar manner to tracks on a tape recorder You can edit audio data by cutting and pasting in the Bars window or the Audio Edit window You can import WAV files to be inserted into audio tracks You can also process audio tracks with effects in the Edit Audio Effects menu Recording will occur over the current track selection 1 e the track number that is highlighted in the Tracks window The track type must be set to Audio The Always Record Audio too if current track is MIDI setting in the Audio Options dialog Options Preferences Audio will cause RealBand to record audio even when the current track type is MIDI RealBand will offer to keep the audio take on the nearest available blank track This can be a lifesaver in those situations where you wanted to record audio but you accidentally selected the current track as a MIDI track 96 Chapter 8 Audio Production The Backup Most Recent Audio Take setting in the Audio Options dialog when enabled will always backup the most recent audio take This can be helpful if you accidentally recorded audio onto the WRONG audio track or you accidentally punched in instead of recording a regular take If this happens you can undo the keeping of the most recent take and then use
312. ing is an advanced setting that you can use to decrease all the measure numbers of the lead sheet It decreases the numbers that are displayed at each measure For example if you specify a Bar Offset of 2 all the measures numbers will be shown as 2 less than their actual numbers So measure 3 would be shown with a number of 1 and the number for measure number 4 would be shown as 2 Any number that is reduced to 0 or less isn t shown so in this case measures 1 and 2 would have no number useful if the song has a 2 bar lead in This setting is the same setting as found in the Print Options dialog of the Notation window The Clefs Split At setting determines the split point for placing notes on the Bass or Treble clef The default setting is C5 that is middle C For example you can use a higher split point such as C6 if you want some notes up to a G above middle C to be displayed on the bass clef with ledger lines instead of on the treble clef If the split point is above middle C and a note in the music is high enough that any of the ledger lines above the bass clef would overwrite the treble clef the note will be placed on the treble clef This is identical to the Clefs Split At setting in the Notation Options dialog The Show Bar Nums setting lets you choose how often bar numbers are displayed This setting is the same setting as found in the Print Options dialog of the Notation window The Show Title checkbox lets you see the
313. ing them when either of the two limits are reached Big Lyrics Window This dialog contains the various settings for the Big Lyrics window The Text Background and Highlight Colors can all be Text Color Black changed if you prefer different colors than the defaults Highlight Color mm The Default Yellow on Red Black on Gray and Black on Teal buttons let you chose between 4 preset color Background Color While schemes without having select individual colors for each setting ul Ped The Choose Font button provides you with ability to lt select a different font for use with the Big Lyrics window Black on Gray Black on Teal The Use Default Font button resets the font used in the Big Lyrics window back to its default setting Use Default Font The Display Chord Symbols checkbox when enabled allows chord symbols present in a song L Display Chord Symbols Lyrics scroll before bottom line scrolls the lyrics before the bottom line instead of scrolling after the first line Lyrics scroll before bottom line Notation This lets you access settings for the Notation window and Lead Sheet window The options are described in detail in the Notation and Printing chapter The Notation Options button lets you access the settings for the Notation window Notation Options The Notation Print Options button lets you access the Notation Print settings and is accessible only 1f the current track contains not
314. ing to use two different brands of sound cards together on one computer as two separate ports there may be timing problems if the cards have different DMA buffer sizes but it is possible you may not encounter any noticeable timing issues The multi port feature is mainly meant for multi port cards Feel free to try multiple sound cards but your results may vary Default MME only The Default MME only button will restore some of the MME settings in this dialog to default settings Since some of these settings must be detected RealBand will analyze the sound card again Enable Input Monitoring ASIO Only Chapter 13 Reference 221 W Enable Input Monitoring ASIO Dele When this checkbox is enabled in the Audio dialog and ASIO is selected in the Driver Type combo then RealBand will take the ASIO input signal from input port number 1 and send it to output 1 so that you will hear the input through the speakers You can apply real time effects to the monitored input by selecting Input in the top combo box of the DirectX VST Real Time Effects dialog You can then select up to four DirectX or VST effects WARNING Do not enable this feature if the input port number 1 is set to record the output e g What you hear or Mix because enabling input monitoring in this case will cause massive feedback that could hurt your ears w Allow IM effects recording ASIO onl when Allow IM effects recording ASIO only is enabled and In
315. ings might have medium Density and low Brightness A small hard space such as a tile washroom might have short Pre Delay medium to long Decay high Density and high Brightness A small soft space such as a large living room might have short Pre Delay short Decay medium to low Density and low Brightness PG Echo Chorus PG Echo Chorus creates medium to long delay effects 262 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins PG Echo Chorus I Enable Effect Invert Delay 1000 100 11 K 100 300 200 3 33 0 al 5 00 0 10 l AO 4 1K 010 T 0 E Delay Feedback LF Aolloff HF Rolloff Mad Hate Random 4k 50 A Delay longer than about 40 milliseconds is perceived as echo or slapback A Delay in the range of 20 to 40 milliseconds is perceived as doubling or chorus A Delay shorter than 20 milliseconds is perceived as a comb filter effect rather than delay Very short delay is called Flanging Short delay flanging 1s better accomplished with the PG Flanger plug in These delay ranges for Echo Chorus and Flange are approximate and depend on the nature of the audio source Sustained instruments may be perceived as a flange filter effect even with rather long delays Percussive instruments may be perceived as short slapback even with very short delay time Pitch Modulation A chorus of voices sounds big because the individual voices have slightly different pitch and timing PG Echo Chorus causes pitch and t
316. ings for this window can be changed in the Lyric Window Options dialog which is launched with the Options button in the Big Lyrics window These options can also be found in the Options Preferences menu s tabbed dialogs This lets you adjust various settings for the Big Lyrics window The Text Color Background Color and the Highlight Color all can be changed 1f you don t like the colors that the window 1s using Background Color The Default Yellow on Red Black on Gray and Black on Teal buttons let you chose those 4 color schemes without having to play around with the individual colors Text Color Highlight Color The Choose Font button lets you select a different font for the Big Lyrics window The Use Default Font button resets the Big Lyrics window to use the default font The Display Chord Symbols checkbox will let you enable or disable chord symbol display The chord symbols will be displayed in brackets e g Am7 between the lyrics Display Chord Symbols Lyrics scroll before bottom line Lyrics scroll before bottom line scrolls the lyrics before the bottom line instead of scrolling after the first line Clicking on a lyric or chord symbol in the Big Lyrics window will start the song from the location of the lyric or chord that you clicked on 236 Chapter 13 Reference Audio Edit Window E Audio Edit Window Track 7 Snap Play Selected Area S
317. insert a volume change into a track beyond the tracks beginning Audio Effects opens the selection list of built in PG Music audio effects Right Click Menu for Audio Tracks If a track is an Audio track and you right click on the track this pop up menu opens This menu will also open with a left click on the track type icon if Left click on track type icon in Tracks Window shows pop up menu has been selected checked in the Options Preferences General dialog Track Type Audio Stereo Port ASIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrem 1 Sound Blaster X Fi tre Set All Audio Tracks to ASIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi strem 1 Sound Blaster X Fi stre Open Dx 57 Plugins Configuration Track Category Make a Mew Audio Category Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Selected Audio Tracks Select Whole Track Crrl 4 Kil selected region ESC Change Current Time rAlt LeftMouseTlick Select and Generate RealTrack Generate RealTrack Favorites Select and Generate Realbrums Generate RealDrums Favorites Generate MIDI Track Insert Volume Change Audio Effects Regenerate Track None Selected Region Generate All Selected Region Selected Tracks The Track Type and audio Port settings can be assigned Open DX VST Plugins Configuration opens the DirectX VST Window where plug ins can be applied and edited The Track Category item lets you select preset groups of audio effects for the particular category
318. inuous controllers Sets continuous controllers such as Pitch Bend to zero which is the off position Send Real time Messages When this option is enabled the program will send MIDI clocks information as well as Start Stop and Continue messages Send Most Recent Patch Wheel Controller When this option is enabled the program will search back through the tracks for the most recent patch wheel pitch bend and controller events These events will be sent to your MIDI Chapter 13 Reference 227 sound source before starting playback This ensures that you hear the proper sounds when playing from a new location within a song Cache Patches when playback is started If you are using an output driver that requires patch caching RealBand will update the patch cache when a MID or SEQ file is loaded SysEx Delay When multiple packets of system exclusive data are sent many synthesizers require a slight delay between packets A SysEx packet is a message that begins with Hex FO and ends with F7 If your synth requires a delay between packets when receiving SysEx which is quite common then this setting lets you specify a delay setting of between 1 and 100 milliseconds The default setting is 0 which equals no delay If you are encountering problems e g overflows lockups etc with sending SysEx data to your MIDI sound source you should try a setting of 10 100 milliseconds to correct the problem Disable Special Controllers This pr
319. ior to an action the default mode will occur Default Mode for section change Now and go to start Default Mode for going back or ahead How and go to start The default is set in the Default Mode for section change or Default Mode for going back or ahead combo box For example by default the section change will occur as soon as you press the key and it will go to the equivalent place in the bar immediately before the beginning of the target section so that the music stays in time and the next 156 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins section begins at the end of the bar But you can change the default for the action to take place at the end of the current bar or current part marker etc Mode when to do the action for section ar qo back ahead f Default G C NOW and go to start NOW go to same rel pos Next BAR Hest PART MARKER Next CHORUS Next SECTION Default Mode for section change Now and go to start Default Made for going back or ahead Now and go to start Play Control Buttons Play F4 This plays the song Hot key F4 MIDI note F4 Stop Esc This stops playback Hot key Esc MIDI note F 4 Example uses of the Conductor In this example we don t have custom sections set so the default sections apply middle chorus section 4 etc Jump to the start of middle choruses during playback press 4 Loop the middle chorus press S whic
320. ire buffer to text file To capture a listing of a large number of events enable this option This directly saves the entire buffer to a disk text file Display recent events in Text window A text listing of the most recent events will be created in a text window In this window unwanted events can be selected and deleted You can also edit events or add comments The selected text in this window can be saved to a text file or copied to the Windows clipboard where it can be pasted into a word processor or spreadsheet program Display Filter The Display Filter dialog allows you to select which events are to be recognized by the MIDI Monitor program Note Virtually any combination of display events can be selected in the filter It is therefore possible to select combinations that do not display any MIDI events at all The MIDI Monitor will warn you about the more obvious nil combinations but if you find that you are not receiving what you expected review these filter settings Display Only displays only the selected items chosen in the filter lists All Except displays all data except the selected items in the filter lists Source Computer MIDI Input when enabled displays data arriving on the computer s MIDI Input when MIDI Thru is enabled in RealBand To view data exactly as it is received set RealBand s Thru Method to Global Also check the RealBand Record Filter to ensure that the desi
321. is a menu command that lets you Set All Midi Tracks to the same port used by the track you are Set All MIDI Tracks to tna Channel There is also a menu item Patch Select Dialog that launches a patch selection dialog which lets Patch Select Dialog Program Bank M56 Bank LSB you Select patches and variations as well as allowing you to change the track s patch list If the patch list is set to General MIDI Roland GS or Yamaha XG the track will display an instrument icon corresponding to the patch Otherwise you ll see the patch number displayed instead of an icon If a track is an audio track when you click on the disclosure triangle you ll see the four Aux effects level settings You can make changes to these settings with the mouse Edit DX Apply Cat FX The Edit DX button will launch the DirectX Window dialog for the slot corresponding to the tracks effects insert 242 Chapter 13 Reference If you right click an audio track icon the pop up menu will have a Track Category item that lets you associate icons small pictures with the track s audio content So if an audio track 1s a guitar part choose Guitar as the track category to display a guitar icon You can use factory Port Microsoft Sound Mapper icons or your own custom user icons Set All Audio Tracks to Microsoft Sound Mapper Track Category Make a Mew Audio Category Tr
322. is is the size that RealBand uses Your driver may alter the preferred size if you ve launched the ASIO Driver Control Panel and have selected a new buffer size from within the driver s Control Panel If your driver changes the preferred size then RealBand will be aware of the new preferred size Actual ASIO buffer size in MS is the length of an ASIO buffer in milliseconds Actual ASIO sample rate used is the sample rate of the ASIO driver itself If it says RESAMPLER IN USE then the SEQ file is a different sample rate than the ASIO driver If it says RESAMPLER NOT IN USE then the SEQ file and ASIO driver both are using the same sample rate Understanding Latency Latency is based on the buffer sizes The smaller the buffer sizes the lower the latency Lower latency lets you hear mixer volume changes quickly as well as hear MIDI thru echoed out via a DXi soft synth practically in real time The latency in MS is determined by the buffer size in samples as well as the driver s sampling rate Note If your ASIO Driver s control panel lets you select the buffer size in MS then you don t have to pay much attention to the part of this discussion about converting samples to MS Converting Samples to MS For example suppose the driver s sample rate is 48K A 48K sampling rate means that it is playing at 48 000 samples per second If the buffer size were 48000 samples then the latency would be 1 second or 1000ms which is very la
323. item that launches a patch selection dialog which lets you select patches and variations as well as allowing you to change the track s patch list As long a track s Patch List 1s set to General MIDI Roland GS or Yamaha XG then the track will display instrument icon corresponding to the patch Otherwise you ll see the patch number displayed instead of an icon In the right click Tracks window menu MIDI tracks can quickly be rendered to audio with the commands Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to WAV file and Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Audio Track as long as the track is assigned to a DXi or VSTi synth Time Stretch and Pitch Shift is an audio feature that lets you stretch or reduce the length of the highlighted section of audio tracks Select Whole Track command will select the entire track for editing Kill Selected Region will deselect a selected region of a MIDI or audio track Change Current Time Alt Left Mouse Click will change the current time without affecting the highlighting of tracks This ensures you don t accidentally de select a region Select and Generate RealTrack opens the RB Assign RealTracks to Tracks dialog for Real instrument selection and options for the generation of the audio RealTrack Track names for generated non BB tracks are displayed in green For example if you had generated a track by right clicking on it and selecting Generate RealTrack then the track name of that track will be displ
324. ith durations in a specified range will be affected by your edit A Secondary Filter is a second Data Filter that you can use in addition to the regular filter If you check the Use Secondary Filter option at the bottom of the filter then a second filter will pop up after you re done editing the regular filter Events that pass through either the regular or Secondary Filter will be affected by the current edit command The purpose of the Secondary Filter is to let you choose two separate sets of ranges For example you could specify a note range of C1 to C2 in the regular filter and a note range of C7 to C8 in the secondary filter Notes that fall within either range will be affected by the current edit command but notes that don t fall within either of these two separate ranges won t be affected at all Smooth Audio Cuts Checkbox This feature performs a very quick fade in if there is audio data immediately beyond the cut section This will prevent any clicks or pops from occurring when the section beyond the cut is played back Chapter 13 Reference 185 Copy E o Changes Markers Chord Symbols Use Data Filter Eram 18 58 EE Thru 4B 4 28 EEN Lancel Help This command works in different ways depending upon which window is active If you are working in the Comments window this command will copy the selected text to the clipboard Otherwise this command copies the marked area of selected tracks as spec
325. itioning The Cursor Position Time Markers in the Time Rulers can assist time positioning The Cursor Pitch Marker in the Keyboard can assist pitch positioning The Cursor Location Info Panel gives precise time and pitch info Also the Note Panel has time grid markings and pitch accidentals are marked in light gray on the background If you make a mistake inserting a note you can hit the Delete key to remove the new note Alternately it is very easy to immediately drag the note to correct mistakes in time pitch or duration Delete a Note Select a note or group of notes then tap the Delete key Alternately select some notes right click and choose the Delete Selected Events item in the popup menu Splitter Bar A vertical Splitter Bar sits between the Note Editing and Graphic Event panels If you want to maximize the Note Editing panel to see more notes drag the Splitter down If you want to maximize the Graphic Event panel for more accurate event editing drag the Splitter up Graphic Event Panel Graphically display and edit non note MIDI events This panel only shows MIDI events specified in the Chan View Edit and Controller Type controls Except for Velocity data the view is drawn staircased Blue lines extend between events This makes it easy to see the persistent effect of events if they occur to the left of your current viewing location Zero value events are drawn as small hollow squares making them easy to see
326. k Name Ch Forced MIDI channel Key Forced Key Transposition Vel Forced Velocity transposition Pt Port Prg Program change Bank Bank change LSB The type field determines the track type MIDI Mono Audio and Stereo Audio You can t change the track type if a track already has data in it The Play Status field shows the status of the track as Play P Muted m This is any name you want to give to the track When not set to zero all events in a track will be sent out over the selected channel This setting transposes the events in a track up or down by the number of semitones you specify This setting increases or decreases the velocity of the notes in a track by the amount you specify Determines the MIDI port or audio port through which the data in a track 1s sent out When this setting is enabled a MIDI patch change will be sent at the start of the song When you change this setting a MIDI program change is sent This is the MSB Most Significant Byte portion of the bank change controller number 0 This is the Least Significant Byte controller number 32 portion of the bank change Some synths use LSB instead of MSB and some synths use a combination of the LSB and the MSB Loop Events Selecting MIDI Patches When this setting is enabled the track will automatically repeat for the number of times specified The number of events in a track A double mouse click in the Prg Progr
327. k Print Uptions Contents Index Search Type in the keyword to find Reall racks Select Topic to display Preferences Song Generation Quick Start Tutorial Select Folders Song Settings Tip of the Day This item accesses a dialog box that will provide you with numerous tips applicable to this program By default a tip 1s displayed when you first run the program You can disable the tip feature by unchecking the Show Tips at Start Up checkbox offered in the Tip of the Day dialog Select the Next Tip Button to cycle through all the tips available About RealBand This 1tem will display a dialog box containing the Version and Copyright information applicable to the RealBand program I About RealBand RealBand by Jeff rank auer PG Music Inc HealB and Forum B D 258 b2 72 280 475 2874 Fax 250 475 2937 Click on this button to launch your Internet browser and open the PG Music home page www pgmusic com PealBarnd Forum Click on this button to go directly to the RealBand users forum on WWW pgmusic com Chapter 13 Reference 261 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins PG Reverb Reverb is the spacious sound of multiple reflections in a room In most rooms reverb has three distinct phases 1 The listener first hears the direct sound from the instrument 2 Then a group of distinct echoes arrives first reflections from the walls and ceiling 3 After the first reflectio
328. k in the middle of bar 1 and then drag the mouse to the middle of bar 8 you will have highlighted bars 1 through 8 Shift click will extend the highlighted area This will select all the tracks of the song for editing You can cut and paste sections of the song by using the Edit Cut or Edit Copy if copying instead of cutting and the Edit Paste command Note If you wish to cut and paste chords make sure the Chord Symbols checkboxes are enabled in the Cut or Copy and Paste dialogs If you don t wish to cut and paste the track data audio or MIDI data then make sure to uncheck the Events checkbox in the Cut or Copy and Paste dialogs The Opt button launches the Chords Window Options dialog Chapter 13 Reference 245 F Chords Window Options Bars Per Line Visible Lines Per Screen Choose Font Mew line for ever section part marker Extra space between sections pels Auto Interpret Chords if loading a File with no chords The Bars Per Line setting determines how many measures will be drawn per line in the Chords window The Visible Lines Per Screen setting determines how many lines rows of chords are will be visible per screen Each screen will always have 125 lines per screen in the Chords window but the Visible Lines Per Screen setting controls how many lines will be visible without scrolling The Choose Font button lets you select a font for the Chords window The font
329. k on and off 1 e to toggle between active and mute states the track name displays vertically to the left of the volume slider The track name is entered in the Tracks window right click on the volume slider to enter an exact fader level each track strip has its own stereo VU meter the LR stereo pan slider also has a smooth even response with the option to right click and type in an exact value z unica amp ES z 8 ud Q r tracks can be assigned to audio subgroups using audio output ports that do not currently have a driver port assigned This track is assigned to subgroup 2 when using audio subgroups the Aux busses should also be sent to that subgroup so auxiliary busses 5 6 7 and 8 would be assigned to Subgroup 2 G2 in this example Aux Busses RealBand has 8 auxiliary busses with the ability to use up to 4 at a time per track Having more Aux busses means that you can add more real time audio effects to your song efficiently m E Note This panel is scrollable so if you don t have room FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX on the screen for all eight Aux bus strips you can use the SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND SEND lt gt scroll arrows to get to the one you want RET RET RET RET RET RET RET RET In this example Aux busses 1 through 4 are assigned to the audio output port A1 and busses 5 through 8 are d L3 4 5 6 8 assigned to a
330. l features such as hand percussion or high hat notes Only set 276 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins the control high enough to remove ticks and crackles If longer clicks remain enable the DeClick section for additional cleaning DeCrackle Activity This displays the percentage of audio which is muted Except for very worn records adjust the DeCrackle Amount so that the DeCrackle Activity reads no higher than a few percent On very good discs one might get perfect results with less than one percent of DeCrackle Activity Strive to mute only the minimum necessary to clean your record NOTE If DeCrackle is set outrageously high the DeCrackle Activity reading can exceed 100 percent This is not a bug The DeCrackle section does three processing passes in progressively lower frequency bands It might happen that the first pass will heal a click but subsequent bands will heal the left over residue of that click Sometimes a bad click might be repaired in multiple processing stages until the defect can no longer be detected With absurdly high DeCrackle settings the DeCrackle Activity can exceed 100 percent because several stages incrementally repair the same bad clicks DeCrackle Fill Gaps When a tick is detected it is smoothly snipped out of the high frequencies without affecting the lower frequencies High frequency ticks last less than one millisecond Each muted section 1s very short only a few samp
331. l time recording Each time you play something on your keyboard the sequencer will record the event with a time value representing the current location in the song 1 e the Now time field This kind of recording method is very useful if you know your way around a piano keyboard but perhaps don t know it quite well enough to play in real time This way you can quickly enter the notes you want via your MIDI keyboard without having to play it in time as there will be an unrecorded rest time of any length you want between notes played Step Record uration whole Half Step size Quarter Quarter 4 Quarter Triplet Quarter Triplet L e e e D Eighth t Eighth amp Eighth Triplet t Eighth Triplet teenth 5 Ixteenth 2 E Sisteenth Triplet Thirty second Thirty second E n gt E pa m m b Sixteenth Triplet Thirty second Triplet Thirty second Triplet Step Size 1 Dotted Step Goto Back up Advance gt iw Auto advance Cancel Help Choosing a Step Size To choose a step size simply mouse click over the desired step In the example dialog box shown above for example a Whole note step has been selected Durations Durations are chosen exactly the same way as step sizes the step Size minus 1 option will automatically make the durations 1 tick less PPQ than the selected Step Size This is a convenient way to make durations automatically match whatever step
332. lBand will automatically rewind to the location that playback or recording was started The choices are Recording Only Playback Only Both Recording and Playback or Disabled w Auto Rewind Recording only Record Filter Playback Only w Both recording and playback Pref a Cia FS references F Disabled Soloing Tracks You can solo any track or any combination of tracks by pressing the Solo button on the toolbar The track selection can be changed while the song is playing Select multiple tracks by holding down the Shift key and clicking on the track numbers Auto Solo Bass and Drums Piano Settings DIES a If you press the Ctrl key when activating the Solo button Spore RealBand will solo the Bass and Drum tracks Current Track RealBand will detect the drum track based on the Drum channel in the All notes except for drum channel Piano Settings dialog located in Preferences under the Piano tab RealBand will detect the bass track using an algorithm that looks at VERENA the number of notes vs chords in a track as well as the average pitch In addition if a track has Bass in the name or patch name then it Big Piano Height Fe will be considered a bass track as well Big Piano ctaves 5 Shaw Track Mumber w Big Piano Vanes Colors by Track Drum Channel 10 El Use the slider on the main toolbar to jump to a new song location Markers can be inserted anywhere in the song to m
333. layed from all the tracks except for notes that are on the drum channel All notes except for drum channel When the Big Sizeable Piano setting is enabled RealBand will show a bigger piano below the toolbar instead of the smaller piano Iw Big Sizeable Piano For the Big Sizeable Piano there is also a setting that gives you a m choice of Show Track Number drawn as a tiny number within the Big Piano Height notes Show MIDI Channel or Show No Text If Big Piano Varies Colors By Track is enabled then the colors of the notes drawn on the big piano will vary depending on the track number For tracks 1 through 10 RealBand uses 10 different colors then repeats these colors for higher track numbers Big Piano claves Show Track Number Drum Channel 10 Cancel Help 0 5 These settings are automatically saved to RBW INI and RB CFG so that they will remain in effect the next time you use RealBand Windows Most of the main screen is used for the windows workspace There are many window views to choose from and you can open as many as you wish to The Tracks window is the default view 44 Chapter 4 The Main Screen Tracks Window The Tracks window shows the track names track type MIDI or audio instrument settings and an overview section showing either MIDI or audio data This window is described in full detail in the x Tracks Ctrl 1 Sela JG i 2 3 5 sr BB Bass 33 Acoustic Bass MIDI
334. le located in the main RealBand folder to run Miniburn in stand alone mode done wav This wave file if present will play when the burning operation is complete You can use any standard wave file just save it as done wav and the program will play that file when done burn txt The program automatically looks for and loads files specified in the burn txt file at the beginning of a burn session A burn txt file is made when the program is launched adding the current song to the burn list automatically acdwrite ocx An active X control that is registered and installed into the Windows OS This file 1s required for the burner software to operate DirectX Windows Audio Plug In Format Use this feature to apply DirectX DX or VST audio plug ins to a track e Access the feature by clicking on the DX button in the toolbar and selecting a track from the list or in the Tracks window by clicking on the disclosure arrow for an audio track and then pressing Edit Dx the Edit DX button M DirectX VST Window Sele Track Options Edt Bypass Plugin Load Group Q Save Group Load Prezet ba Save Preset yt Delete Preset You can also select a track and then go to Edit Audio Effects DirectX Audio Plug ins The DirectX feature requires that you have Microsoft DirectX installed in your OS Note also that this functionality will be of no use to you until you have at least one DirectX Audio plug in installed into
335. le mouse clicking over the desired entry will allow you to change the meter instantly The Delete key is used to delete entries from the map Note that if there is only one entry in a map you won t be able to delete it since a minimum of one entry is required in each project The Help Menu Contents Using help Tip of the Dav About RealBand The Help Menu provides easy access to the on line help file system RB CHM Chapter 13 Reference 259 Contents This tab will access the help file and display an index of the topics available in the RealBand help file system E RealBand Help E Hide Back Print Options Contents Index Search nder aem Contents 2 Contents Ce Features and Tutorials ee ee ee ee eee Audio The following Help Topics are available window Latest Features and Quick Start Tutorial Ce Notation C Plugins Other Tutorials Ce Menu Commands Basics File Menu Edit Menu Audio Menu Track Menu Action Menu Block Menu Options Menu Window Menu Click on the Index tab to type in the name of a feature or topic you wish to find E RealBand Help e Hide Back Print Options 1 Track Paste ian Cache Patches Mow Convert Patch List From Band in a l Drum Grid Editor B Go to Marker Go to Time Juke Bos Mode Un Messages Panic Play 260 Chapter 13 Reference Click on the Find tab to search for a specific word E RealBand Help m Bl Hide Bac
336. le of Contents 5 A TR 274 CAN IMMER aces MR EM IM M IM ILE I MEE 279 Appendix B Keystroke Commands eee e ee eee eere ee eee ee eee eese eese ss e eee teet tette eee eeeee 282 Appendix C MIDI Controller Numbers ccce cree ee e ee eee ee eese eee eee eaaet etes esee sess sssoe 284 PG MUSIC Di oe 286 nro dere 287 IR COIS CT AULA drei mem 296 iO COIS sti to dt ls Rca th AE et pet eM das e Ec 296 6 Chapter 1 Welcome Chapter 1 Welcome Ti r Congratulations and thank you for your purchase of RealBand your all in one audio workstation and accompaniment program RealBand is a program that combines the most popular features from PG Music s PowerTracks Pro Audio and Band in a Box programs into an all in one sequencing program with automatic accompaniment RealBand offers powerful features for musicians students and songwriters With intelligent automatic arrangements RealTracks live instrument tracks RealDrums live drum tracks the amazing Audio Chord Wizard seamlessly integrated digital audio MIDI recording built in DirectX effects and notation RealBand turns a typical PC into a music production powerhouse This documentation will provide you with information on how to get the most out of the great features that RealBand has to offer Updates and improvements to this version of the program are ongoing and are freely available at WWW pgmusic c
337. lease settings can sometimes cause intermodulation distortion on multi instrument tracks or wide frequency range single instruments such as Grand Piano For instance on a track containing both kick drum and hi hat the kick drum might audibly pump the hi hat level Rule of thumb Use moderate Attack and moderate to long Release on mixes but use shorter Attack and Release on individual instruments With Auto Gain enabled makeup gain is automatically adjusted to match the compressor settings As the compressor Ratio and Threshold knobs are adjusted Auto Gain adjusts the Output Gain knob to set the output level to an approximately good level With slow Attack settings the Auto Gain may be too high causing the output to exceed 0 dB on fast note attacks In this case disable Auto Gain and manually adjust the Output Gain knob for the desired output level Output Gain applies make up gain to the audio output in case the compressor settings make the signal too quiet Since PG Dynamics and the RealBand mixer use floating point math the internal audio level can exceed 0 dB without clipping as long as the level 1s reduced below 0 dB sometime before the mixer converts the output signal to 16 bit or 24 bit samples for playback or mixdown PG Dynamics can be safely adjusted so that occasional passages exceed 0 dB as long as the signal 1s attenuated back into a safe range before exiting the RealBand Mixer Adjust the final Mixer output level
338. leases If you haven t registered your PG Music software yet please take a few moments and do so now How to Register Mail to PG Music Inc 29 Cadillac Avenue Victoria BC V8Z 1T3 Canada Fax to 1 250 475 2937 or toll free to 1 877 475 1444 On line at www pgmusic com Telephone 1 250 475 2874 toll free in North America at 1 800 268 6272 or 800 4746 8742 where Universal International Freephone Service is available Name Address City State Province Zip Postal Code Country Telephone number Fax number E mail address Computer check IBM MAC Model Operating system e g Windows XP Vista Macintosh OS X What MIDI interface are you using What primary synth sound card do you use Favorite Styles Jazz Pop Rock Latin Country Other Purchased from Date of purchase Comments Suggestions 296 Registration Form
339. lect a large region of a track for editing AA Bars 1 9 17 2L 33 Bass SD aaa aaa aa Piano M JERR Guitar M MAMAMAN Strings M MATATAMAAN MIDI Me M IIS JESESIL JESIESESI JL MMMA E d Liue Uncal Bars view displaying a song with both digital audio and MIDI tracks You ll see that as the song plays the Bars window scrolls along showing graphical representations of the waveforms that are contained in the individual tracks A small cursor at the top of the window indicates the current bar and the numbers indicate the bar numbers of the song If the Alt key is held when left mouse clicking on the overview section of the Bars window the time will be changed without affecting the currently highlighted region This lets you quickly adjust the current time without having to worry about accidentally changing the highlighted region Audio Edit Window You can open an Audio Edit window for any track that contains WAV data To view the waveforms of the individual tracks click on the track that you want and choose Window New Audio Edit Window Ctrl F2 to launch the Audio Edit window This window lets you view audio data as a waveform Chapter 8 Audio Production 101 E Audio Edit Window Track 1 Snap Play Selected Area Select Whole ii Edit Bath Ch PW Ww wm The Audio Edit window shows graphical representations of the waveforms on the selected track It scrolls as the song plays
340. left channel the right channel or both To determine the best setting for your recordings you must consider the audio source being recorded For example if you are recording a single voice with a mono microphone you would choose either Left or Chapter 1 Welcome Right channel to record If your recording source is stereo such as a guitar preamp or a synthesizer with stereo outputs you should select L R 2 Tracks from the Input Channel for MONO Tracks list box Note If you are using multiple sound cards this setting must be set to L R 2 Tracks Also if performance is sluggish with multiple sound cards selected you should disable some of the sound cards to free up system resources 5 The text box that displays the path of your Audio Temp Directory is another important setting Audio Temp Directory C AWINDOWS Temp l If you have only one hard drive then you do not need to worry about this setting just leave it on the default setting of C windows temp If you have multiple hard drives or multiple partitions you should use the Browse button to point to the best performing drive with the most available disk space If you don t know what your best hard drive is we have also included a special hard drive benchmarking utility so that you can test your hard drive s for their audio recording capabilities to aid you in making this selection To test your hard drive s for their audio capabilities select the
341. ler i 283 MIDIS YC reete ia 217 rechanfel A tros 224 IE COPI D nodes ct ete outer ipid 76 MIDECOntrole dci 283 MID Eden es 227 ITD LMAO Matt iia 171 CONTO ee ea et ete E N 171 SEINO S eee TES 172 MIDI Oui tiee e 226 MIDI Output Port iia 46 61 A TT 22 MIDI tO AUCIO S56 eoa REOR ees bas ERE bee dened dace 99 MIDI track convert to AUCIO e iE Ee a 53 CONV CEU tO WAV oe scietis otc E ees 53 MIDI tracks A R 70 PONG C110 lili 99 IM DU TES eite iudei maie item 162 O ER m 85 254 A re ete ete 143 audio SUDErOUPS ccccccccccccnnnnnnnnninanannns 86 142 256 QUCITO ULC ooa sop lac tee p toL eua iade tua 140 254 OKO ete rice nr S el etm eis 138 delete A ee 85 delete DUN Ol teense a 85 142 dl re 85 MS traits ete ache cide 85 142 MID et el NR TT 139 254 TAU casa 85 record TINO VCS sciet ba b Aie biet 85 TeCOPGI P TO VOS e easet ede AE RUE 145 Selec DEL ot EXE 0 141 Mixer WIN OWN iet 138 254 MIME OA 15 MICS MPTE E 217 Multi channel MOde oooooccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnos 252 Mutti Tracks Pla E 200 huius CT CM 85 New Features IAS VDE cecil at ca Reta bu La 9 OPPIDI RT TOT 249 TOCOLUIBDP csse OE De EE MD 249 hing pec pP 176 o A 127 IP 116 acota 111 Da ATON ere 121 chord heit b vasis e a A 116 118 Aloe occa 111 controller nUMbers ccccccccnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 123 CA da o 123 CODY EHE 115 A E RR TREE AT ER ET 115 A b Erb ntis ies 112 SULTING A aad Mr PR eens 113 Cntertne Ote ovre
342. les If Fill Gaps is set to zero this tiny high frequency muted region is replaced by nothing It behaves like a very brief high frequency dropout On a clean record occasional muted ticks are never noticed But on a dirty scratched disc if many snips are made it will sound like a reduction in high frequencies As you increase the Fill Gaps knob PG Vinyl Tool will extrapolate the signal in the vicinity of the click synthesizing a guess at what the signal might have been in the tiny muted region If you set Fill Gaps to 100 it will insert this extrapolated guess at the same level as the original signal This allows many ticks to be snipped from a dirty record without reducing the high frequency content One might encounter a badly damaged record where the audio 1s so damaged that the guesses are not good enough In these problem cases try setting Fill Gaps to 70 or 50 filling the gaps with lower amplitude guesses which may sound less obnoxious Set Fill Gaps to 100 unless it sounds bad DeClick Checkbox Enable the DeClick section PG Vinyl Tool defines clicks as midrange frequency defects in the range of 500 Hz to 2000 Hz DeClick Amount Adjust the sensitivity of what PG Vinyl Tool considers to be a click At zero nothing is removed As the DeClick Amount is increased PG Vinyl Tool will mute more click suspects If the control is set too high it can partially mute musical features like snare drum hits Adjust this
343. lifeless It is nice to make nice loud songs but you risk losing musical dynamics if you overdo Pre Gain Post Gain Use Post Gain if you want to reduce the dynamic range of a track but you don t want the output level as loud as it will go without clipping Typical Uses PG Peak Limit is typically inserted as the last plug in on the Master Output Insert Applied to the Master Output Insert PG Peak Limit makes sure your mix does not clip and it eliminates any DC Offset Unless a song s source tracks are really quiet making it difficult to get enough gain just with the RealBand Mixer sliders it is usually the right thing to do to set both Pre Gain and Post Gain to 0 dB With this setting PG Peak 264 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins Limit offers a pure output clipping protection function and never changes your music unless an over level peak happens somewhere in the song If your tracks are well performed and do not obviously require drastic fix up it is probably best to use just a single instance of PG Peak Limit inserted on the Master Output The RealBand mixer uses floating point math which means that the mixer cannot clip internally The only way clipping can happen is when the floating point samples from the Master Output signal are converted back to 16 bit or 24 bit samples for playback or mixdown Therefore with good source tracks it doesn t matter if the mixer internally exceeds O dB provided you
344. liseconds setting in the audio settings dialog Chapter 4 The Main Screen 45 Drag and Drop Editing RealBand supports drag and drop editing in the Tracks and Audio Edit windows In the Tracks window you can easily move tracks up or down in relation to each other by drag n drop using the mouse e g drag track 1 below track 2 to change the order of the tracks You can move a highlighted region by holding down the Ctrl key with the left mouse button pressed and drag the region to a new location in the song After releasing the mouse button you have four options 1 Move to new location and overwrite 2 Move to new location and merge 3 Copy to new location and overwrite 4 Copy to new location and merge Drag Drop MIDI or Audio Files Into The Tracks Window You can drag a file such as a WAV file from a folder directly onto the Tracks window The file will be placed on the track you dropped it on at the location onto which you dropped the file The types of files that are supported are the audio files supported by RealBand such as MP3 WAV and WMV In addition to audio files MID files can be dropped onto the tracks window too If the file is a multi track MID it will be imported onto free tracks beyond the highest occupied track If you hold the Ctrl key when dropping the file then the file will be inserted at the time location and any existing data moved beyond the end of the file that is being inserted rather
345. ll take you directly to either group of tracks without the need to scroll up and down in the window When using BB styles with RealTracks there will be a button for each RealTrack below the corresponding button for the BB track as shown here The Tr button opens a drop down list of all track numbers and names Just click on the track to make it the active track in the Tracks or Mixer windows The S button enables soloing of tracks When it is engaged only the current track is heard You can have the song playing with this button pressed and solo different tracks by clicking on them while the song plays Ctrl click on additional track names will add or remove them from the soloing selection so it is possible to audition a few tracks together Chapter 4 The Main Screen 39 Welcome to RealBand JAZQUINT MES Click on the style name box to open the StylePicker where you can choose from any of your installed Band in a Box styles Select Style Prototype Style JAZQUINT STY Other Styles Found 88 RealStyles 34 Styles with RealTracks 343 Styles with RealDrums 785 Country All 594 Country Ballads 145 Country Bluegrass 43 Country Classic 230 Country Folk 56 Country Rock Pop 246 Country Southern Gospel 43 Folk 132 Funk 145 Hip Hop 51 Jazz All 470 Jazz Ballads 74 Jazz Bebop 50 Jazz Big Band 10 Jazz Dixieland 10 Jazz Fusion 101 Jazz Lati
346. lly edit Note Velocity Controllers Program Changes Channel Aftertouch or Pitch Bend There are 2 panes in the window one for notes and the other for controllers velocity and other data i Piano Roll Track Snap ume Dur a Chan PY View E dit MN 7 3 84 Em 7b5 E7 I L 1 L 1 L 1 L 1 m UTE KLULI BELEL ELE D i ELE All notes and controllers are displayed as black gray bars on a grid You can change note duration and pitch by selecting and dragging with your mouse The piano roll features are fully described in the Piano Roll chapter Show VU Meters This command will display the VU meters There are 2 pairs of VU TK VU Meters LAJ meters one pair for audio input and one pair for audio output If you re size the VU meters window vertically the height of the meters will expand or shrink to match the new window height The clipping indicator at the top of the meters indicates that clipping has occurred You should try to keep the levels low enough so they re safely below 0 db and the clipping indicator doesn t light up To be on the safe side it s probably a good idea to adjust the levels so that the meters don t get too close to 0 db even if the clipping indicator hasn t yet lit up Chapter 13 Reference 239 The VU meters have an automatic peak hold feature with gradual peak fallback so it will be easy to see the transient peak levels if you ve got your eye on the mete
347. locity of 100 on the first 16th note of the measure To use the Drum Grid Editor first click on any field of the grid and start typing a number into the field If you make a mistake and wish to erase part of what you typed press the backspace key The left and right arrow keys Tab and Shift Tab as well as the Enter and Shift Enter keys allow you to move to the previous or next field 210 Chapter 13 Reference i Drum Grid Editor aCountry Rock_aCPT11 Drums dg Resolution 16 Play Stop Load Save Fill Clear Load from List Country Rock_a dg zl Cleanup Refresh Count Rock adi 18 Open Shaker county Rock_b dg 17 Closed Shaker 6 Cmin a dg 16 CI Cryin b da ap Dance Techno_a dg 15 Tambourine a pres dg ats Llomino_a da 14 Timbale Ela Domino b do 13 High Conga 12 Low Conga 11 High Tom 10 Mid Tom 9 Low Tom 8 Crash F Ride 6 Low Cow Bell 5 Him Shot 4 Open High 3 High Hat 2 onare 1 Bass Drum tt o sl fel TL OREA CONAN s EN Ll Random Subst Close MIDI Mates The Resolution button toggles the resolution between 16 and 12 divisions per measure When the resolution is 16 the patterns will have a straight feel When the resolution is 12 the pattern will have a triplet swung feel The Play button will play a pattern repeatedly up to 100 times or until the Stop button is pressed The pattern is actually temporarily copied to track number 48 before playing the
348. lues Roadhouse Ev 1 Acoustic G Rhythm Blues 584 de Jack Pearson Guitar Slide Background Blues Ev 085 Distorted R Backgrou Blues 382 5 Steve Hinson Guitar Slide Background EasySouthern Ev 120 Distorted R Rhythm Rock 669 Steve Hinson Guitar Slide Background EasySouthern Ev 165 Distorted R Rhythm Rock 670 Steve Hinson Guitar Slide Soloist Blues Monday Sw 060 Distorted R Soloist Blues 570 30 Steve Hinson Guitar Slide Soloist Blues Sw 120 Bluesy Distorted R Soloist Rock 418 9 Steve Hinson Guitar Slide Soloist Blues Sw 120 Distorted R Soloist 120 Blues 383 9 Steve Hinson Show RealTracks that are N A Filter by v Show RealTracks Variations Update Show All Cancel Help Rebuild V Show if Tempo is out of Range When you click on a RealTrack in the list a Memo appears with information about the selected instrument The RealTracks have been recorded by top studio musicians The Artist Bio displays the names and bios for the RealTracks artist Double click here to view the full memo You can enter your own comments about any style in the User Memo field The comments are saved in RTUserMemos txt Song Style Demos Use the song and style demos to audition RealTracks song Demo MGU The Song Demo MGU button will display a list of songs in the bb RealTracks Style Demo 5TY Demos folder that use the selected RealTrack instrument Click on the song name and then press the Play button to hear it
349. lug in Checkbox Toggle the checkbox to compare the original recording to the plug in output This helps avoid excessive settings PG Vinyl Tool uses look ahead buffering so if you bypass the plug in the output will jump in time This is expected because there is some added delay when PG Vinyl Tool is enabled Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 275 RIAA EQ Checkbox If you recorded from a stereo tuner or other gadget with a phono input jack DO NOT enable the RIAA EQ section The RIAA EQ option is for folks who do not have a turntable preamp having recorded with an ordinary mixer RIAA EQ was designed to overcome the shortcomings of vinyl RIAA pre emphasis is applied when vinyl discs are mastered High frequencies get boosted and low frequencies get cut This makes high frequencies compete better against the inevitable vinyl pops clicks and surface noise Pre emphasis also prevents low frequency signals from bouncing the stylus out of the groove When you play a record the preamp s RIAA de emphasis will reverse the EQ High frequencies are cut and low frequencies are boosted If you do not apply RIAA de emphasis either with a phono preamp or in the software vinyl will sound too bright and shallow HF Boost If you recorded the disc with a mixer which has high impedance inputs preferably 1 MegOhm or better set HF Boost to zero for pure RIAA de emphasis Most audio mixer instrument line inputs have impedance in the
350. mally kept If you choose to have the loops put on separate tracks the program will put each loop on any available track that is greater than or equal to the Current Track For example if there are 10 audio loops recorded then program will put the takes onto 10 audio tracks If you don t want to overwrite existing tracks then make sure the current track and any tracks with a higher number than the current track are blank before recording For example if the song already has 10 tracks used then start recording on track 11 and the loops will be placed on track 11 and beyond If the program runs out of tracks it will attempt to put remaining loops onto the last track NOTE Loop recording will always begin at the start of a loop NOTE Punch in mode will automatically be deactivated by the program since it is incompatible with loop recording mode Rendering MIDI Tracks to Audio Audio Menu Commands The Audio menu on the main menu bar has commands to automatically render entire sequences to audio files or to export selected tracks to WAV files TIME Track Action Block Options Window Help Import Wave File Ctrl F3 Export to Wave File ShiFk Chrl F3 Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Compressed File Merge Audio and DXi Tracks bo WMA File Test Wave File or Compressed File Launch CD Burner Pitch to MIDI Convert current audio track MultiTracks Wave File Player Shi
351. mand The purpose of the Secondary Filter is to let you choose two separate sets of ranges For example you could specify a note range of C1 to C2 in the regular filter and a note range of C7 to C8 in the secondary filter Notes that fall within either range will be affected by the current edit command but notes that don t fall within either of these two separate ranges won t be affected at all The Audio Menu Import Wave File Ctril F3 Export to Wave File ShiF Ctri4 F3 Merge Audio and Di Tracks to Stereo Wave File Merge Audio and Dxi Tracks to Compressed File Merge Audio and Dxi Tracks to WMA File Test Wave File or Compressed File Launch CD Burner Pitch to MIDI Convert current audio track MultiTracks Wave File Player Shift F3 Audio Chord Wizard Open Audio File WwaAvihWwMA MP3ICDA Audio Chord Wizard Use Existing Song Open DirecEX vST Plugins Configuration Open Disil vSTi Synth Panel Configuration Import Wave File This command offers to import a wave file into the current track of your project These audio file formats can be loaded from the File Open and Audio Import Wave File menu commands WAV Windows wave files native digital audio files for the Microsoft Windows platform Chapter 13 Reference 199 MP3 compressed audio files popular on the Internet Requires codec to be present on system WMA Windows Media Audio a compressed audio format developed
352. mapped to the lyrics track and it also contains MIDI data events these won t get remapped to Track 3 but will instead be placed in a track after the chords track The only exception is in the case where lyrics and melody are both on the same track In this case you would type the same track number for both lyrics and melody so that the lyrics get mapped to track 2 and the melody goes over to Track 3 If the tracks in a song are already in the proper order there is no need to remap but pressing the REMAP NOW button will cause the program to insert special identification events at the beginning of tracks 1 and 2 if they don t already exist If this dialog was popped up as a result of selecting the Remap to KAR Format feature there will also be a Save As button which will allow you to save the file as a KAR file Make sure you press the REMAP NOW button if remapping 1s required in order to comply with the KAR specification If this dialog was popped up during a Save As operation there will be a CANCEL button which when pressed will cancel the save operation Window Setup This item is a special sub menu for loading and saving WS Window Setup files See the proceeding three sections Load Window Setup Save Window Setup and Normalize Window Setup for details on WS files Window Setup Load Window Setup This feature allows you to load a WS Window Setup file When the WS file is loaded RealBand will restore the window locations and
353. matic at high Resonance settings With Invert enabled low frequencies are attenuated and the first filter Peak 1s at the Base Frequency With Invert disabled low frequencies are not attenuated and the first filter Notch is at the Base Frequency PG AutoWah Wah effects were invented in the 60 s pedal controlled band pass filters In the 70 s envelope follower boxes became common for electric bass clavinet and guitar PG AutoWah is a classic envelope follower effect Loud input signals increase the filter cutoff frequency and quiet input signals allow the filter to close down Loud notes become brighter than quiet notes Distort adds some grit before filtering When Distortion is set to a value of zero there is no distortion If attempting to AutoWah a mellow signal that doesn t have many high frequencies you can crank the Distort slider to add some buzzy highs before filtering Freq sets the filter s lower frequency cutoff limit in Hz Quiet audio input levels allow the filter to drop no lower than the Lo Freq cutoff If the Wah effect is too dark on quiet notes increase Freq If the wah effect 1s too bright on loud notes try decreasing Freq or decreasing Sens Resonance adds a loudness peak at the cutoff frequency When the filter sweeps around this loudness peak emphasizes resonates with harmonics at the cutoff frequency High resonance has a biting synthetic effect Low resonance is mellower sounding PG
354. me to carry out Chords con This menu item contains a special sub menu that allows you to delete or copy chord symbols i A B that are shown in the Chords or Notation window The commands in this sub menu do not affect ee the MIDI playback of a song but the song will be changed if BB tracks are regenerated Copy Chords This feature lets you copy or move chord symbols that are shown in the Chords or Notation window to a different location in one easy operation This command does not affect the MIDI playback of a song but it does affect the generation of BB tracks The Copy From Bar and Copy Thru Bar settings provide you with the ability to select a range of bars measures in which the chord symbols are copied Copy Chords Copy From Bar Copy Thru Bar 1000 Paste From Bar 1 Repetitions 1 Move Instead of Copy Cancel Help The Paste From Bar setting offers a space to choose the bar number in which to paste the copied chord symbols If the Move Instead of Copy checkbox is enabled the chord symbols are moved instead of copied The Repetitions setting causes the program to paste the chord symbols by the amount shown in this setting The Delete Chords This command deletes any chord symbols that are shown in the Notation window This command does not affect the MIDI Events of a song but it does affect the generation of BB tracks F Delete Chords Delete From Bar Delete Thru Bar 1 Lancel Help
355. milliseconds around 15 ticks at a tempo of 120 bpm and a resolution of 120 PPQ In this case notes further than 15 ticks away will be detected as separate chords Increasing this setting will increase the amount of time allowed between notes within each chord Chord Total Separation in MS in the maximum time span in milliseconds allowed for the entire chords when Detect fine resolution notation is enabled The default setting is 63 about 15 ticks In this case any note beyond 15 ticks from the earliest chord will be detected as a new chord Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 123 Glitch Duration in MS is a setting used by the clean routine to determine which notes are glitches and which notes are valid Increasing this setting increases the likelihood that notes will be detected as glitches when clean mode is checked and the notation is in non editable Notation mode Glitch Velocity is a setting used by the clean routine to determine which notes are glitches and which notes are valid Increasing this setting increases the likelihood that notes will be detected as glitches and not shown when clean mode is checked and the notation is in non editable Notation mode The Line Thickness Settings Bar Line Stave Line Tie and Slur affect the thickness of the lines drawn by RealBand The settings are a percentage with 100 being the regular thickness Line Thickness Settings Bar Line Shave Line Notation Controllers T
356. ming issues The multi port feature is mainly meant for multi port cards Feel free to try multiple sound cards but your results may vary MME Recording Offset Recording Offset MS MME Only 50 The Recording Offset MS MME Only setting is found in the Options Preferences Audio dialog It can be used to correct an MME timing issue under Windows Vista that can cause recorded tracks to be delayed in time Should that happen you can increase the offset to a setting greater than zero Usually the delay is around 50 to 60ms ASIO Audio Drivers This dialog lets you choose an ASIO driver ASIO is an alternate driver system developed by Steinberg It has much lower latency than ordinary MME drivers You can arrive at this dialog in 3 different ways 1 If you haven t used ASIO drivers but RealBand detected them and you answered Yes when asked if you want to use an ASIO driver 2 If within the Audio Preferences you change the audio Driver Type from MME to ASIO 3 If the audio Driver Type is already set to ASIO but you later press the Drivers button in the Audio Preferences The Select one ASIO Driver list box lets you select an ASIO driver to use You can only select one ASIO driver at a time ASIOAAII Driver Warning There is a warning if the ASIOAAII driver is not connected Sometimes the ASIOAAII driver will not be connected to an audio driver and output will be silent This is usually due to a soft synth already
357. mixes of music instruments It gives the best results with single note melody lines played very cleanly and with very little background noise or hum For best results use very plain playing technique and pure tone Idiosyncratic playing technique or wide variation in instrument tone can confuse the converter When playing guitar or other stringed instruments try to avoid ringing strings A quietly ringing open string can also confuse the converter as it tries to determine the pitch of your intended note For vocals try humming or singing all notes with a pure vowel sound such as Oooh or Aaaah As with other pitch to MIDI computer algorithms this plug in is not absolutely perfect However with careful playing or singing and the right settings you can get good conversion results on most of the notes You can also expect to get a few off the wall notes which must be edited in the Notation or Event Edit screens Settings Thresh The Note On level threshold in dB Audio below the Note On threshold will not trigger notes If Thresh is set too low the converter will try to convert noise and unintended notes to MIDI If Thresh is set too high the converter might miss some of the intentional notes in the audio For best results use a fairly loud track It is not necessary to have the audio recorded so loud that it distorts Re Trig Set the sensitivity for re triggering identical note pitches For instance this control is use
358. mments section Otherwise this command pastes the contents of the scrap buffer to the current location in the song as specified in the From settings Paste automatically works the same way as Track Paste if the scrap buffer only has data from 1 track Destination Track If you copy or cut from a single track the Paste dialog will let you choose the destination track with the current track being the default value Use the Track Paste menu item if you wanted to paste multiple tracks onto a single track The Repetitions option will cause the paste to repeat for as many times as you specify 186 Chapter 13 Reference Iz Destination Track Hepetitians Options Merge with existing data t Overvnte existing data f Create gap on selected tracks Create gap an all tracks Iw Everts Tempo Changes Markers Chord Symbols Advance the Now pointer after the paste iw Lrossfade when pasting audio From 10 a4 45 ka lt Cancel Help The Options field gives you 4 choices 1 Merge the Paste with existing data 2 Overwrite Existing Data 3 Create a Gap on the currently Selected Tracks 4 Create a Gap on All Tracks Events Checkbox When this checkbox 1s enabled this command will offer the ability to paste any Events that are currently in the scrap buffer Tempo Changes Checkbox When this checkbox is enabled the Paste command will paste any tempo changes that were copied or Cut into
359. more features and configurable settings which are discussed in later chapters These features give you the ability to produce great sounding music in your own home studio with production values and effects that once required expensive studio time Have fun making your music with RealBand Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 37 Chapter 4 The Main Screen There are five parts to the RealBand main screen 1 The Status Bar shows information about the current project 2 The Menu Bar is where menus and commands are accessed 3 The Toolbars give information and access to program functions 4 The Piano Keyboard displays and can input MIDI notes 5 The Windows area the main workspace for all program windows 1 Pl Realiend Listen SEQ RealTracks 2010 5 i here Tracks 0t01 1 B lek E Pis dt Ades Track Atan dk Ophan Wide Hali A Ar A Tru i WEN H 2 I E 2 W6 m e G ERO So Ao a MA o E o E Bi Sape Saad Plugin Mode Frnt Fige Seniha Prefs Mevonone ACW Import amp udo Render a fF 3 B m m ii e 6 o mod oL OC O b bhm o e RE ol Teada Bes Chock Facer Pak Tom Comments hole Lead Shi Se er Meli El Ak Ed gls Dre Bepckek Conduber s Hex Fay Rem FF ae Bae Aah w Park Abt Pak Markers vw Pate 13 Ti L4 IJIDY EJ GR S mus 20 RealTracks 2010 5 is herel ume wi YU Meters Ez 2 Bar Ending Bess maj w MER F zazquinr I La c as ii Jin i G
360. most noticeable on very high or very low notes The display has quarter cent resolution Noise hum or bad strings can cause the pitch indicator to wobble Guitar G strings seem particularly prone to odd harmonics which wobble the pitch indicator Don t be alarmed if the indicator is wobbling quite a bit Center the average indicator motion around zero The resolution of the display magnifies pitch deviations that the ear may not notice A deviation of a few cents is not very obvious to the ear even though it is a large distance on the pitch display Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 169 Fine Adjust Modify the tuner s calibration For instance if Fine Adjust is set to 10 cents an instrument must be tuned 10 cents higher than usual to measure in tune If you have access to a Strobotuner or other expensive tuner you could calibrate this Guitar Tuner program to agree with the other tuner you use The accuracy of this Guitar Tuner program should be within a few cents of standard on most computers However the tuner program relies upon the audio clock stability of the sound card so there may be slight variations on different sound cards If you have a piano organ or other instrument you wish to use as reference you can likewise adjust the Tuner to agree with your fixed pitch instrument Instrument Optimize the tuner for guitar or bass Bass cannot be tuned at its best if the Guitar button is selected and guitar cannot be tune
361. n 82 Jazz Modern 101 J WYNT 2 g WYNT K A J BASEBR J BREEZY J BRUB24 J CELLAR J COZY J DEETER J DOLFIN A JEASY J GITWLEZ J LAURA J LIONEL J MD_WLZ J MONTY J OLEO AJ BAESEC J SONICE J TEDY JeTRIO J UPTOWN J UPTUNZ J WINDOW J WLZTRI JACO JAZ JAMGRASS JAMMIN JANDEEN1 JANEIRO JAZ_250 JAZ_60 AJAZCOOL AJAZFOURA JAZFOURB JAZFOURC JAZFOURS JAZQUINT Jazz Quintet mq 0000000000000 0000000000 e HHH DAA The next group of controls is for song settings such as title style time signature key and tempo The title is typed in to the title window as regular text Load Song Demo Wynton K 2 Wynton EK Chord Embel Bass amp Brushes Style Jazz Breezy Jazz Sw w 5 insts VintJz Bbrubech fast JzWaltz Jazz Cellar PnoTrio brushes Jazz Cozy Slow Sw Piano Trio Dexter Bop w Brushes Style Dolfin Jazz Bossa sSwing combo Easy Swing w Brushes Style Jazz Guitar Waltz w Brushes Laura Ballad w Brushes Lionel Brushes 40s SwBallad Mile D Waltz w Brushes Style Monty Trio style Oleo Bop w Brushes Style Jazz Sax Section for Big Band So Nice Jazz Bop w Brushes Styl VintJz Teddy stride Pno Trio Jazz Trio Swing tyle brushes Jazz Uptown Fast Guit comp Jazz Uptown 2 Var of J Uptown Windows Fast Waltz w Brushes St Jazz Waltz Trio Jaco Jazz Style Janbras Blues Bluegrass Jammin Smooth Jazz Easy JanDeenl 60s rock Fast ev
362. n the Melody is the currently selected Track and slot 1 PG Dynamics is selected for editing Effects Groups and Presets The Load Group and Save Group buttons let you load and save the effects settings for the currently selected track The Load Preset and Save Preset buttons let you save and load presets for the current effect such as Echo Chorus The Delete Preset button lets you remove a preset from the list of already saved presets 144 Chapter 11 Mixer Window n PE DirectX VST Window Track Options Edit Bypass Plugin d Load Group Save Group Load Preset d ha Save Preset d ae Delete Preset PG Dynamics o Lett Gain Right ExpanderGate m Cip mj Threshold Ratio Attack Release Compressor Auto Gain Threshold Ratio Attack Release Output Gain C C Em NM EN EN Options The Options button brings up the DX VST Options dialog These options are for managing the real time DirectX and VST effects plug ins on your system The chapter on Save Default Di Synths Digital Audio Features has complete details DX VST Options Scan for Mew Dx Plugins Register a Mew OX Plugin Un Register a Dx Plugin Hun Directx Diagnostic Tool Remove YST Plugin from list Cancel VST Plugin Technology by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH Mono Tracks Can use effects in Stereo Mode w Mona Tracks can use effects in Stereo mode This setting in the Audio
363. n MIDI data only This command rounds the times of notes to the nearest user specified time interval This is very useful for correcting timing errors in your music performance s Both the start times and durations of MIDI notes can be quantized The resolution setting will determine the degree to which the timing is rounded For example if you choose a resolution of a sixteenth note the notes in the marked area will be rounded off to the nearest sixteenth note You may choose any resolution setting anywhere from a whole note down to a 32nd note The percentage option will allow you to make the timing of your music more accurate without sounding too mechanical For example if you chose an interval of a sixteenth note a percentage of 50 will move the notes 50 closer to the nearest sixteenth note instead of moving the notes exactly to the nearest sixteenth note Replace This command is for MIDI tracks only It can search for any type of event you specify and replace the events that it encounters with new ones As with other edit commands the replace command affects only the marked area of all selected tracks Chapter 13 Reference 189 F a When you select this command you will be prompted for the type of event to search for followed by the search ranges Ewent Type C Kep Aftertouch C Control Change C Program Change C Channel 4ftertouch C Pitch Bend Cancel Help Enter Search Values Range Value Duration
364. n Stereo mode Soft Synth Latency Adjust Recording Offset MS MME Only jo 220 Chapter 13 Reference Audio File Tyoe The Audio File Type combo box gives you a choice of sampling rates IB 441 from 22 05K to 96K at bit depths of either 16 bits or 24 bits Bit 24 Bit 96 16 Bit 44 1 1s the file type to use for files that you want to burn to audio 24 Bit 48 CDs 24 Bit 44 1 24 Bit 22 05 16 Bit 96 16 Bit 48 16 Bit 44 1 jIEBi 2205 O Z O Z O O Sample Rate Change This setting can be changed even if the song already has audio tracks If you change the sample rate with a project that already has audio saved at a different sample rate the program will offer to automatically convert the song When you ve pressed the OK button to exit the Audio Preferences dialog you will be asked whether or not to go ahead with the conversion if applicable Press the Yes button to convert your project to the new sampling rate Note Any field with MME only has no effect when using ASIO drivers The DMA Size and DMA Offset MME only settings are memory buffer sizes and offsets used by the sound card s driver These settings are detected by RealBand and don t normally need to be changed Audio Driver Type Audio Driver Type The Audio Driver Type is MME by default but if your sound card supports ASIO ASIO drivers you can choose this type ASIO is an alternate driver system T developed by Steinberg
365. n audio subgroup G2 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT QUT You could have up to 16 Aux effects per track since each track can use up to 4 auxiliary busses with up to 4 effects plug ins per bus This is in addition to the 4 effects that can be chained on each track s FX insert 256 Chapter 13 Reference BF DirectX VST Window Seles Track Options Edit Bypass Plugin Load Group E Save Group D Load Preset L Save Preset Delete Preset PG Flanger Iw Enable Effect Invert Delay TOE 100 Hate Random Audio Subgroups Unassigned Outputs Work As Subgroups W Unassigned Output Ports work As Subgroups When this checkbox is enabled in the Audio dialog any audio output ports that do not currently have a driver port assigned to them will function as subgroups A subgroup is a bus or signal path that gives you the ability to control several tracks as a group Suppose you only have one audio Output Driver port installed in RealBand and you ve enabled the Unassigned Outputs Work As Subgroups checkbox Audio Output Ports 2 through 16 will now function as subgroups If you were to then set the output ports of tracks 2 3 and 4 to G2 1 e port 2 which is now called Subgroup 2 and you were to adjust the volume of Subgroup 2 in the mixer the same way you do for output ports this will affect the volume of all 3 tracks as a whole Chapter 13 Reference 257 Output Port FX Ins
366. n brings up the DX VST Options dialog where you can manage your real time effects plug Save Default Dei Synths ms Save Default DXi Synths saves your plug in default settings DX VST Options Scan for Mew D Plugins Register a Mew Oe Plugin Un Register a D Plugin Hun Directs Diagnostic Tool Remove YST Plugin fram list Cancel The Edit DX Exclusion List button lets you edit the list of plug ins to include or exclude in the DirectX editor This is useful if you have some plug ins which were found and which aren t compatible with RealBand If you edit the exclusion list you ll see a dialog box with the left side displaying the included plug ins and the right side displaying the excluded plug ins Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features 87 DX Plugin Exclude List Include Exclude HERU GHNE ee 5ink ta Sink Converter PG Distortion 3 WHT Audio4nalzer 73 PG Dunamicsz4 TechSmith Time Adjuzt PG Echo Chorus 5 TechSmith Frame Skip Filter m PG Five Band ELI ZB Cakewalk FsChorus PG Flangerz T echSmith Overlay PG PeakLimit 8 Cakewalk FsHeverb PG Heverb 3 Cakewalk FuEq Fl HingMadz1U AL HM V rapper Pa ATA 11 Cakewalk FexDelay PG Ten Band EW 12 TechSmith Splitter Filter The gt button moves a plug in from the Include to the Exclude list The lt button moves a plug in from the Exclude to the Include list The Scan for New Plug Ins button will cause RealBand
367. n by holding down the Ctrl key with the left mouse button rr pressed and drag the region to a new location in the song After releasing the mouse button you have four options 1 Move to new location and overwrite 2 Move to new location and merge 3 Copy to new location and overwrite 4 Copy to new location and merge See the chapter on Digital Audio features for additional information F L SF Drag Drop Edit EIE Type af drag drop edit le Move to new location and everwrite Move to new location and merge Copy to new location and overwrite Copy to new location and merge Cancel Help Lead Sheet Window This window is similar to the Notation window except that it can display a track in the form of a lead sheet with multiple staves per page 238 Chapter 13 Reference Up to 7 tracks at a time can be displayed per Lead Sheet window In order to display multiple tracks you should first select the tracks in the Tracks window or Bars window and then open up a new Lead Sheet window Another way to select tracks is in the Lead Sheet Options dialog RealBand can also print notation with multiple tracks when you press the Print button at the top of a Lead Sheet window that is currently displaying multiple tracks The Lead Sheet window is fully described in the Notation and Printing chapter Piano Roll Window The Piano Roll window enables precise graphic editing of note timing and duration You can also graphica
368. n the drum window Show Used Instruments displays the basic trap kit but does not display any extra instruments unless they are used in a song The drum window is cleared each time Play or Stop is pressed Transport Keys On Control playback with the computer keyboard Space key will toggle Play Stop Return key will halt and return to the song beginning Ctrl Tab will enter Record mode 168 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Ctrl Key Sometimes it is distracting to play the drums with the computer keys because if you accidentally play the spacebar or Enter key it halts playback With this option enabled playback is controlled by Ctrl space and Ctrl Enter so it is more difficult to accidentally stop playback Off Playback is not controlled by the computer keyboard Guitar Tuner Y The Guitar Tuner 1s launched with the tuning fork button which is found on the toolbar The Guitar Tuner is optimized for guitar and bass although it is also useful with other acoustic instruments including voice Note The Guitar Tuner must be able to receive audio from your instrument via the line input or microphone input of your sound card Please make sure that either the Microphone In or Line In is enabled in the Recording Properties of the Windows Mixer or the appropriate Mixer application for your sound card To use the tuner connect an electric guitar or bass to your computer s sound card i
369. n the plug in Parameter Name Simply the name of each adjustable parameter Value Slider Move the slider to adjust the parameter value Value Indication Text Displays the value of the slider as interpreted by the plug in In the above example Parameter 0 Bright is interpreted as an ON OFF switch but Parameter 1 Volume is interpreted as a value from 0 to 10 Parameter 1 Volume Value on Bright Value 8 618897 Volume Parameter 7 Low Parameter 3 Hid d Value 5 039370 Low Value 5 039370 Mid Parameter 4 High Parameter 5 Tr Speed Value 5 039370 lt High Value 5 039370 lt Tr Speed Parameter 6 Tr Intens Value O O00000 Tr Intens The number of real time effects that you can expect to activate at a time without stressing the system depends on the speed of your computer Normally you would mostly be using the Aux busses since the effects used in the Aux busses can be applied to multiple tracks efficiently In other words it isn t very taxing on the CPU to apply an Aux effect to multiple tracks For example let s say you were to select a reverb in the Aux 1 section of the mixer and you adjust the Aux1 send knobs for 5 tracks so that they were all using Aux 1 for reverb In this case there would only be one instance of this reverb plug in active in RealBand regardless of the number of tracks 5 that were utilizing the Aux1 bus Wha
370. nd Blaster X Fi Xtren R DI a JBB RealStrings Voca a2 dq ont Generic Audio L AUD Out ASIO 0 1 Sound Blaster X Fi Xtrerr R DI z 14 Untitled 2a 312 0i t L MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SYY Synth R 115 Untitled MN c dz Edd Eo E d gt gt d gt gt e C lt gt The BB tracks except for the MIDI Melody track are empty and there are additional blue labeled BB RealTracks starting at track 9 The track buttons now show a row of RealTracks buttons below the BB tracks buttons for the Bass Drums Piano Guitar and Strings parts Note The instrument on a BB track or BB RealTrack can be different than the track name For example the Piano track might have an acoustic guitar playing if there is no piano part in the style This RealTracks arrangement can be regenerated using any RealTracks style or you could even generate an arrangement with a regular Band in a Box style and add BB tracks to the existing RealTracks Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 35 Play Selected Area BB Piano rt _ 1 Acoustic Grand Piano MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 3 TW x a dn 25 Acoustic Guitar nylon 24 12 MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI 10 D800 Ch a BB Strings oF 49 String Ensemble 1 MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch6 v L R v L R v L R dB B Melody y 24 12 R x L R x L R v L R 189 Pad 1 new age F ld B Audigy MIDI
371. nd of the From Thru range the highlighted area will be extended If you Shift click within the From Thru range the range will be reduced and the location you clicked on will become either From or Thru depending on which boundary was closer to where you Shift clicked the mouse If you keep the left mouse button held after the Shift click and you move the mouse you can adjust the boundary of the range while moving the mouse Shift click works in terms of adjusting the top and bottom of the highlighted area and this affects the range of notes selected Once you have highlighted a section of the Notation Window you can use the Edit Cut or Edit Copy commands to cut copy a section of notation The From Thru values in the Cut or Copy dialog will automatically be set to reflect the highlighted area You can then cut or copy as you would normally When you cut or copy after having selected a section of the Notation window and you press OK RealBand will ask you if you wish to apply a Data Filter based on the highlighted range of notes If you answer Yes a Data Filter will pop up which will be set to include notes based on the vertical highlighted range in the Notation window Right Click Pop Up Menu This menu of notation commands pops up when you right click on the Editable Notation window Insert Section Text Section Letters Motation Symbols Cleanup Orphaned Notation Controller Events Chord height adjustment Advance
372. nd output ports By default the first of each will be selected You are allowed to select multiple ports with a Ctrl click on the ports you choose in the list and all the ports you select will be available for output within RealBand If you do not hear input or output then you may need to try different ports than the defaults You may need to read your sound card s instructions to determine the correct ports to use The ASIO Driver s Control Panel button launches a settings dialog specifically provided by your driver manufacturer This usually lets you adjust Creative ASIO Control Pa the latency by letting you choose different buffer sizes in milliseconds Some drivers might let you choose the buffer size in samples which 1s less ASIC convenient than milliseconds a me lena 10 me Cancel The smaller the buffer size the lower the latency and the faster the response Smaller buffers require more CPU power and if you hear dropouts or artifacts you may need to increase the buffer size Since many ASIO drivers do not support multiple sample rates RealBand has a built in resampler which lets you play and record songs that have a different sampling rate than the rate s directly supported by your ASIO driver Chapter 1 Welcome 17 The Resampler Quality combo lets you choose Fast Good Better or Best Fast is the quickest but is the lowest of the four levels of quality Best is the slowest uses more CPU time bu
373. ndo buffers contain temporary audio files that can be erased to free up disk space Toolbars use large icons Main toolbars have a choice of 24x24 or 16x16 bitmap sizes Toolbar buttons have text Lock Toolbars Reset Toolbars Enable Flyby Hints checkbox lets you enable or disable the hints that pop up when you move the mouse over certain controls such as those on the toolbar Left click on track type icon in Tracks Window shows pop up menu Default Measure Offset Audio This is a dialog with various settings that affect audio recording playback Audio File Type Audio Driver Type 16 Bit 44 1 m Enable Input Monitoring 4510 Only DMA Size MME only 512 Allow IM effects recording 4510 only DMA Offset MME only 1024 Default MME only Reset Realtime Effects Use 16 bit 170 for higher bit rez file types MME only Offset In M5 ce Track Buffer Size 65536 Output Buffer Millseconds MME only 2000 Input Buffer Seconds MME only Input Channel for MONO Tracks Buffer Size for Edit Save 512 Bytes Audio Temp Directory AO A ES Full Duplex Record Flay at same time C Quick Volume Change Advanced MIDI to Audio Sync MME only Realtime Effects Enabled Audio 170 Thread MME only Main Thread v Always record audio too if current track is MIDI Backup most recent audio take speed Change Quality TIMESTRETCH_QUALITY_4B4N0_SUM v C Unassigned Output Ports Work As Subgroups C Mono Tracks can use effects i
374. ne will automatically remove glitch notes based on the Velocity and Duration settings in milliseconds ms The Adjust Latency routine will automatically move the location of notes earlier to compensate for MIDI guitar latency You can specify the adjustments for each string in milliseconds if the default settings don t match your guitar s response times OK DeGlitch Only This will process the track using the DeGlitch routines only OK Adjust Latency Only This will process the track using the latency adjustment routines only OK DeGlitch and Adjust Latency This will process the track using both sets of routines MIDI Guitar Cleanup De Glitch Settings Adjust Latency Settings Remove velocities less than 15 Channel String Move Back n xl E string high le lt MS 2 z B string lf j M5 EE G string 25 31 M5 Ma D string 33 ms EN amp string de MS ne 2j E string low al Tj MS Remove durations less than 63 1 MS OF De Glitch Only From DK Adjust Latency Only Thru Of De Glitch and Adjust Latency Cancel Convert to WMA Windows Media Audio Us this plug in feature to convert a WAV file to Windows Media Audio format WMA There are options to save the file to a specific filename and destination folder to select a resolution quality for the file and spaces to fill in the appropriate Title Author Copyright and song Description credits This information will be embedded into the res
375. nerated a track by right clicking on it AUD ut Microsoft sound Mapper and selecting Generate RealTrack then the track name of that track will be displayed in green Chapter 8 Audio Production 93 Generate RealTracks Favorites 370 Pedal Steel Background Hank Sw 120 This command opens a short list of the most recently used 261 Sax Tenor Jazz Sw 140 RealTracks for a quick and convenient selection Click on your choice in the list to begin generating the RealTrack 409 Fiddle Background George Ev 085 363 Pedal Steel Background Ev 085 You can press the Escape key to cancel generation of the track Regenerate Track This will regenerate an existing track If a track 1s a non BB track but it was generated individually from one of the generation options in Tracks window popup menu or from one of the generation options on the Generate button popup menu then the track name will be displayed in green The track name being displayed in green or blue means that the track can be regenerated using this command This feature is useful to regenerate if you had changed the song s tempo or just to generate fresh material Generate All will regenerate all Blue and Green tracks automatically Generating RealDrums This feature lets you generate realistic drum tracks using RealDrums styles It is selected from the right click menu in the Tracks window You can generate a full track or any part of a track and you can use differe
376. ng Open A dialog box will pop up which has two list boxes one displaying all files with recognized extensions in the current directory and another displaying the different directories folders Note to Band in a Box Users If you open a MIDI file that was generated with Band in a Box the patch numbers channels and even the chords are imported and displayed correctly in RealBand Furthermore if you recorded a WAV audio track to go along with your Band in a Box generated MIDI file the RealBand software will offer to automatically import and align this data too Chapter 13 Reference 177 fi ve Look in B RealBand PB al E Al E 9 AudioChordizard iE data 9 DX Settings 9 mididrums Cy PTw Pictures HBBackup C3 samples 5 templates i i said seq 23 KB B impromtu seq 17 KB B jaysblue seq B kB El Last0NonFReall imeGroup tgs KB ii Latencu djust SEQ 1555 KB B melanbab seq 16 KB las minitwlz seq a kB las HealBand ig here SEU Br 123 KB d TEMP_ACW PT Way 36 161 KB B Template Mew_File With Reverb SEG 3 KB File Falder File Falder File Falder File Folder File Falder File Falder File Falder File Falder SEH File SEQ File SEQ File TGS File SEQ File SEH File SEQ File SEH File Weave Sound SEQ File 30 06 2008 16 34 30 06 2005 16 34 30 06 2005 16 34 30 06 2008 15 34 30 06 2005 16 34 04 07 2008 11 18 30 06 2005 16 34 30 06 2005 16 34 01 03 1993 1 06 01 05 1393 1 06 0
377. ng in the Audio Settings dialog Track Overview Display To the right of the track info panels you ll see the overview display x Tracks EE Snap Play Selected Area A L t Sound Mapper You can select a highlighted region by holding down the Ctrl key with the left mouse button pressed and drag the region to a new location in the song Chapter 13 Reference 243 Click on Play Selected Area to hear the highlighted section being edited Snap Play Selected Area The and buttons upper far left corner of the Tracks window let you zoom in or zoom out the overview section The Snap button causes the time indicator to snap to the nearest beat when changing the time location or when highlighting a region for editing Note If you have selected non consecutive multiple tracks e g 2 3 and 5 for editing you should not click on the track overview section area directly since it will cause your track selections to be lost If you only want to change the edit From Thru settings then you can click on the timeline immediately above the track overviews with the mouse and then press the F7 key to set the From location and then click on the timeline again and press F8 to select the Thru location With a right click on any track in the Tracks window overview this pop up menu opens Individual MIDI tracks can be auto converted to wave files or audio tracks using a DXi or VSTi synth Aut
378. ng uses any audio effects you ll likely get less tracks Percentage Tempos The Play at Speed menu command brings up a submenu that gives you a choice of playing the song at 25 speed one quarter the regular speed 50 regular speed 75 regular speed and 100 which is regular speed Percentage tempo buttons are also available in the Audio Edit window Once engaged from either location the tempo playback speed remains in effect until changed in one of the two locations Go to Time This command gets you directly to any time in a song You can also use the F6 function key to activate this command If the Display Mode in the SMPTE section of the Options Menu is set to Normal then the time is expressed in Measures Beats Ticks If the Display Mode is set to SMPTE then the time is expressed in Hours Minutes Seconds Frames Go To Marker This command allows you to go to a specific marker without having the Markers window opened 208 Chapter 13 Reference Jukebox Juke Box D pt samples Flay List string ivvild Cards allowed Pu iw Random Playback Delay 0 Open Save Add to Play List Stop Between Songs Start Stop gt teo The Jukebox feature lets you automatically play a list of songs When selected a dialog box will pop up that offers you choices as to which songs will be played in a Jukebox session etc The Play List String field contains a list of songs to be playe
379. nge track strip names When the mouse cursor is positioned over a track number in the Mixer window a popup box will display all of the Track windows settings for the track the track name and type patch name volume and pan settings and effects settings MIDI tracks show an output port with an M prefix for a MIDI port or an S for a software synthesizer They have controls for volume pan reverb chorus modulation and expression plus a VU meter a MIDI patch selection box and a mute unmute button Audio tracks either have a prefix of A for an audio output or G for an audio subgroup on their output ports They have volume and pan controls a stereo VU meter a mute unmute button four assignable auxiliary sends and a track specific FX insert In addition to the track specific effects there are eight global busses that can each have four chained effects each You can assign each audio track to four different Aux busses and adjust the amount that each audio track uses the effects in each assigned bus If that isn t enough you can add four chained effects to each audio subgroup and also to the main output this will affect all tracks For a full description of the Mixer and the use of its features please refer to the Mixer Window help topic Having more fun with RealBand You ve seen how easily you can create music from start to finish with RealBand But don t forget that this powerful program has many
380. non concert instruments such as trumpet or saxophone Trumpet players and other Bb instruments should set transpose to 2 Alto Saxophone and other Eb instruments should set the transpose to 3 The music is then displayed in the correct key for the instrument but plays in the concert key to the MIDI card The Show Beat Bar Lines checkbox when unchecked will cause the staff window to be drawn without beat or bar lines Staff Roll mode only not in Standard Notation mode The Tablature box gives a choice of tablature for guitar and additional fretted instruments bass ukulele mandolin and banjo The fretboard tablature will show where the bass clef is normally located Tablature is only shown in Standard Notation and Editable Notation mode A track displayed with tablature must be a valid multi channel guitar track or the tablature won t be displayed properly 2 2 0 0 1 1 1 Tab 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notation window showing banjo tablature Duration Line Color selects the color of the horizontal lines that represent note duration and the vertical lines for note velocity in the Staff Roll notation mode The Key Signature is shown if the Show Key Signature option 1s enabled If the Highlight Played Notes checkbox is checked notes will be highlighted in red as the notes are played when a song is playing If the Snap to grid lines checkbox is checked the inserted note will be lined up
381. nput or tune an acoustic instrument using a microphone connected to the sound card microphone input Then play a pitch and the tuner will auto range to determine the nearest note and display the intonation of your instrument Tones Main Window Input Level Displays the instrument Input Level in dB For best results the level should peak at least halfway up Quiet signals may be too noisy to properly recognize the pitch Some inexpensive sound cards do not handle clipping gracefully If your card seems to misbehave on very loud signals you should try to avoid hitting the very top of the level meter On most sound cards however going over the top will not significantly affect the tuner s performance Input Note The name of the most recent note detected by the tuner is shown in the upper right corner Pitch cents Displays the intonation of the note in cents hundredths of a semitone The note is in tune with the current detected note when the indicator is hovering near zero When the tuner has locked on to a recognizable pitch the indicator turns green and tracks the current pitch Ifa note is not loud enough too noisy or too unsteady for the tuner to measure the indicator will turn red and freeze at the last known good value It can sometimes take the tuner a moment to lock on to a pitch You may need to play a note a couple of times in succession before the tuner is well locked on to the note This is
382. ns more closely spaced echoes build up from secondary reflections bouncing between room surfaces As the reverb decays the echo density builds up into a final sheen of hundreds of quiet closely spaced echoes PG Reverb i Enable Reverb 100 r 4000 4000 S000 2000 1000 10 500 1K 0 Dry Fre Delay Decay LF Rollott HF Rallaff Density Pre Delay is the time delay of first reflections Decay is the time it takes for reverb to decay Reverb Time is measured as RT60 the time it takes reverb to decay to a level 60 dB below the dry signal Brightness is the rate at which the high frequencies die away as the reverb decays Rooms with hard surfaces are typically bright but rooms with soft surfaces are usually darker Density is the density of low level echoes near the end of the reverb tail High Density settings add sheen to the sound Mix is the proportion of original Dry signal to the reverb Wet signal When PG Reverb is inserted in an Aux Return set Mix to 100 percent to keep the original dry signal from returning on the Aux Any original dry signal returning on the Aux would dilute the effect of the reverb Output adjusts the final level of the plug in Typical Settings A large hall might have long Pre Delay long Decay and moderate Density A hard large space such as a gymnasium might have long Pre Delay high Density and high Brightness A soft large space such as a concert hall with carpet padded seats hang
383. nt either of these from being shown in the Bars window by unchecking the appropriate checkbox If you uncheck the Show Measure Numbers in Bars Window checkbox the bar numbers will not be shown in the Bars window If you uncheck the Show Markers in Bars Window checkbox the markers will not be shown in the Bars window These options are provided in case you prefer just one or the other being shown in the Bars window 240 Chapter 13 Reference Markers can be as close together in time or as far apart as you wish Markers that are too close together will run into each other when displayed in the Bars window In most situations such as marking verses and choruses of a song this isn t a problem but it is something to keep in mind when working with markers Show Karaoke Window Use this command to display karaoke files Tile The Tile command will arrange the various project windows so that an equal portion of each window is visible on the screen Cascade The Cascade command arranges the various program windows on screen on top of each other with the tops of each window visible Arrange Icons The Arrange Icons command positions the icons so that they are neatly arranged EE Mixer EIE HH Bars Close All The Close All command minimizes all open windows so that they are shown as icons Tracks Window This 1s the window that 1s shown when you first start the program The Tracks window shows the tracks with their names track type MIDI or a
384. nt RealDrums styles for different sections of a track Select and Generate RealDrums Generate Realbrums Favorites Select an open track for your RealDrums then right click and choose either Select and Generate RealDrums or Generate RealDrums Favorites RealDrums Picker choose RealDrums for this song only RealDrums RockLiteEven8 1 Snare Ride EJ x Filter by Memo lv Show if Tempo is out of Range Iw Show RealDrums that are not Favorites Update Show All d iw Show if Feel does not match Show RealDrums that are N A Simple straight ahead airy Pop style with 4 drum substyles For this song only Force MIDI drums a Sidestick RealDrums For this song RockLiteEven81 Snare Ride ii Blastix y Hane iii Snare For this song only use this RealDrums style in list below Rerum sive Name i Genre Genre more ya Jev 8 JLo Ji Ix NA S A E Pop128 Pop o HJ HE IX Pop98 Pop 3 E 8 050 150 PopBouncy Pop Sw 8 O90 1 0 PopShuffle Pop Rock Sw 8 110 185 PopWaltzEven8 Pop 3 Ev 8 070 190 PopWaltz Pop 3 Sw 8 050 220 ane Reggae Reggae Sw 8 050 240 1 Snare Ride RockEveni6 Rock Ev 16 035 160 2 SideStck Ride RockEven8 Rows EY 2 050 2 3 Blastix Ride RockHardEven8 4 Blastix Snare a C NN RN REN ERN GN 5 SideStck Snare RockShuffle Rock Blues Sw 8 090 220 6 SideStck Blastix RockSoftEven8 Rock Ev 8 080 190 y RockSwing16 Rock Sw 16 070 140 Rumb
385. nu Export to Wave File This command will export the highlighted section of the current track to a wave file if the current track is an audio track Unlike the Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File command this command will generate as small a WAV file as possible For example if you highlight the whole track and there is no audio data until measure number 12 the wave that is exported is going to begin at measure 12 rather than being padded with 11 measures of blank audio Only the raw wave data 1s saved mixer settings and effects are not rendered Merge Audio and DXi VSTi Tracks to Stereo Wave File This is an export command that will merge all the audio tracks to a stereo wave file while simultaneously rendering and merging the MIDI tracks to audio if you have a DXi or VSTi software synth When played in a wave file player the file will sound the same as 1f the audio tracks of the song were being played by RealBand The volume mute pan etc settings of the track will affect the sound of the merged stereo wave file 108 Chapter 8 Audio Production Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Compressed File This command works the same as the Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to Stereo Wave File command except that this will compress the file When you execute this command RealBand generates a temporary stereo PCM file and then a dialog will pop up which will prompt you to select an audio output format After you select a format and
386. o Convert Individual MIDI Track to wA File Auto Convert Individual MIDI Track to Audio Track Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Selected Audio Tracks Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Selected Audio Tracks allows you to permanently change the duration and pitch of individual audio tracks or change the speed and pitch of the entire RealBand mix Bars Window The Bars window offers an overview of multiple tracks of wave and MIDI data EH Bars E x Intro Verse 9 17 Chorus 25 33 Verse 2 441 az Bass BBR Drums BRR Piano BRR M Guitar BRERA strings HRB Asses Melody Bi LIBRE aaa aa EEE EEE Ea BR A AA E E EE Hii Hee He MUI Z Za ie i PH Hi h m LT This window shows the bars or measures of the song Bars that have MIDI data will be shaded while bars without any data are not shaded At the top of the window you will see either the bar numbers markers or both depending on the chosen settings in the Markers window Marker Options dialog See the Markers window topic for more information on markers To the left of the window you will see the track names If the whole track name doesn t fit in this section you will see it ending with to indicate the name is actually longer than shown Bars that have MIDI data will be shaded Bars that contain WAV data will be displayed as waveform overviews Bars without any data appear as empty squares Left click with the mouse to set
387. o Resolutions You can change the resolution for any individual beat of a song to a different resolution by clicking with the right mouse button above that beat on the Notation window s time line For example if you click on the time line above the 2nd beat in a measure a dialog box will pop up which will let you set the resolution of the current beat for both clefs If you select a resolution of 8 then 32nd notes can be displayed You can even select a resolution as high as 32 which would allow 128th notes to be shown Notation Track 3 Opt Print zi Ch Clean L Tr K Beat Resolution Treble Clef Resolution for this Beat Bass Clef Resolution For this Beat Cancel Help When you choose a micro resolution RealBand will insert a special controller event into the track as a means of storing the resolution If you set the resolution to the same setting as the Options dialog s resolution setting then micro resolutions won t be used and the special controller for the current beat and clef will be deleted Highlighting a section of the Notation window When the Notation window is in Editable Notation Mode you can highlight a section of the Notation window so that you can cut or copy the section To highlight a section of the Notation window Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 115 1 Click and hold the left mouse button at the upper right corner of the rectangular section you want to highlight Make sure
388. oe oo ple lite 295 CONTO WE 50 A A A ene 196 Insert Blank Trio dos 203 Juke DD ere ee nee erence tn ree UM UR Ere UU 208 COMMU OS ind 208 play IS teases see hate osts eae canted Ch ue ect 209 A Re ee en su e IRR EE 208 I ACTES de TE 177 180 EE AR oae ios d Eom E ATA 180 Key transposition sas sema enti rio 257 S EPOR CN m 54 73 A bs e eR Ru 215 keystroke commands cccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 281 La RU 228 Lead Sheet bar numbers OptioNn ccccceessessseeseeeeeessees 126 CODY Paste VELO deett tei tati er etta eh 127 double Dat MNCS oiu e eee e RI ARE 126 MIMO dnde 127 malple e doi Les 124 D UDUNS ces Menden Me EE UNE 128 Lead Sheet window cccoooonoooooooocnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnonononnnnos 123 IBI ERE 2 Loa etaient ea nte rea uu e E E 180 Loading songs auTO o eee a ee ee cee eee 84 MID Uae er ras elise accent lee n A 53 A boats ni dotati eae 84 WAV TAN o ll 84 Loop Endless LOOP lala 217 MIDIA A 258 Lyrics copy to clipboard cccccccccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnos 202 CTIUCEITIB coo ee Ce ae en ee ee eee 111 O RR DL 112 MAIS Mos 38 NM iodo 239 290 Meni Dare ene bee EMI rne 38 Merse audio and DA 99 MIGROS Tracks alii 201 MEE A dawns gs wae abo EE dada eor PR 258 MER AAA hehe oa wm atest EE EE 76 230 Micro resolution eerte enhn read Ran 114 MICFO TOSOLUDODS eiie rte p beta tbe uude 81 Micros HDI co 164 MIDI COME A a 193 E Pt 227 totced ehannel ace eee Ped eto 25 list Of control
389. olding down the Ctrl key The Track Name field shows the track s name You can edit a track name by right clicking on the track name field or by double clicking on it After you re done editing then press Enter x The Mute button lets you mute or unmute a track The Disclosure Triangle will reveal more information about a track by making the track row height taller If a track is a MIDI track you ll see Vel velocity offset Rvb reverb Mod modulation Loop Key key transpose Cho chorus and Exp expression settings You can make changes to these settings by clicking on the edit fields with the left mouse button and then had moving the mouse up or down while holding the mouse button down Exp The Edit DXi button launches the DirectX Window dialog and will display the settings panel for either the Default DXi Synth 16 DXi synth slot which is MIDI port 32 or the current DXi port number if the track is set to a valid DXi port 17 32 Any track s MIDI Output Port can be set to send to one of the 16 available DXi synth ports or to any other available MIDI port The Volume and Pan sliders let you adjust a track s volume and pan settings without having to go into the Mixer window Below the Volume slider you ll see two VU level meters These give you a general idea of a track s level during playback NOTE If a track is an audio track the meter display will be delayed by the size of the audio Output Buffer Mil
390. om About RealBand RealBand is a fully featured and powerful music arranging sequencing and digital recording program RealBand is the perfect tool for musicians students and songwriters alike Features included in RealBand e Intelligent automatic accompaniment by Band in a Box e RealTracks and RealDrums automatic live instrument parts e Audio Chord Wizard interprets chords from audio files e 48 track MIDI audio mixer with multiple FX busses up to 16 effects per track e Support for popular audio file formats MP3 WMA WMV WAV and CDA e Built in DirectX audio effects e DirectX and VST plug ins supported e Band in a Box files load directly e Compatible with all Band in a Box styles and Real instruments e Shares native SEQ file type with PowerTracks Pro Audio directly compatible e Support for MIDI and Karaoke files e Karaoke lyrics window e Piano roll window with graphic controller editing e Onscreen notation and lead sheet style printout e Virtual guitar fretboard and piano keyboard e and much more Have fun Chapter 1 Welcome Installation Minimum System Requirements Windows 9x ME NT 2000 XP Vista 7 Windows XP or higher is required for some features 128 MB RAM Digital audio features require a fast Pentium processor May run on slower computers untested MIDI features require a 486 or better 75MB hard drive space much more if recording digital audio MIDI system MIDI
391. ompatible SysEx file into the currently selected bank Save This command will save the currently selected bank on disk in MIDIEX compatible format Name Provides you with the option to choose the name for a current bank of SysEx data Auto When this feature is enabled the bank will automatically be transmitted via MIDI when loaded from a SEQ file The letter A will appear to the right of the bank name if the bank is set to be Auto Transmitted Port This setting determines the output port through which the SysEx data will be sent out via MIDI If the selected port is greater than the number of ports available the data will be sent out the highest available port For example if the port setting for a bank is set to 2 and there is only one MIDI output port installed the SysEx data in the bank will be sent out through MIDI Port 1 Delete This simply deletes the SysEx data from a currently selected bank Send All This transmits all banks that have SysEx data in them out via MIDI Edit For those who wish to manually edit the bytes of a selected bank you can also type in this SysEx data as long as the bank currently has no data in 1t A dialog box will pop up in which you can manually edit the bytes The bytes are edited as hexadecimal numbers separated by spaces The SysEx data will look something like this FO 41 10 42 12 40 11 02 10 1D F7 Each SysEx message should start with FO and end with F7 The following is a list of the editing comm
392. omputer system Setup and Configuration Step One MIDI Setup The first time the program runs you will be prompted to select a MIDI device from a list of currently installed devices e g SB Audigy MIDI IO Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth etc If you don t see the MIDI Driver Setup dialog automatically it can be reached by selecting MIDI Devices from the Options pull down menu Select the MIDI device or devices that you want to use with RealBand optionally set the internal MIDI clock timer in milliseconds This clock timer setting determines how often the computer should reset its MIDI watch If you ever find you need an even higher degree of MIDI accuracy and your system is extremely fast you can decrease this number say to 5 and the MIDI clock will be checked and reset twice as often The default is 10 milliseconds 1 100 of a second which is fine for most systems 8 Chapter 1 Welcome MIDI Driver Setup Input Divers Output Driver s SB Audigy MIDI 10 0500 Microsoft MIDI Mapper SB Audigy Synth D800 Roland v SC SB Audigy 5w Synth L800 SB Audigy Synth B D800 SB Audigy MIDI 10 D800 Move Selected Devices to Top iw He Haoute MIDI playback to default Osi Synth Default Dri Synth WSC Dj Timer Period in Millizecond 1 Synth Output Latency Delay in MS 0 Latency Adjust 0 Audio IO Delay in M5 Cancel Help A MIDI setup using the sound card for MIDI Input with MIDI Output re
393. on of the program in whole or in part except as expressly provided for in this license If you transfer possession of any copy modification or merged portion of the program to another party your license is automatically terminated LIMITATION OF REMEDIES PG Music Inc s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be A The replacement of any media not meeting PG Music Inc s Limited Warranty which are returned to PG Music Inc or an authorized PG Music Inc dealer with a copy of your receipt B IfPG Music Inc or the authorized dealer is unable to deliver replacement media which is free of defects in materials or workmanship you may terminate this agreement and your money will be refunded In no event will PG Music Inc be liable to you for any damages including but not limited to lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or the inability to use such program even if PG Music Inc or an authorized PG Music Inc dealer has been advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by any other party TRADEMARKS Band in a Box CloudTracks CopyMe GuitarStar JazzU PG Music PowerTracks Pro RealBand RealDrums and RealTracks are either the trademarks or registered trademarks of PG Music Inc in the United States Canada and other countries Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in t
394. on window to adjust to make any final adjustments to the highlighted section Event List Editing An Event List window is an event editor that lets you insert or delete MIDI events and lets you make changes to existing events A list of events 1s displayed vertically in a window with each line in the list representing an individual event Each event is shown with its track number time MIDI channel number the kind of the event and the parameters of the event The Ins Del and Change buttons may be used to insert delete and change events You can also type directly in the Ch Time and Event fields to change the values of an event al Event List Track 3 E EJE Bal 100 Ins 292 134 1 Del 60 64 Change 146 316 Transmit 856 644 Silence 676 3 J 3 3 3 J 3 3 3 3 3 J 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 When an Event List is created by pressing the F2 key or by using the Window New Event List menu it is based on the tracks that are currently selected For example if only track 1 1s selected and you use the New command to create an Event List window it will only deal with events that occur in track 1 You can also open an Event List while multiple tracks are selected In this case the Event List will deal with events in all the tracks which where selected at the time of the creation of the Event List window For example if tracks 1 through 3 were selected when you created an Event List window the Ev
395. onboard MIDI synthesizer or by recording the audio output from an external MIDI device To render MIDI tracks to audio with the internal system sound device 1 Load the source MIDI file into RealBand 2 Inthe Tracks window select a blank track and set the track type to stereo audio 3 In Options MIDI Devices verify that the internal MIDI synthesizer is selected This could be the Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synthesizer any model of Sound Blaster or another onboard sound device Click on the VU Meters button on the Tool Bar 5 Inthe VU Meters window click on the Windows mixer button to open the Volume Control see note following To see the Recording Control select Options Properties in the Volume Control window 6 Inthe Recording Control select the input source by checking the Select checkbox Different systems and sound cards use different labels you might be selecting MIDI as the input source or What You Hear or Stereo Mix If you aren t sure which source to choose start by eliminating the obvious like CD Player Microphone or Line In 7 Play the MIDI file and monitor the levels on the Input VU meter Levels can be adjusted in both the Recording Control and the Volume or Playback control The levels can occasionally go into the yellow zone and a transient peak in the red zone is OK Consistent readings in the red or lighting up the clip indicator means your levels are set too high 8 Unless you want to reco
396. ons a pop up hint will appear if you move the mouse cursor over a note and stop The hint wndow shows the note s properties note name MIDI channel velocity start time and duration This lets you quickly see a note s properties without having to bring up the edit dialog by right clicking on the note TIME 6 03 IL IA Cue Notation Symbols for Expression and Articulation The Notation window now supports many new symbols including section letters A B etc slurs legato accents staccatos crescendos and more The Notation Symbols are entered from the Notation Event dialog which 1s accessed from the right click menu in the Editable Notation window Insert Section Text section Letters Motation Symbols Slur Cleanup Orphaned Notation Controller Events Crescendo l l Decrescendo Chord height adjustment Staccato Advance by 1 peg Alt Right Arrow Regular Accent Backup by 1 peg tAlt Left Arrow Legato Accent Motation Mode Editable Mode Staff Roll Mode SEaccatissimoa Marcato Accent This dialog lets you insert or remove notation symbols Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 117 The symbols supported are Slurs And other accents Crescendo A Regular Decrescendo po Legato mes Staccato n Staccatissimo Y Marcato A Choose the event type slur decrescendo etc in
397. oolbar There is a setting to Hide Show Piano in the Options menu Chapter 4 The Main Screen 43 The piano can be played by clicking with the mouse either while a song is playing or when it 1s stopped and clicking on a note while in Editable Notation mode enters that note in the selected track at the current time location There is a 1 peg hot key in the Notation window to move current time forward or backward by 1 peg normally a 16th note Alt left arrow moves the current time backward by 1 peg Alt right arrow moves it forward by 1 peg This makes it easier 1f you are using the on screen piano for entering notes into the Notation window The on screen piano also responds to mouse clicks if the current track is an audio track This is useful if you want to hear a note played as a reference without having to change the current track to a MIDI track You can vertically resize the Big Piano by placing the mouse on the bottom edge of the piano and then clicking and dragging the mouse up or down Piano Settings The Piano Settings are found under the Piano tab in the Preferences They include settings for the display mode and the size of the keyboard Piano Settings When the display mode is set to Current Track the piano will display notes as they are being played from the current track If the Display Mode display mode is set to All notes except for drum channel the piano maes will display notes that are p
398. op in a Real instrument lick Finally you ll want to mix your tracks into a finished recording Mixing in RealBand un The Mixer window provides real time control of volume and effects You can launch it with the fader button on the toolbar or by typing ALT W 8 36 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand With its own real time effects and support for all other DirectX and VST plug ins the RealBand mixer is a powerful production tool It offers great flexibility in applying these effects to individual tracks to sub mixes and to the final audio output This is an integrated mixer that controls both MIDI and audio tracks There are sliders for all 48 tracks 8 auxiliary effects Aux busses and a combined total of 16 audio output ports or audio subgroups Yao E eo Ee Ee AO B C E Or Or C3 B Or Or C OOO cno icno ico Y 2 2 B O B Qo Qo Q B O e O o O o Qe non Tinon noo 29 29 2 E CA B CA CACA B Qr Qr Qr Qr Qr Qr Z Q QQA 9 B CQ B Oe OQ OE Qe Qe QeQqe qq v VE VE VE yA y XEM N y XEM E Nu Num m m o D D ao um 7momomomomomommmuummumm PA 7 PEREA Y D o aa Pen 8 palun 6 r 1 984 lea Pawn Ll palun cb palun L palun vL palun SL pepmur SL m su ns Eton The Mixer track strips conveniently show the track name vertically to the left of the volume sliders This is the track name that is assigned in the Tracks window go to that window to add or cha
399. or the song Song Set The Song Set button opens a dialog of Song Settings with options that apply only to the current song F Song Settings settings apply to this song only Allow RealTracks For This Song Allow Realbrums For This Song Specific RealDrums RD Choose Song has even Feel Styles can change patches For this song 2 2 Bar Offset This song measure offset also affects lead in generation For example if set to 2 the song will be generated with a 2 bar lead in The song location slider moves directly to a new place in the song Dockable Toolbars Q 56 amp FP SQ dir S AS UD x D Mew Open Save Saves Cut Copy Undo AudSet MIDIDrv Plugin Mode Print Plugins Synths Prefs Metronome ACW Import Audio Render Midi Monitor Guitar Tuner Gtr Clean D A A Mi 2 gt gun m LOO F Tracks Bars Chords Mixer Piano Roll Tempos Comments Motation LeadShk Sysex Guitar Meters EventList Audio Edit Big Lyrics Drums Big Clock Conductor The user can personalize the explorer style dockable undockable toolbars There is also an option to Hide Show Toolbar in the Options menu i To add or remove buttons from a toolbar click on the More Buttons arrow at the right end of the toolbar Click and drag on the vertical divider strips to resize the toolbar and hide or reveal additional toolbar buttons This may not be necessary with larger widescreen monitors Click on LAdd or Remove Buttons 7 to open a list of
400. ork if you insert PG Vocal Remover on a mono track Operation Enable Plug in Checkbox Toggle the checkbox to compare the sound with without the Vocal Remover activated Balance Slider Fine tune with the Balance slider The center position is typically as good as it gets but some recordings have accidentally mismatched Left Right balance This is common with vinyl or cassette recordings or CD reissues of Oldies You may get improved vocal cancellation by twiddling the Pan slider to find a sweet spot Lo Limit and Hi Limit Sliders Adjust these sliders to fit the nature of the vocal The default settings are fine for many tunes Frequencies below the Lo Limit and above the Hi Limit are not processed preserving fidelity except in the vocal midrange Set the Lo Limit slider just low enough to attenuate low vocal notes Set the Hi Limit slider just high enough to attenuate high vocal harmonics Obviously the best settings are different for a Baritone Tenor Alto or Soprano voice They are best set by ear Some sopranos have warm low tone but some Baritones have very bright tone so the mid frequency vocal range may be wider than expected Reduce Reverb Checkbox Toggle the checkbox to compare with without Reverb Reduction Reduce Reverb Amount Slider Reverb Reduction behaves like a dynamics compressor but the loudness of the center channel affects the loudness of the side channels Move the slider to the right to increase th
401. orth between windows Chapter 11 Mixer Window 141 Master Controls and Mixer Utilities The two knobs in the All column serve as master reverb and chorus settings These controls will affect the overall level of Reverb and Chorus without changing the settings on individual tracks lt Reverb lt Chorus The volume slider control in the All column is the master volume control The Pan control in the All column will change the settings for all 48 tracks at the same time When a SEQ file is saved all of the Mixer s current volume pan chorus and reverb settings are also saved These settings will be restored when the file is reloaded The current mixer track corresponds to the current highlighted track in the Tracks and or Bars windows You can change the current track in the Mixer window simply by clicking on the track number The Mixer s Range Combo settings are determined by the display configuration you set with the splitter bar These two examples show the Range Combo settings with the splitter bar set to show 12 or 16 tracks at a time but you could use different settings depending on the size of your display or on what combination of track strips Aux busses and output ports you want to see Default The Default button located on the lower left of the Mixer will reset all mixer parameters to the default settings Q The Tune knob lets you fine tune your synth or MIDI sound source When you click on the Tune
402. os as described in the Reference section You can use the square bracket hot keys to change the tempo by 5 bpm Meter This command lets you change the current meter The Meter Map event for the current time will correspondingly be automatically changed The numerator can be from to 99 You can change the denominator via the drop down combo box illustrated here Denominator Key Signature Key IC m This feature allows you to choose the key signature for a song This setting will affect whether accidentals are displayed as sharps or flats Simply pick a key signature from the drop down combo box as illustrated D A E Run Control Panel Drivers This feature auto runs the Windows Sounds and Audio Device Properties dialog This command performs the same function as manually going in to the Control Panel settings and double clicking on the Sounds and Audio Devices icon Patch Names You can easily associate a list of names to patch numbers The Options Patch Names setting can be regarded as a global default setting This means that unless you ve specifically selected another patch list when changing the patch of a track in the Tracks Classic Tracks View or Mixer window the patch list you select here will be shown in the Patch Selection dialog For example if the Patch Names list is set to General MIDI you will encounter the General MIDI patch list by default when you choose to select a
403. ou can Cut Copy and Paste audio data just as if 1t were text Paste to single destination track E Destination Track 8 Repetition Options C Merge with existing data le Dvermnte existing data Create gap on selected tracks Create gap an all tracks iw Events Tempa Changes Markers Chord Symbols Advance the Now pointer after the paste w Crosstade when pasting audio From 10 a4 45 ES ES Lancel Help Each action brings up 1ts own dialog which can be launched with the standard Windows keystroke commands Ctrl X for Cut Ctrl C for Copy and Ctrl V for Paste mw Crosshade when pasting audio The cross fade option when pasting audio smoothes out a paste so that no audible clicks are heard at splice points of pastes Click on the Help button in each edit dialog for detailed instructions on the settings and commands 104 Chapter 8 Audio Production Audio Effects Compressor fate Distortion Reverb Echo Chorus Flanger Ring Mod Tremolo Directx Audio Plugins This is a submenu that contains all of the permanent audio effects for RealBand The audio effects in this submenu are actually external plug ins that are transparently integrated with RealBand but actually aren t built in to the program itself You ll be able to use them just as if they were built in to RealBand Unlike the effects that are added in the Mixer window on the FX track insert and the Aux busses when the effec
404. ou start playing a scale beginning at the E note on the 6th string at the 12th position it is actually a Phrygian Mode scale You can also think of it as just another minor scale beginning on a 5th string The roots of the corresponding major scale are shown with an orange circle The Note Names combo lets you choose between several options that affect the display within the circular guides on the fretboard The default option is Scale Tones which will display all the tones of the Aeolian or Phrygian scale Other options are None no notes shown Root Only just the major scale root notes shown and Chord Tones just the major triad tones The Auto Set Position combo if you chose to make use of this setting will cause the program to automatically set the guitar fretboard s current position to either the Aeolian or Phrygian position of the current key By default it is set to None which means that the fretboard s current position stays unchanged The Auto Set Octave setting when enabled will cause RealBand to automatically set the guitar octave by analyzing the MIDI data in the current track of the song The Use Index Finger Position setting when enabled causes the guitar display to use the index finger to play notes that are one fret outside of the normal position instead of the little finger The Show Out of Range Notes setting when enabled will allow any note to be displayed on the guitar regardless if it i
405. oud passages to avoid intermodulation distortion and pumping between low frequency and high frequency instruments Meters The Left and Right level meters indicate the plug in output level including whatever extra loss is contributed by the Output Gain slider However the Gain meter always shows Gain Reduction before the contribution of the Output Gain slider In other words the Output Gain slider does not affect the Gain Reduction meter Only the Left meter is used with Mono signals The Clip indicators light when the plug in output has exceeded 0 dB The Clip indicators cannot light up if Peak Limit is enabled because Peak Limit never allows Over Level outputs However if Peak Limit is not enabled you can see any over level signals that might appear on Peak Limit s input Enable Peak Limit allows the plug in to control loud peaks Enable DC Blocker allows the plug in to eliminate DC Offsets Pre Gain Apply extra gain to the audio before limiting If a song is too quiet raise the Pre Gain to get a louder signal without having to worry about clipping the output Even if a song is quite loud you can apply extra gain to make a fatter sound Music is often boosted via a Peak Limiter for a more consistent level If Pre Gain is boosted too much the audio can sound squashed It will be very loud but you may hear pumping as the gain continually adjusts to the input level Squashed music can sound loud but
406. out gt gt SC DX Default lt lt Ch2 BB Drums Turns MIDI out gt gt SC DX Default lt lt Ch 10 us BB Piano 1 Acoustic Grand Piano MIDI out gt gt SC DX Default lt lt Ch 3 jazz Default lt lt Ch 6 BB Strings JE y 143 String Ensemble 1 E MIDl out gt gt SC DX Default lt lt Ch art jar art art ars w BB RealDrums JazzBrushesSticks y 54 2122 Generic Audio AUD Qut ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave RealTracks Tenor Sax Generic Audio 4 SAUD Out A510 0 1 Wave Wave 8 Untitled The Track Number fi If the track is the current track it will be highlighted in red When multiple tracks are selected the track numbers will be highlighted in yellow for tracks other than the current track If the track is not selected it will be gray Click on the track number field to make a track the current track y A H a n E i E p isi AT E A A 8 A If you click on the track number field while holding the Shift key this will select a range of tracks from the current track through the number you clicked on For example if track 1 is the current track and you hold the shift key and then click on the number field for Track 4 this will make tracks 1 through 4 selected Track 1 will still be the current track and tracks 2 3 and 4 will be highlighted in yellow You can select deselect individual tracks by clicking on a track s number field while h
407. oves The controller moves are saved as MIDI events in the selected track including audio tracks The Delete button in the mixer will automatically delete all mixer events volume reverb pan chorus that are currently embedded within the song s selected tracks The Insert button in the mixer will automatically insert Mixer Events volume reverb pan chorus into song s non blank tracks W Mono Sometimes a stereo mix will have problems when it is played back in mono Use this checkbox to hear the mix in mono and check for problems such as flanging or canceling H Creating Audio Subgroups in the Mixer Unassigned Outputs Work As Subgroups Ww Unassigned Output Ports Werk As Subgroups When this checkbox is enabled in the Audio preferences dialog any audio output ports that do not have a driver port assigned to them will function as subgroups A subgroup is a bus or signal path that gives you the ability to control several tracks as a group Let s suppose you only have one audio Output Driver port installed in RealBand and you ve enabled the Unassigned Outputs Work As Subgroups checkbox Audio Output Ports 2 16 can then become subgroups Chapter 11 Mixer Window 143 Note that this panel is scrollable so if you can t see all of the faders just use the gt scroll arrows to get to the one you want Ti nif Ti If you were to then set the output ports of tracks 2 3 and 4 to G
408. p current section Loop current bar Loop current 4 bars Loop current part Looping ON previous setting Looping OFF Go Back 1 Chorus Go Back 1 Section Go Back 1 Screen Go Back 1 Bar Go Back 4 Bars Go Back 1 Part marker Go Ahead 1 Chorus Go Ahead 1 Section Go Ahead 1 Screen Go Ahead 1 Bar Go Ahead 4 Bars Go Ahead 1 Part marker F4 Escape F12 Ctrl Shift F8 Shift F8 Ctrl W Alt W 1 9 and 0 W lt QA KX N A DY Ctri A Ctrl S Ctrl D Ctrl Z Ctrl X Ctrl C Shift A Shift S Shift D Shift Z Shift X Shift C In addition using the MIDI keyboard you can also use the Conductor to Al note 21 Turn MIDI Conductor OFF Bbl Turn MIDI Conductor ON Bl Turn MIDI Conductor ON only as note is held down TranzPort Support Wireless Remote Control 158 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins TranzPort Support Wireless Remote Control support for RealBand The Frontier Design TranzPort is a wireless remote control hardware unit Electronic Musician Editors Choice 2006 that now allows you to control RealBand from 30 feet away The backlit LCD provides a two line readout Buttons and a wheel allow control of many RealBand features Select songs and control Play Stop Pause and Loop Select Mute and Solo tracks as well as Volume and Tempo changes are all supported You can for example put the TranzPort unit on your piano at home or your music stand on a gig and load play control songs all while far awa
409. p the Delete key Or right click and choose the Delete Selected Events item in the popup menu Right click Contextual Menu The popup menu can be accessed by right clicking on the notes graphic events or any of the rulers Undo Delete Selected Events Select All Notes and Graphic Events On Current Channel Select All Make Events On Current Channel uk Copy Paste Replace Paste Merge Re Channel All Events to the Tracks Channel Re Channel Selected Events bo the Track s Channel Re Channel Selected Events bo the Current view Channel Cancel Popup Undo Duplicates the RealBand Edit Undo or Ctrl Z action Delete Selected Events Deletes any selected events highlighted in red This can also be accomplished by tapping the Delete key Select All Notes and Graphic Events If the Chan combo box is set to All this item will select ALL EVENTS on ALL CHANNELS all events in the track Otherwise ALL EVENTS that match the CURRENT MIDI CHANNEL are selected Select All Note Events Of Current Channel right click the Note Panel or Note Ruler If the Chan combo box is set to All this item will select all notes on all channels but it will not select any non note events Otherwise all notes that match the current MIDI channel are selected 136 Chapter 10 Piano Roll Window Select All Graphic Events Of Current Channel right click the Graphic Event Panel or Graphic Event Ruler If the Chan combo box is
410. p you can t delete it since at least one entry in the map is required in each project The Tempo Map window also has a Fill button that enables you to insert a series of ascending or descending tempo changes highly useful for ritards and accelerandos The From and Thru fields displayed in the Fill Tempo Changes dialog allow you to specify the beginning and ending locations where you want the tempo changes to occur The Start Value and End Value fields let you choose where in terms of tempo the fill will begin and end For example if the start value is 100 and the end value is 90 a series of tempo changes starting at 100 and decreasing down to 90 will be inserted through the bars beginning with the From location and ending at the Thru setting 248 Chapter 13 Reference Comments Window The Comments window provides a space for you to keep notes of your project OB sl Comments he Comments window is a simple text editor which allows you to edit or view comments The comments will be saved to a SEQ file but not to a MID file ou can cut or copy from the Comments window to the clipboard or you can paste from the clipboard into Comments using the commands in the Edit menu The following is a list of the editing commands Home Go to beginning of line End Go to end of line Home Go to beginning of text End Go to end of text Up Cursor Up Down Cursor Down Page Up Up one page
411. pan mute or effects settings for an audio track You can reduce this setting if you want faster response to mixer moves such as volume pan etc without needing to enable the Quick Volume Changes setting 1000 milliseconds 1 second is usually a good overall setting for fast enough response while still leaving enough buffers to avoid audible dropouts or clicks assuming your computer has a reasonably fast CPU Note If you set this to less than 1000 milliseconds you may further improve the response time of mixer moves but you ll also further increase the risk of an audible dropout or audible click when the system is under stress In addition if you set to a very low setting then MIDI playback may temporarily slow down due to subtle and brief interruptions in the audio during activity such as minimizing and maximizing a window The Input Buffer Seconds MME only setting determines the number of seconds of audio data that are in the input buffer during recording The greater the setting the less likely a dropout will occur during recording in situations when the system is very active The Input Channel for MONO Tracks setting determines which audio input channel Left Right Stereo is used by RealBand to record audio onto a MONO track When set to Left or Right the audio in a track 1s stored as mono so only one channel is used when recording Keep in mind that this setting ONLY is relevant when recording onto MONO audio tracks Wh
412. pattern and then is erased when playback is finished This isn t something that you need to be concerned with unless you are using track 48 for regular playback If this is the case the program will issue a warning message instead of playing the pattern The Save button allows you to save the current pattern as a DG Drum Grid file and the Load button will load a pre made DG file into the grid The Fill button activates the Edit Fill Track with Drum Pattern feature This can be used to fill a track with either a DG drum grid or a DP drum pattern file This is the command to use to get drum patterns into a track of a song The file name of the current pattern will appear in the File field of the Fill Track with Drum Pattern dialog so you can execute the command without having to manually reload the file into this dialog If the current pattern hasn t been saved you will be prompted as to whether you wish to save before performing the Fill Track with Drum Pattern operation The Clear button will erase the current pattern so you can create a new pattern in its place Tip If you press the F5 key or the Subst button a dialog box will pop up that lets you choose a substitute drum note for the one currently selected in a given field For example if a note is a closed high hat with a velocity of 100 you could have say an open high hat with a velocity of 80 or 120 etc as a substitute for the closed high hat occurring 20 of
413. peed of a tape recorder Unfortunately pitch is changed along with the playback rate To change audio duration without changing pitch small snips of audio must be periodically inserted for longer duration or removed for shorter duration so that the duration can be modified without changing the pitch To transpose audio pitch while maintaining the same playback rate it is still necessary to change audio duration To transpose pitch upward we can play the audio faster but playing faster will reduce the song duration One must Time Stretch before changing the Pitch if you want a 3 minute song to take 3 minutes to play after it has been transposed RealBand s Time Stretch and Pitch Shift features work together You can change duration while keeping pitch constant change pitch while keeping duration constant or change both pitch and duration Just select what you want and RealBand will work out the details Large changes in pitch or duration have more noticeable artifacts If you only need to change duration a small amount or repair an out of tune track by pitch shifting a few cents even the fastest methods could be virtually artifact free But large pitch duration changes are likely to have some artifacts regardless of the stretch method Solo acoustic piano may be the most problematic instrument Piano can be stretched small amounts without much grief but it is difficult to get a clean result on extreme piano processing Additional tim
414. program If you ve changed your work since you last saved it the program will first prompt you as to whether or not you wish to save your project before proceeding with the exit feature The Edit Menu The Edit menu contains commands relating to editing changing a song This menu has standard editing features such as cutting pasting quantizing etc The editing commands normally affect the marked highlighted area of all selected tracks Undo 1 Track Paste Chrl 2 Cubos CEri4 x Copy Cri c Paste Ctrl V 1 Track Paste Chords k Audio Effects Reverb e Echo Quantiza on Replace l Flanger Pitch Transpose MIDI Music i Fil Ring Mad Pag Tremolo Length of MIDI Music Compressor Slide MIDI Music NS Gate cR Distortion Eliminate Mate Overlap Extract Channels to Tracks Directx Audio Plugins Change velociti a Wd i oci S m d a e Pitch Shift Fill Track With MIDI Drum Pattern Exciter Randomize Enhancer Rechannel All Tracks l Hura Filter Insert Blank Bars into song Delete Bars from song Split MIDI drums Tone Control Graphic EQ Parametric EQ Gain Change Undo Undo can be applied to most operations in RealBand including audio effects processing notation edits and event level MIDI edits This feature will undo the last edit command executed from the lower portion of the Edit menu excluding commands in the chords submenu It will restore the tracks that we
415. put Monitoring is enabled and effects plug ins are enabled for input monitoring the effected signal will be recorded instead of the dry signal Peset Realtime Effects The Reset Realtime Effects button will remove any real time effects from your project so you can begin remixing your project from scratch If the Use 16 bit T O for higher bit res file types MME only setting is enabled then RealBand will convert the audio to 16 bit before sending to the sound card The Offset In MS setting can be used to make an adjustment to the timing for the purpose of keeping the MIDI and audio in sync You can make an adjustment to this setting if the sound card s audio timing is early or late in comparison to the MIDI For example if the sound card s audio is being heard later than the MIDI you can try increasing this setting which will delay the MIDI timing to match the audio timing The default for this setting is 0 The Track Buffer Size settings determine the amount of memory used by RealBand as a buffer when reading audio data from disk for each audio track Output Buffer Milliseconds MME only setting lets you adjust the output buffer duration The default setting is 4000 milliseconds 4 seconds which is a very conservative setting The higher the setting the less likely it 1s that playback will glitch The lower the setting the quicker the song will start playback and the quicker the program will respond when you change volume
416. pyright Copyright information encoded into the WMA file Author Author information encoded into the WMA file Description Additional information encoded into the WMA file As mentioned the information you enter into the Song Title Copyright Author and Description fields will be viewable when the file is played in a supported media player Miniburn The Audio Launch CD Burner plug in feature renders the current project file to a stereo WAV file and then launches the CD Burner application Note If your drive is not recognized by MiniBurn then you should burn the rendered WAV file to CD using the software supplied with the CD drive You can add songs to the CD R at a later date if you don t select disable the Finalize option Any CD you create won t be playable in an audio CD player until the disc is finalized Make sure that the disc is finalized when you burn the CD for the last time Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 163 MiniBurn File CD Recorder Help Burner E RADO GCC 4120B HL DT ST Burn Hate 12 E D D ocuments and Settings PGMUSIE Local Settings TempsPowerT racks Pro ud 03 17 00 Read Butter Drive Buffer est Made Burn Time 03 17 00 Track Written Cache Files Locally Avail Time Not V riteable Total written We Use BurnProot Finalize Only Burn CO No Finalize l 03 17 00 of 00 00 00 Used MiniBurn details The Burn List Burn list files are
417. qual one quarter note for this setting regardless of the current PPQ setting Generally you won t need to use this setting since the notes are rounded when being displayed in standard notation Hint The notation of Jazz Swing music will often be improved by a Tick Offset setting of about 5 because Jazz music is typically played a little after the beat The Clefs Split At setting determines the split point for placing notes on the Bass or Treble clef The default setting is C5 which is middle C For example you can use a higher split point such as C6 if you want some notes up to a G above middle C to be displayed on the bass clef with ledger lines instead of on the treble clef If the split point is above middle C and a note in the music is high enough that any of the ledger lines above the bass clef would overwrite the treble clef the note will be placed on the treble clef The Minimize Rests checkbox when checked will cause RealBand to display the music with minimal rests Use this setting if notes are displayed as shorter than you intended For example if eighth notes are displayed as sixteenth notes because you recorded them staccato The Engraver Spacing setting when enabled will improve the appearance of the standard notation in situations where the Notation window is crowded However you may notice a significant decrease in the speed of screen re draws You may want to only enable this setting before printing if
418. r deleted and dragged and dropped By right clicking on any note head all parameters of the note can be edited and symbols and text can be added Edit Mate Delete Note Insert Section Text Section Letters Motation Symbols Cleanup Orphaned Notation Controller Events Chord height adjustment Advance by 1 peg Alb Right Arrows Backup by 1 peg Alt Left Arrow Motation Mode w Editable Mode Staff Roll Mode These features are covered in detail in the Notation Window topic Now that you have a RealBand accompaniment your next step might be to record some audio tracks along with the BB tracks The audio tracks could be vocals live instruments or the line output from a keyboard mixer or direct box or digital audio if your sound card has that capability Audio Recording As long as your audio drivers have been set up audio recording is simple and straightforward If you wish you can configure the destination track as described in the Tracks Window topic but if you select any blank track and start recording RealBand will automatically change it to an audio track with the default audio settings To begin select the track you wish to record in either the Tracks or Mixer window Ae Check your recording level with the built in VU meters which open with the meter button on the toolbar The meters are resizable and can be dragged to any convenient location on the screen Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealB
419. r left corner of the Tracks window let you zoom in or zoom out the overview section The Snap button causes the time indicator to snap to the nearest beat when changing the time location or when highlighting a region for editing The L button locks the From and Thru settings from being changed by the mouse This prevents accidental changes to a selected area Drag and Drop Features RealBand supports drag and drop editing in the Tracks and Audio Edit windows In the Tracks window you can easily move tracks up or down in relation to each other by drag n drop using the mouse e g drag track 1 below track 2 to change the order of the tracks You can move a highlighted region by holding down the Ctrl key with the left mouse button pressed and drag the region to a new location in the song After releasing the mouse button you have four options RE a Drag Drop Edit Type of drag drop edit 9 Move to new location and overwrite C3 Move to new location and merge Copy to new location and overwrite Copy to new location and merge 1 Move to new location and overwrite removes the selected region from the original source track and places it on the destination track Existing content on the destination track is overwritten 2 Move to new location and merge removes the selected region from the original source track and merges it with the existing content on the destination track 3 Copy to new location and overwrit
420. r lines which ACW has automatically inferred from its automatic Play st Tap Baine F8 Time Sig 4 tempo detection PLUS your edited Good Bar Lines This is the first downbeat of the song sa we Right Click Set Bar One on this beat IB E Y Insert Barline Delete Bar 1 ED C Jump To d i f f E Estimate Tuning Bh We call the green automatic bar lines Inferred Bar Lines IBL s On this example song the initial automatic tempo detection did a pretty good job Simply setting Bar One has caused the first four bars to be properly aligned to the music On some songs Set Bar One is the only action necessary to get good bar alignment for the ENTIRE tune 33 653 r3 c mE o As playback continues in this example below we notice that ACW has made its first error approaching Bar 5 Audio Chord Wizard has estimated the tempo of Bar 4 too slow But that is easy to fix If you prefer real time control just tap F8 or the Enter key where the downbeat should actually be If you prefer stopped time editing you can either mouse drag Bar 5 to its desired position or drag the Playback Location Cursor to the desired position and then tap F8 or the Enter key Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 149 Approaching Bar 5 the automatic tempo tracking begins to drift During Playback the current position of the Location cursor is where Bar 5 SHOULD be We Tap F8 ar the Enter Key or alternat
421. rack This is a quick and convenient way to adjust BB volume levels while other tracks are playing The Tr button opens a drop down list of all track numbers and names Just click on the track to make it the active track in the Tracks or Mixer windows The S button enables soloing of tracks When it is engaged only the current track is heard You can have the song playing with this button pressed and solo different tracks just by clicking on them while the song plays Ctrl click on additional track names will add or remove them from the soloing selection so it is possible to audition a few tracks together DAC Ico Solo tracks can also be selected with the BB track buttons Song Settings and Song Generation Preferences There are two types of settings that affect how your songs are generated by RealBand the Song Settings and the Song Generation Preferences Song set Song Settings are accessed from the Song Set toolbar button These settings apply only to the current song including enabling or disabling RealTracks and RealDrums and specifying a particular RealDrums set for the song 7 Song Generation l l l Song Generation preferences are found in the Preferences dialog These settings affect all songs and also include the path to your bb RealTracks and RealDrums folders Importing Songs As you can see in the File Open dialogue RealBand supports all major audio and MIDI file types including PG Music s Pow
422. rate MIDI Track opens a list box to choose which Band in a Box part to generate for the track Bass Drums Piano Guitar or Strings When a part is chosen from the list it will JAZQUINT automatically be generated using the current Band in a Box style in use You can create Q tracks in different styles in the same song The track name of the generated non BB MIDI track will be 1 Acoustic Grand Piano colored green MIDI aut Roland vSC Ch Insert Volume Change will insert a MIDI controller into the track at the current location If a highlighted region exists then the program will ask if you want to apply this change to the highlighted region as opposed to a change at the location you clicked If applying the change to a region then program will insert a volume change at the beginning of the region and a 2 volume change at the end to restore the prior volume If necessary the program will insert a controller at the very beginning of the song to preserve the original volume if you insert a volume change beyond the start of the track This will normally be done the first time you insert a volume change into a track beyond the tracks beginning Audio Effects opens a submenu that 1s the same as the Edit Audio Effects window This submenu also contains Fade In and Fade Out menu items which launches a FlashMessage w instructions and then launches the GAIN dialog Regenerate Track will regenerate an existing track Ifa tra
423. rate and little or no modulation depth With this setting the filter doesn t move much or at all You can tune the flanger to statically emphasize specific frequencies in a signal Base Freq sets the lower limit of the lowest pitched peak or notch in the comb filter To get a wide sweep set Base Freq low Modulation will drive the frequency higher than the Base Freq at the tops of the modulation wave Resonance sets Flanger delay feedback High resonance settings make peaks louder and notches deeper creating a more pronounced effect Mod sets Modulation Depth which controls how far the flanger sweeps Think Vibrato Depth When set to 100 it will sweep all the way from the Base Frequency up to about 10 KHz Rate is the Modulation Rate which controls how fast the flanger sweeps Think Vibrato Speed Random randomizes the modulation rate to avoid a mechanical sweeping sound Mix is usually set to 50 percent for classic flanging but you can reduce the setting for more subtle effects If PG Flanger is inserted by itself on an Aux Return perhaps Mix should be set to 100 percent Then adjust the amount of Flange at the Mixer output with RealBand s Aux Return Level control Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 269 Invert Delay Invert the delay against the original signal Inverted and non Inverted have distinctly different sounds The Invert setting makes a bright classic whooshing sound Invert is even more dra
424. rd the metronome check to be sure it is disabled in Options Metronome 9 Click on the Record Audio button to record the song The Input VU meters will become active during recording 10 When done click the Stop button and choose to Keep Take when prompted A stereo track will have been recorded You could then use the menu command Track Save Track to File to save the recorded audio track as a WAV file To render MIDI to audio when you re using an external synthesizer or sound module you connect its audio output to the Line In of your sound card and select Line In as your input source in the Windows Recording Control Rendering when you re using an external synthesizer 1 Load the source MIDI file into RealBand 2 Inthe Tracks window select a blank track and set the track type to stereo audio 100 Chapter 8 Audio Production 3 In Options MIDI Devices verify that the external MIDI driver is selected It could be named MPU 401 MIDI Out Port or another name with the word out such as SB Live MIDI Out or MIDI IO input output 4 Click on the VU Meters button on the Tool Bar In the VU Meters window click on the Windows mixer button to open the Volume Control To see the Recording Control select Options Properties in the Volume Control window 6 Inthe Recording Control select Line In as the input source by checking the Select checkbox Make sure that the audio output of your MIDI synthesizer or so
425. rding Start recording with the Mixer moves record button and perform the Mixer moves as rehearsed Stop recording Answer Yes to Keep Recorded Mixer Moves They will show up as a series of MIDI controller events in the Event List for the selected track Alternatively you could just use the Edit Fill command or insert MIDI controller events into the event list for the particular audio track 146 Chapter 11 Mixer Window Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Audio Chord Wizard Overview The Audio Chord Wizard is an extremely powerful feature that automatically finds chord symbols C Fm7 etc by analyzing the audio content of a song MP3 WAV WMA or CD audio file The song can be in a digital file format MP3 VMA WAV one that you created in RealBand or directly loaded from a CD In addition to the chords the Audio Chord Wizard also automatically determines the bar lines and a Tempo map Use this feature to instantly play along to your favorite songs by reading and printing the chord symbols Improvements in Audio Chord Wizard 2 0 from Version 1 0 include Detection of up to 2 chords per bar Much improved chord detection accuracy Improved tempo tracking ability to tap in a few bar lines during playback and tempo often locks to bar lines for the whole song Faster operation including screen redraws and analysis The File Open Audio w Chords WA V WMA MP3 CDA menu command will open an existing au
426. re affected by the last edit command to their Chapter 13 Reference 183 previous state If you are working in the Comments window this will also undo the last text edit command RealBand supports up to 100 levels of Undo the number is set in Options Preferences General If you execute a command for which there may not be enough memory to be able to issue the Undo command RealBand will warn you beforehand If you receive such a warning it might be a good idea to save your work to disk before proceeding Cut Tempo Changes Markers Chord Symbols Options le Keep Gap t Close Gap C Use Data Filter Smooth Audio Cuts From 1 B8 E Thru nmn Zo ES E Cancel Help This command works in a few different ways depending upon which window is active If you are working in the Comments window this command will cut the selected text to the clipboard Otherwise it deletes MIDI events and wave data from the marked area and moves them to the scrap buffer As with copied events cut events can later be pasted to any location or saved to a file with the Save Scrap command Events Checkbox When this checkbox 1s enabled the Cut command will operate on MIDI events or WAV data in the marked area of all selected tracks Tempo Changes Checkbox When this checkbox is enabled the Cut command will operate on tempo changes in the tempo map If the first tempo map entry is within the marked area it will be copied instead of cu
427. re available 800 4PGMUSIC 800 4746 8742 Fax toll free in the United States and Canada 1 877 475 1444 Or 1 250 475 2937 tolls apply Technical Support Phone toll free in the United States and Canada 1 866 9TECHPG 866 983 2474 Or 1 250 475 2708 tolls apply E mail support pgmusic com Live Internet Chat www pgmusic com Be sure to visit the FAQ pages at www pqmusic com for information about known troubleshooting issues as well as the latest technical support bulletins PG Music Inc Index accelerand Owes gritas 247 Achion MISTI ii 205 ACM es 253 Align Music to Click Track 202 ASIO audio drivers ccccccccnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 16 ASIOJA MS 16 220 assign RealTrack to track ccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 92 Audio COP 103 Ud as ad 103 drag and drop edits ooocccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnos 102 A deeper 100 EAU natn aD MM n 103 linis c M 104 EXPOR WA VO cta 107 latency delay esee ARIDAM a is 228 merge audio and DXl occcccccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnninos 107 A cimi etiuduld bass isustu E 103 Savio TCS ceo RE REIR an 107 Audio Chord Wizard eese 57 146 Dat TM CICAL OLS id as 148 chord dele Of seu us ORA tate 147 COM ONS T 146 Oil t bitu onda ad 148 116 CUDITIg dote cia AE cen casa on N 150 key STARS 150 A se cat cee A 153 SPECIAL A a 149 drastic tempo Changes
428. re in black About BB Tracks BB Tracks are MIDI tracks so they can be edited like any other MIDI track with the features described in the following section BB tracks cannot be moved or renamed but you can change any of the settings with the right click menu for example the patch MIDI port or MIDI channel Settings for Bar BB Tracks can be generated using more than one style with volume changes and with repeats In the Chords window click on the bar where you want to make changes and press on the F5 function key This opens the Settings for Bar dialog 74 Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks Settings for Bar 8 Kev Change Instrument changes Volume Change 127 127 ALL BB Instr wi Bass Fiano Drums Guitar Strings Melody Soloist Repeat Bars including this bar Number of Repeats Use the STY button to open the StylePicker and make your selection and use the Clear button to remove the selection When the song is generated your new style will be heard playing at that bar This feature can be used any number of times in a song Volume Changes Instrument changes Volume Change 127 127 ALL BB Instr Bass Mute Back to Marmal Change by Fade per bar Piano Drums Volume changes can be applied at any bar to all BB tracks together or just to selected instruments The options are Mute to silence the track Back to Normal to undo a previous change and restore the norm
429. re inserting useful if inserting bars in the middle of a song This will insert blank bars at any location of the song and push the music forward in time to create the blank bars Insert Bars Insert Bars Insert at Bar 33 Number of Bars to Insert E Iw Adjust MIDI nates close to boundary Cancel Help In the Insert at field enter the bar at which you would like RealBand to place the blank bars In the Number of Bars to Insert field enter the amount of blank bars you would like RealBand to insert If the Adjust MIDI Notes Close to Boundary checkbox is checked RealBand will attempt to ensure that MIDI notes that are slightly earlier than the point of the insert and really 1s part of the section of music that will be moved forward in time but was played slightly early will be moved to the end of the inserted section rather than staying just before the inserted section Delete Bars and Preserve Settings Edit Delete Bars from song makes 1t easier to delete bars from a song with an option to preserve the most recent Patch Wheel Controller settings and an option to intelligently adjust MIDI notes that are close to the boundary of the section being deleted This command will delete bars of music from the song and will move the music beyond the deleted section backward in time so there is no gap left over Delete Bars Delete Bars Starting Bar 33 Number of Bars IE Iw Preserve recent Patch Wheel Controller
430. re not Favorites You can assign a style as one of your favorites by clicking in the first column on the left which is headed with an asterisk This will place an asterisk to the left of the style name Then you can sort by favorites or use this option to only see favorites v Show RealDrums that are N A These are styles not found in the drums folder likely because they are add on styles not purchased yet If you think that styles that show as N A should be present press the Rebuild button and confirm the path for the drums folder in the Song Generation preferences w For this song only force MIDI drums Set this if you want to use MIDI drums and want to override a RealDrums that is embedded in the style This sets the drums to no RealDrums override for the song and optionally also forces MIDI drums i e no RealDrums for style either When a RealDrums style is picked in the list a descriptive Memo opens RealDrums Style Name Genre Gere more 4 Ev 8 to Hi x NA Click on the heading for any column in the list to sort the list by that column such as by name genre or feel The User Comments field is where you can type in and save your own notes about a RealDrum style RealDrums styles ending in a caret have Variations available These are shown in the list here For style names with two variations such as Brushes Sticks the first refers to the a substyle and the second 1s the b subs
431. re saved in its native sequence file format with the file extension SEQ RealBand also includes full support for saving playing and editing Standard MIDI files MID and Karaoke files K AR Using DXi and VSTi Synthesizers DXi and VSTi software synthesizers allow RealBand to play high quality sounds directly through your computer s sound system without external MIDI hardware Connecting RealBand to the software synth as a plug in has several advantages over connecting as a MIDI driver The plug in allows RealBand to merge sync in any existing audio file vocals etc with the synth output You can also directly render your performance to a WAV file using the DXi or VSTi plug in To use DXi VSTI1 softsynths with RealBand you can think of them as a type of MIDI Output Driver MIDI Driver Setup E Input Drivers Output Drrver s SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Microsoft MIDI Mapper SB Audigy Synth amp D SOL SB Audigy Sw Synth D600 SB Audigy Synth B L800 SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Move Selected Devices to Top mw Re Route MIDI playback to default Oxi Synth Default Dei Synth WSC Dsi Timer Period in Millizeconds 1 Synth Output Latency Delay in M5 0 Latency Adjust O Audio LO Delay in M5 Cancel Help You can either visit the MIDI Driver Setup dialog Options Preferences MIDI tab MIDI Devices button and select the Re Route MIDI Playback to Default DXi Synth checkbox to send all M
432. red events are enabled Host Program Output displays data generated by RealBand Note If both inputs are disabled in Display Only mode or both inputs are enabled in Display All Except mode then no MIDI data will be received 174 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins Display Filter Display Source c Duy EUST iw Computer MIDI Input eun al Host reser Dumi Channels Events Controllers Mate OFF 8x HL Bank Select MSB Mate On 3 81 Mod Wheel MSB Poly Pressure fx 2 Breath CH MSB Control Change B x Ha Undefined Program Change C HA Foot Ctl MSE Channel Pressure FO 5 Portamento Time MSE Pitch Bend Ex 6 Data Entry MSB Gysen Start SFO HF Man Volume MSB MTC Quarter Frame F1 6 Balance MSB Song Position Ptr SF 2 HY Undefined Song Select F 3 10 Pan MSE Undetined F 4 11 Expression MSB Undefined F 5 12 Undefined Tune Request F 5 13 Undefined Sysex EOS SF 7 14 Undefined 16 MIDI Timing Clock FF8 i 15 Undefined he Channels Select which channels are received Events Select which Event types are received Controllers Select which Controller types are received Save Text Window Ei Save Text Evt H Time m5 Source Aaw Status Chan Datal Data OO 1 0 B1 00 00 Control Change B 2 LC Type HU Bank Select MSB A 2 0 B1 0 00 Control Change FE z LL Type 32 Bank Select
433. reduce the level until the music is unaffected This can ensure that any noise below the minimum music level is exterminated Be sure to check the DeNoise Amount against the quietest parts of the recording because the quiet locations are most likely to be affected if the DeNoise Amount has been set too high Conclusion PG Vinyl Tool offers many tools which can clean vinyl records But there is a limit what can be done for severely damaged discs without investing in very expensive tools On very damaged records you may be forced to decide between a natural sound which contains a few residual defects versus a more heavily processed sound which has collected new annoying artifacts to replace the old annoying defects PG Vocal Remover PG Vocal Remover can reduce the level of vocals on many commercial recordings Lowest Vocal Frequency to Cancel Highest Vocal Frequency to Cancel Left Right Channel Balance Enable Effect Iv Enable Plugi 100 Hz Lo Limit 17 2 KHz Hi Lirit Been I I I I I I I I I W Reduce Reverb Min Mar Amount F 10 m 50 ms 100 m atak Tp 2L m 15100 mS 200 ms Release NA Reduce Reverb Amount of Reduction Envelope Attack Envelope Release Operating Principle PG Vocal Remover exploits a common mixing technique the lead vocal is often center panned 1 e the left and right stereo channels have identical vocal loudness Typically the bass and kick drum
434. res that the count in will be silent visual count in only This is useful if you are playing live and you don t want an audible count in Keep these settings permanent ignore settings stored in SEQ files will cause RealBand to remember the current metronome settings and ignore any settings stored in SEQ files The Counting Down dialog visibly shows the numbers e g 1 2 3 4 during the countdown Counting Down SMPTE Access to the SMPTE dialog which offers the ability to choose the time display format as well as whether MIDI events will be translated and displayed as SMPTE times Time Display Format Normal 3 SMPTE SMPTE Format C2 24 Frame C3 25 Frame C3 30 Frame Drop 2 30 Frame Nor drop SMPTEDHset ol ol a ol Time Display Modes If the time display mode is set to Normal the time will be displayed in Measures Beats Ticks When it is set to SMPTE the time will be displayed as Hours Minutes Seconds Frames SMPTE Format You may choose one of four SMPTE formats 30 FPS Non Drop 30 FPS Drop frame 25 FPS or 24 FPS frames per second SMPTE Offset This determines the SMPTE time that the program associates with the beginning of a song For example if you use an offset of 00 00 02 00 then the start of the song will be 00 00 02 00 This gives the program two seconds to sync up to a tape when starting a tape from the beginning 232 Chapter 13 Reference Piano Access to the Piano Se
435. rge and slow and usually not allowed in ASIO If the buffer size were 4800 samples which is 1 10 second then the latency would be 100ms If the buffer size were 2400 samples which is 1 20 second the latency would be 50 ms If the buffer size were 240 samples which 1s 1 200 second the latency would be a mere Sms which 1s incredibly low and very fast Normally you can change your driver s latency by pressing the ASIO Driver s Control Panel button Normally the driver specifies the buffer sizes in milliseconds which equals the latency Low latency is faster and more responsive but uses more CPU power Depending on the speed of your computer you may find that the playback has dropouts clicks pops or other artifacts if you set the buffer sizes too small This is because smaller buffers use more CPU power and if your computer can t handle the low latency you will hear artifacts If this happens you would need to use larger buffer sizes You may need to experiment to find what works well You may be able to use smaller buffers with songs that don t have a lot of tracks and effects but may find that you need to use larger buffers with songs that have more tracks and use more effects This is because more tracks and more effects use more CPU power which leaves less CPU power available for the audio routines to keep up with lower latencies 18 Chapter 1 Welcome Chapter 2 New Features in RealBand 2010 5 Over 30 New Features R
436. roller value click on the green checkmark or red x above the fader to turn tracks on and off 1 e to toggle between active and mute states right click on the sliders to type in an exact fader level click on the patch number box to see the Select Patch dialog where the name of the patch will be highlighted You can select a new patch from this dialog the track name from the Tracks window is shown vertically to the left of the Volume slider each track strip has its own stereo VU meter the LR stereo pan slider also has a smooth even response with the option to right click and type in an exact value click in the Out box to assign the track to a MIDI output port DXi and VSTi synths are identified with an S For example the default DXi synth or VSTi synth is S16 selected tracks are highlighted in red or yellow as in the Tracks window Audio Track Strip This is the Mixer strip for an Audio track Chapter 13 Reference 255 mM X the FX button opens the DirectX VST Window where up to four real time effects can be inserted into the track each track has four auxiliary effects sends that can be assigned to any four of the eight available Aux busses Each Aux bus can have up to four chained effects the rotary knobs set the send level to each Aux bus Right click on a knob to enter an exact level for the send use the green checkmark or red x above the fader to turn the trac
437. rom Thru specified below Use From Thru fram the main toolbar The From and Thru settings for punch in recording can be set Thru 1j or 0 in the Punch In dialog or they can be the settings from the main iw Offer ta keep punch n takes as normal takes toolbar When Punch In is disabled recording may occur at any time DK m Hel within the song and data will be merged with any existing events Caead NN if the track is a MIDI track or the data will overwrite existing data if the track is an Audio track Recording Mixer Moves Any volume pan chorus and reverb mixer adjustments made during recording will be recorded in real time as MIDI controller messages Adjustments made in the All column of the mixer will not be recorded however When recording mixer moves for audio tracks you must move the slider for the current track in order to record the mixer moves For MIDI tracks you could move any slider and the data will get recorded onto the current track but normally you ll move the slider of the current track e There is a special Record Mixer Moves button in the mixer which will let you record ONLY mixer moves This special button will also let you record mixer moves onto an audio track without the audio being silent during recording In order for the recording of mixer moves to work correctly for MIDI tracks please make sure each track has its own unique MIDI channel in the Tracks window Also keep in mind that mixer moves w
438. rs For the Output you may have to adjust your mixer settings within RealBand to keep the levels within a reasonable range For the Input you may have to press the speaker button to launch the Windows Record Control dialog and you could then lower the input level Show Tools Panel This pops up a Tools panel which allows for easy access to some commonly used commands in RealBand File New File Open File Save File Save As Cut Copy Paste and Undo There is a button for each command These buttons are also located directly on the RealBand toolbar Show Markers Window This command will display the Markers window This window lets you insert markers in the song for keeping track of various sections of your music These markers will also appear by default at the top of the Bars window You could use the markers to mark sections such as the verses and choruses of the song The Ins and Del buttons allow you to insert or delete markers You can change the current marker by editing it directly in this window A Markers 1 01 666 Intro 5S 01 006 Verse 21 u1 BBB8 Chorus The Opt button will open a dialog with checkboxes for enabling or disabling the display of Markers and Bar Numbers at the top of the Bars window Marker Options i Show Measure Numbers in Bars Window I Show Markers in Bars Window By default both Markers and Bar Numbers are displayed Since they are shown on the same line you can preve
439. s Select one 4510 Device None gt ASIO Driver s Control Panel ASIO4S LL ve Creative ASIO Rezampler Quality ASIO Always On Input Port s Output Ports Mix L Analog U1 Wave Wave 2 3 Mis L hie A 2 3 Front L R Front LA 4 5 Min FL Mix FA 4 5 Rear L R Rear LA 6 41 Mis AL Mis RA 6 7 Center LFE Center LFE 8 3 Mis FC Mis LFE 8 9 Rear Center Rear Center 10 11 Mi AC Mis RE 10 11 Side LA Side LA 12 13 Min SL Mis SH 12 13 Fx Slot 1 L H Fx Slot 1 LA 14 15 SPDIF In L SPDIF In A 14 15 FX Slot 2 L R Fx Slot 2 LA 15 17 Line In 2 Mic 2 L Line In 2 Mic 2 RF T6327 Fs Slot 3 L R FR Slot 3 LAA Show Warning for Untested Soundcard Formats Driver Info name SB Audigy 4510 D800 version 00000002 Input channels 22 output channels 20 allowed sample rates 22050 zno 44100 cno 48000 pes 36000 no input data format Intl bLSB output data format Intl bLSE buffer sizes in samples min 96 max 65536 pref 480 granularity 4 actual ASIO buffer size in HS 10 actual ASIO sample rate used 48000 RESAMPLER IH USE Click on OK when you have made your selections and RealBand will then prompt you to select your MIDI drivers in the MIDI Driver Setup dialog If you have DXi or VSTi software synthesizers installed you can choose to send your MIDI output to the software synth of your choice 22 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand F MIDI Driver S
440. s 64 to 64 The Font Size setting adjusts the size of the Notation window s font The default size is 100 You can increase or decrease the font size by changing this setting You can also use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons at the top of the Notation window The Use Jazz Music Font setting enables the Jazz Music font for notation instead of the standard font The Jazz font will give your lead sheets the appearance of a Jazz lead sheet rather than having a Classical appearance The Lyrics Font Chords Font and Title Font let you choose a different font for lyrics chord symbols and a song title The percentage fields are used by RealBand to determine the size of the font rather than the size in the font selection dialog Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 121 The Bar Font setting lets you choose either the Notation Font or a different font of your choice The percentage setting lets you adjust the percentage relative to the default size The following group of settings 1s for Standard Notation mode only and don t have any effect in Staff roll mode The Tick Offset lets you display the music ahead or behind the beat If you have a tendency to play the music ahead of the beat you can specify a setting from 1 to 120 to have the music displayed forward in time A setting from 1 to 120 will cause the music to be displayed ahead of the beat but not before the beginning of the song 120 ticks e
441. s but it will mot always result in whole number of bars So we ve entered our chords in the Chords window set the length of our song and added a 2 bar ending chosen a Band in a Box style and set the tempo We re ready to generate an automatic arrangement with BB tracks and we ll see them in the Tracks window when we press the Generate button to create our song x Tracks Ctrl 1 LJ i Wf 24 12 E 4 gt DI IO D800 Ch 2 1BB Drums Drums MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 10 BB Piano 11 Acoustic Grand Piano MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI 10 D800 Ch 3 BB Guitar 25 Acoustic Guitar nylon MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch BB Strings 50 String Ensemble 2 MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 7 BB RealDrums BossaRock 1 HiH Generic Audio AUD Out ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave 7 Untitled x L R 247 12 a ps 24 12 u o p24 7 12 u o 24 12 u s u 2 a Il LE I 1 I IN I Iin l li ll li i 4 l I fs pe PEN I HP ge art art ar art ar MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch O The track overview shows us that we have five MIDI tracks playing the parts generated by the J Lush style and because RealDrums are allowed in the Preferences Song Generation settings the BB Drums track is empty and we have a RealDrums audio track Notice that the BB Track names are in blue whereas user track names a
442. s e g Channel 8 9 can be split into Wo uu two tracks for use with the piano keyboard s Auto hand Use Channel Table splitting feature From iIB Og a ES Eg Thru 100 1 o E ES Cancel Help Extract Channels to Tracks Chapter 13 Reference 193 F If the Use Channel Table checkbox is enabled a dialog Channel Table box will pop up before this command is issued This gives you the opportunity to choose which tracks the various Track MIDI Channel events are extracted to For example as Channel 1 Channel Y E you ll notice when the Channel Table dialog box pops up the default is for Channel 3 to be extracted to Track 3 Channel 2 Channel 10 i 0 Using this table you could for example enable this feature to extract certain events on Channel 3 to Track 19 Channel 11 D Channel 12 h2 Channel 13 ha Channel 14 m Channel 15 iS Channel 1b 1e Cancel Help Tip You can use the Data Filter to determine which events are affected by this command Change Velocities Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel b Channel Channel 8 TELLS This feature allows for easy increases or decreases of the velocity values of notes within a marked region of all selected tracks by a specified percentage Change Velocities Percentage 120 Filter Data The Normalize command can be used to apply the same levels to many MIDI files so they all sound with the same approximate volume Dynamics in
443. s Window for track with most lyrics Write Lyrics in General MIDI lyric format Bootup in folder of last session Automatically reload most recent file from last session Open and Save As dialogs remember last folder independently Create backup file when averwriting a SEQ file Max backups per song Max backups per hard drive 10000 When limit is reached put old backups in Recycle Bin instead of deleting 224 Chapter 13 Reference The Convert PPQ of Loaded Files to PPQ checkbox when checked will automatically convert files to the selected PPQ resolution For example if the selected PPQ resolution is 480 PPQ Pulses Per Quarter note and this checkbox is checked RealBand will automatically convert any files you load to 480 PPQ RealBand supports PPQ as high as 3840 which allows for more precise audio editing since at higher resolutions each tick spans a finer section of audio Note For really long songs or for songs that have really long note durations it may be wise to not use the highest PPQ settings Higher note resolution reduces the maximum allowed song length as well as reducing the maximum allowed note duration length At 3840 PPQ the maximum song length of a 4 4 song is around 35 minutes long at a tempo of 120 less at faster tempos At 3840 PPQ and a 4 4 time signature the maximum allowed note duration length is around 17 beats regardless of the tempo The Don t Save Forced Ch Meta Event in MID files
444. s and offer to insert stereo track s 1f necessary MONO tracks contain only 1 channel per track but you could record mono tracks in pairs if you ve set the Input Channel for MONO Tracks to L R in the Options Preferences Audio settings When recording to MONO tracks multiple ports are only utilized if the Input Channel for MONO tracks in the Options Preferences Audio settings is set to L R This will be set to L R automatically if you select multiple input ports The audio data will be recorded as 1 L R pair per input port with all the data recorded on adjacent available tracks Tracks will be inserted if necessary same method as when recording L R with a single port See the Options Audio Preferences help topic for more information on stereo recording Multi port recording works the same as stereo recording except there is more than one pair of stereo tracks being recorded by RealBand If the Record Channel is set to Left or Right only Input Port number 1 the first input port in the list that was selected by you in the Audio Drivers dialog will be recorded onto a MONO track Note Port number 1 is used as a source of timing when syncing MIDI to digital audio If you are attempting to use two different brands of sound cards together on one computer as two separate ports there may be timing problems if the cards have different DMA buffer sizes but it is possible you may not encounter any noticeable ti
445. s bar is the colored header across the top of the screen RealBand shows the file name for the currently loaded song in the status bar It also shows the song title if the song has been given one and the name of the current window e g Chords if the window is maximized When the jukebox is playing then Juke Box mode is displayed in the status bar status bar The Menu Bar File Edit Audio Track Action Block Options Window Help Like most Windows applications RealBand has a pull down menu interface You can access the menus by pressing Alt lt letter gt with the letter being the first letter of the menu you wish to activate e g Alt F for the File menu The buttons to minimize maximize and close the program appear at the right side of the You can also activate a menu by clicking the left mouse button with the mouse cursor positioned directly over the menu name on the Menu Bar The menus list many operations that can be controlled with key strokes These can save time and it is a good idea to memorize the ones you use regularly Toolbars 38 Chapter 4 The Main Screen Toolbars provide control of the program and access to many of its features gt gt Toolbars have a choice of 24x24 or 16x16 icon sizes 24x24 16x16 To select the icon size go to Options Preferences and in the General dialog check Toolbars use large icons aes RIDE for 24x24 icons or clear the checkbox for 16x16 icons
446. s can also be edited in the track overview and in the Piano Roll or Notation windows Let s examine the BB Piano track in the Piano Roll window E We can select the BB Piano track while still in the 1 Tracks window or we can open the Piano Roll window with the piano roll button and then select BB Piano from the track list In the Piano Roll window notes can be dragged and dropped shortened or lengthened in the Note Panel which is the upper part of the window fj Piano Roll Track BB Pino O x Snap Ibo Dur PE Chan EN View Edit velocity Y Cm The lower panel is for graphic editing of the selected parameter in the View Edit list Note velocity is shown but parameters such as pitch bend channel aftertouch and MIDI controllers can be edited in this panel as well Please see the Piano Roll Window help topic for more on this very useful feature The BB tracks can also be edited in the Editable Notation window Click on the eighth note toolbar button to open the Notation In the Notation window toolbar there i El are three buttons for different notation modes Editable notation 1s the button with dotted vertical lines crossing the staff lines 28 Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand Notation Track 3 Lopt Print S Len Es Ciciean L r L Auto J Rest ASL In this notation window notes can be inserted o
447. s in the GM drum range the GM drum sound names for GM drums are shown e g Acoustic Snare Closed High Hat etc You could override the track number by enabling the checkbox next to the Hard Trk field and typing another track number in the hard track field The Hard Track can be any MIDI or blank track that you specify Auto Backup of SEQ Files When you save a file RealBand saves a backup of the file in a c RealBand RBBACKUP folder This doesn t add any time to the file save command and the number of backups is configurable So the next time that you mistakenly overwrite a file when saving go the backup folder to look for a saved previous copy Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks 83 Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features Overview Audio tracks are great for recording live performances they work much like tracks on a tape recorder They are also used for RealTracks and RealDrums since these parts are created from live audio recordings of studio musicians You can edit audio data by cutting and pasting in the Bars window or the Audio Edit window you can import WAV MP3 WMA WMV and CDA files to be inserted into audio tracks and you can also process audio tracks with the professional effects included with RealBand ON Any track of RealBand s 48 tracks can be designated as an audio track mono or stereo Click on the i track icon to set the track type wv n Teas Fe 5 Oo Track Tvpe Audia Mana Park Micro
448. s the range of the guitar or not 254 Chapter 13 Reference Mixer Window The Mixer window provides real time control of effects and track volumes You can launch it by typing ALT W 8 fa Mixer Ctrl 8 SE E amp og 8 6 AUS rl A 0d if if d E ES S NW ave Cd eve ES eve Seve eve eve eve BES SY eve EY ir vs ES inve ES evo ES ro E Q aux cHo CHO de CHO f cuo C cuo cuo C cuo C H H LA Aa i Acna 7 CHO CHO CHO 1 cHo MOD MOD MOD f MOD 7 MOD MOD mop H 7 f H JA noo 1 MoD MOD MOD MOD exp exe CM exe M exe CM exe B exe A exe C A n Y n exe exe exe M exe ler ON VE EH VE Ed y EHM yEl x VB lt E E m Li I I i i i I ilk I l l EE A E E oe oo E OS f sunigigas ag ws ETA palun LL Pawn ob paun vL palun SL Ppenyu SL 5 suniqgigas m E r oa ns C Mono Track 14 Untitled Note that there are sliders for all 48 tracks 8 auxiliary effects Aux busses and a total of 16 audio output ports or audio subgroups The Mixer window has stereo VU meters for each track smoothly responsive sliders and knobs individual track mute buttons and a scrollable track strip MIDI Track Strip This is the Mixer strip for a MIDI track control knobs for Reverb Chorus Modulation and Expression effects have a smooth real feel response Right click on these control knobs to type in an exact cont
449. s the velocity values so that they are 50 closer to the average velocity For example if the l EHE i 1 EJ average velocity is 64 and a note has a velocity of 84 From B E E the note s velocity will be moved midway between Thru 1000 m 8 T 3 these values 64 and 84 to become 74 A percentage setting of 150 would expand the velocity values so that they are 5096 farther away from Lancel Help the average velocity For example if the average velocity 1s 64 and a note has a velocity of 84 the note would be moved 50 farther away from 64 and 84 to become 94 Velocity Dynamics Fercentage 100 Use Data Filter In the preceding examples the velocity value suggested would be considered to be above the average Remember that velocity values that are below the average will be increased toward the average velocity when compression occurs and decreased when expansion occurs Tip You can use the Data Filter to determine which events are affected by this command Fill Track With Drum Pattern This feature is a convenient way of loading an existing Fill Track With Drum Pattern tal drum pattern and pasting it onto a track The Select Select Patter POCE DP Pattern button lists all of the available patterns in a drop down combo so that you can quickly select a Select fram List Rack dp Drum Pattern file DP to be pasted into the track that is selected in the Track field The m
450. s uncheck the Same Note Number and Same MIDI Channel checkboxes so that the command will affect all notes that appear to overlap Lancel Help Notes are normally only considered to be overlapping if they are on the same track in the Tracks window Be careful not to use this command on notes that you want to have overlap such as chords and arpeggios Since this command can be Undone you can listen to the results carefully to further ensure that everything sounds as 1t should If you do not like what you hear use the Undo feature before moving on to other commands Remove Duplicate Notes checkbox when enabled is especially useful for eliminating ghost notes that may have been accidentally inserted over existing notes in the Editable Notation window They may even be masked from view in the regular notation screen display A duplicate note is a note that is has same note number is located at the same time location and is on the same MIDI channel as a pre existing note Tip You can also use the Data Filter to determine which events are affected by this procedure Extract Channels to Tracks This feature will move MIDI events to different tracks based on the channel number of said events For example if the channel number of an event is 1 the event will be moved to track number 1 i This can be useful when multiple channels of data are recorded on a track and you decide you want to split the A een data into multiple track
451. screen size is remembered between sessions Double time and half time support for RealTracks added Now you can play any RealTracks at half time or double time This allows you to for example in a ballad at tempo of 70 to add a RealTracks Sax solo with tempo of 140 and play it as a double time which will match the ballad tempo of 70 So now all of your existing RealTracks can be used at 3 different tempos normal half time double time Chapter 2 New Features in RealBand 2010 5 19 Automatic Tempo swapping of similar RealTracks If you have similar RealTracks available at different tempos BB will automatically choose the best one to use For example if you have a ballad loaded with an Acoustic Bass RealTracks at tempo of 60 and you speed up the tempo to 140 and press play BB will automatically choose an Acoustic Bass RealTracks closer to tempo of 140 if it is the same genre and feel This means you can use a simple Jazz style and play it at various tempos without having to set the best RealTracks based on tempos RealDrums picker dialog has been enhanced with information about Artist name Artist bio and Real Drums Set number Support enhanced for non concert instruments Bb Eb sax trumpet etc Now when chord sheet is transposed you can type in chords in the transposed key and they will show up as you have entered them instead of requiring you to enter the chords in the concert key Lyrics enhanced Undo added for entry of in
452. sert position button If you have created a single channel guitar track using your keyboard and you used the Guitar Window to insert position information then this command will help you convert the track into a multi channel MIDI Guitar track Six MIDI channels are used in this conversion one for each guitar string The range of the channels is based on the Base Channel setting in the Guitar window s Options dialog If the base channel is set to 11 default the channels will range from 11 to 16 with Channel 11 corresponding to the highest string and Channel 16 corresponding to the lowest Split Piano Track into LH RH This command will attempt to split a piano track so that the notes that were played by the left hand are moved to Channel 8 and the notes played by the right hand moved to Channel 9 This command may not work perfectly in all situations but it often produces quite acceptable results The auto splitting performed by this command can be thought of as one of the many possible ways a track may have been played When a track is split by this command you can check the Use Ch 8 9 for Left Right hand checkbox in the Notation Window s Options dialog to attempt to display the notes in the Notation window on Channel 8 in the bass clef and the notes on Channel 9 in the treble clef Copy Lyrics to Clipboard This feature can copy any existing lyrics of the current track to the standard Windows clipboard as text so that
453. setting in the Audio Options dialog allows mono audio tracks to use the real time effects track inserts in stereo mode for better sounding mixes When the checkbox is enabled and a mono track is using an effects insert added via FX button on mixer such as a stereo reverb the output from the stereo reverb will be heard in stereo rather than mono Note This feature only applies to track effects inserts Aux busses have always worked in stereo mode if the effects were stereo This feature when enabled will also cause RealBand to use up more CPU processing power File This dialog contains preferences that deal with saving or loading files The Load Mixer Settings from SEQ Files checkbox when checked enables the feature in which RealBand automatically loads and transmits any mixer settings that are stored in SEQ files The Save Mixer Settings to SEQ Files checkbox when checked will cause RealBand to save all the current mixer settings of non blank tracks to SEQ files If the Load Mixer Settings from SEQ Files setting is enabled the settings will be loaded and sent whenever a SEQ file is loaded Load Mixer Settings from SEQ files Save Miter Settings to SEQ files Convert PPO of Loaded Files to 480 PPO v Don t save forced Ch Meta Event in MID files Automatically Rechannel track data when saving to MID Long File Names use custom open save dialog Fill blank track names with patch names Open Lyric
454. sic 230 teo Country Folk 56 dE Country Rock Pop 245 MTL oes Country Southern Gospel 43 aro feo Folk 132 nee Funk 145 _ TL 065 Hip Hop 51 MTL 120 Jazz All 470 Tun Jazz Ballads 74 MTSwWw1l2o Jazz Bebop 50 Slee Se Jazz Big Band 10 iine Jazz Dixieland 10 TOBY TRAV Jazz Fusion 101 3 atini inm Country Style 165 Bea Eagles Style 126 ES Bluzz Shut vw l bka 102 EZ Sad Country Bal 66 ES Etey HonkTonkTonk 1140 EZ Cl Counterey Swing 155 EX Cl Counterey Sw Ballad leo Re Ebey Ballad 120 EZ l Counterey Swing 190 EX Bebop Quartet 160 EZ Chord Embel 140 EZ Jass Bop 1650 ES Wynton E 140 ES Crossover 65 RE Rock Style 120 ES Harz Mtl vw met quit 85 RS Hry Mtl vw met ba z 120 ES Harz Mtl vw met quit 165 EX Hry Mtl vw met quit 120 ES Hry Mtl vw met ba z 565 EZ Harz Mtl vw met olo leo EX Harz Mtl vw meat bass 155 BG Funky Elue 120 ES Harz Htl we wild solo 120 EZ Pop Nash Boek 102 ES Pop Bock wf el quit 102 ES Mash Bock wf res quit 120 ES Sw 16 tbtey 5650 ES Sw 16 Crrery 88 ES Train Beat 120 ES H gm ggg LL gs gg guguumsumesuussumsum HH H qo o m H wem TRAWVND TRH C2 H e H wem Generating RealTracks Select and Generate RealTrack Generate RealTrack Favorites This feature lets you generate realistic instrument tracks usin
455. sizes that were in effect at the time of saving the WS file See the next section Save Window Setup for more information about WS files Window Setup Save Window Setup This feature allows you to save a WS Window Setup file of your current program window setup The current window setup consists of the locations of any opened windows Up to three Notation Staff three Big Lyrics and three Event List window positions can be saved in each WS file The WS files can also contain information such as whether or not the Toolbar and Piano are visible or hidden RealBand will automatically save a file called DEFAULT WS each time the program is exited Then each time the program is started it will look for this DEFAULT WS file in the RealBand directory or the configuration directory such as C WINDOWS if running under a network If the program finds such a file it will restore the setup that was stored in it thus restoring your screen setup back to the way it was when you exited from your last session However if you save a file called FAVORITE WS to the EXE directory RealBand will use the setup stored in this file even if DEFAULT WS exists Saving a Window Setup file called FAVORITE WS is a nice way to have RealBand always start with your favorite setup Take advantage of this feature if you would prefer to have RealBand start out with a certain setup every time rather than restoring the most recent last setup You could
456. soft Sound Mapper Set All Audio Tracks to Microsoft Sound Mapper Track Category Make a Mew Audio Category Other Audio Formats RealBand supports WAV WMA WMV CDA and MP3 audio file formats These files can be loaded directly with the File Open menu option or they can be imported to an exact location in a specific track with the Audio Import Wave File command Ctrl F3 Lancel Help Loading and Playing Audio Files Let s load an audio wave file and explore the audio features of RealBand RealBand files have the SEQ sequence file extension and open in the same way as a MIDI file KA Use the Open a File button or the menu command File Open to go to the RealBand directory In the Samples folder choose the file tutor2 seq Tracks Window Here s how the Tracks window looks when the audio file is loaded x Tracks nex ES N accedi 3 h N fay Wave a Drums and Percussion Generic Audio AUD Dut 4S10 0 1 Wave Wave Rhythm Comp Generic Audio AUD Out 4 10 0 1 Wave Wave Melody JAUD Out ASIO 0 1 Wave Wave MIDI Horns MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth JB Untitled mipi out Microsoft GS Wavetable SYY Synth 84 Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features Press the Play button You should now be hearing the demo song playing through your computer s sound system What you re hearing are four discrete tracks of digital audio To mute any track
457. soft signals is changed more drastically An input change of 6 dB would yield an output change of only 0 6 dB A 12 dB input change would yield an output change of 1 2 dB At high ratios loud and soft input signals arrive at the output at nearly the same level High ratios are useful for special effects add long sustain to clean guitar or make spoken dialog loud and intelligible on small computer speakers Attack is the time required for the compressor to respond to an increase in amplitude As a general rule use fast Attack values to compress individual notes but use slow Attack values to compress the overall level of a track With fast Attack each note will be modified which can keep the notes within a phrase more consistent This can tighten up an inconsistent performance but also could remove the expressiveness from an expert expressive performance With slow Attack individual notes are not affected very much but the compressor controls long term level Individual notes can retain their expressive emphasis but the long term audio level is controlled Release is the time required for the compressor to respond to reductions in amplitude Fast Release lets the compressor spring back quickly after a loud passage Slow Release makes the compressor wait awhile before raising gain after a loud passage Use fast Release to compress individual notes Use slow Release to compress the overall level of a track Very fast Attack and Re
458. song s file name displayed you can uncheck this option Enable Undo For Event Level Editing This feature when checked will allow you to undo the last event level edit in the Event list or Notation window such as inserting deleting changing or moving a note Dialogs Use Ct13D effects This checkbox ensures a modern appearance for the program Chapter 13 Reference 219 The SysEx Input Buffers setting offers the ability to change the amount of SysEx input buffers allocated before receiving a SysEx dump This setting can range between 2 and 512 The SysEx Input Buffer Size settings let you change the size of each input buffer allocated by RealBand before receiving a SysEx dump The default size is 128 You can decrease this to as low as 64K to as high as 1024K The Silent Message Boxes checkbox when enabled will prevent RealBand from making a beeping sound in situations where a message box is displayed Restore Never Ask Again Questions will restore pop up message boxes in which Never Ask This Again was chosen The Number of Undo Levels determines the number of recently executed edit commands can be undone By default this 1s set to 5 levels of undo you could increase this to as high as 100 You can also adjust the Undo Warning Message Threshold in same dialog For example if you set the threshold to 100 megabytes RealBand will issue a warning message and ask if it s okay to clear some undo buffers if the u
459. ss than perfectly accurate You can record MIDI data in RealBand and examine the timing in the RealBand Event List window To use RealBand to measure correctly in milliseconds set then RealBand PPQ resolution to 480 and RealBand tempo to 125 BPM With this special resolution and tempo tick values in the Event List window will correspond to milliseconds Current Time This is the millisecond count since the timer was last started Click anywhere in the Timer area to clear the Current time setting it to zero The timer automatically starts when MIDI data is received The period that the timer will run after MIDI activity ceases can be adjusted in the Settings dialog Channel Activity Panel The Channel Activity panel has an array of LEDs light emitting diodes to indicate which channels are active For example if note information is received on a channel the Note On LED will latch on If controller pitch bend or other channel events are received the Other LED will latch on Click anywhere on the Channel Activity Panel to clear all the indicators MIDI Display Area The MIDI Display area located at the bottom of the main window displays the data generated by RealBand and or data received at the computer MIDI input Each row is a single MIDI event Evt Event number starting from when the display was last cleared Time mS The time in milliseconds from when the timer was last cleared Source When set to Int the e
460. such as guitar vocal keyboard or your own user assigned effects groups Make a New Audio Category opens a dialog where you can name a new category select an image for its icon and assign an audio effects group TGS preset Time Stretch and Pitch Shiftis a dialog that lets you stretch or reduce the length of the highlighted section of audio tracks Select Whole Track command will select the entire track for editing Kill Selected Region will deselect a selected region of an audio or MIDI track Change Current Time will change the current time without affecting the highlighting of tracks This ensures you don t accidentally de select a region Select and Generate RealTrack opens the Assign RealTracks to Tracks dialog to select a RealTracks instrument and generate a RealTrack Track names for generated non BB tracks are displayed Chapter 5 Using MIDI Features 65 in green For example if you had generated a track by right Wa Generic Audio clicking on it and selecting Generate RealTrack then the track IRT531 Banjo Bluegrass Doc Ev Generate RealTrack Favorites shows a list of recently used RealTracks Select and Generate RealDrums opens the RealDrums Picker to choose a a amr m RealDrums set and create a RealDrums track Track names for Generic Audio generated non BB tracks are displayed in green 2400 Out Microsoft Sound Mapper Generate RealDrums Favorites shows a list of recently used RealDrums Gene
461. t and all other entries will be cut You can the paste the tempo changes to a different location in a song using the Paste command Options When events are Cut a gap is created by default in the selected track s of a song You can choose to keep or close this gap Note This command also will automatically place cut MIDI events into the Windows clipboard in MIDI format in order to be able to paste the events into any Windows application that supports clipboard pasting Only MIDI data not audio data can be placed into the Windows clipboard from RealBand Use Data Filter The Data Filter is a filter that when in use determines which events will be affected by the current edit command RealBand will only allow the events that match the chosen characteristics to pass through the filter so that the current edit command can act upon them The filter has a separate row for all six types of MIDI events Within each row are settings that determine whether a type of event will pass through the filter and the ranges and values of 184 Chapter 13 Reference the events that RealBand will allowed to pass through There is also a row within the filter that lets you specify which MIDI channels will pass through the filter Data Filter vale Duration 12 0 65535 E i ce Hate L r2 OB 12 OK Cancel Ctrl a i Key Aft Prog ca L un art Bend L na Chn Att
462. t special controller event into the track as a means of storing the resolution Cancel Help Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks 81 Highlighting a section of the Notation window When the Notation window is in Editable Notation Mode you can highlight a section of the Notation window so that you can cut or copy the section To highlight a section of the Notation window 1 Click and hold the left mouse button at the upper right corner of the rectangular section you want to highlight Make sure you don t click on any existing notes and make sure you don t release the left mouse button until you are finished highlighting 2 Move the mouse down and to the right to form a rectangle You will see a rectangular section of the Notation Window become highlighted in reverse 3 When you ve finished highlighting release the left mouse button During the process of highlighting a section you can highlight a section beyond the current notation screen by moving the mouse cursor beyond the right edge of the notation window When you do this the Notation window will advance to the next screen The Notation window will continue advancing until you move the mouse cursor back inside of the Notation window You should move the mouse cursor back inside the notation window when it has reached the screen that contains the last measure of the section you wish to highlight Then you can move the mouse cursor to the left or right within the Notati
463. t Paste dialog 282 Appendix B Keystroke Commands Ctrl Ctrl 2 Bars window Ctrl 3 Chords window Ctrl 4 Tempo Map window Ctrl 9 Classic Tracks view Alt F2 New Notation window Shift F2 New Big Lyrics window Ctrl F2 New Audio Edit window Ctrl Alt P New Piano Roll Window F2 Event List window L Toggles lyric entry mode O Sets duration of inserted notes to whole OOS H Sets duration of inserted notes to half O Sets duration of inserted notes to quarter Sets duration of inserted notes to 8th Sets duration of inserted notes to 16th Sets duration of inserted notes to 32nd Sets duration of inserted notes to 64th 1 Sets duration of inserted notes to 128th A or Ctri A Sets duration of inserted notes to be automatic Ctrl Z Deletes the last notes entered 283 Appendix C MIDI Controller Numbers o BR Select MSB o O Bank Select MSB Modulation Wheel Breath Controller Undefined Foot Controller 5 Portamento Time Data Entry MSB Main Volume 8 Balance 00 9 Undefined 0 0 O Undefined 000 20 31 Undefined 32 63 LSB for Controllers 0 3 sea Damper Pedal Sustain Data Byte of 0 63 0ff 64 127 0n 65 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Pedal Legato Footswitch Hold 2 Sound Controller default Sound Variation Sound Controller 2 default Timbre Harmonic Content Sound Controller 3 default Release Time Sound Controller 4 default Attack Time Sound Controller 5 default Brigh
464. t Whole Track Change Current Time AlE LefEMouserc lick The right click menu in the Audio Edit Window is similar to the right click menu in the Tracks window The Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Audio Track feature allows you to permanently change the duration and pitch of individual audio tracks or change the speed and pitch of the entire RealBand mix Select Whole Track makes it easy to select the whole track for editing Change Current Time sets the time to the position where the menu is opened Tracks Window Editing Audio edits can also be performed directly in the Tracks window although the Audio Edit window offers a larger view for precision editing Drag and drop audio editing in the Tracks window makes it easy to drag a clip from one track to another You can select a highlighted region by holding down the Ctrl key with the left mouse button pressed and drag the region to a new location in the song Ne cal After releasing the mouse button you have HSA four options 1 Move to new location and overwrite Move to new location and merge Copy to new location and overwrite Copy to new location and merge PM Drag Drop Edit Type of drag drop edit 2 Move to new location and overwrite ps a D9 C2 Move to new location and merge C2 Copy to new location and overwrite Copy to new location and merge Chapter 8 Audio Production 103 Audio Edit Commands Audio editing uses the Edit menu commands Y
465. t one hundred percent the volume falls all the way to zero between each tremolo pulse an exaggerated stuttering sound PG Real Time Analyzer The PG Real Time Analyzer is ONLY a frequency measurement tool PG RTA never modifies the audio Sonic Repair An RTA can help identify frequencies which should be boosted or cut with an Equalizer plug in For instance if an instrument track is too noisy examine the frequency response with an RTA To reduce noise unused frequency bands would be the first likely places to equalize If a track sounds bad the objectionable frequencies are likely to be among the loudest in the RTA display It can be easier quicker to improve the tone if you first try equalizing the loud frequencies Mixing Mastering An RTA 1s a good reality check on full mixes To get a feel for the frequency distribution of a music style use the RTA to study your favorite CDs Music styles often have typical frequency distributions While polishing your mix the RTA can help you make a tune s frequency balance in the ballpark of the tune s genre It may seem uncreative to purposely make original tunes similar to the norm but listeners are less likely to seriously audition a tune if it sounds out of whack from the target genre Metal and Big Hair 80 s Rock are among the brightest commercial mixes often approaching a straight horizontal line on an RTA If your mix has an overall positive slope the high frequencies
466. t s nice about this is that you can apply completely different amounts of the same effect to different tracks so some tracks can be very wet with lots of reverb while others can be relatively dry with very little reverb If you use Track Inserts on multiple tracks you will use up CPU processing power relatively quickly and your computer may have trouble handling this depending on the speed of your CPU The reason for this is that the Track Inserts each involve the usage of a unique instance of each effect since each Track Insert is a unique signal path for each track Note The more effects you chain together within each Aux bus Track Insert or Output Insert the more CPU power will be required For example an Aux bus with just an EQ will require a lot less CPU power than an Aux bus with chain of 4 effects such as Compressor EQ Chorus Reverb Reset Effects The Reset Realtime Effects button is found in the Audio preferences dialog It Reset Realtime Effects removes all real time effects from your project so you can remix your project from scratch 90 Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features Chapter 8 Audio Production Overview The audio production options available in RealBand include RealTracks RealDrums and audio tracks plus powerful audio effects and editing features RealTracks are audio tracks generated automatically following the chord changes you enter in the Chords window They use the ex
467. t the most transparent and accurate quality See the following Understanding Latency section ASIO always on is normally selected but it can be disabled if a driver has trouble running ASIO constantly When this setting is turned off unchecked the ASIO driver is only used for playback and recording and MIDI Thru will be routed to the default MIDI Output destination as selected in the MIDI Driver Setup This minimizes MIDI Thru latency when ASIO is not on and it is the same way MIDI Thru behaves with high latency MME drivers The Driver Info field shows various characteristics of your driver The Name is the driver s name The Version is the version number of your driver Input Channels is the total number of mono input channels that your sound card has Note RealBand groups these into stereo pairs Output Channels is the total number of mono output channels that your sound card has Note RealBand groups these into stereo pairs The Allowed Sample Rates field shows the sample rates allowed by your sound card s ASIO driver RealBand has a built in resampler which lets you play and record files that aren t directly supported by your ASIO driver Input data format and output data format is the format of the data that the ASIO driver uses such as integer or float 16 or 32 bit LSB or MSB which is the ordering of the bytes The Buffer Sizes In Samples shows a range of allowed buffer sizes The Pref is the preferred size and th
468. t window are all windows that fall into this category 1 Tracks Ctrl 1 2 Bars 0Chrl 2 3 Chords Ctri 3 4 Tempo Map Ckrl 4 5 Comments CErl 5 6 5ysex Ctrl 6 7 Guitar Ctrl 7 a Mixer Crrl 87 9 Classic Tracks View Ctrl 9 More Windows Arrange Icons New When you choose the New command the sub menu shown above will appear offering the Event List Notation Audio Edit Big Lyrics and Lead Sheet windows available to be opened Event List g Event List Track 3 1 01 000 1 01 000 1 81 888 1 01 000 1 01 000 1 01 000 1 02 04 1 02 040 1 02 040 1 82 858 UolCtrl PanCtrl Control ReverbCtrl ChorusCtrl Change PedalCtrl Hote 1080 Transmit Hote 1686 Hote 1056 Silence Hote 1688 A oo C2 oo mo Co n2 Co c2 CJ A oo C2 fo mo Co n2 l CJ An Event List window is an Event Editor that allows you to insert delete and change all MIDI events A list of events is displayed vertically in the window shown above and each line in the list represents an individual event Each event is shown with its track number time MIDI channel number the kind of the event and the parameters applicable to the event When an Event List is created it is displayed based on the tracks that are currently selected highlighted For example if only one track e g Track 1 is selected and you use the New command to create an Event List window it will only display events that occur within Track 1 234 Chapter 13
469. ta will be recorded as 1 L R pair per port with all the dated recorded on adjacent available tracks Tracks will be inserted if necessary same method as when recording L R with a single port If the Record Channel is set to Left or Right only Input Port number 1 the first input port in the list that was selected by you in the Audio Drivers dialog will be recorded even if multiple ports are selected Buffer Size for Edit 5 ave 5 Am tes v The Buffer Size for Edit Save setting in the Audio dialog lets you adjust the buffer size used by RealBand when editing and saving a song It lets you adjust the buffer size that RealBand uses during operations such as cutting and pasting or when saving a file Depending on your hard drive using larger buffer sizes may result in a speed improvement The Audio Temp Directory is the directory used by RealBand to store temporary audio data when recording or editing a song This setting can t be changed if the song already has audio data The Full Duplex setting when checked will allow RealBand to record and play back audio at the same time This setting will only work if your sound card its driver supports full duplex simultaneous record playback The Quick Volume Change checkbox when checked will cause RealBand to quickly stop and restart playback in response to any volume or panning changes to an audio track or muting unmuting of audio tracks There may be a slight delay or glitch before the chan
470. te By default you must hold the Ctrl key before clicking on the Guitar fretboard to insert a note into a Notation window If the Send Notes To Notation Windows option in the Guitar Settings dialog is enabled holding the Ctrl key won t be required but be careful not to accidentally insert a note when using the mouse to switch to the Guitar window Notes can be deleted by holding down the Delete key and then clicking over the note you wish to delete Editing Notes Notes can be edited by clicking on the note with the right mouse button to launch a menu of editing commands Select Edit Note to open the NOTE dialog 114 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing F NOTE 480 PPO This dialog allows editing of Channel dm The MIDI channel for the note Tine 3 38 The exact time location 1 Note name aee v Velocity of the note Velocity Duration of the note in beats and ppq Forced Accidental If a note is being displayed as a sharp but TT Lua 1 Duration o you want it to appear as a flat or vice versa you can force Forced Accidental eS Note Type You can choose for the note to be Normal 2 Invisible note will sound but will not appear in regular notation or Guitar Bend a B will appear above the note Normal Note that the guitar bend is for notation only and does not C Invisible affect the sound of the note Guitar Bend The Delete button removes the note Micr
471. ted Devices to Top button lets you adjust the order of the Audio Output ports You can choose which Audio Output devices appear as Port 1 Port 2 etc within RealBand and not be stuck with the default ordering for the ports determined by the Windows operating system If the ports are in a different order than the order you want you can select highlight one or more ports and press the Move Selected Devices to Top button This will move the highlighted ports to the top of the list When you launch the Audio Drivers dialog all the highlighted ports will always be shown at the top They will be in the same order they were before relative to each other For example let s say you have 4 ports on your system and by default they show up sequentially Driver A Driver B Driver C Driver D In the preceding picture none are highlighted Now let s say that you highlight the 4 port Driver D and move it to the top and then you highlight the last port in the list which is now Driver C since Driver D was moved to the top You now have 2 ports selected Driver D at the top and Driver C at the bottom Driver D and Driver C will be ports 1 and 2 within RealBand Driver D Driver A Driver B Driver C The next time you launch the Audio Drivers dialog you ll see Driver D and Driver C at the top followed by the other two un highlighted ports The important point here is that the chosen order of the highlighted ports
472. th by ear When you press the Start button PT will load in a special song that contains an audio and MIDI track that plays quarter notes The note of the MIDI track is a Sth higher than the note on the audio track While the notes are playing adjust the latency on the spin control until it sounds like both notes are played in unison Press start again IF the song starts with Ehe tracks lined up right away then vou are Finished IF not then this means you overshot or undershot the real latency by the length of a quarternote which is 500ms e 9 IF the MIDI begins exactly a quarternote early then the latency setting is now 500ms too high IF the audio is heard a quarternote early than the latency setting is still 500rms too low Soft Synth Latency MS Note If the notes sound in sync but you later play a song and the MIDI and audio still sound like they are out of sync then likely you overshot the correct MS setting by 500ms If this happens we recommend starting the adjustment again at a value of zero and increasing it until you hear the MIDI and audio notes in sync Step Two Digital Audio Setup RealBand includes an auto configuration utility to profile your computer s sound card and install optimal parameters to use when recording and playing back digital audio Go to Options Preferences and select the Audio tab to view and edit these settings You will see the Audio dialog Chapter 1 Welcome 11 Pressing the Default MME
473. th for RealTracks e g CBB RealTracks C BB RealTracks Select path For RealDrums e g C BBiGrums ora Select The Select button opens a browser where you can locate folders The other settings enable or disable RealTracks RealDrums and patch changes embedded in styles Metronome Access to the Metronome dialog The metronome can be active during recording playback or both Recording If this checkbox option is enabled the metronome will be on heard during recording Playback If this option is enabled the metronome will be on during playback RealBand will send a specific note out via MIDI on each beat The note velocity duration and port options will determine the pitch and characteristics of the note that is sent out via MIDI on each beat of the song Count In This option lets you choose how many measures bars will be counted down before recording begins The countdown may range from to 4 measures Metronome Iw Recording Play Back Count in m Allow Count in before playback Metronome shuts off after count in Silent Count In MIDI Metronome Channel TN Kep FHS Velocity ee Duration mm Fort UN Lancel Help Allow Count in before playback Enables count in before playback This 1s useful for practicing or playing live Chapter 13 Reference 231 Metronome shuts off after count in Shuts the metronome off after the count in so it is silent during playback Silent Count In Ensu
474. than overwriting any existing data NOTE this feature will only insert files on measure boundaries Track Overview Display To the right of the track info panels you ll see the overview display x Tracks m Snap Play Selected rea 0 a aft Sound Mapper You can click and drag to highlight a section of the song for editing If the Alt key is held when left mouse clicking on the overview section of the Tracks window the time will be changed without affecting the currently highlighted region This lets you quickly adjust the current time without having to worry about accidentally changing the highlighted region ditta eese nn Click on Play Selected Area to hear the highlighted section being edited _ Snap Play Selected Are The and buttons upper far left corner of the Tracks window let you zoom in or zoom out the overview section 46 Chapter 4 The Main Screen The Snap button causes the time indicator to snap to the nearest beat when changing the time location or when highlighting a region for editing Note If you have selected non consecutive multiple tracks e g 2 3 and 5 for editing you should not click on the track overview section area directly since it will cause your track selections to be lost If you only want to change the edit From Thru settings then you can click on the timeline immediately above the track overviews with the mouse and then press the F7 key to set the
475. the Tracks window In the menu that opens click on Select and Generate RealTrack This opens the Assign RealTracks to Track dialog Note that this is a minimal set of RealTracks for demonstration purposes There are dozens of RealTracks instruments available with many more to come Assign RealTracks to Track Memo Sax Tenor Jazz Sw 140 SoloistJazz Tenor sax soloist RealSax ST2 User Comments Audition al None Clear All Disable RealTracks for this track Force this track to MIDI Name Instrument Type Feel Tempo Genre wa None Song doesn t override RealTracks on this tra None Song do lt None gt lt No lt No lt Non O Guitar Acoustic Strumming Ev 085 Acoustic Guitar 26 Rhythm Ev 2 Country 362 Pedal Steel Background Ev 085 Pedal Steel Background Ev p 363 Sax Tenor Jazz Sw 140 Tenor Sax 67 Soloist Sw 140 Jazz 365i M Show RealTracks that are N A Filter by V Show RealTracks Variations Update Show All Cancel Help Chapter 3 Tutorial Guided Tour of RealBand 31 We ve selected Tenor Sax for our RealTrack Click on the Close button and the RealTrack will be generated Your RealTracks players never complain about do overs so if you don t get what you want the first time a RealTrack is generated just generate another one Or generate several more on different tracks and use the one you like best or use the choice sections of different tr
476. the time The Substitute Play field determines how often a substitution may occur A Substitute Play 9o value of 80 would mean that the substitute note has an 80 chance of replacing the regular note in the specified position of the grid each time a measure is placed into a track using the Fill command The Substitute Note field allows you the ability to select a note number ranging from 1 Bass Drum to 18 Open Shaker Similarly the Substitute Velocity field offers you a way to alter the velocity of the substitute drum note Chapter 13 Reference 211 The Random button launches a dialog that ties the previous settings together and lets you specify whether the program will randomly alter the start times and velocities of notes when the Fill Track with Drum Pattern command is used This feature does not randomly alter any notes in real time It will only randomly alter velocities when the Fill Track with Drum Pattern command is issued If you re select a fill the track will very likely be different each time The Min Start Time Offset is the lowest amount of ticks that the program can move a note backward in time The Max Start Time Offset is the highest amount of ticks that the program can move a note forward in time For example if the Min Start Time Offset is 5 and the Max Start Time Offset is 2 and a note begins at 2 01 100 the program will randomly move it anywhere between 2 01 095 and 2 01 102 If both the Min and Max
477. the available buttons for that toolbar Each button is named or described in the list 42 Chapter 4 The Main Screen Buttons with a check mark in the check box will be displayed on the toolbar Clear the checkbox to remove a button from the toolbar New Open 25 MIDI Drv Plugin Mode v ES Print SGREELLLLI e de 5 i Es v DXi Synths Prel Prefs Rec Audio v vy Metronome A Import Audio Render lt Midi Monitor V2 Guitar Tuner Audio Edit Big Lyrics A Drums Pry Mark MxE Mark Markers YL Panic Punch Big Clock SPST ST SES lt lt 11815 lt lt Ress a atr Clean Conductor Loop 22 Q gt k Y X Rec Play Rew Stop Rec Audio Pry Mark Nxt Mark Markers WU Panic Punch Reset Toolbar Click on Reset Toolbar to restore the default toolbar settings Now S cos TE the TT S Now 1s the current location in MIDI format bars beats ticks The From and Thru values indicate the range of bars currently selected for editing operations You can double click in these fields to type in new locations When From and Thru are set to the same value RealBand always generates a complete song If they are set to different values RealBand will generate that specific range The CPU Usage Indicator shows total CPU usage and PT RealBand usage The Piano Keyboard alind The re sizeable piano keyboard is located below the t
478. the current time location To ensure that a previously highlighted region is not accidentally changed while setting the current time hold down the Alt key when clicking the left mouse button You can use the mouse to select a region to be highlighted by clicking on a measure and dragging the mouse over the measures you are interested in This action highlights an area that can be affected by the commands in the Edit menu The horizontal scroll bar located at the bottom of the Bars window allows you to scroll around through your entire project 244 Chapter 13 Reference Chords Window fj Chords Ctrl 3 FMaj7 D7 Gm7 67 F6 The Chords window displays the chord symbols of a song You ll see the bars of the song displayed in rows If a bar contains chord symbols they will be displayed to the right of the bar number An optional setting inserts a line between each section of the song as determined by the a and b part markers There is another setting for the thickness of the line When the song isn t playing you can enter chord symbols by typing them You enter chords in a similar manner to the Notation window except that the Chords window is always ready for chord entry if the song is currently not playing Each measure is divided into Beat Groups A Beat Group consists of two beats If a song is in 4 4 then each measure will contain two beat groups The current beat group will have a rectangle drawn around it You can
479. the number of discrete tracks encountered in a given file into the current song or project To load a file move the highlight bar over the desired choice and either press Enter or click on the Open button The Open dialog recalls the folder from the last time the dialog was used This setting can be enabled or disabled in the File tab of the Options Preferences dialog A file can also be loaded by typing its name directly in the File name field instead of using the list box You can also use the mouse to select a file by double clicking on the file with the left mouse button 178 Chapter 13 Reference Custom File Dialog We ve made a custom Open dialog for you with more features than the standard dialog To see the custom Open dialog go to Options Preferences Ctrl F5 and select the checkbox for Long File Names use custom open save dialog m ve Look in B RealB and E al Bl Al E C3 AudioChordizard File Falder 30 06 2008 15 34 C3 data File Folder 30 06 2008 16 34 C DY Settings File Folder 30 06 2008 16 34 9 mididrurms File Folder 30 06 2008 16 34 Cy PTw Pictures File Folder 30 06 2008 15 34 HBBackup File Falder 04 07 2008 11 18 5 samples File Folder 30 06 2008 15 34 9 templates File Folder 30 06 2008 16 34 said seq 23KB SEQ File 01 03 1993 1 06 as impromtu seq 17KB SEQ File 01 03 1333 1 06 i jayeblue seg SKE SEQ File 01 03 1993 1 06 El LastONonAeall imelroup tos 2KE TGS File 13 07
480. the program will print the notes of the track The only reason for un checking this would be to print blank paper with just the key signature You would also have to make sure the Bars Per Line is set to 1 and un check the Bar Numbers and Chord Symbols checkboxes The Staves Per Page setting lets you determine how many staves will be printed per page Normally you ll want to leave this at 10 but you can decrease this setting if the song has a lot of very high or very low notes so that there is room between staves for them If you increase this setting beyond 10 there may not be enough room for all the staves on the paper depending on the size of the paper in your printer Ifthe printout has a song title the first page printed out will be limited to 8 staves so that there s room for the title When the Chord Symbols checkbox is checked the program will print the chord symbols of the song if there are any The Bar Offset setting is an advanced setting that you can use to decrease all the measure numbers of the printout It decreases the numbers that are printed at each measure For example if you specify a Bar Offset of 2 all the measures numbers will be printed as 2 less than their actual numbers This setting is useful if the song has a lead in because for example a setting of 1 would cause the first measure to be printed with no number and the rest of the measures will be printed with their numbers starting with 1
481. the tempo scrap buffer The Markers and Chord Symbols checkboxes have the same function Advance the Now pointer after the paste advances the current time to the end of the pasted area This is a useful feature for when you plan to create a new track or song section from multiple Pastes Note This command can also paste a Standard MIDI File data from the Windows clipboard If you re using another MIDI application capable of copying a Standard MIDI File data to the clipboard such as Band in a Box this can be a very convenient feature to use to get MIDI data into your project quickly Keep in mind though that this command does not paste meter changes Crossfade when pasting audio smoothes out a paste so that no audible clicks are heard at splice points of pastes Chapter 13 Reference 187 1 Track Paste This feature performs a similar function as the Paste command except that it pastes all the data onto one single track Therefore you should select only one track as the destination track or this command can t be performed This command will only paste MIDI data to a MIDI track and WAV data to an audio track For example if you 1 Track Paste to an audio track and there is also MIDI data in the scrap buffer the MIDI data will be ignored If more than one audio track is in the scrap buffer RealBand will merge those tracks together automatically during the 1 Track Paste procedure but this will take a notably longer ti
482. then this will be set to treble The Offset field if present lets you make adjustments to the vertical position of an event The Start Time field is the start time of the event in measures beats ticks OK Insert Event exits this dialog and then inserts the event into the notation track OK Remove Event exits this dialog and then REMOVES the event if it exists in the specified time range from the notation track 118 Chapter 9 Notation and Printing Chord Height Adjustment The Notation Event dialog also lets you make an adjustment to the chord symbol height for a beat by choosing the Chord Height Adjustment event type Decrezcendo Staccato Event Type Staccatissimo Regular Accent Legato Accent Marcato Accent Chord Height Adjustment This setting allows for adjustment of the vertical position of individual chord symbols This is useful when chord symbols overlap other aspects of the notation Staff Roll Notation Mode Staff Roll mode is similar to a piano roll except the notes are shown on a grand staff Its purpose is to allow for easy graphical editing of notes with the Staff Roll you will be able to graphically edit sequences much easier than if you were using a regular piano roll or an ordinary notation window Notes are shown as black dots note heads on the staff Note stems are NOT shown Notation Track 3 Opt Print Ch c2 I Clean L Tr auto Ret po T d If the S
483. through the filter For example if the minimum for the note range is C1 and the maximum is C2 only notes that fall within the range of C1 through C2 will pass through the filter and be affected by the current edit command The Value column works in the same way as the range column but will act upon note velocities controller values or aftertouch values Only events with values that fall within the specified values will pass through the filter For 198 Chapter 13 Reference example if the minimum note value is 50 and the maximum is 100 then only notes with a velocity of 50 up to a velocity of 100 will pass through the filter Duration allows you to specify that only notes with durations within a specified range will be affected by your edit Data Filter Duration 0 65535 Ctrl Key Aft Prog 0 127 Bend 2192 8191 Chr At w D 127 MIDI Channel 1 18 Use Secondary Filter Lyrics v Audio checkbox affects Audio tracks only Ctrl checkbox affects either Audio or MIDI tracks All other checkboxes affect only MIDI Audio v tracks PT won t paste data from MIDI Tracks to Audio Tracks or vice versa Secondary filter only affects MIDI tracks oY Sex If you check the Use Secondary Filter option at the bottom of the filter then a second filter will pop up after you re done editing the regular filter Events that pass through either the regular or Secondary Filter will be affected by the current edit com
484. tiple tracks you should first select the tracks in the Tracks window or Bars window and then open up a new Lead Sheet window EAL SANG la HECE il d li ill 3 N il I Another way to select multiple tracks is in the Lead Sheet Options window Lead Sheet Options Track Specitic settings Track 2 i Selected Track 2 RealBand can also print notation with multiple tracks when you press the Print button at the top of a Chapter 9 Notation and Printing 125 Lead Sheet window that is currently displaying multiple tracks If you attempt to display multiple tracks and the lead sheet appears overcrowded you should reduce the Font Size setting in the Lead Sheet Options dialog This will solve the problem of staves bumping into each other Note When printing the Font Size in the print options dialog controls the font size for printing Generally you ll fit more tracks at a 100 font size when printing than would fit in the Lead Sheet window due to the different dimensions of a printed page You can switch between the Lead Sheet window and a regular Notation window by pressing the eighth note button at the top of the Lead Sheet window The Loop Screen button will play the music of the current lead sheet screen in a loop Opt Although the Lead Sheet window has its own Options dialog many of the settings in the Notation window s Options dialog also affect the Lead Sheet window Lead
485. tness Sound Controller 6 10 no defaults General Purpose Controllers Nos 5 8 84 Portamento Control S O Effects 1 Depth previously External Effects Depth Effects 2 Depth previously Tremolo Depth Effects 3 Depth previously Chorus Depth aA Effects 4 Depth previously Detune Depth 284 Appendix C MIDI Controller Numbers 96 Dwalnrement S O 98 Non Registered Parameter Number LSB Registered Parameter Number LSB Registered Parameter Number MSB Undefined Reset All Controllers Local Control All Notes Off 177 PolyOn MAA 000 yO Poly On Mono Off More MIDI Controller Information Additional descriptions of MIDI controllers are available in the MIDI tutorials found in the Support pages on the PG Music Inc web site www pgmusic com For the full MIDI specification search MIDI Manufacturers Association in your Internet browser Appendix C MIDI Controller Numbers 285 286 PG Music Inc RealBand is protected by copyright and is the property of PG Music Inc Copyright O 2010 PG Music Inc and its licensors All rights reserved RealBand was written by Jeff Yankauer PG MUSIC INC 29 Cadillac Avenue Victoria BC V8Z 1T3 Canada Contacts E mail info pgmusic com Phone toll free in the United States and Canada 1 800 268 6272 1 888 PG MUSIC 746 8742 Or 1 250 475 2874 tolls apply Universal International Freephone Service Outside of the United States and Canada whe
486. to four chained effects the rotary knobs set the send level to each Aux bus Right click on a knob to enter an exact level for the send use the green checkmark or red x above the fader to turn the track on and off 1 e to toggle between active and mute states the track name displays vertically to the left of the volume slider The track name is entered in the Tracks window right click on the volume slider to enter an exact fader level each track strip has its own stereo VU meter the LR stereo pan slider also has a smooth even response with the option to right click and type in an exact value tracks can be assigned to audio subgroups using audio output ports that do not currently have a driver port assigned This track 1s assigned to subgroup 2 when using audio subgroups the Aux busses should also be sent to that subgroup so auxiliary busses 5 6 7 and 8 would be assigned to Subgroup 2 G2 in this example Press the FX button to bring up the DirectX VST Window and you can select edit the effects you wish to insert Bl bDirectX VST Window Ex Edit Brpazz Plugin Load Group oL Save Group None Load Preset Save Preset Delete Preset A click in area around the track number will open the context menu with a full list of commands and settings for the particular track This is the same menu that opens with a right click in the Tracks window so it reduces the need to switch back and f
487. to shorten the bar then ACW will mistakenly decide that you wish to make all the following bar lines double tempo 4 4 113 336 y i HS we EP ESAE E D7b SAMA BG GIB E DbD D Solution First Right Click on the beat 9 3 and Insert a bar line 113 336 vn ES 566 wu 337 we ERE LO Set Bar One f Delete Bar 9 A B Bb B 5 E DHD EE Change Bar 9 Time Sig Y E ag ra Estimate Tuning 114997 Now a new bar line is added and three new GBL bar lines are flagged ad 1 of p FP Y dl ey 230 986 ES 15 E ABE rU T G LL GG D rasah C eC Cs C Cares 1149 BV D7bp5 D C AJB Bhp Bl E DhD D Right Click on the new shortened Bar 9 and set the Time Signature to 2 4 113 336 227 632 230 986 115 566 114 997 y Li Set Bar One Insert Barline T1 Delete Bar 9 Jump To C AB BbIB P SetBars 9 Thru UE To a Timesig of f la Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 153 ERE MEEN Get 4 qa E jac Change Bar 10 to its its desired duration Hover dete mouse over ver the red triangle marker at Bar 11 and the mouse cursor becomes a drag cursor Click and drag the bar line to the location marked 11 3 113 336 C 6b i Now we have edited bar 9 to nave its proper 2 4 Time Signature and preserved the song tempo on both sides of the 2 4 bar Precise Floating
488. ts in the Audio Effects submenu are applied the content of the audio track is permanently altered The effect can be removed with the Edit Undo command Note Once the file has been saved the effect cannot be undone This command will undo the last edit command executed and restore the track to 1ts Tone Control previous state The number of Undo Levels is adjustable from 1 to 100 in the Graphic EQ General section of the Options Preferences dialog Parametric EQ Gain Change De Ess Auta Wah Pitch Shift Exciter Enhancer Hurn Filter Each effect has its own dialog with custom settings and commands Click on the Help button for a detailed explanation of the settings and a concise tutorial on how to apply the effect Pre Delay Hvb Time Hb Density HF Decay hix 9 O 9 29 40 m5 100 ms Peak Limit Preview 10 Secs Stop Help o Previous pum Copy Paste Save Preset Time Stretch and Pitch Shift This feature is available from the Tracks window by right clicking with the mouse on any audio track Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Selected Audio Tracks It allows you to permanently change the duration and pitch of individual audio tracks or change the speed and pitch of the entire RealBand mix If an audio track has been inadvertently recorded too flat or too sharp you can easily modify the pitch without affecting the track s duration If the duration of an audio track is incorrect Re
489. tting If you miss too many notes decrease Min Dur Fine Tune Compensate for an out of tune recording If too many MIDI notes are playing a half step too high adjust the Fine Tune setting upwards If too many MIDI notes are playing a half step too low adjust it downwards Low Note Limit High Note Limit Set the expected note range of the source audio Min Vel Max Vel The Midi velocity range that corresponds to the audio note amplitude An input Note that reaches up to 0 dB will send the Max Vel and a note that 1s barely above Thresh will send the Min Vel For an organ type on or off response set Max Vel and Min Vel to the same value This will cause all MIDI notes to have the same velocity Hum Filter Checkbox Pre process the audio thru a hum filter n case the audio has too much hum hum can confuse the pitch detection Send Volume Checkbox Insert Volume messages in the MIDI track This could be most useful with voice violin horns or even guitar A good way to use this setting would be to set a narrow velocity range Perhaps Min Vel and Max Vel could be set to 127 or perhaps Max Vel 127 and Min Vel 100 Then enable the Send Volume checkbox Each note s MIDI volume is controlled by the instantaneous audio level rather than controlling the level by MIDI velocity You could use a long decay synth patch and each note will track the volume envelope of the underlying audio With just the right settings 1t will track
490. ttings dialog with settings applicable to the virtual piano display mode There are two display modes for the piano Piano Settings 1 When the display mode is set to Current Track the piano will Display Mode display notes as they are being played from the current highlighted track t Curent Track 2 When the display mode is set to All notes except for drum channel the piano will display the notes of all tracks except for notes that are on the drum channel f All notes except For drum channel Ww Big sizeable Piano The default drum channel is normally set to channel 10 in this dialog but it can be changed to any MIDI channel between and 16 If you select a drum channel of 0 all notes that are being played will Big Piana Dctavez display including the drums Big Piano Height Show Track Number Drum Channel 10 Cancel Help When the Big Sizeable Piano setting is enabled RealBand will show a bigger piano below the toolbar instead of the smaller piano You can vertically resize the Big Piano by placing the mouse on the bottom edge of the piano and then clicking and dragging the mouse up or down For the Big Sizeable Piano there is also a setting that gives you a choice of Show Track Number drawn as a tiny number within the notes Show MIDI Channel or Show No Text If Big Piano Varies Colors By Track is enabled then the colors of the notes drawn on the big piano will vary depending on the track numb
491. ty effects The effects on each bus or insert are chained in sequence which means that the processed signal from each plug in is then further processed by the chain s next plug in There are no hard and fast rules but a typical effects chain might start with effects that condition the incoming signal noise gate EQ dynamics then add effects that alter the tonal qualities of the sound chorus distortion modulation and then time based effects reverb delay To run effects in parallel rather than chained you can assign them to any of the eight auxiliary busses and route each track individually through any four effects 88 Chapter 7 Digital Audio Features Track Options Edit Bypass Plugin i n Load Group Save Group Load Prezet Save Preset y m n 3 n Delete Preset Aux Bus FX insert window Choosing and Editing DirectX VST Effects The Track field of the DirectX VST window lets you choose a track in which to select or edit effects A track can be a Track Insert an Aux bus or an Output Insert The Edit radio buttons let you choose which of the four effects to edit in the group of effects available in each track The Bypass checkboxes lets you bypass any of the four effects in a group In the example the Melody is the currently selected Track and slot 1 PG Dynamics is selected for editing The Load Group and Save Group buttons let you load and save the effects settings for the
492. tyle Compatible Songs styles Use these buttons to find compatible RealDrums styles The RD Demo button loads and plays a demo of the chosen RealDrums style A list of RO Demo Songbemo BB Styles pray RD Demo Sengbemo EB Styles demos for the chose style will be displayed The Song Demo button shows BB styles that will use this RealDrums style The song demo for the style will get loaded The BB Styles button shows BB styles that will use this RealDrums style The style will get loaded if the menu selection is made The Audition button doesn t load the style but instead uses Media Player to play a demo WAV file for the style Use the Rebuild button to build the list of RealDrums styles present in the drums folder If you add new drum styles press this button to update the list HealDrums BossaBrushes Track names for generated non BB tracks are displayed in green Genenc Audio AUD Out Microsoft Sound Mapper Generate RealDrums Favorites This command opens a short list of the most recently used RealDrums for a quick and convenient selection Click on your choice in the list to begin generating the RealDrums track Chapter 8 Audio Production 95 SalsasonMontunoaz23701 Bngo Timbal MashwilleSouthern01 Sticks Ride LaPoapJazzHardEwv 16 JazzBrushes FusionFunkTerry Clarke 1 Sticks Country2Beat161 Sidestick Snare BossaBrushes Press Escape to cancel generation of the track Regenerate
493. u may move around by cursor arrow Keys Enter key or mouse pointer click on the time indicator at the top of the Notation Window The time line moves 2 beats at a time in response to the left and right cursor keys When you have the time indicator at or close to the beat where you want to enter a chord you then type the name of the chord Note that the chord entry works the same as Band in a Box in that the chord you type will go to the first beat in a 2 beat cell For example if the time is 1 02 00 and you type the letter c the C chord will be placed on beat 1 You can enter a chord on beat 2 00 00 with a comma as discussed below For example type c6 to get the C6 chord Note that you should never have to use the Shift key as RealBand will sort this out for you Use b for a flat e g Bb7 Use f or3 fora sharp e g F 7 You can actually type F37 to get F 7 RealBand will sort out the case saving you the effort of using Shift 3 to type the symbol Use for slash chords with alternate roots such as C7 E C7 with E bass Usea comma to enter two chords in a row For example we would type Ab9 G9 to enter two chords on consecutive beats Youcan use Ctrl Delete or the comma key to delete a chord The chords are shown in the Notation window above the treble clef C6 AM7 DM7 Ab9G9 C6 E ATHO9 In the above example the symbol shows roughly where the bar lines would be if these chords were entered in
494. udio various settings as well as an overview section showing either MIDI or audio data The Track Number field shows the track number If the track is the current Track it will be highlighted in red If the track 1s selected the number will be highlighted in yellow If the track is not selected it will be gray You can click on the track number field to make a track the Current Track x Tracks E Bk El zl Snap Play Selected Area 33 40 Bass BB 33 Acoustic Bass MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 2 Drums BB Tunms MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 10 Piano BB 1 Acoustic Grand Piano MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 3 Guitar BB 125 Acoustic Guitar nylon MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 1 4 Strings BB 50 String Ensemble 2 MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI 10 D800 Ch amp Melody BB 53 Choir amp ahs MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Ch 4 un gn I un gu LENTUM HH Vin pa f ha pper 8 Untitled MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Cho 9 Untitled MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI IO D800 Cho 10 Untitled MIDI out SB Audigy MIDI 10 D800 Ch O If you click on the track number field while holding the Shift key this will select a range of tracks from the current track through the number you clicked on For example if track 2 is the Current Track and you hold the Shift key Chapter 13 Reference 241 and then click on the number field for Track 4 this w
495. udio RealTrack Generate RealDrums Favorites Generate RealTrack Favorites opens a list of recently used Real instruments for quick selection and generation Generate MIDI Track Select and Generate RealDrums opens the RB RealDrums Picker for Regenerate Track None selection of a RealDrums style and options for the generation of the audio RealDrums Generate Al Generate RealDrums Favorites opens a list of recently used RealDrums styles for quick selection and generation Bass Generate MIDI Track opens a list box to select the part for a MIDI Drums track to be generated on the current track Piano Guitar Strings Regenerate Track Use this to regenerate an existing track If a track is a non BB track but it was generated individually from one of the generation options in Tracks window popup menu or from one of the generation options on the Generate Button popup menu then the track name will be displayed in green Chapter 4 The Main Screen 41 The track name being displayed in green or blue means that the track can be regenerated using this command This feature is useful to regenerate if you had changed the song s tempo or just to generate fresh material Generate All This command will regenerate all Blue and Green tracks automatically including RealDrums The button always generates all of the song If the 2 Bar Ending checkbox is selected RealBand will automatically generate a 2 bar ending f
496. ult to make vinyl cleanly reproduce very low frequencies Also most consumers even audiophiles with expensive stereos did not have speakers capable of reproducing lower than 40 Hz Unless you are dubbing classical organ records it is doubtful that there is anything of interest below 30 or 40 Hz While adjusting PG Vinyl Tool you can experimentally toggle the Rumble Filter on off to make sure the filter 1s not removing important audio features DeCrackle Checkbox Enable the DeCrackle section PG Vinyl Tool defines crackle as high frequency defects in the range of 2000 Hz to 20 000 Hz A single microscopic speck of dust or a tiny static discharge can cause an isolated tick which is too short to be considered a click The DeCrackle section removes these isolated ticks Crackle is a cluster of high frequency ticks If there are multiple close spaced ticks the ticks are perceived as a crackling sound First disable the DeClick Checkbox and adjust DeCrackle On a clean record in good condition DeCrackle may be the only necessary section Normally you would only enable the DeClick section if DeCrackle can t adequately clean up the mess DeCrackle Amount This adjusts the sensitivity of what PG Vinyl Tool considers to be a tick crackle At zero nothing is removed As the DeCrackle Amount is increased PG Vinyl Tool will mute additional tick suspects If the control is set too extreme PG Vinyl Tool will partially mute musica
497. ulting WMA file and will be viewable when the file is played in an appropriate media player 162 Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins To access this feature select Audio Merge Audio and DXi Tracks to WMA file Convert to WMA ASF Source Destination Quality Better than CD quality Stereo 128 Kbps 11 1 946 KB min Song Title ReaBandisHerel 0000000000000 Copyright PG Musie Ine 00 Author MeffYankaue 000000 Description Your AlHn One Audio Workstation and Accompaniment Program Help Cancel Encode Waw to WMA In the example we chose 160Kbps since we want the file to sound as clear as possible You can set this quality resolution parameter from a low of 6Kbps up to this 160Kbps rate You might want to choose a setting of around 32Kbps modem speed if you want to make a file that can stream on your web site Source This field displays the source WAV file It is for informational purposes only This field cannot be edited Destination This field displays the Destination filename and path This can be edited if desired Quality Set the bit rate of the compressed file Higher bit rates have higher quality audio while lower bit rates make smaller files which take up less space on a hard drive and are easier to stream over the Internet at the expense of sound quality Song Title The Song Title which is encoded into the WMA file and which is displayed by a WMA player Co
498. umber game For instance if you only change the level of drum hi hat it can radically change the RTA display One can make a bad sounding mix which has the same frequency distribution as your favorite famous recording But an RTA 1s an excellent reality check If your mix sounds good to the ear AND THE RTA IS ALSO IN THE BALLPARK the odds are good that you are getting close to a finished mix Control Descriptions Enable Plug in Checkbox Toggle the checkbox to turn the RTA ON or OFF PG RTA only does processing when 1 The plug in is enabled 2 The plug in is visible Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins 273 If PG RTA is not enabled or it is not visible it does not add to the computer load during playback It does no harm to leave several instances of the plug in assigned to various Tracks Aux Returns or Masters When you don t have the plug in visible on screen it will not load down the computer Frequency Resolution The Octave button displays ten bands representing the level of each octave in the audio The Third Octave button displays 28 bands representing the level of each third of an octave in the audio There may be situations where it is more useful to have a general overview at octave resolution but the main reason you might prefer Octave resolution is to reduce the CPU load Compared to third octave resolution Octave resolution only presents one third of the computer load Channel View Channel View 1s only
499. und module 1s connected to your computer s Line In jack 7 Play the MIDI file and monitor the levels on the Input VU meter Levels can be adjusted in both the Recording Control and the Volume or Playback Control the levels can occasionally go into the yellow zone and a transient peak in the red zone is OK Consistent readings in the red or lighting up the clip indicator means that your levels are set too high Unless you want to record the metronome check to be sure it is disabled in Options Metronome Click on the Record Audio button to record the song The Input VU meters will become active during recording 10 When done click the Stop button and choose to Keep Take when prompted A stereo track will have been recorded You could then use the menu command Track Save Track to File to save the recorded audio track as a WAV file Note While recording rendering the MIDI tracks you can perform real time mixer moves such as fading volume levels up or down which will be recorded to the audio track These changes cannot be undone but the tracks could be re rendered if necessary Editing Audio Tracks By default the program uses the Windows Temp directory for temporary audio files created during editing You can change the directory in the Options Preferences dialog under the Audio tab Bars Window The Bars window provides an overview of the data WAV and or MIDI in a song file This view makes it easy to se
500. use cursor to the desired insert location Right click on the Note Panel the Graphic Event Panel or any of the Rulers Then choose this item from the popup menu Events from the clipboard are merged with whatever data may already exist in the track If the Chan combo box is set to All pasted events keep their original copied MIDI channel Otherwise the pasted events will be re channeled to match the Chan combo box NOTE If you use RealBand s top Edit Menu Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C or Paste Ctrl V commands the conventional Cut Copy or Paste dialogs appear with the Piano Roll Time Selection automatically entered This gives you a choice of two different styles of Cut Copy or Paste either the conventional RealBand Cut Copy Paste dialogs which use a Time Range or the Piano Roll right click menu Cut Copy Paste methods which use Selected Events Re Channel All Events to the Track Channel Re channel all notes and graphic events the entire track to the MIDI output channel assigned for this track For instance though the track output channel might be channel 4 meaning that RealBand transmits any events in the track on channel 4 the actual events in the track might be channel 1 or a mixture of several channels Ordinarily it doesn t matter if the event channels are mixed up as long as you have the View Channel set to ALL But if you wish to use Paste Replace this function is smart enough not to stomp on a track s ev
501. ution equal to between 1 and 4 beats rather than complete bars This is mainly for editing purposes If you use beats with this setting the program will ignore any Bars Per Line From This Screen On markers in order to display the partial bars The Bars Per Line From This Screen On setting lets you change the horizontal resolution from this screen on This will cause the program to insert a special Bars Per Line marker Controller Event into the sequence This is useful if you have some sections of the song that you would like to be displayed with a different number of Bars Per Line than the overall Song setting The Notation window will then display the number of bars you selected from the current screen on Notation Window Options Bars Per Line Ong 4 Barla Resolutions 4 Sixteenth From This screen Un 4 Chord Vertical Position E Notation Settings Transpose r iw Show Bar Beat Lines E Tick Offset r T ablature ye None Clefs split at Ic p Duration Line Color W Show Key Signature Minimize Rests le Green iw Highlight Played Mates Engraver Spacing f Blue i Snap to grid lines iw Enabled Scroll Ahead Enabled Iw Enabled During Playback Scroll Ahead Trigger at 7 70 Scroll Ahead Amount 3 50 lw Detect fine resolution notation Use Ch 87 9 for LA Hand W Show Mate Durations Show Velocity Lines Lyric Position o Font Sizes 00 Other Options W Use Jazz Music Font Lyr
502. utton Broken vertical gray lines are shown across the staff to show each note subdivision for either eighth note triplets or sixteenth notes Chapter 6 BB Tracks and MIDI tracks 79 Notation Track 3 E Notation Traka c0 Opt Print H def Ch ps f clean L tr auto fF Res pl cj Tl d a Editable Notation window in 16th note even resolution Moving Notes Drag and Drop To move a note move the mouse cursor over an existing note and then click and hold the left mouse button The mouse cursor will change to a different shape While keeping the mouse button pressed move the mouse cursor over to the location you wish to drop the note and then let go of the mouse button The note will be moved to the place you dropped it Certain areas of the screen are not valid locations to drop a note The mouse cursor will change to a circle with line through it to indicate an invalid location When you click and drag a note with the left mouse button you will hear the note being played as you move it up and down the screen The note s pitch will be increased or decreased chromatically as you move it up down the screen Entering Notes Notes can be inserted simply by clicking on the staff in an appropriate location You will see the name and octave of the current note location in a box at the top of the window helpful for inserting a note above or below the grand staff When inserting a note holding down the mouse
503. vent was generated by RealBand and when it is reading Ext the event was generated by an external MIDI Device attached to the computer s MIDI In port Note To display data received from computer MIDI Input the MIDI THRU option must be enabled in RealBand Raw This indicates the raw bytes representing each MIDI message Most MIDI message types contain three bytes but some contain only one or two bytes SysEx messages can contain an arbitrary number of bytes Note This field is normally blank in the case of SysEx messages With SysEx messages up to 16 raw bytes are displayed in the Data fields Long SysEx messages are displayed on multiple lines at 16 bytes per line Status Show the text name of the Event type Chan This displays the MIDI channel of an Event This field is blank for System messages values from FO to FF System messages do not have an associated channel Data 1 Text name for the meaning of the first data byte of the MIDI message Data 2 Text name for the meaning of the second data byte of a MIDI Message Notes 1 For some messages such as Pitch Bend or Song Position Pointer the value of both data bytes 1 and 2 are calculated and displayed in Data 1 2 Some MIDI messages such as Program Change or Channel Pressure only have a single Data byte and the Data 2 field will be blank Also some MIDI Messages have no data bytes in which case both Data fields will be blank Settings Window
504. with the PG Dynamics Output Gain knob or adjust the Mixer s Track or Master sliders or insert an instance of PG Peak Limit somewhere down stream of any PG Dynamics plug ins 266 Appendix A PG Music DirectX Plug Ins Expander Gate An Expander increases the difference between soft and loud sounds The PG Dynamics Expander is a downward expander which means it does not affect loud signals but reduces the level of quiet signals A Gate sometimes called a noise gate is simply a drastic high ratio Expander setting Expander Gate checkbox enables PG Dynamics expander module Signals below Threshold are attenuated but signals above threshold are not affected Ratio adjusts how drastically to attenuate below threshold At 1 2 Ratio a 6 dB reduction of below threshold input level yields a 12 dB reduction in output level At 1 10 Ratio a 6 dB reduction in input level yields a 60 dB reduction in output level effectively chopping off or gating low level signals Modest Ratio can subtly reduce low level noises between musical notes and phrases without creating unnatural sounding side effects High Ratio settings give more drastic results Sometimes a high Ratio expander is useful as a special effect but high ratio does not often sound natural Attack is the time required for the expander to respond to an increase of amplitude Release is the time required for the expander to respond to a decrease of amplitude Fast Release
505. with the closest grid line quantized The duration of inserted notes is determined by the Inserted Note Defaults settings in the Other Notation Options The Notation window can be set to scroll ahead of the music without interfering with your view of the current notation Use the Scroll Ahead Enabled checkbox to toggle this feature on and off The Scroll Ahead Trigger at setting adjusts the location where the screen will scroll A setting of 70 would cause the notation to scroll when the 70 of the current screen has played The Scroll Ahead Amount determines how much the screen will scroll based on the Bars Per Line setting For example a setting of 50 with the Bars Per Line setting at 4 Bars would scroll the notation ahead by two bars If the Show Note Durations checkbox is checked then in Staff Roll Mode the durations of notes will be shown as either green or blue horizontal lines depending on whether the Duration Line Color is set to green or blue The Show Velocity Lines setting causes the Staff roll mode to display vertical lines in the same color as the duration lines These lines represent the velocity of the notes the higher the velocity the longer the line The velocity lines are roughly the height of a staff when a note has a velocity of 127 The Lyric Position lets you adjust the vertical position of the lyrics When set to zero the lyrics are drawn between the staves The range i
506. y described in the Reference chapter Piano Roll Editing Let s examine the BB Piano track in the Piano Roll window We can select the BB Piano track while still in the Tracks window or we can open the Piano Roll window with the piano roll button and then select BB Piano from the track list In the Piano Roll window notes can be dragged and dropped shortened or lengthened in the Note Panel which is the upper part of the window The lower panel is for graphic editing of the selected parameter in the View Edit list Note velocity is shown but parameters such as pitch bend channel aftertouch and MIDI controllers can be edited in this panel as well Please see the chapter titled Piano Roll Window for more on this very useful feature The BB Tracks and MIDI tracks can also be edited in the Editable Notation window fj Piano Roll Track BBPino Snap roe Dur Fj Chan mn View Edit Velocity v I Cm Editable Notation A Click on the eighth note toolbar button to open the Notation In the Notation window toolbar there El are three buttons for different notation modes Editable notation is the button with dotted vertical lines crossing the staff lines In the Editable Notation mode notes can be inserted by clicking on the Notation window with the left mouse button moved by dragging with the left mouse button or edited by clicking on a note head with the right mouse b
507. y from your computer all wirelessly up to 30 feet even through walls The TranzPort also works right out of the box with Band in a Box Note the TranzPort is sold separately by PG Music Inc www pgmusic com Using TranzPort with RealBand To use the MIDI TranzPort with RealBand first make sure the Frontier USB wireless receiver is plugged into a USB port of your computer iw Enable TranzPort if present The Enable TranzPort if present checkbox must be selected under the MIDI tab in Preferences If this checkbox is unchecked then RealBand will not attempt to look for and initialize the TranzPort By default this checkbox 1s enabled which means that by default RealBand will always try to find and initialize the TranzPort You should see a TranzPort icon on the Windows task bar RealBand should then automatically connect to TranzPort when you start up RealBand To verify that the TranzPort is installed you can visit the MIDI drivers dialog and see if TranzPort shows up as a MIDI In and MIDI Out driver Do NOT select the TranzPort in the MIDI drivers dialog To start using the TranzPort While RealBand is running wake up the TranzPort by pressing a key on the TranzPort e g the STOP key The TranzPort display will show Title of RB song on top row of LCD tempo Current Track Number gt track volume patch if track is MIDI For example the screen might say My Tune 120 Tr 1 v 122 p 1
508. ynth is used as the default software synth Chapter 1 Welcome MIDI Driver Setup Input Divers Output Driver s SB Audigy MIDI 10 0500 Microsoft MIDI Mapper SB Audigy Synth D800 Roland v SC SB Audigy 5w Synth L800 SB Audigy Synth B D800 SB Audigy MIDI 10 D800 Move Selected Devices to Top iw He Haoute MIDI playback to default Osi Synth Default Dri Synth WSC Dj Timer Period in Millizecond 1 Synth Output Latency Delay in MS 0 Latency Adjust 0 Audio lO Delay in M5 Cancel Help The Re Route MIDI playback to default DXi Synth setting will cause RealBand to re route all MIDI playback to the default DXi or VSTi synth This is the easiest way to use a DXi softsynth for playback If this option is checked then all MIDI tracks playback output will be routed to the default DXi VST synth regardless of the individual track s port number VSTi Synthesizer Support Installing a VSTi Synthesizer mxi To select a VSTi synthesizer for the first time click on the DXi toolbar button to open the DirectX VST Window Select gt gt Synth 16 lt lt in the Track list In the Plugin list select Add VSTi Plugin at the bottom of the list Note VSTi synthesizer plug ins have the text lt VSTi gt prepended to the plug in name and VST effects plug ins have lt VST gt prepended to the plug in name Add 5 i Plugin VST VSTI plug ins are oft
509. you chose between details mode and list mode These settings will all be remembered by RealBand the next time you load or save a file using the custom file dialog The Find button in the Custom File Selection dialog lets you search for a file within the current folder This is useful when a folder has many files and you wish to avoid scrolling through a long file list The Favorite Folders button in the Custom File Selection dialog will let you select from a list of favorite folders When using the Custom File Selection dialog RealBand will remember up to 25 folders from which you had previously loaded files When you press the Favorite folders button you can quickly select a folder without having to navigate through the Windows folder tree structure The Fill blank track names with patch names checkbox will cause RealBand to fill a blank track name with the patch name for the track when loading a file assuming the track has MIDI data and the Prg field in the Classic Tracks View isn t blank For MID files this is ALWAYS a General MIDI patch name For SEQ files this is based on the patch list of each track The Open Lyrics Window for track with most lyrics setting when enabled lets RealBand automatically open a Big Lyrics window for the track that has the most lyrics Write Lyrics in General MIDI lyric format saves Standard MIDI File lyrics Boot up in folder of last session is a checkbox that can be enabled or disabled Wh
510. you don t click on any existing notes and make sure you don t release the left mouse button until you are finished highlighting 2 Move the mouse down and to the right to form a rectangle You will see a rectangular section of the Notation window become highlighted in reverse 3 When you ve finished highlighting release the left mouse button During the process of highlighting a section you can highlight a section beyond the current notation screen by moving the mouse cursor beyond the right edge of the Notation window When you do this the Notation window will advance to the next screen The Notation window will continue advancing until you move the mouse cursor back inside of the Notation window You should move the mouse cursor back inside the notation window when it has reached the screen that contains the last measure of the section you wish to highlight Then you can move the mouse cursor to the left or right within the Notation window to adjust to make any final adjustments to the highlighted section The highlighted area will include any notes on the first and last pegs vertical beat division lines of the highlighted section The minimum highlighted section contains two pegs Shift click to adjust the highlighted section of notation Shift click Shift key left mouse button support makes it easy to tweak the beginning or end of the highlighted area If you Shift click before the start of the From Thru range or after the e
511. your system You can download the latest version of Microsoft DirectX from www microsoft com Dynamic 3D Drum Kit Window This re sizable drum window is an animated 3D display of a complete MIDI drum kit with all 61drum sounds displayed on their respective instruments TA To launch the Drum Kit window click the Drums button in the ee toolbar You can do several things with the Drum Kit window Watch the drum part being played on the drum kit in real time Play along with the drums in real time by mouse clicking on the drum instruments or using the QWERTY keys The computer keyboard the piano key number and sound names can all optionally be made visible on the hint line by moving your mouse cursor over a given instrument Record a drum part into RealBand Drum Display All the General MIDI percussion instruments are shown Some percussion instruments are triggered by multiple MIDI notes When a sound is controlled by more than one MIDI note a percussion instrument will show different Chapter 12 Wizards Tools and Plug Ins 165 behavior in response to the different notes For instance the Hi Hat responds differently to Close Hat Pedal Hat and Open Hat MIDI notes The on screen instruments may be played by mouse clicking or by pressing the appropriate computer keys When playing by mouse click or computer keys the Shift key can be used to switch the velocity between two user specified levels 1 e loud 100 and soft
512. zards Tools and Plug Ins chapter Tracks Window The Tracks window shows the track names track type MIDI or audio instrument settings and an overview section showing either MIDI or audio data The Track Number field shows the track number If the track is the current Track it will be highlighted in red y Tracks DER Bi El Snap Play Selected Area 2 E 5 G i S Wavetable SW Synth Drums y Drums MIDI out Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth Flan Wavetable SW Synth If the track is selected the number will be highlighted in yellow If the track is not selected it will be gray You can click on the track number field to make a track the current track highlighted in red If you click on the track number field while holding the Shift key this will select a range of tracks from the current track through the number you clicked on For example 1f track 2 1s the Current Track and you hold the Shift key and then click on the number field for Track 4 this will make tracks 2 through 4 selected Track 2 will still be the Current Track and tracks 3 and 4 will be highlighted in yellow You can select deselect individual tracks by clicking on a Track s number field while holding down the Ctrl key The Disclosure Triangle will reveal more information about a track by making the track row height taller v If a track is a MIDI track then you ll see the Vel velocity offset Rvb reverb Mod modulation Loop

PG Music Band in a Box - RealBand User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents